JP2023094773A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine of which performance is improved.SOLUTION: Provided is a game machine in which an error history can be displayed in a liquid crystal display when predetermined conditions are satisfied in a setting confirmation mode. In a situation in which the error history is displayed in the liquid crystal display, when opening of a front door is detected, it is so configured that the error history displayed in the liquid crystal display is updated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 136

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

A reel-type game machine (slot machine) starts a game when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of stopping the reel by making full use of the reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the effective line. When a combination (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special game state in which the player is more profitable than in the normal game state (a game state in which the lottery probability of small wins is higher than in the normal state). The type that shifts to is common. Here, in the reel-type game machine, in addition to such basic games, various effects are performed to improve the taste as a whole.
In addition, when the game medals are paid out, a payout sound is output, the number of acquired medals is displayed, and a back lamp effect is performed so that it can be recognized that the game medals have been properly paid out.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-217068

This type of game machine is desired to improve its performance.

front door and
having a liquid crystal;
Equipped with a setting confirmation mode that allows you to check setting values,
When certain conditions are met in the setting confirmation mode, the error history can be displayed on the LCD,
This game machine is configured to update the error history displayed on the liquid crystal when the opening of the front door is detected while the error history is displayed on the liquid crystal.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

It is a figure which shows the housing|casing exterior perspective view of slot machine PS1. It is a figure which shows the back surface of front panel PS2. It is a figure which shows the inner surface of cabinet PS3. It is a figure which shows a functional block. 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power-off recovery processing; It is a flowchart which shows game progress main. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing; FIG. It is a figure explaining the reel arrangement|sequence in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the design combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the condition device in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. This is an example of a push button effect. It is an example of the display mode of the display device when the push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up notice in the normal effect state. This is an example of a dialog announcement in the normal production state. This is an example of a dialogue announcement during continuous production. This is an example of the effect switch image in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where a betting operation is performed by the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where the adjustment|settlement operation by the adjustment|settlement switch is performed after the completion|finish of a payout|payout process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where payout was performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when payout|payout is normally performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission; It is a figure which shows the time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution timings of timer interrupt processing; It is a figure which shows an example of stage change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st continuous production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd continuous production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a telop is displayed in a continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow until a NEXT image is displayed in a continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a form of a push order navigation image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a push order navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a predetermined error occurs during display of a push order navigation image; FIG. 10 is a time chart in the case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed; FIG. It is a time chart when game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed. FIG. 10 is a time chart when game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay combination is completed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart when a payout operation is performed using the payout switch after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed; FIG. It is a time chart when the payout is not normally performed after winning the winning combination of Cherry (when the hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a time chart when payout is not normally performed after winning a winning combination of cherry (at the time of occurrence of hopper retention error); FIG. It is a figure which shows the reel arrangement|sequence used when demonstrating a correct operation challenge production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the condition device list used when demonstrating a correct operation challenge production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination list used when demonstrating a correct operation challenge production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination list used when demonstrating a correct operation challenge production|presentation. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition device and the symbol combination used when explaining the correct operation challenge effect. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition device and the symbol combination used when explaining the correct operation challenge effect. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition device and the symbol combination used when explaining the correct operation challenge effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a game screen when it is set to normal mode and when it is set to distribution mode. It is a figure which shows each area|region memorize|stored in main control ROM. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an interrupt initialization area and an automatic allocation according to priority of the interrupt initialization area; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses in power-on processing and timer interrupt processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs; It is a figure which shows an example of the ball-out specification which straddles an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows an example of the ball-out specification which straddles an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows an example of the ball-out specification which straddles an advantageous area. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing corresponding to the differential number counter; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing corresponding to the differential number counter; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows stop monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop monitoring processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation of an operation|movement advance notice information state and a stop information state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a reel arrangement in specification 1; It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the condition device in the specification 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in specification 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in specification 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in specification 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in specification 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in specification 1; It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a reel arrangement in specification 2; It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the design combination in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the condition device in the specification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining internal lottery numbers in Specification 2; It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the stop control for every game state in the specification 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a liquid crystal screen during an introduction period in specification 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a liquid crystal screen during an introduction period in specification 2; It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal screen of the other production mode using the switch for production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal screen of the other production mode using the switch for production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration regarding a bet number display lamp 25 and a payout number indicator; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration regarding a bet number display lamp 25 and a payout number indicator; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration regarding a bet number display lamp 25 and a payout number indicator; It is a figure which shows the positional relationship when the medal|token selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of front panel PS2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a gap between a medal selector 34 and a chute member; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a gap between a medal selector 34 and a chute member; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the position and dimensions of a locking component that fixes the chute member in a state where the fixing portion of the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 by a locking component (screw); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another aspect of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. It is a figure which shows an example of an error history screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error history screen when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is being displayed; It is a figure which shows an example of a time setting screen. 7 is a list of display patterns of error history when multiple errors occur;

<Description of terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insert" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting (betting) game media. When representing a hexadecimal number, it is described as "0x〇〇" or "〇〇h", and when representing a binary number, "〇〇〇〇〇〇〇〇b" or "〇〇〇〇 〇〇〇〇B”, and if there is no particular description before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal numbers. A "reel" may be referred to as a "rotating drum", and both have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Giving" used in "giving game media" or "giving points" may be referred to as "payout" or "acquisition", both of which are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" for each function, but in either case, the same switch is indicated. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. If a small win with a large payout or a small win with a small payout is stopped depending on the operation mode, the small win with a large payout is called a high win (same as high bell and high small win), and the small win with a low payout is called a low win. It is sometimes called an eye (also synonymous with an eyeball and an eyeball). At this time, when the combination of symbols without payout is stopped, it may be called a dropout (same meaning as dropout).

An embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Description of slot machine PS1>
Constituent elements of the slot machine PS1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side, where necessary parts and substrates are attached respectively. The front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the side of the cabinet PS3 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device. The locking device side can be opened. That is, the front panel PS2 functions as a door for the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, the front door PS2, or the front door PS2, or simply the front door) is a plate-shaped member with a design. panel (including display window 4, operation instruction lamp 24, etc.), operation panel 11 (including bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, winning number display 27, etc.), lower panel 5 (also referred to as lower panel 5) ), an upper or both side production lamp, etc. are provided, and on the back side there are a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., setting display LEDs ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a set value display LED, a set display device, a set value display device, a set display device, or a set value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and the symbols drawn on the reel can be visually recognized when the front panel PS2 is closed. The patterns printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reel tapes fixed to the reel rims of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). It is When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of the 21 symbols (20, 16, etc. may be freely designed according to the specifications) are visible. That is, from the display window 4, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 patterns in total can be visually recognized. Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowest stop position is the lower stage. and

<Valid line>
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (to be described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are stopped. The effective line in this embodiment is visible through the display window 4, and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel. When it is determined that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line corresponds to any winning combination by the prize determination process, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination such as a bell has stopped, game medal (hereinafter may be referred to as medal, game medium, or game value) payout process or credit addition process is performed. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped, automatic bet processing is executed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, namely, an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward right line, and a downward right line. (upper stage, lower stage of right reel 8c), approximately valley type (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, upper stage of right reel 8c), approximately L-shaped (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, lower stage of right reel 8c) It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1, such as setting 6 lines or more, or setting the effective line so that it changes depending on the number of bets. A straight line other than the valid line may be called an invalid line.

<Operation instruction lamp 24>
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit (the middle operation instruction lamp 24b and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are extinguished), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, and the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit. When (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are turned off), it indicates that the middle stop switch 13b should be operated, and the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the middle operation instruction lamp are turned off). 24b is extinguished), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
A bet number display lamp 25 (also referred to as a bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11, and is operated by a player to bet. It has a function to display the number of sheets. It is also composed of a 1-bed lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is betted, the 1-bet lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a and 2-bet lamp 25b are lit up, and when three medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a is lit. , the 2 bed lamp 25b and the 3 bed lamp 25c are turned on. Also, although not shown, after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the bet number used in the game in which the replay was won is lit. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 26b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the credit amount, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

<Acquisition number indicator 27>
The winning number display 27 (also referred to as winning number display, winning number display, payout number display, or payout number display) is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). A segment display 27a (not shown) that mainly displays the upper digits of the acquired number, and a segment display 27b that mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired number composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). (not shown). The number of won medals means the number of medals paid out to the player according to the game result in the slot machine PS1 (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26). Also, when a normal game cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display respective information by means of segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a and 27b. It is also conceivable to display different information. For example, information indicating that the user is staying in an advantageous section (to be described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. mentioned. In addition, it may have the capability of notifying the pressing order by using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27 . When the winning number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the winning number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided substantially in the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a substantially horizontal horizontal portion and a vertical portion extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal portion. The horizontal part has a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, and a checkout switch (Fig. not shown), and an effect switch (not shown) is provided.

<Start switch 12>
A start switch (also called a start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11 . It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and it is determined that the start switch has been operated by turning off the start switch sensor when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like is executed. Further, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, when the start switch sensor is ON during non-operation, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is ON and OFF during operation. When this occurs, the start switch input signal is turned ON. The configuration is not limited to this, and the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on. In other words, the prescribed number refers to the number of bets required to start the game.

Hereinafter, simply referring to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated" means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and that the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what happened.

<Stop switch 13>
A stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11 . In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. Also, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around it is changed to suggest that the stop switch 13 is effective. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red. Further, for example, the light is turned on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and the light is turned off when the operation is impossible.

<Medal slot 17>
A medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals of a standard size or larger. A plurality of types of medal insertion slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game media are not limited to the medals described above. is input to the game machine, and based on the input game medium information, the number of bets may be set, or addition may be made at the time of winning.

<Bet switch (MAX bed switch 18, 1 bed switch 19)>
A bed switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credit, the bet processing is executed and the bet number setting processing equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 is performed. However, even if the bet switch is operated when medals are not stored in the credit, the bet processing is invalidated (the bet switch operation is not accepted). In addition, the MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player, a detecting portion for detecting the operation of the pressing portion, and a light emitting portion (also referred to as a MAX bet lamp) for lighting the pressing portion. The switch 19 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player and a detection portion detecting the operation of the pressing portion (the 1-bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting portion).

When the MAX bet switch is operated, the MAX bet lamp informs the player that the betting process can be executed. Various modes such as periodic blinking are conceivable. Conversely, when the bet processing cannot be executed even if the MAX bet switch is operated, it is conceivable to light the MAX bet lamp in a specific color or not to light the MAX bet lamp.

In addition, a MAX bet switch 18 with which the maximum number (three in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1 can be bet, and a 1-bet switch 19 with which one can be bet are provided. When the bet switch 18 is operated, the MAX bet process is executed, and when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet process is executed. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is 3 or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than 3. and the sum of the number of bets currently betted is less than 3 (in other words, the situation where the number of bets is less than 3 even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated), and in the situation where 3 bets have already been made It is not possible. The 1-bet process can be executed when the number of credits is 1 or more and the number of bets currently bet is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 bets have already been made.

Also, every time the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, 1-bet processing is executed, and if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times from the state where no bet is made, it becomes a 3-bet, and the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times. This corresponds to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18 .

Also, the 1-bet switch 19 is disabled when 3-bets have been made, but if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once in the situation where 3-bets have been made, the 1-bet state is entered and credits are awarded. You may be comprised so that two sheets may be returned.

Also, although the embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, the process of betting the maximum number that can be bet at present is also conceivable. In other words, if no bet is made and the number of credits is 2, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, 2 bets may be made.

The maximum number of bets that can be betted may differ depending on the game state. good too.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a light-transmitting member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and a sub-switch lamp for lighting the depressed portion of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen (sometimes referred to as a user menu screen) on a display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub-switches 20 as input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, sub-cross key switches 21 (upper switch, lower switch, left switch, right switch) and performance switches (operated using instructions during the game) switch) is provided. Also, the sub-switch 20 can function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile interlocking system), which will be described later. Although the sub-switches 20 are used for the menu display function and the effect switches are used for operation during the game, they may be used as common switches.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light amount adjustment items, and mobile interlocking system-related items. The cursor that selects is controlled to move up and down. When the subswitch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, the details of the item are displayed. For example, if the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted with the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21. there is

Further, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after the game is finished and no bets have been placed. At this time, the effect state can be any of normal effect, continuous effect, AT effect, or demo screen (a screen that is displayed 60 seconds after the end of the game, and displays the manufacturer name and effect introduction as a moving image). Even in this situation, the menu screen is displayed by operating the subswitch 20. - 特許庁However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous production or AT production.

<Direction switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a light-transmitting member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and an effect switch lamp for lighting the pressing part of the effect switch. When the switch for performance is operated in a situation where the operation of the switch for performance is effective, the performance based on the operation is executed. For example, the display device (hereinafter also simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32 displays "success" (hereinafter referred to as "success effect") indicating that a privilege is given in the final game of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is being executed. ) or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a failure effect), which means that the benefit is not given, is displayed by operating the effect switch. A mode of displaying "success" or "failure" is conceivable.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the switch for effect is effective, the effect switch lamp lights up so that the player can be informed that the operation of the switch for effect is effective. As a lighting mode of the performance switch, it is conceivable that the performance switch is turned off when the performance switch operation is invalid, and is lit when the performance switch operation is valid. In addition to the lighting mode in which the operation of the effect switch is effective, a mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a constant cycle may be used.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is effective, the fact that the operation of the effect switch is effective is notified by performing a display imitating the effect switch on the liquid crystal. When a display imitating a switch for effect is displayed on the liquid crystal, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100 . For example, it is conceivable that a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the start switch reception command, or a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the all reel stop command.

In addition, by pressing the production switch, it is possible to move to the detection position (on position) where the sensor provided in the production switch detects the detection piece provided in the production switch, and the sensor detects the detection piece. In this situation, moving the piece to be detected to the non-detection position (off position) where the sensor does not detect it by moving the effect switch (an operation to return the spring to its natural length due to the force of the spring provided in the effect switch). It is possible.

It should be noted that although the effect switch has been described as a switch with a push structure, it is not limited to this and may be a switch with a jog dial structure. Other structures may be used as long as they can detect the ON position and the OFF position.

<Payment switch>
A settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . By being operated after the game is over, the number of betted game media and the number of game media stored in credits are paid out to the player (settlement process). note that. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made and game media are stored in the credits, the betted game media are first paid out and then stored in the credits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of paying out the game media stored in the credits may be executed only when the number of betted game media is zero. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a state where a bet is placed, only the game media that are bet are paid out, and when the settlement switch is operated again after that, the game media stored in the credits are paid out. may

<Bottom panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. A design sheet is sandwiched between two sheets of transparent resin, and the design sheet is printed with a characteristic color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout port 45>
A medal payout port 45 is provided below the lower panel 5 . This is an exit for ejecting medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return opening for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Saucer 28>
A receiving tray 28 (also referred to as a “lower tray”) is provided below the lower panel 5 . It has a substantially concave structure to receive and store medals discharged from the medal payout port 45, and is provided so as to protrude toward the player side so that the player can check the stored medals.

In addition, the receiving tray 28 has other functions such as a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet to which a union license seal, a patent stamp seal, and a model seal are attached, and seal storage having an opening for displaying to the player side. A section 30 is also provided.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided above and below the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound and a warning sound informing that an error has occurred, in addition to sound effects in accordance with the production.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various effect images, a game instruction image that instructs the pressing order of the stop switch 13 and the position of the eyes during the game (pressing order navigation image when only the pressing order is displayed). (Also called push order image, operation order image, or operation order image), push navigation image (also called push image or operation position image) when only the push position is displayed, or push order and push position are displayed. It may be referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a broader concept of pressing order and pressing position), an error image when an error occurs, and the like. Also, depending on the model, there is a slot machine PS1 in which the display device 32 is not mounted.

<Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories>
Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel PS2 such as the periphery of the display window 4, the middle panel, the lower panel 5, and the like. Other production devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various production images and production operations, game instruction images and operations for instructing the pressing order and position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and error generation. Display an error image or perform an action when an error occurs. Other effect devices are arbitrarily mounted according to the model of the slot machine PS1. Various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can also be used as production devices. In particular, in a game machine having a liquid crystal as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the display area of the main display device is larger than that of the sub display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the downflow passage below the medal slot 17 . The medal selector 34 has a medal count function of counting the number of medals inserted by the player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal rejection function of guiding the inserted non-standard medals to the receiving tray 28, and a front panel PS2 front surface. An eject function that ejects medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating the eject switch provided in the , and an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker) that blocks medals that are inserted when not accepting medals. It has a blocker function that removes it from the downflow passage. Also, if the medals inserted at the time of medal reception are legitimate medals, the medal selector 34 discharges the medals to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a path sensor, an insertion sensor 1, an insertion sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The path sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are positioned downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to determine the passage time of the medals passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to determine normal passage or abnormal passage. is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1 . The shoot sensor is located downstream of the throw-in sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of thrown-in medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the shoot sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it permits passage of game medals, and when it is OFF, it prohibits passage of game medals. Permitting the passage of game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are led to the hopper 44, and disallowing passage of the game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are not allowed to pass through the hopper. It is not to be led to 44.

Components of the slot machine PS1 on the side of the cabinet PS3 will be described below.

<Cabinet PS3>
The cabinet PS3 is a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and contains reel unit 6, hopper 44, auxiliary tank 46, setting key switch 37, reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply "reset switch"). or a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, and the like.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are combined, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover cannot be easily opened and closed by caulking. (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket in cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed by a locking member (screw or rivet).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with a plurality of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, and a stepping shaft supported by the reel base. It consists of a motor and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is neglected as a reel unit. A pattern arrangement different for each reel is drawn on the reel tape.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rpm), timer interrupt processing (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as interrupt processing) is performed once. After maintaining a constant-speed rotation state in which the stepping motor moves one step each time (constant-speed rotation), the corresponding reel is determined for each stop operation reception position in response to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player. The reel is moved to the stop position at constant speed rotation, and after moving the reel to the stop position, the brake is applied (the four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotation of the reel and terminate the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke portion provided on the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index, which is a reference during rotation for each lap. The positions of the symbols (also called initial symbols) are determined. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the drive source of the reel in this embodiment, is 336 steps, and one cycle is performed by timer interrupt processing 336 times during constant-speed rotation. During constant-speed rotation, the rotation failure detection counter is incremented each time the timer interrupt process is executed twice. In other words, if the reel does not make one rotation even after 360 times of timer interrupt processing, it is determined that the rotation is defective. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that the rotation failure detection counter becomes 0 before it reaches 180 if the constant speed rotation process is normal.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the index is detected during constant speed processing, and it is not determined whether or not the index is detected during acceleration processing. It may be determined whether or not the index is detected during the acceleration process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to bring the player into a state in which it is possible to accept the stoppage more quickly.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, and it is lit to emphasize the stopped pattern after the reel stops, or to improve the visibility of the pattern while the reel is rotating. I'm letting you

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals thrown in by the player. The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 includes a storage tank portion that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by input of a drive signal from the hopper driving means, and a hopper motor that is pivotally supported to form a storage tank. A rotating disk for aligning the medals inside, a medal dispensing part provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging the medals one by one to the tray 28 by rotating the rotating disk, and a medal discharge port for discharging the medals by the medal dispensing part. , and a payout sensor for detecting medals ejected from the medal ejection port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in excess of the allowable amount of the storage tank portion of the hopper 44 pass through the downwardly inclined rail portion provided in the storage tank portion. is stored in the auxiliary tank 46. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are connected to the auxiliary tank through through holes provided on at least one side surface. 46 is exposed, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are stored, two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. We judge that it is. The number of fullness detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of fullness detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method of using the fullness detection electrode, and a sensor provided at a predetermined position may detect medals to enable fullness detection.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine PS1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front surface thereof. After opening the front panel PS2, the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit is opened to allow access. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it clockwise by 90 degrees. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed. Executes setting change processing (described later).

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply device 39 is provided on the lower left side of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply device 39 has a rectangular box structure, is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside, and is provided with a power supply board for generating a voltage inside. The power supply device 39 is individually connected to the rotary device board and the sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown). Power is supplied to the control board 100 .

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 and then generates predetermined voltages for the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 respectively. It is configured to take in voltage, and is configured not to take in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 when the power switch 40 is turned off.

<External output terminal plate 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally mounted inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and outputs a signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 in a predetermined format. , and transmitted to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Contents of game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside are when the main control board 100 is controlled by the AT state, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of the game-related counter reaches a predetermined value, etc. It can be set based on the information determined in advance.

<Functional block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment operates from a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that governs general game flow, to a sub control board 1000 (sub control means 1000). , sub control board 1000, sub control means 1000), door relay board (also called central display board), rotary device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc. , which enables data communication. However, bidirectional communication between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 is disabled, and data communication is enabled by unidirectional communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 1000 .

A main control chip is mounted on the main control board 100 . In the main control chip, the main control CPU, the main control ROM, the main control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. In addition, the main control chip has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate with each other via a bus. Furthermore, the main control chip includes general-purpose registers (for example, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that can be used by the main control CPU for calculation, etc., and call instructions ( For example, a PC register for storing a program (return address) after a return instruction (for example, RET instruction) after execution of a program by CALL instruction), an interrupt register (for example, IFF1 register, IFF2 register).

Under the control of the main control chip, the winning lottery (also called internal lottery), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately communicated to various boards. In addition, for the sub-control board 1000, as a result of the internal lottery, the selected role (AT role, AT target role, pushing role, pushing role, and operation procedure role including both pushing and pushing roles) ), and when the main control means 100 side notifies the information (push order, operation timing) regarding the display of the choice hand, the choice hand information (choice hand group information, selection By transmitting the information regarding the display of the combination), it is possible for the sub-control means to notify the information regarding the display of the selected combination. It should be noted that all the processes related to AT, such as shifting to AT, extending the number of AT games, and notifying the pressing order, may be referred to as processes related to (related to) the instruction function. It should be noted that the push order role is a conditional device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the push order role is the operation of the stop button. This is a condition device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the timing of acceptance.

The storage capacity of the main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and other areas outside the use area ( Also called a second program area). In the usable area, there is only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as a first control area) in which the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and information other than the program (for example, internal lottery table information). is stored or will be stored in a data area of "3.0 KB or less" (also referred to as a first data area). Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the usage area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for gaming machine testing are stored outside the usage area.

The storage capacity of the main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 is "1024B or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first work area) of "512B or less" and the other outside the use area (second (also referred to as a work area). The first work area is a rewritable storage area according to the progress of the game, and the second work area is a rewritable storage area during the execution of anti-fraud measures and game machine test programs.

The storage areas of the main control RAM built in the main control chip include storage areas for switch state flags indicating the ON/OFF state of the stop changeover switch and the ON/OFF state of the automatic settlement switch, which are set from 1 to 6. A storage area for set value information indicating any value of RT status information storage area indicating which RT status among a plurality of RT statuses, a specific condition device indicating the winning status of a specific condition device such as a bonus , other game information storage areas where information necessary to progress the game is stored, unused unused storage areas, stack area storage areas where data saved from registers are stored, There is a temporary stack area storage area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means, at the time of power failure recovery processing, and at the start of each game. The range is different.

During the setting change process, if power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the switch status flag storage area. In other words, only the switch state flag is taken over the state before the setting change. For example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and not taken over.

Also, during setting change processing, either when the power failure recovery can be performed normally or when the state is not recoverable, that is, when the setting change processing is performed normally, the storage area of the switch state flag , set value information storage area, RT status information storage area, and the storage area of the specific condition device are stored. In other words, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set values after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in subsequent setting change processing.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, at the start of each game, data is stored in the stack area storage area excluding the unused storage area of the RAM area and the maximum use area at the time of power-off recovery when the RAM is initialized. Set to 0.

The main control built-in register built in the main control chip is for setting the operation of each peripheral circuit (eg, timer circuit, etc.) built in the main control chip and controlling its function.

For example, by writing (also referred to as setting or storing) data to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in register by a program stored in the main control ROM, one of the programs stored in the main control ROM, the maskable Settings (timer circuit settings) relating to interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) can be performed.

<Sub-control board 1000>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board 1000 . In the sub-control chip, the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data designating the performance to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub-switch 20, the performance switch, and the like. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. Further, the sub-control board 1000 is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Rotor device substrate>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external collective terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. . A reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when the projecting piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door PS2 is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether or not medals are properly passed when they are paid out from the hopper 44 . The external collective terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is supplied directly from the power supply board to the rotary drum device board.

<Door relay board>
The information input to the door relay board includes various sensor information in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bed switch information, stop switch information, checkout switch information, and information to be output. These include blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bed switch, stop switch, checkout switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section ramp.

<Production control board>
The effect control board (also referred to as effect control means) includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a switch for effect, a movable accessory, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and a display device 32. is electrically connected to an image control board that controls the display contents of the .

The effect control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of effects to the effect device based on the effect command received from the sub-control means 1000. - 特許庁

The effect control means selects the contents of the effect based on the lottery result of the combination by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effect contents are provided in advance, and the effect control means performs a lottery using a software random number after the internal lottery means performs a lottery for a winning combination at the start of the game. Select content.

In addition, a plurality of types of effects are provided according to not only the result of the combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), and the like. More specifically, a plurality of types of presentation contents are provided corresponding to bonus wins, small win wins, replay wins, non-win wins, and the like.

As the game progresses, the content of the production is at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamp is lit, It determines whether to flash or turn off, what kind of sound to output from the speaker S, what kind of image to display on the display device 32, etc.).

Also, it is possible to generate an effect output by the effect control means according to an operation by the player. For example, the start switch 12, the stop switch 13, the medal insertion slot 17, the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), the settlement switch, etc., for which operation signals are input to the main control board 100, are operated according to the operation signals. It is conceivable that an effect is generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control command transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub-switch 20 and the sub-cross key for inputting the operation signal to the sub-control board 1000. It is also conceivable to directly generate an effect from the sub-control board 1000 according to the sub-input switch operating means such as the switch 21 and the effect switch. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the performance control board are separate boards, they may be configured as one board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processes of the production control board, and the sub-control board 1000 includes the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the production switch, the movable accessory, the speaker S, the back lamp, and the front panel. An LED lamp provided in the PS 2 and an image control board for controlling display contents of the display device 32 may be electrically connected.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for specifically displaying the effect content on the display device 32 .

<Supplement to board configuration>
In addition, the sub control board and the effect control board may be composed of one (one) board, or the sub control board, the effect control board and the image control board may be composed of one board. When the sub-control board and the effect control board are composed of one board, two sub-control CPUs and effect control CPUs may be provided, or one CPU may be provided. The same is true when the sub control board, effect control board, and image control board are configured in one board.

<Power board>
In the slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment, power is supplied from the power board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40 . The power supplied to the reel device board supplies power to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to establish an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 supplies power to the performance control board and power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is supplied to each component and electrically connected.

Next, the control of the main control board 100 that controls the game of the gaming machine will be described.

<Error type>
Errors are roughly classified into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Errors that can be recovered include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a restorable error is set, after removing the factors of various restorable errors, if the operation of the reset switch is accepted, the game can be returned to the game without turning on the power again. During the restorable error, the display device 32, payout amount indicator, and various lamps display information about the error in order to notify the player of what error has occurred.

When a recoverable error is detected during a game, progress of the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after completion of the game in which the recoverable error is detected. By stopping the progress of the game during the restorable error, even if the restorable error occurs due to fraud, damage to the game parlor manager can be suppressed. As a condition for recovering from a recoverable error state, it may be configured so that recovery is automatically performed by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error. ing.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, etc., and the credit number indicator 26 displays according to the type of error. It notifies that it is in a non-restorable state.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when the operation of the reset switch (not shown) is accepted. An unrecoverable error cannot be cleared simply by turning on the power again. In this case, the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again in the event of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power-off recovery process is executed, the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed so that subsequent game processes are not executed.

As non-recoverable errors, if the number of bets at the lottery is out of the specified number, if the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, it is determined that the power supply shutdown processing was not performed normally when the power supply was restored. (sometimes referred to as "RWM (RAM) error" or "RWM (RAM) error"), if it is determined to be a random number abnormality such as an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator, the prize will be won on the valid line in the winning judgment process. There is a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the combination that has not been played is stopped.

Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped regardless of whether it is during the game or during the game standby (from the end of the game to the start of the next game).

<Game method, game flow>
In order to play a game in the slot machine PS1, first, medals are inserted from the medal slot 17, or pre-stored medals are betted (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals to bet (also referred to as the prescribed number). In this embodiment, three sheets are set as the prescribed number. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the activated line is set to be effective and the game becomes possible.

When medals are inserted from a new medal insertion slot in a situation where the number of medals to bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is 50. If medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of bets (3) and the upper limit of the accumulated amount (50) are inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (when medals are inserted into the gaming machine) in a state to prevent it) and returned to the receiving tray. That is, when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of accumulated credits is the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (the path to the hopper 44 in the selector is not formed).

A situation in which the number of bets is added when medals are inserted is when the number of bets is less than 3 (less than the maximum number of bets in the game state when the medals are inserted). In addition, as a situation in which credits can be stored when medals are inserted, the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets in the game state when medals are inserted) and the credit is less than 50 (credit is less than the maximum number that can be stored). That is, when the sum of the number of bets and the number of stored credits is less than 53, medals are inserted into the gaming machine when inserted from the medal slot. In addition, as a condition for inserting medals into the gaming machine when the medals are inserted, it is also possible that the player is waiting for a game (a period from the end of the game to the start of the next game). For example, a symbol combination related to replay is displayed, and the token insertion requirement is satisfied even during game standby after the automatic betting process is executed. In this case, since three coins are automatically betted, if the number of accumulated credits is less than 50, the token insertion requirement is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is received, the internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the result of the internal lottery process, the condition device number), the minimum game time (wait time (period), or 4.1 second timer) has passed, and if the wait time has passed, the rotation of each reel is started, and if the wait time has not passed, the wait time has passed. Wait without spinning each reel until

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any stop switch of the stop switch 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, according to the timing of accepting the combination lottery result and the stop operation The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 operated by is stopped. When all the reels are stopped (also called full stop), it is determined whether or not each stop symbol determined at the time of accepting the stoppage of each reel is normal. Search, and pay out medals (including addition to credits), set replay (automatic bet processing), set bonus status, end bonus status, set RT status, Processing such as termination of the RT state is performed, and one game is terminated.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze processing (also referred to as freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by suspending the progress of the game for a predetermined period includes, for example, acceptance of game media, which is a function related to the progress of the game, and the number of bets of pre-credited game media. For example, the function related to acceptance of operation of the bet switch for setting, acceptance of operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or acceptance of stop operation of the reels may be suspended. Note that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100 .

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped, or only some of the functions may be temporarily stopped.

Modes for pausing the progress of the game include control processing based on the operation of the player (processing for forming a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing for setting the number of bets based on the operation of the bet switch, For example, reel rotation processing or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and reel stop processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13) are not performed.

When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during the period in which the progress of the game is paused by the freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the input signal is not received. By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period elapses, the game end timing in one game is delayed as compared with the case where the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period. When is operated, internal lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, and internal lottery and reel rotation are performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or when start switch 12 is operated, internal lottery is not performed for a predetermined period of time. However, the reels are not rotated and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period of time has passed, or the predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the internal lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. , or after the start switch 12 is operated to perform internal lottery and reel rotation, a predetermined period is set and stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel. In the freeze effect performed based on this, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

As the control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, for example, when the left stop switch 13a is operated during all reel rotations and freezes, the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a is stopped. Afterwards, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is invalidated. As a result, the player cannot stop the rotating middle and right reels for a predetermined period of time. , the timing until the end of the game in one game can be delayed.

As a result of accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted as the control processing of the freeze performance performed based on the stop display of the specific symbol on the reel. When a specific pattern is stopped and displayed on each reel as a result, the stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is invalidated, or the operation of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted. Based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel, the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet switch to start the next game, the process of detecting the insertion of game media by the passing sensor, or replay is enabled. For example, control processing or the like based on the automatic betting processing that is performed when the player stops on the line is not performed.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the gaming machine operation irrespective of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the rotation mode of the reel can be arbitrarily set such that it rotates in a normal rotation mode, rotates at a lower speed than usual, or rotates at a higher speed. can do.

As the rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period, the reels are rotated in a direction opposite to the normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), the reels are rotated a predetermined number of symbols and a specific combination of symbols is stopped, and a predetermined number of reels are rotated. For example, stopping a reel and rotating another reel, changing the rotation speed of a reel, or changing the operation of a reel due to a player's operation.

The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to predetermined conditions. Here, the predetermined condition is the detection of a signal based on the operation reception status of various switches by the player (the operation status of the start switch 12, the bet switch, the stop switch 13, or the settlement switch, etc.), and the result of the freeze lottery. is mentioned. In addition, changing includes shortening or lengthening a predetermined period of time during which a freeze effect is performed in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, or switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Control processing for shortening the suspension period includes forcibly terminating the suspension period or rewriting the suspension period to a period shorter than the suspension period. As control processing for lengthening the suspension period, another period is added after the suspension period, or the suspension period is rewritten to a longer period. Further, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not have to be set with an upper limit time, and may continue until a certain result is obtained based on the result of operation acceptance.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period and the freeze effect period are compared, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period, and the freeze effect ends during the wait period. If not, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. In addition, if there is only a freeze performance period longer than the wait period in advance, the processing of comparing the wait period and the freeze performance period is omitted, and the freeze performance is started after the start switch 12 is operated (after internal lottery processing). It is also possible to

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also referred to as a pseudo-game) as if a normal game were progressing during the acceleration process. In the pseudo-game, the start switch 12 is operated, a pseudo-game period is set during the reel acceleration process after the internal lottery is performed, and reel rotation control is performed like a normal game during the pseudo-game period (pseudo-game The reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the game), and the reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13 . Also, it may be configured to rotate the reels again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo-game period. However, the internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning judgment process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo-game, when the reels are stopped by operating the stop switch 13 or when the reels are automatically stopped as a reel performance, the stopped reels are swung up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). As a result, when the player operates the stop switch 13, it can be determined whether the game is a normal game or a pseudo game.

<Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention is a symbol combination that can stop and display the winning combination of symbols on the active line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are rotating. means For example, when bell symbols are arranged at intervals of 3 symbols on all reels, the bell-bell-bell always stops (attraction rate is 100%), so it can be said that the symbol combination does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a winning combination with a pull-in rate of 100% may be referred to as PB=1, and a winning combination with a pull-in rate of all reels of 100% may be referred to as PB=1.

On the contrary, PB≠1 means that the symbol combination of the winning combination does not stop depending on the stop timing of the stop switch 13 while the reels are rotating. For example, if there is a place where there is no symbol related to the winning combination (eg, separated by 5 symbols) within the pull-in range, PB≠1, and the winning combination is sometimes called a PB≠1 combination.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
Minor win priority control means that when a minor win and a bonus are won in duplicate, or when both the symbols related to the minor win and the symbols related to the bonus can be drawn when the minor win wins within the bonus, the symbols related to the minor win are drawn. .

The bonus priority control is to attract the bonus symbol when both the symbol related to the minor symbol and the symbol related to the bonus can be drawn in when the minor symbol and the bonus are won in duplicate or when the minor symbol in the bonus is won.

In addition, replay has the highest priority and cannot be missed, so when replay and small winnings, or replay and bonus condition device flags are turned on at the same time, patterns related to replay are always drawn.

<Normal section>
A normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When winning in the order of pushing in the normal section, a process of transmitting to the sub-control means 1000 masked information (effect group number) indicating which order of pushing was won is executed. In addition, when winning the pushing order in the normal section, notification of the pushing order (both the correct pushing order and the incorrect pushing order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the pushing order even if the pushing order is won. I don't know. In other words, it is a game section in which the AT state does not occur.

<advantageous section>
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, it is possible to perform a lottery to shift to AT or have a case of being in AT state, but in order to suppress the above-mentioned excessive medal acquisition, the advantageous section is terminated based on certain conditions. It is designed to move to the normal section.
in particular,
1) When 1,500 games have been played from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 2) When more than 2,400 medals have been obtained from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 3) When any condition is satisfied is mentioned. By these means, excessive acquisition of medals can be suppressed. The 1,500 games in 1) may be 3,000 games, or 65,535 games, which is the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area. It may be configured not to end. Further, the optional conditions of 3) include, for example, when one AT is completed, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

If it is an advantageous section, information indicating that it is an advantageous section (also called an advantageous section type) is stored in a predetermined RAM area. When the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (when the advantageous section type is 0), it indicates a normal section, and when the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (when the advantageous section type is 1) indicates that it is an advantageous section.

<advantageous section ramp>
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information indicating on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he/she is staying in the advantageous section, he/she can easily judge by lighting/non-lighting of the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP of the credit display 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP of the credit display 26 is not lit, the player is not staying in the advantageous section. It is shown that. The lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp is after all reels have stopped, after accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, and when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected. Examples include when the second medal is detected, after receiving the start switch, or after winning a winning combination by internal lottery. In addition, as a condition to always light up, if you are staying in an advantageous section, and if you notify the operation procedure information of the choice hand and the ball output rate (maximum ball output rate) of the information game exceeds 1 ( increase).

In addition, it is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when announcing the RT transition pushing order to an RT with a high replay probability although the ball payout rate does not exceed 1 because the pushing order small combination is not installed in the specifications. ing. This is to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player by means of the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering damage due to ignorance of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the condition for always lighting the advantageous section lamp as described above is not satisfied, there is no problem even if the timing for lighting the advantageous section lamp after the transition to the new advantageous section is arbitrary.

In addition, when the advantageous section lamp is lit once, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before accepting the operation of the start switch for the next game after the advantageous section ends (after all reels stop, After accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected), the advantageous section lamp will not light up. to

With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player can feel the expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, conventionally, if it is a normal section, it has become a game that only waits for the transition to the advantageous section, but with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, AT transition Since there is a possibility that a lottery or the like is being performed, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section type is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section type is 0), and in a game where the advantageous section type is 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section type is 1 but before the transition to the advantageous section. This is because the game state is in the normal section. When executing processing to transmit whether the test signal is an advantageous section or a normal section, if the advantageous section type is referenced, the signal for the advantageous section will be sent even though it is a normal section. send a different signal.

In order to prevent this situation, the test signal is configured to refer to the value of the advantageous interval clear counter when transmitting either the advantageous interval or the normal interval. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), a process for outputting a test signal indicating the advantageous section is executed. By configuring in this way, as processing for outputting the test signal, it is only necessary to determine whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, and the state can be specified accurately, thereby eliminating pressure on the program capacity. , and the program execution speed can be improved. As described above, even when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary end condition, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1. Therefore, in the processing for outputting the test signal, even in the game where the advantageous interval ends, the advantageous interval can be output correctly.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a winning combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). In general, means for notifying in the AT include stop switch operation timing, stop switch operation order, stop switch operation timing and stop switch operation order, and are also referred to as an operation procedure or operation mode.

<Sub bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from a bonus (1st type BB, 2nd type BB, RB, CB, SB, which will be described later) that can be won by an internal lottery. It is basically the same as AT, but is characterized in that the sub-bonus start symbol combination is stopped by reel performance, pseudo-game, or pushing order at the start of the sub-bonus. It should be added that even if it is simply referred to as "AT", it is a concept that includes a sub-bonus.

<Grouping of selected roles>
The main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 the production group number indicating that the choice is won when the choice is won during non-AT, and the production group number and the operation procedure information when the choice is won during AT. to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, since the operational procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 cannot notify the operational procedure. As a result, on the side of the sub-control means 1000, it is unclear which operation procedure is used to display the symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and the symbol combination advantageous to the player is displayed during AT. Since the operation procedure information that can be performed is transmitted, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or the operation instruction lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure, and can suppress illegal acquisition of the operation procedure information during non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function includes AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, AT end condition update (addition/subtraction of AT game number, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), AT execution (notification of operation mode) It is a concept that includes not only lottery related to AT, but also processing related to AT state management. Processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and when a plurality of bets is set as a prescribed number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number is set. configured to process. For example, when a 2-coin bet and a 3-coin bet are possible in the middle state of the bonus, the processing related to the command function can be executed only in the game with the 3-coin bet, and the processing related to the command function can be executed in the game with the 2-coin bet. is infeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, the AT lottery is not executed even if the AT lottery target role is won, or the AT game number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if SB (single bonus) or CB that ends in one game is dedicated to 2-bet games, and if 2-bet or 3-bet is the game after SB or CB ends, SB or CB If the replay is won and the number of automatic bets is 2, the processing related to the instruction function in the game after SB or CB ends will not be possible executable), the number of bets to be automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to 3. By doing so, it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. It should be noted that, as described above, processing related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During the AT, when announcing the information on the operation procedure for the winning hand, the operation procedure information may be announced using the win number indicator. Specifically, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order A (left, middle, right correct), and "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order B (left, right, middle, correct). In the case of push order C (middle left right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (middle right left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and push order E (right left In the case of the middle correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the pushing order F (right middle left correct answer), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Also, when the indication monitor is used also as the acquired number display, the above-described numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the winning number indicator displays the winning number or the pressing order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order is displayed. In the case of C (middle left right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of , "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of pushing order F (right, middle, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the pushing order on the instruction monitor is any period from when the pushing order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch to when the stop switch becomes operable. is preferably the timing of With such a configuration, the pressing order can be notified before the player operates the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the stop operation from being performed in an incorrect pressing order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the game machine. Also called the instructed role ratio), the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the latest It is a display device that switches and displays the character ratio between the 6000 games, the cumulative continuous character ratio, the cumulative character ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character, etc. every 4800 ms. A four-digit number can be displayed by using four. The upper two digits of the four digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called an identification segment, and the lower two digits are called a ratio segment.

"Role" in the role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the ordinary role (so-called SB). ” is a ratio calculated by payout during operation of accessory/total payout×100. In addition, payouts in the operation of the first class special role product continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special role product continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in "payout during operation of the role product", but during BB Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in the “payout during operation of the accessory”. Note that "payout" is a term in which the number of inserted coins is not subtracted. Also, the combination of the first class special role product continuous operating device and the second class special role product continuous operating device may be simply referred to as a role product continuous operating device.

The "continuous role" in the continuous role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), and the "continuous role ratio" is the payout during operation of the first type special role / total payout It is a ratio calculated by ×100. Note that the payout in the operation of the type 1 special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) is also included in the "payout during the operation of the accessory", but the payout in the general game during the BB is the "payout during the operation of the accessory". not included in

The "instruction-inclusive role" in the instruction-inclusive role ratio includes the payout in the game (so-called AT) in which the instruction function is activated in the above-mentioned "accessory", and the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" , (payout during operation of the instruction function or payout during operation of the accessory)/total payout×100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is in operation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is in operation and the accessory is activated, but the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated. It refers to the sum of the payouts of the game in which the number and the accessory are activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was the game in which the accessory was activated, instead of adding the two payouts, the payout during product operation). If the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained. In this case, the payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio in the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio in the latest 6000 games. It is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio, and is indicated by "7U." and "7P. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, “5H.”. For example, when "7U." It shows that it is a character ratio. The "." displayed on the role ratio monitor is a decimal point.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the nearest decimal point and displayed. Also, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Also, when the total number of games is less than 400, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification seg is displayed in a flashing manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, it is 175,000 games, and in the case of the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, it is 175,000 games. The ratio is 6000 games, the character ratio among the latest 6000 games is 6000 games, the cumulative continuous character ratio is 17500 games, and the cumulative character ratio is 17500 games. and 175,000 games in the case of the total state ratio of accessories, etc.

The ratio seg is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 in the case of the cumulative instructed role ratio, and 70 in the case of the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games. 60 in the case of the latest 6000 game character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative continuous character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative total character ratios, etc. 50 for state ratios. If the total number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but "00" is displayed in the ratio segment, the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting mode.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification seg and the ratio seg for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing is started. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. The test pattern may be displayed at any timing during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM (RAM) abnormal error, in addition to the timing after power-on.

When the cumulative number of games in the identified segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, and when the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a blinking manner. However, more specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and extinguishing at every 300 ms such as lighting 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→lit 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→ . . . Also, when the various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, thereby preventing the display period of various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous The character object ratio, the cumulative character object ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character object, etc. are configured to switch the display contents every 4,800 ms, and this 4,800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit at the switching timing of the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

By configuring in this way, even at the timing when various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, so that it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the blinking period does not deviate.

In addition, since the test pattern display period after the power is turned on is also set to 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED turns off when the test pattern is displayed for 4800 ms. It is possible to display information about the instructed accessory ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method for blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be described.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and lighting. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and performs processing for adding 1 for each timer interrupt processing. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and then circulates between 0 and 299 each time timer interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is set to "0" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 1”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "0-299").

Example 2) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 299”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").

Example 3) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "299" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 0”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 0 (the carry flag is set to 0 because no carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "299-299").

As described above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag is set to 1, and the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to 1. If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for management is 299, carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored to 0) when the power is turned on. When 0 is stored in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the extinguishing mode every 300 ms. can be repeatedly displayed (blinking display).

When the display of the role ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode, if the total number of games in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, if the display numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since it is one of the cases of displaying, in cases other than these cases, it is displayed in the lighting mode without referring to the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is updated for each timer interrupt process. ) is also updated as needed, and even when the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is switched from a non-referencing state to a referencing state, the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of various ratio displays are displayed without deviation. becomes possible.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing for setting the interrupt mode, setting the functions of the main CPU, and creating power failure recovery data. In the RAM check process, it is determined whether or not the checksum of all RAMs is normal. If the condition is satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal, and if the condition is not satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or whether the recovery is possible. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, the first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal or not in a recoverable state, the second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. Then, after the setting change process, the game proceeds to the main game shown in FIG.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not turned on, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal or unrecoverable, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process shifts to unrecoverable error processing for stopping the progress of the game of the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is not abnormal or unrecoverable, the process proceeds to the power-off recovery process of FIG. Then, after the power-off recovery process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 9 is entered. It should be noted that, after the power-off recovery process, the game returns to the saved state when the power-off is detected, so the process is not always executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited, and the output of the output port (output of sub-control command, output of excitation signal to stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the display (notification) of the error is repeated on the obtained number display 27 .

<Power off processing>
Power-off processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the present embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event such as a power failure occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (also referred to as a power interruption), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops. When the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power cutoff, generates a power cutoff detection signal, and the power cutoff detection signal is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the judgment processing for judging whether or not the power interruption detection signal of the timer interrupt processing is inputted, the power interruption processing is executed when it is judged that the power interruption detection signal is inputted. When determining whether or not the power-off detection signal is input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made by one timer interrupt process, or by two or more timer interrupt processes. good too. In other words, when judging whether or not the power supply has been turned off by multiple times of timer interrupt processing, even if it is judged that the power supply interruption detection signal has been input at the first time, the power supply interruption detection signal has not been input at the second time. If determined, the power-off process is not executed. This is to prevent power-off processing from being executed when noise or an instantaneous interruption (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for a moment but immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are periodically executed are prohibited, and the interrupt disable/enable state at power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When the data is saved, the power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is turned on and saved, and the checksum data of all the RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the stored stack pointer, the presence or absence of a power-off processing completion flag, and whether or not the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt processing starts, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when the power-off detection signal is received, the power-off processing is executed, and the inputs of various sensors and operation switches are read from the input port. , and measure various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.), and as reel drive control, each reel is accelerating, rotating at constant speed, decelerating, decelerating, stopping Control and update of the drive state are performed according to any drive state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (such as an excitation signal for the stepping motor and a drive signal for the hopper 44) to be output for each output port, and it is checked whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various kinds of abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input/discharge sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer.

Next, if there is a sub-control command set in the control command transmission process, it outputs the sub-control command to the sub-control board 1000, controls the lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. By outputting notification data to be transmitted to the board, outputting a signal related to the performance test, restoring the register, and saving the interrupt permission flag to ON, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of an internal lottery, a reel rotation start command when the reel starts accelerating, and a rotating reel. There are various commands such as a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command by operating each stop switch for stopping.

Also, the timer measurement process may be performed in the timer interrupt process.
In the timer measurement, control processing is performed to update the information on the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, the process of updating the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) per game (for example, the process of subtracting 1) )I do. In addition to the RWM storage area for monitoring the minimum playing time, the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) for monitoring (managing) the insertion of game medals by the insertion button, and the output time of the external signal are monitored. It may have an RWM storage area related to a plurality of timers, such as an RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area C) to be (managed).
In this case, in the timer measurement, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area B, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area C, etc. A process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area) that stores information about the timer is executed. Further, when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0" and timer measurement is performed, the value stored in the certain timer area becomes "0". .

As the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area has been exemplified. It can be processed.

Here, monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button will be described.
Monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button is a timer that counts after the bet processing is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and the value of the timer becomes "0". It is a timer for not executing the process of determining whether or not the next 1-bet switch 19 has been operated until the next 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

For example, under a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), the 1-bet switch 19 "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet processing is executed based on the operation of . After that, the value stored in the timer area B is decremented by "1" by timer measurement in timer interrupt processing. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". If the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process It is not determined whether or not the bed switch 19 has been operated. That is, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", no bet processing is executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet processing can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the bet processing from being executed a plurality of times due to an erroneous operation even though the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once. Further, when a malicious player repeatedly hits the 1-bet switch 19, the bet processing based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is executed a plurality of times, and commands based on the execution of the bet processing are continuously issued to the sub-control means 1000. You can prevent it from being sent to

<Power failure recovery process>
Power-off recovery processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 40, the main control board 100 executes a power-off restoration process for restoring various data to the state before the power-off.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is recovered, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 is recovered. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if it is abnormal (the value is out of the defined range), it shifts to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if normal (within a defined range of values), an unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt prohibition/permission state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power failure return processing is completed, the state before the power failure occurs is restored, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the main control processing of the game progress is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated after the power-off recovery process in the program start process.

<Description of main game progression>
A game progress main control process executed by the main control board 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number stored before the previous game, and executes the freeze effect when the stored freeze effect number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze effect, and saves the freeze effect. If the freeze effect number provided does not correspond to the number to execute the freeze effect, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game value insertion processing). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets enabling the game to be executed has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and it is determined that no bet has been placed. In this case, it waits for the reception of operation of the bet switch if it is in the state of inserting game medals or in the state of being stored in credits (in the case of being in the state of being stored in credits). If the number of bets that makes the game executable has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (it is determined that the start switch signal is ON), internal lottery processing is performed and the start switch 12 has not been operated ( If it is not determined that the start switch signal is ON, the reception of the operation of the start switch 12 is waited.

In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery random numbers are generated and acquired, and a predetermined arithmetic process is executed to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after allowing the stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation. be as prepared as possible.

The types of winning combinations provided in the slot machine PS1 are roughly classified into bonus, minor combination, and replay.

A bonus means a feature that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. FIG. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number is changed, or the conditional device activation probability of the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number is changed. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set as an end condition of obtaining 8 small wins or 12 game results, and during RB, RB middle win set higher than normal win lottery table winning probability of small win. A role lottery is performed using a lottery table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device for the first class special bonus. BB is set as an end condition to payout game medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 269) related to winning a small winning combination, and during BB, the probability of winning a small winning combination (to be described later) is set higher than in the normal winning lottery table. A combination lottery is performed using the BB middle combination lottery table. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the BB middle winning lottery table during the BB. For example, the BB middle winning lottery table may be called a BB middle winning lottery table that continuously operates the RB middle winning lottery table, which will be described later, until the BB end condition is satisfied.

CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special accessory. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all minor winning combinations have been won regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed for a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

Since the CB is in a state where at least all of the small wins have been won as described above, the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure may not be displayed (also referred to as a dropout). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific pattern can be placed on the effective line at any operation timing. Although it could be displayed, if it stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific pattern cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. For MB, for example, payout of more than 153 medals associated with winning a small winning combination, winning RB, or winning SB, which will be described later, is set as an end condition.

SB is an abbreviation for a single bonus, and is also called an ordinary accessory. The SB is set as an end condition that the result of one game is obtained. During SB, a combination lottery is performed using an SB medium combination lottery table in which the probability of winning a small combination is set higher than that of a normal combination lottery table.

In the present embodiment, the BB uses the BB medium combination lottery table to perform the combination lottery, but the invention is not limited to this. A game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased together with the RB and a RB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor role is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, in the BB, there is no change in the fact that the payout exceeding the predetermined number of medals associated with winning a small winning combination is set as the termination condition. In addition, what controls these bonuses is generically referred to as special game control means.

A small combination is a winning combination in which a combination of symbols based on the winning minor combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and medals are paid out based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed when it is determined that a prize has been won by a winning determination process (to be described later). be.

In replay (also called replay role), the symbol combination based on the winning replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined as winning by the winning determination process, replay (automatically without inserting new medals) This is a combination that gives a game that allows the next game to be played by betting. Since the replay is never missed in the winning game, the next game after winning the replay is always a replay.

In the lottery result of the combination lottery, when none of the bonus combination, the minor combination, and the replay combination are won, the winning process is not performed as described later. When the player loses, the combination of symbols that does not relate to any combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Of the hands drawn by lottery, if the combination of symbols for BB, RB, and MB is not stop-displayed on the active line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later. It can be done (special role carryover means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the carry-over medium role lottery table (also referred to as the internal lottery table or the internal medium lottery table) according to the winning flag. ) may be used to draw a winning combination. When the combination of symbols based on the winning BB, RB or MB is stopped and displayed on the active line while using the carryover middle role lottery table, it is determined that the shift condition of the role lottery table is met, and the carryover middle role lottery table is used. The lottery table is shifted to the combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

Winning probabilities for a plurality of types of winning combinations are determined in the winning combination lottery table, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the game state. For example, it corresponds to a BB middle winning lottery table used during BB, an MB middle winning lottery table used during MB, and the like.

In the combination lottery table, there are lotteries for single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more activated lines. Set according to the result.

A plurality of symbol combinations set as overlapping winning hands may be set so that one winning hand can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of all the symbol combinations, or some of the symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. can be set to Of the multiple winning combinations, the combination corresponding to a part of symbol combinations that cannot be stopped may be referred to as a control combination.

As for the role of the control service, even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery wins, the display will be stopped according to the type of control service set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays the role of being able to control the effective line to be different.

Winning flag control means turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, when all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player to end the winning process for the winning combination, the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off.

As for BB, RB and MB mentioned above, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB or MB symbol combination is the valid line. If it is not stop-displayed above, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards, the above-mentioned carry-over middle role lottery table is set, and the symbol combination of BB, RB or MB that wins is stop-displayed and won. The flag corresponding to BB, RB or MB is turned off by completing the prize winning process for the role.

In addition, an RT combination lottery table is provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is different in a role lottery than in a normal role lottery table.

As a specific usage example of RT, the winning probability of replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal combination lottery table with replay, or the replay area of the normal combination lottery table may be replaced with losing and replayed. You may make it reduce the winning probability of.
Further, although the area of the normal combination lottery table and the replay are the same, the type of replay to be won within the area of the replay may be made different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table are as follows. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, and transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, BB, RB, etc. Or when MB is finished, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of games have been played after a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, and transition condition 5 is when BB, RB, or This is when the specified number of games have been played after the MB is finished. The transition conditions for these RT combination lottery tables can be appropriately set according to game characteristics.

The input number is the winning number of each lottery result determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. Become. For example, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery result with the number 4 is 1/16384.

In addition, when any one of transition conditions 1 to 5 of the above-described RT combination lottery table is satisfied, the set number relating to replay can be changed. For example, the replay probability of RT1 is 1/7.3, and when the game shifts from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability of RT2 may be changed to 1/1.5. As a result, by shifting to a state where the replay probability is high, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals and add interest to the game.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has passed. If it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum playing time timer is 0), the minimum playing time is newly set, and if it is not determined that the minimum playing time has passed ( If it is not determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), it is checked whether or not the minimum game time has passed after decrementing the value of the minimum game time timer. This minimum game time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and other processes are executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. configured not to. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processes, the game can be started quickly. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other instructions with a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience the extension of the minimum playing time. After newly setting the minimum playing time, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data relating to the spinning reel stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the rotation start output of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is started. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

The stop table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the combination lottery by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13 .

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, a process relating to a freeze effect (for example, a reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are slightly moved or reversely rotated, mainly to indicate the degree of expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is completed, the reel rotation process (also referred to as reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is performed. Execute. There are four reel rotation states: an acceleration state, a constant speed rotation state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is to be rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by timer interrupt processing.

Acceleration processing executed in the acceleration state is processing executed from a state in which reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation processing. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step each time the timer interrupt is processed. become more sexual. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 timer interrupts are processed, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 timer interrupts are processed, and then 10 timer interrupts are processed. After processing, move the stepping motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five timer interrupts, move the stepping motor one step after processing two timer interrupts, and then move the stepping motor one step. After interrupt processing, the stepping motor is moved by one step. After that, it is connected to a constant-speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each timer interrupt process.

When the constant-speed rotation process is executed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process to detect rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. It is decremented, and it may be determined that the rotation failure is detected at the timing when it becomes 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop reception of the stop switch is permitted, and the operation of the stop switch is waited. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, the red light is lit). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means 100 or by the sub-control means 1000 . Further, as lighting control of the lamps of the stop switches, when executing push-order navigation, the lamps of the stop switches may be flashed so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped. good.

Also, a command indicating that the reel has started rotating is transmitted to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counted. to start. Then, when the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (time equivalent to 3 minutes), the message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal to prompt the player to rotate the reels. encourage rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still spinning, it counts again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels are stopped.

In addition, if the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, by displaying it in front of the push order navigation, when the display area of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlaps Also, the visibility of the reel stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly urged to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that you will not know which reel to stop. The warning image may be made smaller or moved) so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling reception of operation of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, determination processing of reception of operation of the stop switch (reel stop reception check processing) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop switches has been operated, stop control (also referred to as slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from the constant speed rotation state to the stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the target stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when it reaches the target stop position, it shifts to a stop state, and all the four-phase excitations are turned ON to apply the brakes. Slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch 13 is operated. In this embodiment, when accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number saved as the stop position match. All 4-phase excitation is turned ON as a position. Also, the pattern number currently passing means that the initial pattern number is set at the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and the initial pattern number is moved by one pattern by timer interrupt processing. It is judged by setting the pattern number next to the pattern number.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all the reels are stopped. When all reels are stopped, winning judgment processing is executed and then winning processing is executed, and when all reels are not stopped, stop operation reception waiting processing of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is executed. . Then, after all the reels have stopped, the contents displayed on the status display monitor are updated, and the process proceeds to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT status, etc. is performed, and a series of main flow of the game progress is finished. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the stop operation is accepted.

Winning judgment processing is processing for judging whether or not the combination of symbols forming a winning combination is stopped on the pay line. In order to determine whether or not the stop symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is abnormal, the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is not used for determination. After it is determined by the prize determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, the winning process is performed, and it is not determined by the winning determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. If it does, perform processing based on the loss.

The winning process is a process of giving a privilege to the player based on the combination of symbols to be stopped on the activated line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a minor combination is stopped includes payout of medals based on the stopped symbol combination, processing of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and symbol combination based on replay. As the winning process when the is stopped, it is the process of giving the right to replay and the process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and the winning process when stopping the symbol combination based on the bonus is a process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. In addition, in the case of a loss, the winning process is not performed.

However, without being limited to this, when the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the winning process based on the losing process may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, no benefit may be given to the player. Further, as the winning process based on the loss, the game state may be shifted according to the operation mode when the game is lost. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated in accordance with a predetermined operation order when losing, a transition to a game state with a different freeze winning probability can be mentioned. In addition, even in the case of an apparent loss due to the omission of a small winning combination, it is possible to carry out a prize winning process such as controlling the transition of the game state such as transition to the RT state without paying out. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, a payout of medals or a replay right based on the stop-displayed symbol combination may be added.

The process of transitioning the game state includes setting a combination lottery table according to the game state to be transitioned, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned, and setting a freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned. or a combination thereof.

In the winning determination process, when the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning symbol combination information (stopped eye information) stopped and displayed on the active line and the winning lottery result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these pieces of information, it can use the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S to output an effect according to the winning symbol combination information and the combination lottery result information.

In the winning determination process, winning is determined on all active lines, and as a result of the determination, when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning hands are stopped and displayed on a plurality of activated lines, the stop-displayed plurality of symbol combinations are displayed. Winning processing is performed for each.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 and a small combination with a payout number of 10 are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines, the winning processing is performed as a small winning combination with a payout number of 2. 12 coins are paid out by summing the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set minor combination.

An upper limit is set for the number of payouts for one time, and when the upper limit of the number of payouts is exceeded when the combination of symbols based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number of payouts of the upper limit is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15, and the small winning combination with the number of payouts set at 12 and the small combination with the number of payouts set at 10 are stopped on a plurality of active lines. As the winning process, when the total value of the small winning combination of 12 coins and the small winning combination of 10 coins exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 coins is paid out.

In the present embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small wins, but medals corresponding to the number of bets may be paid out as prize-winning processing based on replay, or prize-winning processing based on bonuses may be set in advance. You may pay out as many medals as you have.

<Advantageous Section Clear Counter Management Processing>
Among the processes executed by the game progression main according to the present embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter management process relating to the management of advantageous zones will be described with reference to FIG. 11 .

Set the advantageous interval clear counter RWM address.

Subsequently, a 2-byte subtraction process is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, a process of determining whether or not the advantageous section type is 0 is executed. Then, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Advantageous section type = 0 means that the section is not an advantageous section and that it is a normal section, and advantageous section type = 1 means that it is an advantageous section.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to RWM initialization processing. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter, the current value of the MY counter is acquired.

Subsequently, after executing the processing for acquiring the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether or not the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, the value of the MY counter is determined. has exceeded the upper limit value (2400), and if it is determined that the replay operation symbol is not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the payout number buffer data. The data of the payout number buffer is data indicating the number of payouts related to winning, and no payout (the number of payouts is 0) when a win or a small winning combination is missed.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the data of the payout number buffer, the number of payouts for the game is acquired.

Subsequently, a process of adding the acquired payout number buffer data (OUT number) to the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, a process of acquiring game medal count data is executed. The data on the number of game medals is data corresponding to the number of inserted medals.

Subsequently, a process of subtracting the IN number (the number of inserted sheets) from the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, an initial value is set in the MY counter and stored in the MY counter. If it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter is stored in the MY counter. The initial value of the MY counter is 0, and when the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Whether or not the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0 or not. The carry flag is a flag that becomes 1 when the result of the subtraction process is a negative value, and becomes 0 when the result of the subtraction process is not a negative value. In addition, in the case of addition processing, if the upper limit value (65535 for 2 bytes) is exceeded, the value is 1, and if the upper limit value is not exceeded, the value is 0.

Subsequently, after saving the value of the MY counter, the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400) is executed. If the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400), the RWM initialization process is executed and the process proceeds to the advantageous section type determination process. The section clear counter management process is ended, and if the advantageous section type is not 0, the initial value (1500) is set to the advantageous section clear counter, and the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended. Further, if the value of the MY counter does not exceed the upper limit (2400) in the process of determining whether the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the advantageous section clear counter management process ends.

Judging whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section type is not 0, the processing that is passed at the start of the advantageous section , and this process is not passed except at the start of the advantageous section. The number 1500 stored in the advantageous interval clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in the advantageous interval. This is to prevent addiction, suppress the state in which the number of medals continues to increase throughout the day, and prevent the gambling spirit from being remarkably aroused.

As for the timing of setting the advantageous section type to 1, it is executed in the advantageous section transition lottery process between the reception of the start switch and the start of rotation of the reels. Advantageous section transition lottery processing is a process that is passed when the condition device number to be the target of the lottery is selected. set the advantageous section type to 0 (normal section).

In the RWM initialization process that is executed after the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to zero. The parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, it becomes a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and when the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, the advantageous section is maintained and the process ends. In addition, when the replay is won in the advantageous section, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number of bets as the inserted number is automatically betted. However, there is a possibility that the value of the MY counter will be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraud, so it is determined whether or not the MY counter has reached the upper limit even during replay.

In addition, the advantageous interval can be ended at any timing for each gaming machine other than the lapse of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) are executed. In this way, when the advantageous interval is terminated with an arbitrary termination opportunity, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1 before the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is executed (it is desirable that the AT-related processing is executed after all reels are stopped). By setting , when the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed, the advantageous section clear counter is 1 before subtraction, the subtraction result of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0, and the advantageous section clear counter management process can be terminated. That is, after setting the value of the advantageous interval clear counter to 1, by subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous interval can be terminated. This makes it possible to perform processing within the same module without using a separate advantageous section termination module when an arbitrary termination condition is achieved.

Further, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction processing in the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is configured to be executed in any game state in any number of bets (when a plurality of prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine). there is

<Setting change processing>
A setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode starts (setting change processing is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is acquired and If it is outside, save "1" as the set value and acquire the set value "1".

After obtaining the set value, save the set value display data. After saving the set value display data, the set value display data is referenced every five interrupts and lighting control is performed by dynamic lighting control, which is timer interrupt processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 has turned on from off, and when it is determined that the setting switch has turned on from off, Determine whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than the maximum value, increment the current set value. conduct. After the set value is incremented, the updated set value is displayed, and the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has been turned from off to on, the setting value is fixed, and the setting key switch is waited until it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off from on. When it is determined that the switch has changed from ON to OFF, the determined setting value is stored in the main control RAM, the setting display LED is turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on (the medals flow down to the hopper 44). to form a passage for) to end the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is means for determining one of setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6 on display). After any setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also referred to as a winning lottery table) corresponding to the determined setting value is continuously set until the setting value is changed by the setting change means. A combination lottery table is provided in which the determination probability of the lottery result by the internal lottery (the winning probability of the combination) differs for each set value.

The setting change means holds the setting key at a rotational position where a setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key used for setting change is turned on by the manager of the game arcade while the power of the slot machine PS1 is not turned on. When the power of the slot machine PS1 is turned on in this state, the setting key switch signal is turned on with the turning on of the power of the slot machine PS1. In this embodiment, turning on of the setting key switch signal means rising on (turning from off to on). Since the rising on state is not detected, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. If the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, the setting change mode may be entered.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door opening signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting change means can change the setting value of the slot machine PS1. start mode.

The setting changeable flag switches between ON and OFF according to the game state. For example, it is conceivable that the setting changeable flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and the setting changeable flag is turned on during the rest of the period. However, the configuration is not limited to this mode, and the setting changeable flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game is started or when a specific bonus is in progress. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. There are 6 levels of set value data that can be changed in the setting change mode: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Set a high winning lottery table.

After starting the setting change mode, the setting display LED provided on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 is turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is activated. Then, set value display data for displaying the set value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged on the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the credit amount display device 26 arranged on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are displayed. A setting display LED (not shown) is turned on to display the setting value. When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "1", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "2", and when the set value data is "3". If the set value data is "4", the set value display will display "4", and if the set value data is "5", the set value display will display "5". ” is displayed, and when the set value data is “6”, “6” is displayed as the set value display.

In addition, when the set value data stored in the set value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", the set value display when the set value data is "0" is "1". When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "2", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "3", and the set value data is " When the set value data is "3", the set value display displays "4", when the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on. The setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal has been turned on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch start-up data is cleared and the current set value is the maximum set value. (set value data "6") or more, and if it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "6"), the set value data is cleared (set value data to "1"), and if it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set values "1" to "5"), the current set value is incremented. As for the processing of the setting change mode when the set value data is set in six stages from 0 to 5, it is determined whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "5"), When it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0") and the current set value becomes the maximum set value. When it is determined to be less than the value (set value "0" to "4"), the current set value may be incremented.

As a setting value display mode of the setting display LED when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is ON after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED indicates that the setting value cannot be changed. 0", or "_X" ("X" is the setting value after confirmation) on the setting display LED, etc. may be displayed.

<Playability Using Advantageous Sections Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number for starting the game is only three. In other words, the game cannot be started with anything other than the 3-coin stake, and the game can be started with only the 3-coin stake even when the bonus is activated.

In this embodiment, the effective line consists of one line consisting of the left reel lower stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel lower stage. Hereinafter, stopping the symbol combination on the active line is simply referred to as "stopping the symbol combination".

In this embodiment, there are ten kinds of patterns. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay, respectively. It should be noted that the names of the symbols and the types of the symbols are only examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, one reel has 20 symbols, and includes a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. In the figure, the item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. In addition, the "prescribed number and game state" shows the privilege to be given when the symbol combination for each prescribed number is stopped. If "Specified number and game state" is described as "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is described as "Replay" indicates that replay is given when the symbol combination is stopped, and if a number is indicated, it indicates the number of payouts when the symbol combination is stopped, and if indicated as "-", it is applicable It shows that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is provided with one kind of BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. In addition, this type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either one of two wins or two games is satisfied. The specification is such that RB is automatically activated until (payout of more than 11 game medals) is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 13, there are eight types of 1-type BB symbol combinations, and the drawing rate of the 1-type BB symbol combination on each reel (probability of stopping the symbols related to the symbol combination) is not 100%. In order to display the symbol combination of 1 type BB, it is necessary to press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also called 1 type BB non-inside), and if 1 type BB wins during non-RT and the 1 type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game ( When the 1st BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st BB operates from the next game (1 BB ), and when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the next game is shifted to non-RT. In addition, since setting change is started from non-RT, if the setting change device is operated while RT1 or type 1 BB is operating, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device is completed. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off without the setting change device operating (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed. Specifically, when the power is cut off during the 1st type BB and then the power is restored, the 1st type BB operating state is during the 1st type BB, and the power is cut off in the state of RT1, and then the power is restored. If it does, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

A condition device in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the item of "winning replay" in FIG. 19, numbers corresponding to winning numbers are described. In addition, the conditional device to be activated is described in the item of "conditional device". In addition, the simple name of the operating condition device is described in the item of "common name". For example, the common name corresponding to the replay-H condition device is "right push: strong-battle eye", and it is shown that the strong battle eye stops when the right reel is stopped for the first time, and the winning-A1 condition device The corresponding common name is "push order bell A group 123", and the operation mode of left reel 1st stop, middle reel 2nd stop, right reel 3rd stop is the correct operation mode (in this case, winning 52 (winning 01 to 02 , 09, 29 to 31, the symbol combination is stopped). In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is shown in the item of "component". For example, it is indicated that replay 01 or replay 02 can be displayed when the replay-A condition device operates (wins). It should be noted that "0" in the item "winning replay" corresponds to losing.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-internal 1 type BB in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. FIG. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during non-1 type BB are 1 type BB, replay -A, replay -B, replay -C (+1 type BB), replay -D (+1 type BB), replay-E (+1 type BB), replay-F (+1 type BB), replay-G (+1 type BB), replay-H (+1 type BB), replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win -B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D (+1 type BB), Prize-E (+1 type) BB), Prize-F (+1 type BB), Prize-G (+1 type BB), Prize-H (+1 type BB), Prize-I (+1 type BB), Prize-J (+1 type BB), Prize- Any of K (+1 kind BB) and there is no outlier.

Note that the above description of "replay-C (+1 type BB)" indicates that replay-C and 1 type BB are won at the same time, and in FIGS. This corresponds to the fact that the names are described in both "device" and "winning replay". 20, 21, and 22, the item "internal lottery" indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state. Indicates that it is not covered. 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state. , "x" indicates that the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, a 100% win is made and the advantageous section transition is made. Items "R1" to "R6" in FIGS. 20, 21, and 22 show the winning numbers of the internal lottery corresponding to the set values, and 65536 numbers are assigned to each game state. . Note that "R1" corresponds to the setting value "1", "R2" corresponds to the setting value "2", "R3" corresponds to the setting value "3", and "R4" corresponds to the setting value "3". corresponds to the setting value "4", "R5" corresponds to the setting value "5", and "R6" corresponds to the setting value "6".

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means inside the 1 type BB are replay-A, replay-B, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, and replay. -F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1 , Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize -E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K, and there is no exception.

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1 type BB is any of win-K, win-L, and lose.

In this embodiment, the conditions for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section are replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, and replay-I. , Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize- Any one of I, Prize-J, and Prize-K wins, and replay-A and replay-B wins do not shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning during the normal section -A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1 , Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize If any of -K wins, it will always shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside 1 type BB), there is no deviation (either the replay role or the winning role will always win), so once it shifts to RT1, the pressing order bell group C (winning - C1 ~C6) It is possible to stop the BB symbol combination in some operation modes at the time of winning. A part of the pressing order bell group C winning is, for example, a partial pressing position of the middle reel or the right reel first stop when winning-C1 wins. In addition, when winning-C1 wins in the advantageous section, by informing the order of pressing the correct answer (in this case, "1, 2, 3)" is displayed on the liquid crystal), the winning 38 is stopped and the BB pattern combination is not stopped. With such a configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by informing the operation mode that the BB symbol combination does not stop.In addition, the number of losers during RT1 is 4 (the design minimum winning probability is 1 /17500 or more), and by configuring so that the BB symbol combination is not stopped in other replaying combinations or winning combinations, the BB symbol combination may be stopped only when the winning combination is lost.

In this embodiment, as game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous section, the states of the advantageous section general state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT are provided. , from AT to the advantageous zone general state, or CZ, respectively. In addition, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal section is only the normal section general state, and the game state does not transition until the transition to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section general state and the normal section general state, the flag related to the game state to be managed by the main control means may be in the same state or in a different state.

The normal state is a state in which an advantageous winning pushing order is not reported when any one of winning-A1 to winning-C6 is won as a result of the internal lottery.

CZ is a state that shifts when winning any of the winning-D to winning-H as an internal lottery result in the normal state, and during CZ, AT depending on the result of the internal lottery during CZ and the lottery at the start of CZ Perform a lottery to move to.

AT is a state that shifts when AT lottery in CZ is won, and is a state in which an advantageous operation mode (winning order) is notified when winning any one of prize-A1 to prize-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section are set when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 times) and when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. When the initialization process based on the change is performed, the RAM clear switch becomes effective, and the end condition of AT does not match the end condition of the advantageous section. However, part of the conditions for ending the AT (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of acquired coins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2300)) may be used as the condition for ending the advantageous section. Also, when you hit CZ in the advantageous section, you may shift to the normal section. In this case, it is determined whether or not to end the advantageous section according to the situation of the advantageous section when the CZ is hit in the advantageous section.

CZ is decided by lottery when winning any of the prize-D to prize-H (hereinafter also referred to as rare role), and basically the harder it is to win the internal lottery, the more CZ will be won. It's getting easier. In this embodiment, the order in which CZ is likely to be won is as follows: Winning-G> Winning-E> Winning-H> Winning-F> Winning-D.

In this embodiment, CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after hitting CZ, CZ is started when moving from the advantageous section to the normal section and moving to the advantageous section again (when transitioning to the advantageous section in RT1 always start CZ). As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that when the AT is hit from the CZ, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small and the ball cannot be put out. In particular, the smaller the number of net additions (expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also called slope value), the more effective. For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 cards, the maximum number of cards to be obtained in the advantageous section is about 2400, so 1200 games are required to obtain 2400 cards. However, AT is not always performed in the advantageous section, and various game states such as the above-mentioned normal state and CZ transition, so the number of remaining games in the advantageous section may be small (eg, 500 times) There are many. In this case, even if the game is played 500 times, since the number of net increase is 2, the player ends up getting about 1000 coins, which makes it difficult to meet the user's expectation of winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous section once with a CZ win and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous section, even if the CZ is the number of games played 100 times, the advantageous section can be played the remaining 1400 times. , it can create a sense of anticipation for the user to win 2400 tickets.

In addition, the winning probability of CZ for the second and subsequent times within the same advantageous interval may be varied according to the value of the number of won (cumulative number of payouts−cumulative number of inputs) after the start of the advantageous interval. For example, if you start CZ at the time of transition to the advantageous section and hit AT, change the winning probability of CZ in the remaining advantageous section after the end of AT depending on whether you win 50 or 1000 at the AT. Aspects are conceivable. In this case, the CZ winning probability after obtaining 50 cards may be higher or lower than the CZ winning probability after obtaining 1000 cards.

If the CZ winning probability after winning 50 cards is higher than the CZ winning probability after winning 1000 cards, it becomes easier to give the next CZ to users who could not get much at AT, so expectations It is possible to play while maintaining it.

If the CZ winning probability after acquiring 50 cards is lower than the CZ winning probability after acquiring 1000 cards, the remaining advantageous section after acquiring 1000 cards is small (1500 times, which is the end condition of the advantageous section (because the number of games is close to 2400), even if CZ is set to a high probability, the gambling spirit is not remarkably increased due to the design of the ball output, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When the player wins the CZ, a congratulatory performance of displaying characters such as "success" or "win" is performed after the game in which the CZ is won or after a predetermined number of games (which can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game machine). As a result, the user can understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, so that the user can intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the message "Preparing for CZ" can be displayed in the lighting mode of the liquid crystal or the lamp, so that the user can have a sense of expectation for the CZ. "Under CZ preparation" corresponds to a state in which, when the CZ winning game is in an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is ended and the advantageous interval is resumed in the subsequent normal interval. Since "CZ preparation" is internally a normal section, it is in a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform AT lottery or AT addition at all, but the ball output rate during CZ preparation is regarded as AT state. By making a comparison and lowering, it is possible to allocate the balls to the AT and create a wave of balls. In addition, since the expectations for the CZ are created during the CZ preparation, the user is less likely to feel a loss even if the payout rate is lowered.

In addition, although the advantageous interval is ended in the next game after winning the CZ, the predetermined number of games may be executed from the game in which the CZ is won to the end of the advantageous interval. In this case, it is conceivable to execute a predetermined number of games by means of an effect whether or not the CZ has been won without notifying that the CZ has been won in the game in which the CZ has been won (so-called premonition effect or continuous effect). Then, the blessing performance is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of times of the game is executed, and the CZ is being prepared from the next game. This is because the advantageous section lamp is lit in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section lamp is turned off, so the advantageous section lamp is turned off from the CZ winning game to the notification that the CZ has been won. This is because it is not possible to know whether or not the player has won the CZ in the lighting mode. It should be noted that during CZ preparation it may be possible to move from the advantageous section to the normal section, in this case it is already notified that CZ is being prepared, so the result depends on the lighting mode of the advantageous section lamp during CZ preparation There is no such thing as knowing ahead of time.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal section, and may be set to an advantageous section. Even in this case, the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the normal section is relatively higher than the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, and as a condition for executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, the advantageous section The condition is that the number of remaining games is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) or more. By configuring in this way, in order to execute CZ preparation when there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, it is sufficient even if CZ is executed through CZ preparation and as a result AT is executed It is possible to create a feeling of winning. In addition, since the normal section is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise such as starting AT immediately after CZ preparation (in order to initialize information about AT at the end of the advantageous section, normal If the interval is used, AT cannot start because CZ will be executed at the start of the advantageous interval).

Also, when performing CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous section, it may be determined whether or not to give AT by lottery when winning any of winning -D to winning -H during CZ preparation . In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to be won by AT by AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to be won by CZ, or Win-E> Win-G> Win-F> Win-H> Win-D. You may make it partly different like the order of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the user expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order to prevent the user who won the rare combination but did not win the AT from losing their desire to play, a privilege different from that of the AT may be given. As the privilege, for example, it is possible to display a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user terminal, or display a setting suggesting effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The privilege may be easier to grant as the number of games in the advantageous section is closer to the above-described predetermined number (eg, 1500 times), or the number of CZs is a specific number (eg, multiples of 5). You can make it easier.

Processing related to setting change in this embodiment will be described.

When the setting change device is activated, the above-described RAM initialization processing is performed at the timing when the setting change device is activated or at the timing when the set values are determined. If the gaming state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is RT1, the information in RT1 is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the gaming state after the RAM initialization processing becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is in the 1st type BB, the information in the 1st type BB is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization processing is non-volatile. RT.

Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in the advantageous section, when the RAM initialization process is performed, information on the advantageous section is initialized, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal section. In other words, the gaming state during the advantageous section is the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of which state the game is in, when the RAM initialization process is performed, the game shifts to the normal section.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, the game will be started from the non-RT and normal section, but in this embodiment, since it is a specification to start CZ when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section , After the setting change, it is in an advantageous state (a state in which CZ can be started by shifting to an advantageous section without playing a game to win CZ).

By configuring in this way, since the state is advantageous after the setting change, it is possible to motivate customers to come to the store in the morning, and to increase the effect of attracting customers.

In addition, if a state that is too advantageous (a state in which the game is shifted to CZ after only playing a few times) can be set after the setting change, there is a risk that gambling will be significantly aroused (so-called "morning"). Therefore, it is conceivable to change the contents of CZ according to the situation when shifting to the advantageous section.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT1, CZ is started because it is a basic game flow, and the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is non- If it is RT, CZ is not started because it is after setting change. As the game that has been determined to move to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay Game-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win- B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Either Win-J or Win-K wins.

Also, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K overlap with 1 type BB, so the RT state of the next game won is RT1, and CZ is started. , Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize -C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6 do not overlap with 1 type BB, so the next game won is non-RT and CZ does not start.

With such a configuration, since there is a case where the non-RT shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the specifications related to the morning such as shifting to the CZ only by playing the game several times after the setting change, and the gambling property can be suppressed.

It is also conceivable to reduce the gambling property by changing the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous section by referring to the RT state of the next game determined to be shifted to the advantageous section. In this case, AT is not performed in the advantageous section shifted to non-RT (1 type BB non-internal), and AT is made possible in the advantageous section shifted to RT1 (1 type BB internal). good too. With such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the non-RT advantageous section after the setting change, it is not possible to win the ball because the AT is not performed, so the gambling nature is suppressed. The end condition of the advantageous section at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or the predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 times) have been played.

In addition, the transition of CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery, but not limited to this, the condition device that is operating in the game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery is controlled. may be referenced to control the transition of CZ. In this case, when winning-A1 wins inside the 1st class BB in the normal section, CZ should be started at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the 1st class BB and winning-A1 condition device is operating. Control. In addition, when Winning-A1 wins during non-inside 1 type BB in the normal section, it controls not to start CZ at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the Winning-A1 condition device is operating.

In the present embodiment, only one type of BB is the lottery target, but instead of this, RB or MB may be the lottery target, or two or all of the one type BB, RB, and MB may be the lottery target. .

<Playability with a higher expected value for acquiring game value at the start of the advantageous section>
A description will be given of a game property in which the expected acquisition value of the game value at the start of the advantageous section, which is applicable to the present embodiment, is increased.
Here, in order to increase the expected acquisition value of the game value at the start of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is configured not to end when the game is played a predetermined number of times. In other words, the advantage interval is not terminated depending on the number of games played in the advantage interval.

After starting one advantageous section, when the premonitory game is executed a predetermined number of times in the advantageous section general state, the next game is shifted to a predetermined AT (also called AT1), and a predetermined lottery is executed in the AT1. However, if the lottery is won, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit), and the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. After finishing the advantageous section, the normal section starts from the next game. Then, after starting a new advantageous interval through the normal interval, when the premonitory game is executed a predetermined number of times in the advantageous interval general state, it shifts to AT1, and when a predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, The AT1 continues until the number of wins in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, and when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends and the normal section starts from the next game.
That is, the acquisition of game value of about 2400 is looped until a predetermined lottery is not won at AT1. It should be noted that the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery can be appropriately set, but it is preferable to configure the winning probability to be as high as 50% or more and less than 80%. In addition, there is a minimum guarantee for the execution period of AT1 (50 AT games, 100 wins, etc.), and even if AT1 does not win a predetermined lottery, AT1 will not be terminated immediately. AT1 is configured to continue until the minimum guaranteed AT is executed without any delay. Note that the predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the minimum guaranteed AT is executed in AT1.

Also, if you are not elected in a predetermined lottery at AT1, after the end of AT1, you will move to the advantageous section general state without ending the advantageous section, and in the advantageous section general state, the low probability ( For example, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, replay-A, replay-J, winning-J, etc.) is won with the minimum probability of 1/8192 in the winning lottery, the advantageous section ends and the normal section starts from the next game. Then, when a predetermined number of portent games are executed in the general state of the advantageous section after starting a new advantageous section through the normal section, the process shifts to AT1.

It should be noted that, compared to the general state of the advantageous section at the start of one advantageous section, the general state of the advantageous section that transitions after being unsuccessful in a predetermined lottery at AT1 will have a lower expectation for AT. It is configured.

In addition, the advantageous section is configured to end when a predetermined combination is won in the advantageous section general state that shifts after the AT1 is not won in a predetermined lottery, but the advantageous section is not limited to this. A predetermined CZ may be executed, and when the lottery in the predetermined CZ is won, the advantageous section may be terminated.

Also, during AT1 or during a predetermined number of precursor games immediately after the start of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is not terminated even if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the tempo of the game in a state in which the number of acquisitions of 2400 is looped. In addition, even if a predetermined combination is won in a situation where it is confirmed that a predetermined lottery is won in AT1 and a game value of about 2400 can be acquired, AT1 is not ended in the middle, so the game is played. It is possible to prevent the risk of giving disadvantage to a person. In addition, even if a predetermined combination is won in a situation in which a predetermined effect indicating that it is confirmed that a predetermined lottery is won in AT and about 2400 game values can be obtained, the predetermined winning combination is executed. Since the performance is not ended in the middle, the player can be prevented from feeling distrustful. It should be noted that if a predetermined combination is won during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous interval may be terminated in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, or the advantageous interval may be terminated after AT2 is completed. .

In this way, by increasing the expected acquisition value of the game value at the start of the advantageous interval, it is possible to create a new game feature in which the player aims to finish the advantageous interval. In addition, by requiring a predetermined number of omen games from the start of one advantageous section to the shift to AT1, even when a predetermined lottery is won in AT1, the number of acquired ATs exceeds 2400. Since there is no continuation, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing excessively.

It should be noted that, even in the advantageous zone general state that has been shifted after a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, AT lottery may be performed, or the number of ceiling games (for example, 1000 games) is executed by providing a ceiling. It may be configured to shift to AT each time it is played (these ATs other than AT1 are also collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that a predetermined lottery is not executed. In this way, by not executing the predetermined lottery at ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high and to increase the expectation for the predetermined lottery at AT1.

Further, even if the expected value of acquisition of the gaming value at the start of the advantageous section is configured to be high in this way, it is advantageous if the transition to the advantageous section is determined during RT1 (inside the type 1 BB) by the method described above. After the start of the section, the game is shifted to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonitory games, but when the shift to the advantageous section is determined during non-RT, the AT is not executed even after the predetermined number of games are played after the start of the advantageous section. In other words, in the first advantageous interval after the setting change, it is preferable to configure so that AT is not executed after a predetermined number of games have been played since the advantageous interval was started. In this way, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined during RT1, it is relatively more advantageous than when the transition to the advantageous section is determined during non-RT. can be suppressed.

In addition, if a specific number of games (for example, 5000 games) are played without completing one advantageous interval, the design value of the ball payout rate will be set to a predetermined value (100%) from the next game until the advantageous interval ends. and not exceeding 115%). Although the specific number of times can be set as appropriate, it is preferable to set the number of games that can be played during the business hours of the game parlor in one day.

In addition, in order to set the design value of the ball payout rate in a predetermined state to a predetermined value, 1) every time a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) are executed in the advantageous section general state, the AT2 is entered. 2) the number of games to shift to AT2 and the number of wins in AT2 after shift so that the payout rate becomes a predetermined value A plurality of predetermined scenarios may be provided, and the game may proceed according to any of the scenarios.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to form a motivation to continue the game even in a disadvantageous situation for the player that one advantageous section continues for a long time.

In a predetermined state in which the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantage section may not end even if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined state in which the design value of the payout rate is the predetermined value from being excessively advantageous to the player.

Also, even in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantage section may be terminated when a predetermined combination is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when winning the predetermined combination.

Further, the designed value of the payout rate may be designed to be the same in a predetermined state in which the designed value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, regardless of the set value. By doing so, in a predetermined state in which the design value of the pay-out rate is a predetermined value, it is possible to provide a stable game with no advantage/disadvantage depending on the set value.

In addition, the design value of the ball payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the ball payout rate is a predetermined value is higher as the set value is higher, such as set value 1<set value 2<...<set value 6. It may be configured to By doing so, the higher the set value is, the earlier the advantageous interval can be ended when the design value of the ball payout rate shifts to the predetermined value in one advantageous interval. It is possible to hasten the transition to a state where the acquisition expected value of value is high.

Further, the design value of the ball payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the ball payout rate is a predetermined value is higher than the lowest set value (set value 1 in this embodiment) and the highest set value (set value 1 in this embodiment). may be configured to be lower than the set value 6). By constructing in this manner, even if the game is not won in a predetermined lottery during AT1 of one advantageous section, the game is continued, aiming at a predetermined state in which the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value. It is possible to increase the significance of the game and not to impair the significance of playing the game with the highest set value.

<Control corresponding to power off while various switches are pressed according to the present embodiment>
The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has ended, 3-bet has not been made (including situations where automatic betting has not been made), and a credit amount equal to or greater than the 3-bet amount is stored ( For example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is placed, or the number of credits is 2 or more when 1 bet is placed. ) When the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are off).

Note that not only when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, but also when the front panel PS2 is in the open state, it is after the end of the game and no 3-bet has been made (situation where no automatic bet has been made). ), and a credit number greater than or equal to 3 bets is stored (for example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is made, or 2 or more when 1 bet is made). Under the circumstances, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit ( The 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, and the 3-bed lamp are turned off before the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is in a closed state, but the same behavior may be performed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. .

In addition, the MAX bet possible state includes a situation where no bet is made, a situation where one bet is made, and a situation where two bets are made. When the lamp is newly lit, it is a state where no bet is placed, that is, when the maximum bet is possible. 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are lit, and in the MAX bed possible state, which is a situation where 2 bed lamps are already lit, the 3 bed lamp is newly lit in the situation where the 1 bed lamp and 2 bed lamp are already lit It has become.

In addition, in the MAX bet possible state, the MAX bet lamp is lit to inform the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is on in the MAX bet possible state (when the sensor for detecting the MAX bet switch 18 turns from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp is extinguished. In other words, even while the MAX bed switch 18 is being pressed (the state in which the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 remains ON), the MAX bed lamp lights out.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, releases the MAX bet switch 18 that has been pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 turns from ON to OFF), By pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), it is possible to place a MAX bet (perform a MAX bet process).

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is turned on, the MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed). (When the sensor for detecting the 1-bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if there is a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18), the MAX bed lamp The lighting mode of indicates that the bet processing is possible, and suggests that the 1-bet switch 19 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bed lamp may or may not be on after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, it suggests that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the 3 bet state becomes the 1 bet state, and credits The difference "2" is returned (if the number of credits is 50 in the 3-bet state, the difference cannot be returned to credits, so even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet state does not occur and 3 In order to maintain the bed state, the MAX bed lamp does not light up (turns off) after the power is turned on). When the MAX bet lamp is turned off after the power is turned on, it is possible to suggest that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, even if the MAX bet lamp is on or off after the power is turned on, a 3 bet sound (1 bet sound for 3 times) is output when the power is turned on to inform that the MAX bet process has been executed. It becomes possible to

Subsequently, when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated (depressed) in the MAX-bet possible state (situation where no bet is placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1-bet lamp lights up. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bed lamp is also lit.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and If the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1-bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the 1-bet process is completed. It is no longer running. Further, since the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed, a new 1-bet process by pressing the 1-bet switch 19 cannot be performed.

As a result, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1-bet switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where a hand is placed on the 1-bet switch 19), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to notify that the bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, and to suggest that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. ing. For this reason, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, releases the pressed 1 bet switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF). After becoming), press the 1 bed switch 19 again, or without releasing the pressed 1 bed switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bed switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), 1 bet processing or MAX bet processing can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and When the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the 1 bet process is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is newly activated By operating (pressing), the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1 bed switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the 1 bed switch 19), the MAX bed lamp The lighting mode of indicates that bet processing is possible, and suggests that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the maximum bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed. 1-bet process may be executed when the power-off recovery process is executed). In this case, the MAX bet lamp lights up after the power is turned on, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Further, by outputting a 1-bet sound when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1-bet process has been executed.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but under the condition that the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, a new 1 bet switch 19 can be operated (depressed) to execute the 1-bet process. In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet processing is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is released and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed) again. Thus, the MAX bet process can be executed. In this case, even if the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, the 1-bet sound and the 3-bet sound are not output. Alternatively, the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed, and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, so that a 3-bet is made and the front panel PS2 is open. Below, when the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel rotates, but the start sound may not be output.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is turned on, the MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is open, by enabling the 1-bet processing by the 1-bet switch 19, the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, setting confirmation and administrator menu , etc.), it is possible to check whether or not the 1-bet process can be performed normally. In games at amusement arcades, it is not normal to play a game with the front panel PS2 open. Become.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp is not lit, the MAX bet process is not executed, and even if the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1-bet process is not executed. When the front panel PS2 is closed (closed is detected) while the MAX bed switch 18 is being operated (pressed down), the MAX bed lamp lights up, and when the 1 bed switch 19 is newly operated (pressed down) A mode in which 1-bet processing is possible may also be possible.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, the player can be made to recognize that the game cannot proceed. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 continues, by validating the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible. It becomes possible to

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage drops below the threshold value and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet process and the 1 bet process are not executed. Further, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is being continuously pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed. Similarly, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, When the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (when power-off recovery processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and 1-bet processing are not executed. When the 1-bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, and the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (depressed), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the 1 bed switch 19 are unintentionally operated (the situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the 1 bed switch 19 etc.), and even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. can be done. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, the game can be progressed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been made (replay is not activated), and normal effects are being displayed (states other than continuous effects and AT effects) or demo When the sub-switch 20 is operated (depressed) (when the sensor that detects the sub-switch 20 changes from OFF to ON) while the screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), the menu screen is displayed. is executed, and a menu screen is displayed on the display device 32 .

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. When the sub-switch 20 sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed, the sub-switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed.

As a result, for example, even if the sub-switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as when a hand is placed on the sub-switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power failure, the unintended menu screen is displayed. Instead of displaying the sub-switch lamp, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid releases the depressed sub-switch 20 (after the sensor of the sub-switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then the sub-switch is activated again. By pressing 20 (by turning the sensor of the sub switch 20 from OFF to ON), display processing of the menu screen can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. In this case (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the sub-switch lamp may be lit and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20, etc.) It is possible to prevent unintentional bets and display of the menu screen even if there is a bet, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp lights up to indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective. In addition, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp informs that the menu screen display process is possible, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is turned on, the MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp may be turned on and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested. In this case, even after the menu screen is displayed, the MAX bet lamp continues to light up to notify that the MAX bet process can be executed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been placed (replay is not activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as the "adjustable state"). Then, when the settlement switch is operated (depressed), the settlement process is executed, and the medals stored in the credit are paid out to the receiving tray 28 .

In addition, in the settlement possible state, when the power supply is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the game machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the settlement is made. When the power is turned on while the switch is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the settlement switch is ON), the MAX bed lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed. Further, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is pushed while the settlement switch is being pushed, the MAX bet processing is not executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since it is possible to notify that medals remain in credits by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet process is executed. good.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bet switch is effective, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered as much as possible, thereby not reducing the interest in the game.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the MAX bed lamp may be turned on and the settlement process may be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on before the opening of the amusement arcade, if the power is turned on while the checkout switch is being operated (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the power is turned on. Since the settlement process can be executed immediately after the opening, the work of turning on the power before opening the store and the work of settlement of the medals remaining in the credit can be simplified.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 is lit and the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not. (The menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, for example, even if the settlement switch is operated unintentionally when the power is turned on after a power failure, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the subswitch 20, and the game history can be confirmed and the volume can be checked on the menu screen. It is possible to view and change information useful for the game, such as adjustments. Also, by validating all the operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all the games other than the payment can be executed. The settlement process is used only at the end of the game, and adjusting the number of inserted medals without executing the settlement process does not put the player at a disadvantage, thus hindering the progress of the game as much as possible. It is possible to run without

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible and the settlement is possible, power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and settlement processing are not executed. there is Also, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is being pressed down, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed, and the MAX bet switch is activated. When the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, and the settlement switch is newly operated (depressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, settlement processing can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, there is a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch are unintentionally operated (a situation where a hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch, etc.). However, it is possible to prevent being betted and to prevent settlement processing. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify that there are medals remaining in the credit and that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective, by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp.

When the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, the game has been completed, and 3 bets have been made (including the case where replay is in operation) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotatable state), the start switch 12 is turned on. When operated (depressed), reel rotation processing is executed, and each reel rotates. It should be noted that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum game time has passed.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp lights up, but none of the reels rotate.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from using the bet game medium unintentionally, and even in such a case, the start lamp indicates that the operation of the start switch 12 is effective. can be accurately notified by the lighting mode.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light and none of the reels may rotate. In such a case, when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off), the start lamp may be turned on.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the game medium that has been bet. It is possible for the player to recognize that the reels do not rotate until the operation is finished, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp lights up, indicating that the operation of the start switch 12 is valid. can be reported accurately.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed) may be a mode in which all the reels rotate.

As a result, the start switch 12 is operated until the power supply is cut off in the reel rotatable state and the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold, and then the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, When the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is being operated (when the power-off recovery process is executed), all the reels rotate after the power is turned on. Even if the start switch 12 is operated at appropriate timing, the game can be progressed (all reels are rotated), and the labor of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, all the reels are rotating, and the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as a reel stop possible state), the stop switch 13 is operated. When (pressed down) (when one of the sensors for detecting the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stop control processing is executed, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 is stopped. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to the state in which all the reels are rotating, and the state in which any one reel is rotating can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state.

In the reel stoppable state, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is effective. It has a lighting mode that indicates that the constituting LED is invalid.

Here, the unstoppable state of the reel is a state in which the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reel is rotating (during detection of rotation failure or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated). or when the reels are not rotating (such as when all the reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated while the left reel is stopped).

Further, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is enabled is a mode of lighting in white or a mode of lighting in a color such as red, and the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is disabled. The lighting mode indicating is a mode of lighting in a lighting color (for example, blue or the like) different from a lighting color indicating that it is not lit (extinguished) or effective.

In addition, in the state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the left stop switch 13a sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Further, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation, and after a power failure occurs in the left reel stop possible state, the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on. Even so, since the rotation of the left reel is not stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing a small winning combination that requires eye pressing. Also, to prevent the operation of the stop switch 13 from being accepted in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order when an internal lottery result (so-called pressing order role) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player stops depending on the pressing order is won. is also possible.

In addition, in the state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process may be executed for the left reel. In this case also, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is pressed during the time when the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold when the power supply is interrupted during a game, and the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on. When the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on. Even if the stop switch 13 is pressed at a certain timing, the game can be progressed (the corresponding reel is stopped), and the effort of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved. When stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 pressed after the power is turned on, the reel is stopped even if the reel is accelerating, thereby bringing the player closer to the timing the player originally wanted to stop. becomes possible. However, if there are a plurality of stop switches 13 that are pressed after the power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control corresponding to power shutdown during slip control according to the present embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received, the reel is rotated from the reception position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control). The reel comes to a stop. If the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position. When it is determined that a minor winning combination has been won, medals are paid out based on the minor winning combination.

Therefore, in a game in which a small winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, the power cutoff process is executed during the slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped, and the power is turned off. Even if the symbols corresponding to the minor winning combination are not stopped on the effective line after the return, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning winning combination is determined to be stopped by the winning judgment processing after all the reels are stopped, and the stopped symbol combination is selected. The corresponding medals are paid out.

This is for the following reasons. In other words, it has the effect of preventing the player from being unable to receive the payout of medals even though the player performs the stop operation at the timing of receiving the payout of the medals. There was also the problem of not being able to recognize it. In order to solve this problem, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing at which the symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination can be stopped, the slip control is performed (from the stop acceptance to the slippage). (until control ends), the reel is rotated after the power is restored, the index is detected, the reel is rotated to the stop position based on the detected index information, and then stopped at the stop position. and then pay out the medals.

With this configuration, even if the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the player can determine which symbol combination has been stopped by rotating it to the stop position where it was scheduled to stop again after the power is restored. Since it is possible to visually recognize it, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, even if the same pattern exists while the power is turned off during the slip control, and the index is detected in the re-rotation process after the power is restored, and it moves to the planned stop position, it will not be possible. stop position. If it stops at the same symbol before the planned stop position, there is a possibility that the stop display will not stop during the game, so it is necessary to determine whether the stop is prohibited or not. , is moved to a predetermined position in order to reduce the processing load during re-rotation processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in re-rotation processing after power recovery, acceleration processing and constant-speed processing are executed in the same manner as normal drum rotation start processing. It should be noted that acceleration processing and constant speed processing that are different from normal processing may be executed without being limited to this. For example, it is conceivable that the acceleration time is shortened, the acceleration time is lengthened, the speed of constant-speed rotation is slowed down, or the speed of constant-speed rotation is increased. By changing the acceleration mode or the constant speed mode in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotation is different from the normal one.

Also, if it rotates to the same position as the stop reception position while rotating at a constant speed during re-rotation, it will be considered that the stop operation has been received in the same way as normal rotation processing, and slip control will be performed, and the planned stop position will be performed. When the reel rotates up to , an all-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a 4-phase stepping motor, a 4-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotating reel.

In addition, the power is turned off during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, "re-rotating" is displayed on the liquid crystal so that the player can recognize that it is being re-rotated. Alternatively, it is possible to output a voice saying "Re-rotating", or display an error on an error indicator. This mode allows the player to recognize that the rotation is unusual.

Further, when the power-off process is executed during the slip control, a flag indicating that the slip control is not completed is stored in a predetermined storage area, and when the power is turned on, the predetermined storage area is checked and the flag is set. If so, execute re-rotation processing. The flag is initialized when the re-rotation processing is stopped as a result of executing the re-rotation processing, so that the re-rotation processing is not executed when the power is normally turned on. In addition, the flag relating to the fact that the slip control is not completed may be an error flag or a game state flag.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, re-rotation processing may be automatically executed after power is restored, or re-rotation processing may be performed after an error occurs after power is restored and is canceled by the reset switch. may be executed. Any aspect is applicable to the re-rotation processing of the subsequent embodiments.

Further, during the power-off process during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 180 as described above), the acceleration process is executed again. In this case, the rotation failure may be caused by the reel being held by hand, the motor being out of step due to malfunction, or the deterioration of the member over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and updating (counting) of the rotation failure detection counter is started along with the execution of the re-rotation process. After the index is first detected after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter is started again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after detecting the index for the first time in this way, the position of the reel stopped by the power-off processing is the position immediately after passing the index, and the stop position is the position immediately before passing the index. can stop up to the stop position without detecting rotation failure. In other words, although the reel rotates about two turns after the power is turned on until the reel stops, it is not determined that the rotation is defective.

Although the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is assumed to be when the power is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation failure detection counter is initialized when the rotation failure detection counter occurs.

In this way, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored. It is possible to stop at the stop position where it is. In addition, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not executed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and if an error (restorable error) is detected during re-rotation processing after power recovery, error notification is performed after the re-rotation processing is completed. Errors detected at this time include medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. there is In addition to the error code displayed on the acquired number display 27, the error notification can be performed in a liquid crystal notification mode, a speaker notification mode, an upper or both side production lamp, and a production switch lamp in a predetermined color (for example, , red, blue, and other highly visible colors). Note that the error notification may be performed by only one error notification, or may be performed by combining a plurality of error notifications.

In this way, by giving the error notification after the re-rotation process is finished, it is possible to make it easier for the player or the person concerned with the game hall to recognize whether the notification is during the re-rotation or the notification of the error. If the re-rotation notification is given during the re-rotation, the re-rotation notification is terminated after the re-rotation is completed, and the error notification is switched to. Note that error notification is not performed during re-rotation, and notification regarding re-rotation, which is not error notification, is not performed.

The error mode during the re-rotation process described above is not limited to this, and the error to be detected may be a partial error (for example, the hopper retention error is detected, but the medal retention error is not detected, etc.), and the error notification mode , after an error is detected, the obtained number display 27 notifies the error, and when the re-rotation process is completed and the reel stops, the error is notified by the liquid crystal or the speaker, or after the error detection, the obtained number display 27 and the liquid crystal. Alternatively, the error may be notified by a speaker.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during the slip control, and during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled, and even if the stop switch 13 is operated, it is supported. The reels are designed not to stop.

As a situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, power recovery after power loss during normal reel rotation is possible in addition to power recovery after power loss during slip control. When the power is restored after the power is turned off during normal rotation of the reels, the reels can be stopped, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is an effective mode. Therefore, when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reel is normally rotating by confirming the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13.例文帳に追加

In addition, as another situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is conceivable that the power is restored after the power is turned off during a freeze in which the reel rotates. As types of freeze in which the reels rotate, there are a pseudo game in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel performance in which the rotation of the reels does not stop even if the operation of the stop switch 13 is received.

During the pseudo-game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, and when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the pseudo-game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, so when the power is turned on. When the reels rotate, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reels are rotating normally by checking the lighting state of the lamp of the stop switch 13 .

The lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled during the reel performance, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the reel performance, so when the power is turned on. When the reels are rotating, it is not possible to determine whether the reel is being produced or is being re-rotated by the way the lamp of the stop switch 13 is turned on. It's becoming Even if the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch is in an invalid mode during the reel effect, if the operation of another main system switch (switch managed by the main control means 100) is to be validated, the other main system switch Since the lighting mode of the lamp is an effective mode, by checking the lighting mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is being performed or re-rotation processing is being performed.

Also, during the pseudo-game or during the power restoration after the power is turned off during the reel effect, it may be a mode that does not rotate the reels, in this case, since the reels do not rotate when the power is restored, it is possible to determine whether the re-rotation process is being performed. can be easily determined by the rotation mode of the reel.

Subsequently, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power restoration, rotation is performed until the index is detected after power restoration, and the index is scheduled again. Move to the stop position and stop. If the power is turned off immediately before the index is detected, and if the index is not detected during acceleration after the power is restored, the index cannot be detected and the index is rotated again until the index detection timing. I can say.

Since the re-spin process can be executed even when the power is restored after the power is cut off during the re-spin process, the stop symbol can be displayed to the player even in an unstable situation where the power is cut off several times. can be displayed.

Here, the power-off processing is executed during the slip control, and the power-off processing is executed again during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored. After detecting the index at .

<Pattern 1>
Power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. It is conceivable to rotate until the index is detected in the second re-rotation process, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, since the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference symbol position is not stored, the second re-rotation process determines that the reference symbol position is not stored and repeats Rotation is performed to detect the index, and it is possible to stop at the planned stop position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. including the timing at the moment when the sensor detects the index.The same applies hereinafter.), after the power is restored, up to the planned stop position based on the reference pattern position by the index detected before the power was turned off. A mode in which it is rotated and then stopped is conceivable.

In this case, since the index is detected in the first re-rotation process, it can be stopped at the planned stop position based on the stored reference symbol position. It is possible to shorten the time until restart.

In the pattern 2-1 described above, the power supply is turned off during the period from the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process to the rotation to the planned stop position and application of the brake (until the four-phase excitation is output). If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored Re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the power is restored for the second time regardless of the stop reception position received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing, power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the index is detected again later, and then it is rotated to the planned stop position and then stopped.

In this case, considering the possibility that the reel may have moved between the time the power was turned off and the time the power was restored, it will continue to rotate until the index is detected again, so it will reach the stop position more accurately. It is possible to rotate.

In the pattern 2-2 described above, after the index during the first re-rotation process is detected, until the brake is applied after rotating to the planned stop position (until the four-phase excitation is output), the power supply is turned off. If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored A re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the power is restored for the second time regardless of the stop reception position received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. If not, after the power is restored, the index is not detected again, and re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position, and the power is turned off during the slip control, and the power is turned off. During re-rotation processing after recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing and the rotation has reached the stop reception position, the index is detected again after power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the symbol is moved to the planned stop position by executing the re-rotation process for the purpose and then stopped.

In this way, since the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be finely controlled after the return of the reference power supply, it is possible to execute appropriate processes according to the situation in which the power-off process is executed.

<Control of effect mode using the effect switch according to the present embodiment>
An effect using the effect switch (sometimes referred to as a push button effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . FIG. 23 shows the operation of the start switch 12, the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, and the operation of the right stop switch 13c. It shows the process in which the performance is executed. In addition, the portion labeled "PUSH" in FIG. 23 represents a switch for effect (however, the "PUSH" indication on the upper side of the lower middle diagram in FIG. 23 is displayed on the liquid crystal).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 23, the start switch 12 for starting the game is operated (more specifically, reception of the start switch reception command or reception of the reel rotation start command from the main control means 100). The production "Win the rock-paper-scissors!" is displayed on the LCD. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper middle diagram of FIG. 23, based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a for stopping the left reel (more specifically, reception of the left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ja~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper right diagram of FIG. 23, it is executed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b for stopping the middle reel (more specifically, reception of the middle stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ke~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the lower left diagram of FIG. 23, it is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c for stopping the right reel (more specifically, reception of the right stop switch acceptance command from the main control means 100). The effect of "Pon!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the middle and lower diagrams of FIG. 23, the effect switch executed based on the fact that all the reels have stopped (more specifically, the reception of the all reel stop command from the main control means 100) is simulated. An image of the switch that has been pressed (hereinafter, may be referred to as an effect switch image, an operation promotion image, or an operation promotion effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, the effect "Pop!" displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is dimly displayed (lowered in brightness). Since the operation of the effect switch is valid at this time, the effect switch is lit. When the image is displayed dimly, the luminance may be lowered instead of the brightness, or the image may be superimposed with a semi-transparent gray color. In any case, it is possible to express that the visibility is lowered when the image is displayed dimly.

Subsequently, in the diagram on the lower right of FIG. 23, the image "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation response image or an operation response effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Since the operation of the effect switch is invalid at this time, the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 23, when the effect switch image is displayed on the liquid crystal as an effect to prompt the operation of the effect switch, the effect switch image is larger than the actual effect switch. make it By displaying in this manner, the effect switches can be effectively displayed on the liquid crystal display that the player is watching, and the player can intuitively be prompted to operate the effect switches.

In addition, in the effect switch image, an image representing the lighting mode of the effect switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) is also performed. When the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit (not blinking), and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a predetermined cycle. According to such a configuration, the effect switch image is repeatedly brightened and darkened, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous, and thus the operation of the effect switch can be effectively urged.

Also, when the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a specific cycle, and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle. It may be in the form of In this case, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out by making the predetermined period of the lighting state image shorter than the specific period of the effect switch lamp. In this case, the operation (pressing) of the effect switch is valid even at the timing when the effect switch lamp is turned off, and the effect switch is operated at this timing. , the state of dimly displayed "Pop!" The production is switched.

Also, even when the eco mode (also called power saving mode) is installed, the brightness of the effect switch when the effect switch is lit when executing the push button effect during the eco mode, The brightness of the switch for performance is made equal to the brightness of the switch for performance when lighting the switch for performance when the push button performance is executed when not in the eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively prompt the player to operate (press down) the effect switch. In addition, when the eco mode is set, the brightness of the upper or both side production lamps is reduced or turned off, or the brightness of the lower panel is reduced or turned off, compared to when the eco mode is not set. or turn off the brightness of the liquid crystal display.

It should be noted that even when the error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the upper or both sides production lamps or production switch lamps in a predetermined color (highly visible colors such as red or blue), the eco mode and the eco It is preferable to make the brightness of the upper or both side effect lamps and the effect switch lamps the same when not in the mode.

In addition, when displaying an image indicating turning off as a lighting mode image, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered and displayed, but the brightness is not lowered until it turns black, and the expression is such that it is slightly lit. do. On the other hand, when the production switch lamp is turned off, it is not lit. In this way, by differentiating the expression of the lighting state image from that of the effect switch lamp, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out. In addition, since the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch, the brightness of the lighting mode image of the effect switch image is not lowered until it becomes black, thereby reducing the difference in brightness with the surroundings. making it smaller. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce fatigue during the game while making the effect switch image stand out.

Also, when the effect switch image is displayed before the immediately preceding image as shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. The brightness of the previous image is made lower than the brightness. With such a configuration, even when the lightness of the effect switch image is the lowest, the lightness of the effect switch image is higher than that of the surrounding images, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous.

The lower middle diagram in FIG. 23 will be further described with reference to FIG. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a mode of change, an effect representing the initial position of the effect switch and the advance/retreat of the pressed position is expressed using the effect switch image.

The leftmost diagram in FIG. 24 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, the second diagram from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position, and the third diagram from the left. 4 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth figure from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position. In this way, by configuring the effect switch image to repeatedly show the state of the initial position and the state of the depressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch. .

The initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image is longer than the predetermined cycle representing lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. is configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out, and to prevent the user from being reminded of repeatedly pressing the effect switch. Many of the game machines currently on the market continuously change the performance by repeatedly hitting the performance switch, and if the change mode of the performance switch image is changed too quickly, there is a risk of mistaking it for the repeated hitting performance. , There is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced. For this reason, by making the period of change between the initial position and the depressed position longer than the period of the lighting mode, it is possible to intuitively express that the effect switch is not being repeatedly hit while making the user aware that the effect switch is being depressed. becomes.

In addition, in a situation where an effect of repeatedly hitting the effect switch is displayed, by shortening the cycle of changing between the initial position and the depressed position than the cycle of the lighting mode, the player is made to repeatedly hit the effect switch. can be expressed intuitively. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, but the switching cycle of the lighting mode image is set to be shorter than the cycle when the switch image for effect is operated once, although the position of the switch image for effect does not change. It may be an aspect.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may be changed between the initial position and the depressed position in a constant cycle. In this case, since the display area of the liquid crystal can be reduced, it is possible to display characters such as "Press the PUSH button" to the effect that the effect switch should be pressed instead.

When the switch for presentation is operated while the switch image for presentation for operating the switch for presentation is displayed on the liquid crystal, the switch image for presentation is deleted without any effect. In other words, if the effect switch is operated while the effect switch image is displayed, the effect switch image is immediately erased and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. . In this case, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. It may be configured to erase the effect switch image.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in what result is obtained by pressing the switch for presentation, and the information as to whether or not the switch for presentation has been pressed can be made conspicuous. It is possible to eliminate it.

Further, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the display of the effect switch image is continued and the effect switch is operated. When operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect, and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. At this time, as described above, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch, or may be executed after a predetermined period from immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. The effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process.

By executing the performance based on the depression of the performance switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, the progress of the game is not hindered even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened. becomes possible.

When the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal while the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting mode of the effect switch is the same as when the front panel PS2 is closed. , is configured to be different from the lighting mode of the effect switch when the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal. For example, when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, it lights up, while in the open state it blinks or turns off. It can be different. In addition, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, as shown in FIG. 28, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the effect switch image ( In order to improve the visibility of the effect switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the front panel PS2 is opened at a position where these images do not overlap each other. (You may also display an image showing that Furthermore, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "the door is open") may be output. It is also possible not to output the effect sound associated with the display of the switch image or the effect sound associated with the effect based on the depression of the effect switch. Thus, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even in the situation where the sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is being output, the effect sound associated with the display of the effect switch image or the effect sound based on the pressing of the effect switch is output. good too. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open without hindering the progress of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the front panel PS2 must be opened instead of the effect switch image. is displayed to invalidate the depression of the effect switch, and then the front panel PS2 is closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is erased, and the effect switch image is displayed again. . By displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open superimposed on the effect switch image, the effect switch image is made invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is closed after that, the front panel PS2 is open. It is also possible to erase the image indicating that the switch image for effect can be seen again. In this case as well, by changing the lighting mode of the effect switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened as described above, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

Further, in the case of executing an effect (success effect) meaning that a privilege is given to the player when the effect switch is operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect. In the case of executing an effect (failure effect) meaning that no privilege is given to the player when is operated, the switch image for effect may be erased along with the effect. Incidentally, the effect in the case of a failure effect may be a mode in which the effect switch image explodes or a mode in which the brightness of the effect switch image is maintained in the darkest state (a mode in which the brightness does not change periodically).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the failure performance is displayed as a result of operating the performance switch, thereby fostering a sense of satisfaction in the player and reducing interest in subsequent games. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, when displaying the effect switch image when all reels (all reels) are stopped, when the start switch 12 of the next game is operated, the image displayed when the effect switch is operated is not displayed. Display an image based on the operation of the . Furthermore, when displaying an image based on the operation of the start switch 12, the effect switch image is erased. At this time, the effect switch image is erased without any effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effect executed based on the operation of the start switch 12.例文帳に追加A player who skips the effect switch image by operating the start switch 12 is highly likely to know in advance that the degree of expectation is low, or is not interested in the effect itself using the effect switch, and there is no effect. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by erasing the game without deleting it.

In addition, when the effect switch is operated in a situation where the effect switch image is displayed and a successful effect is displayed, the time from acceptance of the effect switch operation until the effect switch image is erased, and the pressing order A time from acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 when the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated in a situation where the navigation image is displayed and a success performance is displayed until the pressing order navigation image is erased; , the time until the effect switch image is erased is longer.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the time until the reaction effect that is executed when various switches are operated, and it is possible to give different fun depending on the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. becomes. For example, if the push order fails, the profit is lost directly. With the push order navigation image, if the next information is immediately displayed, the player's interest can be heightened. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether the success effect will be displayed or the failure effect will be displayed.

When the effect switch doubles as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the effect switch lamp is lit after a certain period of time (for example, T1) has elapsed after all reels have stopped. The lighting mode of the effect switch lamp at this time is different from the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp when the effect is executed by operating the effect switch after all reels are stopped.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest whether the menu screen is displayed or whether the success or failure effect is displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. .

In addition, when the effect switch image is displayed as shown in the lower middle figure of FIG. The lighting mode is not the lighting mode when the menu screen is displayed, but the lighting mode corresponding to the effect switch image. Then, when the performance switch operation is received after T1 has elapsed after all the reels are stopped, the performance switch image is erased, the success or failure performance is executed, and the performance switch lamp is kept turned off. Then, even when T1 has passed since receiving the operation of the switch for presentation, the switch lamp for presentation is kept off, and even if the switch for presentation is operated, the menu screen is not displayed. Furthermore, even when T2 for the demonstration screen to be displayed has passed after all reels are stopped, the demonstration screen is not displayed and the sound volume is lowered, and the effect switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch or the game is executed until after the next game (after the end of the game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), after all reels are stopped The menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed, and the demonstration screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed after all reels have stopped.

With this configuration, when the effect switch is operated in the game in which the effect switch image is displayed, the player wonders whether the menu screen will be displayed or the success or failure effect will be displayed. It becomes possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game because it is no longer necessary. In addition, it may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed even after the settlement process is executed. It is possible to maintain the expectation until whether or not is executed.

Further, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a lighting mode capable of displaying the menu screen, the effect switch image is not displayed on the liquid crystal. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can be confirmed only by the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the state that the menu screen can be displayed, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, by only the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. Compared to , it is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation of the effect switch will cause a sense of anticipation, and the menu screen is displayed even though the player has operated the effect switch with a sense of expectation. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by putting it away.

In addition, on the demo screen where the player can easily recognize that the game is not progressing, the effect switch image is displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. good too. In this case, the player is unlikely to be confused with the push button effect, and the menu screen display can be effectively displayed to the player. This means that the timing of displaying the menu screen is most often when starting a game, and since the game is not being played at that timing, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed. It is based on

As for the display position of the effect switch image, during the push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and during the demo screen, the edge of the liquid crystal (for example, as shown in FIG. (e.g., in an inconspicuous position). Further, as described above, the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during the push button effect. In other words, it can be said that at least one of the display area and the size is different between the effect switch image in the demo screen and the effect image during the push button effect. Furthermore, it is preferable that the display modes of the effect switch image during the push button effect and the effect switch image in the demo screen are different (for example, the effect switch image during the push effect repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle). display in a blinking mode, and the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode, etc.). As a result, the player can intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the player wants to press the performance switch as part of the performance and a situation in which the performance switch may be pressed.

As shown in FIG. 30, the effect switch image in the demo screen may be in the form of playing a telop such as "PUSH to display menu".

The timing at which the push button effect is executed is after all reels are stopped, but it may be after receiving the start switch 12. - 特許庁When the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or even after all reels are stopped. The display of the effect switch image may be maintained. When the display of the effect switch image is maintained after all reels are stopped, the effective period of the operation of the effect switch is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, the success or failure effect is executed. It should be noted that if the effect switch has not been operated due to either the elapse of the time for shifting to the demo screen, the execution of the settlement process, the execution of the betting process, or the start of the next game. Also, the effect switch image is erased.

Further, whether or not the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on the reception of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, and timer interrupt processing. etc., the counter value is decremented at predetermined intervals, and when the counter value reaches 0, the operation of the effect switch is enabled (the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch). ). At this time, the effect switch image is also rendered after a period corresponding to a predetermined timer value elapses after receiving a predetermined command. Due to a delay in communication with the board, etc., the effect switch may become effective before the effect switch image is displayed. Thus, even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed, the response effect can be executed.

<Description of Winning Effect, Settlement Effect and Throwing Effect Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the throwing effect applicable to the present embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to the present embodiment described below, a prize-winning effect associated with a game medal payout process based on winning a small winning combination such as a winning hand, a settlement effect associated with a settlement process, and an insertion effect associated with a bet operation. By enabling both outputs at the same time, it prevents erroneous recognition that settlement was not performed normally, input was not performed normally, etc., and the player recognizes that the gaming machine is functioning normally. It is intended to

Configurations related to the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the throwing effect applicable to the present embodiment will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment and the like, but the details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be described below.

<Process when game medals are inserted>
If game medals can be inserted, and if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit, a bet setting (also referred to as a bet) is made for the number of inserted game medals, and the upper limit is set. If it is set to , the number of sheets put into the credit is added. In addition, if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit and the number of bets that can be set is stored in the credit, the bet is set according to the operation of the bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). . Here, the insertion of game medals means that the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 normally pass through the medal selector 34 .
Before starting a game with game medals set to bet or stored in credits (after setting the required number of bets and before operating the start lever), the settlement switch is operated. After that, the settlement process is possible.
In addition, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control means (sub control board 1000, also referred to as effect control means) when game medals are inserted, and when the bet switch is operated It transmits to the sub-control means a reserve insertion command corresponding to the number of bets set. When the credit is stored (added) to the credit, the main control means transmits a stored number command indicating the current stored number to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means is capable of executing a throwing effect such as outputting a game medal throwing sound.

<Winning process (payout process)>
Winning processing (hereinafter also referred to as payout processing) pays out predetermined game medals according to the winning small winning combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination processing that a small winning combination has won. processing. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting payout based on winning (whether adding credits or paying out from hopper 44), and ends payout based on winning. When doing so, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound and executing a back lamp effect (also referred to as a BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize again, the information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Payment processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while the game is not being played, the game medals corresponding to the number of bets set and the number of accumulated credits are paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement). Execute. When the settlement process is started, the main control means transmits a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process ends, the main control means transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means can execute settlement performance such as output of settlement sound based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, such as execution of effects based on the result of lottery of the role (result of internal lottery), execution of push order navigation effect during AT, insertion effect, A winning effect, a settlement effect, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This is an effect executed when game medals are inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command and a stored insertion command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, any one of the accumulation insertion command (1 sheet), the accumulation insertion command (2 sheets), and the accumulation insertion command (3 sheets) is set as the accumulation insertion command according to the number of bets set. The command to put in the storage is transmitted to the sub-control means. When a stored insert command (one coin) is received, an insert sound A indicating that one coin has been bet is output once (for example, a sound of da) is output to inform the player that one coin has been bet. . When the stored insertion command (three coins) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to inform the player that three coins have been bet. When the medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medals are set to bet, the insertion sound A is output once, and if the inserted game medals are stored, the insertion sound B is output once to indicate that one medal has been stored. (For example, outputting a sound of d) to inform the player of the bet or accumulation.
In addition, when receiving the stock insertion command (three coins), instead of outputting the insertion sound A three times, an insertion sound C indicating that three coins have been bet may be output. , the same sound as when stored (for example, the input sound A may be output in all states). Also, different sounds (on-on sound D) may be output during normal times (during non-AT) and during AT.

<Prize-winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command. executed.

<Output sound>
The game medal payout sounds output during execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound B, which are different sounds. The payout sound A is a payout sound output when the winning combination is won in the normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. A payout sound B is a payout sound output when an advantageous payout is made by stopping the combination of correct symbols as a result of winning a winning combination in the pushing order during AT and operating in the correct pushing order. If the operation is not performed in the correct pressing order, the incorrect combination of symbols may be stopped and a disadvantageous payout may be performed. In this case, the payout sound is not output. The payout sound A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of the first sound (for example, the sound of duo) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, the first specific time ( For example, for 1 second), the first sound is repeatedly output and then terminated. The payout sound A is a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed). By outputting the sound over the period of time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound over the first payout sound period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the game is played as if the payout is being performed during the period when the payout sound is output. As a result, it can be expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed by making the player aware of it, and as a result, when the effect according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it will be easier to execute without being canceled in the middle. .

The payout sound B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of the second sound (for example, the sound of de) until the payout end command is received, and after that, the second specific time ( For example, it is a payout sound that repeats the output of the second sound for 2 seconds and ends. That is, the payout sound B is output for a second payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the actual payout period. is performed, and this second sound-play period is longer than the first sound-play period of the sound-play A. In this way, the payout sound B is output for a longer period than the payout sound A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. Further, by outputting the payout sound B different from the payout sound A during the AT, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the player is in an advantageous state different from the normal state.
Although the payout sound is output until the first specific time or the second specific time elapses after receiving the payout end command, when the payout start command is received, the payout start and payout end are not triggered by the payout end command. The payout sound may be output for a period of time obtained by adding the first specific time or the second specific time to the time required to complete the payout (the longer one of credit addition and game medal payout). In addition, although the normal payout sound A and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp performance includes a back lamp performance A and a back lamp performance B which are different from each other. Back lamp production A is a back lamp production that is output when the winning order is won at normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. be. The back lamp performance B is a back ramp performance executed when a winning combination is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct order, the wrong symbol combination may stop, but in that case, the back lamp effect is not executed. The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in the first pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a first specific time ( For example, for 1 second), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off according to the first pattern. The back lamp performance A is executed over a first back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed. , the player can easily recognize that the payout is being performed. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for the first back lamp effect period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the payout is performed during the period during which the back lamp effect A is performed. It can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize it as if it is being played. Easier to execute without being cancelled.

The back lamp effect B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in the second pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a second specific time ( For example, for 2 seconds), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off according to the second pattern. That is, the back lamp effect B is illuminated over a second back lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed. , are repeatedly extinguished, and the second back lamp effect period is longer than the first back lamp effect period. In this way, the back lamp effect B is executed for a longer period of time than the back lamp effect A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by executing the back lamp effect B different from the back lamp effect A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in an advantageous state different from the normal one.

The back lamp effect was executed until the first specific time or the second specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command. The back lamp effect may be executed for a period of time obtained by adding the first specific time or the second specific time to the time required for completion (the longer one of the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). Also, although the back lamp effect is different between normal time and AT, the same back lamp effect may be executed. Also, although the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of turning on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp presentation. In addition, both the "first back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect A and the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A add the first specific time to the actual payout time. Although both are the same period, the "first back lamp effect period" and the "first payout sound period" may be different periods. Regarding this, the relationship between the "second back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect B and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sound B is the same. In short, the "first payout sound period" and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sounds A and B, the "first backlamp effect period" and the "second backlamp effect" of the back lamp effects A and B "period" is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period", "first back lamp effect period" < "second payout sound period" 2 back lamp production period", these periods can be set as appropriate.

<Payment performance>
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled. It is executed based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, and the output of the settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and the settlement. A voice is output to the effect that the processing has ended. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and until the payment end command is received, a sound different from the payment sound (for example, a sound of do) is repeatedly output, and when the payment end command is received, after that, a third specific period For example, in 5 seconds), a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, such as "The payment has been completed," is output, and the process ends. That is, in the settlement effect, the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the settlement process is performed) is longer than the predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned third specific time period).

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. FIG. FIG. 31 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, FIG. 32 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and FIG. FIG. 34 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch after the completion of the payout process, FIG. 34 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the completion of the settlement process, and FIG. 35 is a time chart after the completion of the settlement process. It is a time chart in the case of throwing in. In FIGS. 31 to 35, ON and OFF are used for convenience of description, but the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, payout processing / settlement processing / BL effect / settlement effect, ON indicates a state of execution, OFF indicates a state of non-execution, and when it changes from OFF to ON, processing etc. are started and ON to OFF, it means that the process ends. With respect to the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates a state of output, and OFF indicates a state of non-output. The MAX bet lamp/medal insertable lamp ON indicates a lighting state, and OFF indicates a lighting state. The MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. Regarding medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medals have passed through the medal selector 34 (an insertion sensor provided in the medal selector 34 detects the game medals), and OFF indicates that the game medals have not been inserted. .

<When the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 31, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means generates payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) based on the received payout start command. Output and back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is started. At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as the winning effect for the period T1 (first specific time). After the payout process is completed at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . At the timing of time t2, the main control means lights the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since the MAX bed switch was not operated, the MAX bed lamp continues to light up. At the timing of time t5, since the period T1 has passed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A and back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to time t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, at the timing after time t1, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, and turning on the MAX bed lamp. By continuing the output of the sound A, the player can be made to recognize that the payout has been made and can be made to appropriately recognize that the bet can be set by the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the game machine. be able to.

<When the input operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 32, until the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4 (During the T2 period) As an effect for throwing-in, a throw-in sound A (referred to as throw-in sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as outputting the dispensing sound A and outputting the input sound A are combined, thereby enabling smooth control. While making the player aware of this, it is possible to make the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At the time t3, the output of the payout sound A continues, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the bet setting is performed visually while the player recognizes that the payout has been made by the sound. can recognize that In addition, in FIG. 32, the insertion operation with the MAX bet switch was explained, but the insertion sound is similarly output even if the insertion operation with the 1 bet switch and medal insertion are performed.

<When the settlement operation is performed with the settlement button after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 33, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the adjustment button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. be. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bed lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over a T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output at the same time, the player will be confused. By ending the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, the player can be made to accurately recognize that the settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 34, the main control means starts settlement processing at the timing of time t8, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) at the time of settlement, and the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At the timing of time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over the T3 period. After the settlement process is completed at the timing of time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker so that game medals can be inserted. At the timing of time t10, the main control means lights the medal insertion enable lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted after that, the lighted state is continued. At the time T13, the T3 period has passed since the time t9, so the sub-control means stops outputting the voice indicating that the payment has been completed. As described above, at the timing after time t10, the settlement effect is being executed, but the state is such that medals can be inserted.

<When game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 35, until the timing of time t10, the operation is the same as when game medals are not inserted after the end of the settlement process. Setting is performed, and a medal insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs the throwing sound A once as a throwing performance based on the reception of the medal throwing command, and the output is performed from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. At the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the input sound A while outputting a voice indicating that the payment has been completed. While making the player aware that the game has ended, it is possible to make the player aware that medals have been inserted and bets have been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 31 to 35, an example has been described in which the payout sound is the payout sound A and the BL effect is the back lamp effect A. In these FIGS. 31 to 35, the payout sound is the payout sound B. , the BL effect may be the back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the period T1 in FIGS. 31 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<Change in mode>
While the payout process and settlement process are being performed, the same sound is repeatedly output during the period until the end. A command indicating that one card has been paid out and a command that can identify the remaining number of cards to be paid out are sent to the sub control means, and one card is paid out based on the receipt of these commands sent from the main control means. A payout sound or a settlement sound may be output every time.
Also, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. If the same sound is used, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the back lamp effect. It can make you aware of what is going on.
Also, the settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case also, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity.
In addition, although the payout sound B is output during the AT, in addition to the output of the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound indicating the correct pressing order such as "get" or "yes" is output from the start of the payout process. It may be output in a shorter time than the second specific time (2 seconds) after the process is completed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct pressing order, it is possible to recognize that the stop switch has been correctly operated, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct pressing order, game medals can be earned. The player can recognize that the payout has been properly made.
Also, the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means. , the light may be turned off.

In addition, although it has been explained that the input sound is output as the input effect, in addition to the output of the input sound, an image indicating the input is displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for effect is used to indicate that the input has been performed. Notification may be made.
In addition, as the winning effect, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed. You may notify that you have won a prize. At that time, when executing the throwing effect, the display of the display device 32 as the winning effect may be ended, the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, the display of the display device 32 as the throwing effect, the LED lamp may not be performed.
In addition, as the effect of settlement, output of settlement sound and output of voice indicating that the settlement has been completed are performed. Alternatively, an LED lamp for presentation may be used to notify that the payment is being made. At that time, when executing the input effect, the display of the display device 32 as the settlement effect may be ended, or the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, or the display of the display device 32 as the input effect, the LED Notification by the lamp may not be executed.
In addition, although the prize-winning effect is executed for the pushing order role, the prize-winning effect may be executed for other minor roles (watermelon role, bell role regardless of pushing order, cherry role, etc.). By outputting a payout sound different from that of the winning combination and performing a back lamp performance different from that of the winning combination in the other small combination, it is possible to easily recognize that a winning combination different from that of the winning combination has been won.
Also, the time and the length of the period in this embodiment are examples, and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of Errors and Winning Effect Related to Hopper 44 Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between an error related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and a winning effect will be described.

In the effect applicable to the present embodiment described below, even if a hopper empty error occurs when the winning effect accompanying the start of the payout process or the effect after the reel stops, the game The purpose is to make the player recognize the result of the game, the result of the performance, etc.

Errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and configurations related to the winning effect will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the description of the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the input effect applicable to the present embodiment and the present embodiment, but the details of the process are omitted from the description of the present embodiment. is explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination process that the minor combination has won. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. In order to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and rotates the turntable to collect one game medal. When the game medals are discharged one by one and the payout sensor detects the game medals for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Further, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on winning (whether credit addition or payout from the hopper 44). Then, when ending, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as display of the number of payouts and display of the cumulative difference number. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize again, the information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Error regarding Hopper 44>
As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error when it is determined that game medals are stuck in the payout port of the hopper 44 when the game medals are paid out, and the hopper empty error is an error when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty. The abnormality detection error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the dispensing sensor of the hopper 44 .
When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, the main control means transmits an error notification start command including error type information to the sub control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is cleared. The sub control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32 based on the error notification start command, terminates the error screen display based on the error recovery command, and reports the occurrence of an error. Return to the previous display.
Further, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing of detecting an abnormality detection error, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality detection has occurred based on the error detection command.

<Hopper Retention Error>
When the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44, a driving signal is input to the hopper motor, and the game medals are paid out by rotating the rotating disk. It is determined that it is clogged and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are to be paid out from the hopper 44, even if a driving signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medals are paid out by rotating the rotating disk, the game medals are not detected by the payout sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds). If not, it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Anomaly detection error>
When the game medals are not paid out, if the payout sensor detects for a predetermined time (3 ms) or more, it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. Error display is performed in a state in which no game is played (waiting for insertion of game medals, waiting for reception of start lever).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the lottery result of the role (result of internal lottery), error notification can be executed, and during AT, the push order navigation effect can be performed. Execution, prize-winning effect, result screen display, result notification effect, etc. are executed.

<Prize-winning performance>
This is an effect executed when the game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect indicating that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out and an indication that the game medals acquired by the player accumulate to a predetermined number. and a cumulative display effect. Acquisition display effect and accumulated display effect are executed based on the receipt of the payout start command by the sub control means.

<Acquisition display effect>
Acquisition display performance is a performance executed when a winning combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. As a form of the acquisition display effect, "GET" may be displayed without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or "12 GET" may be displayed so as to specify that 12 game medals are to be paid out. may be displayed. As a result of winning the pushing order role during AT and not operating in the correct pushing order, the incorrect symbol combination is stopped and a disadvantageous payout (payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination, such as one payout) is performed. However, in that case, the acquisition display effect is not executed.
Acquisition display effect is started when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display effect period (1 second) shorter than the period during which actual payout is performed (period during which payout processing is performed). . Therefore, it is executed even if not all the game medals actually paid out to the player have been paid out. This is to prevent the effect from being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display effect is executed after all the coins have been paid out. Also, by executing the acquisition display effect even if all the game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the game (that the payout is obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds each specified number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000) for the first time. It is a production that Specifically, during one AT, the accumulated number of acquired sheets is counted from the start of the AT, and when it can be determined that the accumulated number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). be. After that, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As a form of the cumulative display effect, a message such as "500 sheets GET" is displayed according to the specified number.
Cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it can be determined that the cumulative number exceeds the specified number due to the payout, and the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed) is shorter. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second). Similar to the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. When the accumulated display effect is actually executed at the timing when the specified number is actually exceeded, the timing of executing the accumulated display effect varies, the effect is canceled when the next game starts, and it prevents confusion with the result of the next game. Because. Also, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number is not exceeded, the player can be made aware of the game result (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
Note that the acquired display effect and the cumulative display effect may be executed in one game, but in the present embodiment, the acquired display effect is basically executed in the game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed. Instead, only cumulative display effect is executed. However, unlike the principle, the case of executing the acquisition display effect will be described later.

<Display of result screen>
The result screen displayed in the present embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and is a screen that displays the total number of game medals obtained during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, and the like. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (a display to prevent immersion) is also displayed. When the final game of AT ends (all reels stop command is received), the display of the result screen is started, and the display of the result screen is continued until the next game is started. It should be noted that while the result screen is being displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any specified number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, as a result of winning the push order role and operating in the correct push order, the combination of correct symbols is stopped, an advantageous payout is performed, and if the specified number exceeds 500, the cumulative display effect is not performed if the final game is not played. However, since the result screen is displayed in the final game, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect. This is because the total number of game medals acquired during AT is displayed on the result screen, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be superimposed and the player will be confused.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is a effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect. Specifically, in order to notify the player whether or not a favorable result for the player has been obtained, such as a bonus win, an additional win such as the number of remaining AT games, or a special zone win that increases the chance of winning. As an example, it is notified whether or not an advantageous result has been obtained in a battle effect or the like. If a favorable result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if a favorable result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, when the lever is operated, a screen is displayed in which allied characters and enemy characters face each other, and after all reels have stopped (by receiving a command to stop all reels), allied characters and enemy characters compete. An image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed after the production branch timing after a certain period of time has passed. The effect branch timing is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result announcement effect ends at the timing when the image indicating success or victory or the image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. It is 3 seconds after the start. As a result, the result notification presentation ends before the hopper empty error occurs (detects) and the error screen is displayed, and the player can confirm whether or not there is an advantageous result regardless of the occurrence of the error. Since the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are transmitted at approximately the same timing, the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all the reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36 to 41. FIG. FIG. 36 is a time chart when the payout is normally performed, FIG. 37 is a time chart when the payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 38 is a time chart when the payout is normally performed 39 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed (when a hopper retention error occurs), FIG. 39 is an example of a display screen when dispensing is normally performed, and FIG. 40 is a screen when dispensing is performed normally. FIG. 41 is an example of the display screen when there is no hopper empty error (when the hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 41 is an example of the display screen when the dispensing is not performed normally (when the hopper retention error occurs).
Although ON and OFF are used in FIGS. 36 to 38 for convenience of explanation, the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout process indicates a state of execution, OFF indicates a state of non-execution, and when it changes from OFF to ON, the process starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it ends. . ON of payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON of the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect is finished and the display is stopped on the screen announcing the result). . ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. ON of the error display indicates a state in which an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates an error code display or an error screen display. is not performed.

39 to 41 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "12 cards GET" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figure is the cumulative display effect. It becomes the notation of "500 sheets GET" displayed.

The winning effect, the settlement effect and the throwing effect described above can be combined, and the times t0 and t1 in FIGS. 31 to 33 and the times t0 and t1 in FIG. 36 are the same timing. Time t5 in FIGS. 31 and 32 is later than time t1 in FIG. 36 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment was made normally>
As shown in FIG. 36, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t14 after one second, the sub-control means terminates the acquisition display effect or the accumulated display effect. After that, at the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds when normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). Acquisition display effect is started at the timing when the payout process is started, and ends at the timing before the payout process ends. As a result, the player can recognize that game medals have been obtained or that the cumulative number of game medals obtained exceeds a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Since the result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, it is already being executed at the timing of starting the payout process. At the timing of time t15, the result notification effect becomes the effect branching timing, and the display after this timing differs between the case of displaying an image indicating success or victory and the case of displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At the timing of time t16, the effect of notifying the result being executed ends. Time t15 is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out, and the turntable continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub control means displays an error screen. At the timings of other times t14, t15, and t16, similarly to FIG. The performance announcing the result ends. Hopper Empty Error occurs because the period for execution of Acquisition Display Effect and Cumulative Display Effect and the period until the end of result notification effect is set shorter than the period from the start of payout process to the occurrence of Hopper Empty Error. Then, it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect before the error screen is displayed.
The figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without even one coin being paid out after the start of the payout process. The timing at which the empty error occurs is a timing later than time t17 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 38, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed. At the timing of time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continued to detect for 201 ms or more from the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub control means displays the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect that was being executed. Cancel the result notification effect (end the display) and display the error screen. Since the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the payout process start timing, it is executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs, so the acquisition display is performed before the error screen is displayed It is possible to confirm the contents of the effects and cumulative display effects.
In addition, in the same figure, it shows a case where not even one coin is paid out after the start of the payout process and a hopper retention error occurs. The timing at which the retention error occurs is later than time t18 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect are executed becomes longer.

Acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect cancel the execution of the effect itself and do not display it, but while the effect itself is being executed, the effect is displayed by overlapping the error screen with the effect. You may make it invisible. In this case, when the error is canceled during execution of the effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the timing of the cancellation. However, it is necessary to operate the reset switch to cancel the error, and since the reset switch is inside the housing, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than 3 seconds from the start of payout processing to the end of the result notification effect before canceling the error. Also, it does not return during execution of acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, and result notification effects, and returns on the screen after all effects are completed.

<Display screen when payout is performed normally>
FIG. 39 shows an example of a display screen when payout is normally performed. FIG. 39 shows a scene in which a battle effect (result notification effect) is executed in a game executed with 11 remaining AT games and a total of 230 game medals acquired. The number of remaining games is displayed on the upper left of the screen (Since the game was executed with 11 remaining games, 1 is subtracted and 10G (game) is displayed. On the upper right of the screen, the total number of game medals acquired by AT is 230. Allied characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

FIG. 4(a) shows the screen at the timing when all the reels are stopped during execution of the battle effect (receipt of all reel stop command), and the effect progresses after this timing to announce the result. FIG. 36(b) is the timing of time t0 in FIG. 36, which is a screen showing the timing at which the payout process is started. One game medal is paid out, and the total number of game medals is increased by one from 230 to 231. From the right side of the screen, the player can specify that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. display is moving toward the center. In the center of the screen, a competition between friendly characters and enemy characters has begun. FIG. 4(c) shows the timing when three game medals are paid out, and a large display of "12 game medals" is displayed in the center of the screen as an acquisition display effect so as to specify that 12 game medals are paid out. is being done. The competition between allied characters and enemy characters continues.

(d) of the same figure shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large display of "12 medals GET" displayed in the center of the screen moves towards the left side of the screen toward the end of the win display effect. moving. 36(e) is the timing of time t15 in FIG. 36, when the payout of the game medals is completed, and the effect branch timing is reached. Since the game medals have been paid out, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between friendly characters and enemy characters continues. FIG. 4(f) shows the process of displaying an image indicating success at the timing after the effect branching timing. The ally character is displayed enlarged from the competition between the ally character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be successful. (g) of FIG. 36 is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 36, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the production was successful. The image displayed in (g) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts. FIG. 4(h) shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure at the timing after the effect branching timing. The enemy character is displayed enlarged from the competition between the friendly character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be a failure. FIG. 36(i) is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 36, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and it is clearly displayed that it was a production indicating failure. The image displayed in (i) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 40 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper empty error occurs). 39A to 39I, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. FIG. 37(j) is the timing of time t17 in FIG. 37. Since game medals were not detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, a hopper empty error was set in the main control means, and , is the timing at which the error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed. The same image is displayed regardless of whether an image indicating success or an image indicating failure is displayed before the hopper empty error occurs.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 41 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper retention error occurs). 39A to 39C, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. FIG. 38(k) is the timing of time t18 in FIG. 38, when the hopper retention error is set in the main control means and the screen showing the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub control means. When the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detects for 201 ms or more after the start of payout processing, the main control means determines that game medals are jammed and sets a hopper retention error. When the hopper retention error is set, the main control means transmits a command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32 .

<Change in mode>
The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is a period (1 second) shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is normally executed, but it may be a longer period. Specifically, the period may be longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period until the hopper empty error is detected (3.5 seconds). By making the period longer than the period required when the payout process is executed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect.
In addition, although the period required when the payout process is normally executed is set to 1.5 seconds, it depends on the number of payout processes and whether the payout process includes only the addition of credits or the payout of game medals from the hopper. Different times may be required.
Also, only one of the acquired display effect and the accumulated display effect is executed, but when the conditions for executing both effects are satisfied, the accumulated display effect is executed after the acquired display effect is executed. may Acquisition display performance ends 1 second after the start of payout processing, and cumulative display performance is executed for 1 second thereafter, so that even if a hopper empty error occurs, the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display performance. .
In addition, the acquisition display effect is performed when the winning order is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is performed. However, it may also be executed when a winning combination other than the winning combination is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when

The acquisition display effect may have multiple types of modes when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, the color and font used when displaying "GET 12 cards" may be changed according to the state. More specifically, the colors and fonts are changed depending on whether or not it is easy to win the AT add-on, or the colors and fonts are changed during the sign that a continuous effect will occur or the move to the add-on special zone. . By making the mode of the acquisition display effect different, the player can be notified of the acquisition of game medals and can be made to expect that an advantageous situation may occur after the next game. Also, the color and font when displaying "12 cards" may be changed according to the setting values set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the game machine can be provided each time the acquisition display effect is executed.
Also, the cumulative display effect may be provided in a mode in which it can be displayed only when a specific set value is set, other than for each prescribed number. Specifically, when the set value "2", "4" or "6" is set and the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "246 GET" is displayed. When the number of cards exceeds 246, the cards may be displayed without fail, or may be displayed when a lottery is held and a prize is won. By suggesting settings based on the contents displayed in the cumulative display performance, it is possible not only to inform the player of the cumulative number but also to provide information for estimating the set value set in the game machine. When the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time only when the setting value "6" is set, "666 medals GET" may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each predetermined number, and the set values set in the gaming machine and the state may be suggested by the displayed display modes.

Acquisition display effect and accumulation display effect can be executed during AT, and even if the accumulated number of game medals exceeds a specified number only during the display of the result screen, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the accumulation display effect. , acquisition display effects, and accumulated display effects may not be executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, it is not necessary to execute the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect. Also, in the situation of the pseudo bonus executed during AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the accumulation display effect may be executed. In addition, during the preparation period before starting the AT, the AT start screen, the continuous effects executed during the AT, and the signs of the continuous effects, the acquired display effects and cumulative display effects must not be executed. good too. In an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous section, it is not necessary to execute the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect. To appropriately notify a player of necessary information by providing a case of execution and a case of non-execution according to a game state managed by a main control means and a performance state managed by a sub-control means. can be done.

Whether or not the accumulation display effect is to be executed is determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but the value of the MY counter is used for judgment. You may Specifically, a command indicating the value of the MY counter is transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means after the end of the game is checked and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. Information on the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter at the time of lever operation at the timing of receiving the payout start command as the result of the game, and it is determined whether the added total value exceeds the specified number. If a value based on the value of the MY counter is displayed as the cumulative number during AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be obtained by the end of the advantageous section.
The result notification effect is the battle effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect, but it may be the effect executed in one game instead of the continuous effect. In addition, it is not limited to a battle production where friendly characters and enemy characters compete, but it is possible to associate the results of production such as whether or not to draw the first prize in a lottery, whether or not to win in an amidakuji, and the results that are advantageous to the player. Other productions may be used.

As for the result notification effect, the result is displayed after the effect branching timing occurs due to the passage of time from the stop of all reels, but the result may be displayed by operating the effect switch. Specifically, at the production branch timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch imitating the production switch (also referred to as an operation promotion image or an operation promotion production) is displayed, and the player operates the production switch. , displays an image indicating success or an image indicating failure. By displaying the operation promotion image at the production branch timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the operation promotion image is displayed before the error screen is displayed. can recognize that
Also, after all the reels have stopped (after all the reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed in order to announce a stage change in the effect or an additional number of AT remaining games. Specifically, after all the reels have stopped and before time t17 before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, an image of a switch simulating a switch for effect is displayed and operated by the player. , to change the stage of production and announce the number of additions. Before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed), it can be recognized that an image of a switch simulating an effect switch is displayed (PUSH button effect is executed). In addition, before the image of the switch imitating the switch for production is displayed, the image of the switch imitating the switch for production may be displayed or triggered, and before the error screen is displayed, the result of the stimulation , the image of the image of the switch imitating the switch for effect is displayed.

In addition to the result notification effect and the PUSH button effect, a comment effect, etc., triggered by the operation of the stop switch of the last reel or the stopping of all reels may be executed. By executing these effects before the time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, the timing of the time t15, the timing of the time t1, etc.), the contents of the effects can be changed before the hopper empty error occurs. can recognize.
Also, as a result of winning the pushing order role and operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout (12 payouts) is performed. It may also be executed when another role is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when
Also, the length of time and period described in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be described.
The interrupt mode is set in the initial setting regarding the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. Setting the interrupt mode means making various settings (settings of main control built-in registers) to enable execution of timer interrupt processing.
Therefore, first of all, a description will be given of main control internal registers for enabling execution of timer interrupt processing.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, a clock to be supplied to an 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later, can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set "by how many" the frequency of the system clock (SCK) is to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143=approximately 111.8881 KHZ becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the number of clocks from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute timer interrupt processing. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", the clock is approximately 111.8881 KHz (one cycle is approximately 8.9375 μs). clock) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in an interrupt wait monitor register, which will be described later. be. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, an interrupt request notification signal can be output from the interrupt wait monitor register to the CPU, and the interrupt is enabled. (When the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "1") the timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, when the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = about 1.117 ms (millimeters). seconds), timer interrupt processing can be executed.
Also, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after setting the value in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control built-in registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, an interrupt wait monitor register is stored. A predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the monitor register becomes "1". Thus, when a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1", it is called storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register. Setting the bit to "0" is referred to as clearing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (described later). When the IFF1 register is "1") the timer interrupt is enabled. When executing timer interrupt processing in response to an interrupt request notification signal (before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or after executing timer interrupt processing), an interrupt wait Clear the information stored in the monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, when the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), , outputs an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, but does not execute timer interrupt processing. In this way, when the timer interrupt process cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register has been generated. Information indicating is retained (not cleared). Further, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it continues to output the interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt enabled state (IFF1 register described later is "1") and responded to the interrupt request notification signal. When executing timer interrupt processing (immediately before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing timer interrupt processing), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register clears the information indicating that a
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated). is not stored).

Next, the interrupt register that manages the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state will be explained.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register that the main control chip (for example, the main control CPU) has.
The interrupt registers manage interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states), namely the interrupt disabled state (interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period) and the interrupt enabled state (interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period). do. Specifically, it has an IFF1 register and an IFF2 register as interrupt registers, and manages an interrupt disabled state and an interrupt enabled state according to the value of the IFF1 register. Therefore, description of the IFF2 register is omitted. Also, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. It is viable.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, the timer interrupt Take no action.
In other words, the interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and the interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, a "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that enables an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when timer interrupt processing is executed (immediately before timer interrupt processing is executed, at the same time as timer interrupt processing is executed, or immediately after timer interrupt processing is executed).
In other words, the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process refers to the state from the execution of the interrupt prohibiting instruction to the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction. to the execution of the instruction that enables interrupts.
Note that the initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0". Therefore, it can be said that the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction is also the interrupt disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state indicates a state other than the interrupt disabled state.

Now, let us return to the setting of the interrupt mode in the initial setting regarding the operation of the gaming machine in FIG. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, the value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

Thus, in setting the interrupt mode, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "125"→"124"→...→"2"→"1". ' → '125' → '124' → . After the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings regarding the operation of the game machine in FIG. 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is kept updated even when another program (processing/command) is being executed. is configured to Also, the timing when the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the value of the 8-bit counter PTC timing out.

After executing the interrupt mode setting, the timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after the instruction to enable the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt permission instruction is preferably issued after determining whether or not the checksums of all RAMs are normal by RAM check processing (after power-off recovery data normal or recovery possible state in FIG. 5). For example, it is conceivable to execute an instruction to permit an interrupt by "activate interrupt processing" in FIG. .

In this way, if the 8-bit counter is updated before the RAM check process (determining whether or not the RAM before power-off and the RAM after power-on is the same), the 8-bit counter will be updated after the RAM check process. The 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier than when updating the bit counter (the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). Timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an instruction to permit an interrupt to be executed is executed.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when setting the interrupt mode, but the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register may not be executed. Specifically, it is possible to set the interrupt period by using the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, when the system clock is set to 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250". Therefore, by storing an arbitrary value in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be appropriately determined. can be done. The cycle of timer interrupt processing according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register is illustrated below.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
b) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 2ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 1 ms (milliseconds).

In this way, even if the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the updating of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. can be done. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, first, the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register is and then stores a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register, the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is Based on the obtained frequency, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated. In such a case, the update cycle of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC becomes irregular, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register, storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register prevents the failure of the main control chip. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be described using a simple program example.
(A) of FIG. 42 represents the program of the game progress main processing. The "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt disabling instruction). The "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction).
"AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary instructions (programs).

In FIG. 42A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
The IFF1 register remains "0" when the subsequent instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", and ".." are executed.
After that, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the interrupt processing is not started immediately, the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
By configuring in this way, even if an instruction "EI" for enabling an interrupt is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables the interrupt. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing the program at the return address) such as the "RET" instruction may be used as an instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables an interrupt. Even if there is, by not executing the timer interrupt process until the next instruction is executed, the instruction after the instruction "EI" for enabling the interrupt can be reliably executed.

In addition, in the game progress main process, as an example of providing an instruction to prohibit interruption and an instruction to permit interruption,
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, after executing a command to disable interrupts, write the command in the storage area of the RAM, etc., and then execute the command to enable interrupts. Case a) When the blocker is turned on (medal acceptance enabled state), after issuing an instruction to prohibit interrupts, the process of writing the information for turning on the blocker to the storage area of the RAM and turning on the token insertion ready lamp. If you execute a command to allow interrupts after executing processing such as writing information to the RAM storage area to prevent interrupts c) When you turn off the blocker (medal acceptance refusal state), you issued an order to prohibit interrupts Later, after executing the processing of writing the information for turning off the blocker in the storage area of the RAM and the processing of writing the information for turning off the token insertable lamp in the storage area of the RAM, etc., the instruction to permit the interruption is executed. case etc.
Note that when an interrupt prohibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction are provided, they are not limited to the above-described a) to c), and an interrupt inhibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt inhibited state in the game progress main process is, for example, during execution of a process composed of a plurality of instructions (instruction A, instruction B, . . . , instruction Z). This is provided in order to prevent the data in the RAM from being changed, and to prevent the execution of processing that causes problems based on the data in the RAM.
The interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is set to an interrupt prohibition state by an interrupt prohibition instruction (for example, a DI instruction) and an interrupt permission state by an interrupt permission instruction (for example, an EI instruction). In addition to the above DI instruction, other instructions may be used to inhibit interrupts, and not only the above EI instructions may be used to enable interrupts.

FIG. 42B shows a program for interrupt processing. As in FIG. 42A, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction). , “CCCC”, and “..” are arbitrary instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for terminating timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in FIG.

When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the IFF1 register becomes "0". As a result, it is possible to prevent the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process. Note that the "DI" instruction is not required to start the timer interrupt processing.
When the timer interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to switch from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1". The "EI" instruction corresponds to "save interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG.
Also in the "RETI" instruction after the "EI" instruction, the IFF1 register is "1".
In other words, the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. In this case, timer interrupt processing can be executed after executing the "RETI" instruction. The 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even in this case (when interrupt processing is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
In this way, after the "RETI" instruction, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, timer interrupt processing becomes executable, and after the "RETI" instruction, When the interrupt waiting monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the game progress main processing can be executed. Therefore, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction "RETI" is executed. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

Next, with reference to (1) of FIG. 43, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process will be described.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the PTC counter setting register as a value, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC. , '2', '1', 'm', 'm-1', 'm-2', . . . Thus, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC circulates between "m" and "1".

At the timing of t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m". That is, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t2, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, with reference to (2) of FIG. 43, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is an interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process will be described.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

As in FIG. 43(1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. there is With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state. With this configuration, even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so the timer interrupt process can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, the interrupt period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is disabled in the game progress main process will be described using <example (1) showing execution timing of timer interrupt process> in FIG. . A normal period of timer interrupt processing (a period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out until the next time the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T". Note that after the value is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) is started.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Further, even when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t6, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t8, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Here, T is the period from timing t2 to timing t5. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when the timing of t2 is “n×T (“n” is a natural number)”, the timing of t5 can be expressed as “(n+1)×T”. Also, the timing of t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T".
Also, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'".

First, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t3. Originally, the timer interrupt process executed at timing t3 should have been executed at t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process. In other words, the timer interrupt process should have been executed at the timing of t2 if the interruption prohibition state in the main processing of the game progress had not occurred at the timing of t2. That is, since the timing of t2 was the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing was executed at the timing of t3 when the interrupt permission state was entered.

Next, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5. The timer interrupt process executed at timing t5 is executed before "T" elapses from timing t3. In other words, the measurement of the interrupt cycle "T" is not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5 is configured to be executed when T has passed from the timing of t2. That is, based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC that continues to update the count even if timer interrupt processing is not executed (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). is configured to run).
In this way, let the timing of t2 be “n×T”, the timing of t3 be “specific timing after “n×T” and before “(n+1)×T”, and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1).times.T" is assumed, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, it is configured such that the timer interrupt process can be executed at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t7 is also executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC (the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). ) is configured to run.
In this way, let the timing of t2 be “n×T”, the timing of t3 be “specific timing after “n×T” and before “(n+1)×T”, and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1)×T" is assumed and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", at the timing of t7, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. can be done. In other words, it is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed in the original timer interrupt processing cycle (n × T) due to the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after the timer interrupt processing can be restored to a situation in which timer interrupt processing can be executed when the original timer interrupt processing period arrives (xxT ("x" is a natural number)). As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the influence (time of timer measurement is long) on timer measurement executed in timer interrupt processing.

Next, the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out multiple times under the condition that the IFF1 register is 0 will be described using <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. .

<Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt process> describes the case where the game progress main process runs out of control or the game progress main process takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are prohibited in the game progress main process. It is represented. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal cycles.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, since the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored again in the interrupt wait monitor register. I don't do anything like that. After that, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.

At the timing of t4, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t4, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to allow the interrupt of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t5, the timer interrupt processing ends and the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution (“before” includes “immediately before”), at the same time as execution, after execution (“after” includes “immediately after”) ), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t7, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Thus, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Information is stored once. In FIG. 44, an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC timed out twice during the interrupt disabled state was given. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the wait monitor register once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times during the interrupt disabled state, the times out are not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n"("n" is 2 or more) times during the interrupt disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing is executed as " It is configured not to be executed (repeatedly) n" times in succession.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being continuously repeated a plurality of times after the transition from the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt permitted state, and the game progress main processing being unable to be executed during that time. .

In <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. Similarly, the timer interrupt processing may run out of control while the timer interrupt processing is disabled, or the timer interrupt processing may take an unexpected amount of time. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n" ("n" is 2 or more) times during the disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing will continue to "n". '' times consecutively (repeatedly) (executed only once).

<Processing time for program design>
A program is composed of a plurality of instructions. At this time, the designed processing time from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program is an instruction (eg, A instruction) related to the start of a certain program to an instruction (eg, Z instruction) related to the end of a certain program. ) can be calculated from the instruction types.

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency×number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
In the following, the time required to execute one instruction will be described using specific instructions when using a 16 MHZ system clock.
(a) DI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(b) EI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(c) DEC (HL)
Contents of instruction: 1 is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when using the same system clock frequency, the time required to execute one instruction may vary depending on the type of instruction. Moreover, even if the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are part of a plurality of instructions, and there are many instructions other than the above instructions.
The frequency of the system clock when executing the game progress main process and the number of system clocks when executing the timer interrupt process are the same. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process and the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process are the same.

In other words, the designed processing time of a certain program can be calculated from the total number of states of a plurality of instructions from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program. Specifically, it can be calculated by calculating 1/system clock frequency×total number of states. In other words, since the frequency of the system clock is uniform in one game machine, a program with a large total number of states has a longer design processing time than a program with a small total number of states. It will happen.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is the time from the start of the timer interrupt process to its end (for example, until the RETI instruction is executed). However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the difference in the information stored in the RWM and the difference in the progress of the game, even if the timer interrupt process is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt process , there is some variation. In other words, since the instructions executed in timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when executing one timer interrupt processing differs. Therefore, when timer interrupt processing is normally executed, the average time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process may also be referred to as the time associated with the timer interrupt process.

<Designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed maximum time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the designed processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing. Further, as described above, even if the timer interrupt process is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt process varies to some extent. Therefore, the design maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing is defined as the time required to execute an instruction with the largest total number of states from the start to the end of one timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as the maximum time for timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process, the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process is the time from an interrupt disabled instruction (for example, a DI instruction) to an interrupt enabled state. (E.g., EI command) (also referred to as the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the command to allow the interrupt) . However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even if the main game progress process is executed normally. There is Therefore, the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing varies somewhat. In other words, since the instructions to be executed in the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress processing are not necessarily the same, the total number of states differs when the interrupt disabled state processing in the main game progress processing is executed. Therefore, when the game progress main processing is executed normally, the average processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. .

In addition, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the design interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated. The longest processing time is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. The designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the time associated with the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Designed maximum processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibition state in the main game progress processing, when the instruction with the largest total number of states is executed from the start of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibition state. is the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing.

Further, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is designed. The longest maximum processing time is defined as the designed maximum processing time of the interruption prohibited section in the game progress main processing. The designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time of interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S'", T>S' is satisfied. It is preferable to configure as follows.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, a plurality of timer interrupt cycles from occurring while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship Between Timer Interrupt Cycle and Design Maximum Processing Time of Interrupt Disabled State in Game Progress Main Processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S", T>S can be established. preferable.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T>S'(S' is the designed processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing), the interrupt in the game progress main processing can be further improved. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt cycles while the prohibited state is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t', where "T" is the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) and "t'" is the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process. In other words, it is preferable to set the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, the timer interrupt processing is executed when the cycle of the timer interrupt processing arrives, and thereafter, the game progress main processing is continued longer than T/2 before the next timer interrupt processing cycle arrives. Can run for long periods of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and design maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t, where "T" is the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) and "t" is the designed maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing. In other words, it is preferable to set the designed maximum processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), when the cycle of the timer interrupt processing arrives, the After that, the game progress main process can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the cycle of the next timer interrupt process arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Types of interrupt processing>
Next, types of interrupt processing will be described. Interrupt processing includes maskable interrupt processing (called INT), in which interrupt processing is not executed if an interrupt factor occurs while interrupts are disabled, and interrupt processing that is executed even if an interrupt factor occurs while interrupts are disabled. can be broadly classified into non-maskable interrupt processing (referred to as NMI).

<Non-maskable interrupt processing>
When a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs, the CPU is notified that the non-maskable interrupt factor has occurred. Then, the CPU receiving the notification that the cause of the non-maskable interrupt has occurred suspends all processing, and the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed with the highest priority. However, after executing the CALLEX instruction used when executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area, it is used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area. Even if a cause for non-maskable interrupt processing occurs, it will not be executed until the RETEX instruction is executed. In other words, even if a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs while the program in the second program area is being executed by the CALLEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing is not executed, and the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. configured to be Note that the CALLEX instruction is an instruction different from a normal CALL instruction, and is used only when executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area. It is not used when calling a program in the first program area from a program or when calling a program in the second program area from a program in the second program area. Therefore, it is also called a special call instruction. The RETEX instruction is an instruction different from the normal RET instruction (return instruction). The CALLEX instruction executes the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area, and then executes the program in the second program area. It is only used when returning from a program to the program in the first program area. Furthermore, unlike the RET and RETI instructions described above, even if the RETEX instruction changes the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state and a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs between the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction, the Non-maskable interrupt processing is executed immediately after (the next instruction based on the RETEX instruction). Therefore, the RETEX instruction is also called a special return instruction. As an example of non-maskable interrupt processing, the occurrence of power failure can be used as the cause of the non-maskable interrupt, and the power failure processing described in FIG. 6 can be treated as non-maskable interrupt processing.

<Maskable interrupt processing>
The main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing described above is one of maskable interrupt processing. For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Then, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored. As described above, timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed when interrupts are disabled. Also, it executes the CALLEX instruction used when executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area, and then it is used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area. Until the RETEX instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed even if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Can not. In other words, even if a maskable interrupt factor occurs while the program in the second program area is being executed by the CALLEX instruction, the maskable interrupt process is not executed, and the maskable interrupt process is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. configured to be In this embodiment, a case where one type of timer interrupt processing is used as maskable interrupt processing will be described as an example.

<Interrupt vector address>
The interrupt vector address refers to an address (also called start address) where the first program (instruction) of maskable interrupt processing is stored. As a specific flow, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and executes timer interrupt processing, first acquire the address indicated by the interrupt vector address of timer interrupt processing, and then jump to the acquired address. , timer interrupt processing can be executed. For example, the interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are 0004h and 0005h (addresses determined by 2 bytes), and the address where the first instruction for timer interrupt processing is stored (also called the start address of the program for timer interrupt processing). ) is at address 0050h, 0050h, which is the address where the first instruction for timer interrupt processing is stored, is stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h (actually, 50h is stored at address 0004h and 00h is stored at address 0005h). remembered). When timer interrupt processing is to be executed, a jump is first made to address 0050h determined by addresses 0004h and 0005h, and the instruction at address 0050h (the first instruction of timer interrupt processing) can be executed.

The interrupt vector address is determined based on the value of the I register and the value set in the program management area (also called program management area) mounted on the main control board 100 . Specifically, the value of the I register determines the value of the upper byte of the interrupt vector address, and the value of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address is determined based on the value set in the interrupt initialization area of the program management area. For example, if the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0004h, the upper byte 00h is determined by the value of the I register, and the lower byte 04h is determined by the value set in the interrupt initialization area of the program management area.

<I register>
The I register is one of the registers that the CPU has and is also called an "interrupt page address register". The I register is a register that can store 1-byte data and can set the high-order 1 byte of the interrupt vector address. It can be freely determined by executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to a specific value. For example, by executing an instruction (LD I, 10h) to set the value of the I register to 10h, the value of the I register can be set to 10h. If the value of the I register is 10h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 10h, so the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 04h according to the value set in the interrupt initialization area of the program management area. In this case, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 1004h. The initial value of the I register is 00h. In other words, when the power is turned off under the condition that the value of the I register is 10h, and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes 00h. If the power is turned off while the value of the I register is 00h and then turned on again, the value of the I register remains 00h. In this embodiment, no instruction is executed to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h (the program in the first control area and the program in the second control area set the value of the I register to 00h). (does not change from ). In other words, in this embodiment, the initial value 00h is used as the value of the I register. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of executing an instruction for setting the value of the I register to a value other than 00h. Also, since the value of the I register is 00h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 00h. That is, as shown in FIG. 71, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be defined in the control area (first control area described above) of the used area.

<Each area of the main control ROM>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing each area stored in the main control ROM in this embodiment. First, from 0000h to 11FEh is a control area. This control area is the control area of the used area (first control area described above), and various instructions are stored in the control area. An interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is defined in the control area. However, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is an address, not a program, as described above. Therefore, when the main control chip is normally activated, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is not executed as an instruction. Address 11FF is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. The data area is from 1200h to 1DF6h. This data area is the data area of the use area (first data area described above), and the data area stores a lottery table and the like used (referred to) by the program (instruction) of the first control area. An unused area is from 1DF7h to 1FFFh. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 2000h to 245Dh are a control area outside the use area (second control area described above). Various instructions are stored in the control area outside the use area. Note that unlike the control area, the control area outside the use area does not have an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing. The data area is from 245Eh to 2526h. This data area is a data area (the second data area described above) outside the use area, and the data area stores a table or the like that is used (referred to) by the program (instruction) of the second control area. Addresses 3FC0h to 3FFFh are a program management area.

<Program management area>
The program management area includes an out-of-designated-area-prohibition setting area, which designates an area where program runaway is not determined, and an interrupt initial setting area, which designates a lower address of the vector address. Note that the program management area may also be called a program management area.

After the power is turned on and before the first program (the program at address 0000h) starts (before the user mode starts (specifically, during security mode)), each area of the program management area Various settings of the main control chip can be performed based on the values (information) stored in the . In other words, the first program (the program at address 0000h) is executed after the setting of the area for designating the no-travel prohibited area and the setting of the interrupt initial setting area are completed. The security mode includes security checks of the control area and data area of the main control ROM, inspection of the program management area, and setting based on the program management area. After that, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the security mode, the system shifts to the user mode. In other words, the programs are executed sequentially from the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the security mode (for example, when the value set in the program management area is an abnormal value), the user mode is not entered. In other words, it stops without executing the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area (the main control chip stops controlling).

<Driving prohibition setting area outside the designated area>
There are a program code end address 1 setting area, a program code start address 2 setting area, and a program code end address 2 setting area as the setting areas for prohibiting movement outside the specified area. For example, the program code end address 1 setting area is composed of 2-byte areas at addresses 3F03h and 3F04h, the program code start address 2 setting area is composed of 2-byte areas at addresses 3F05h and 3F06h, and program code end address 2 is set. The area consists of 2-byte areas at addresses 3F07h and 3F08h.

In this embodiment, there is a control area from 0000h to 11FEh, and an out-of-use control area from 2000h to 245Dh. Therefore, 11FEh, which is the last address of the control area, is set in the program code end address 1 setting area. In the program code start address 2 setting area, 2000h, which is the first address of the control area outside the use area, is set. Also, 245Dh, which is the last address of the control area outside the use area, is set in the program code end address 2 setting area. Note that 0000h, which is the first address of the control area, is not set. Even if 0000h, which is the first address of the control area, is not set, the program code start address 1 for the program code end address 1 is 0000h. With the setting described above, it is possible to prevent the reset from occurring when executing the program from 0000h to 11FEh (instruction fetching). Also, when executing the program from addresses 2000h to 245Dh (instruction fetching), it is possible to prevent the reset from occurring. On the other hand, when the CPU attempts to execute a program (when fetching an instruction) outside the area set by the outside-designated-area travel-prohibition setting area, a reset can be generated. For example, when trying to execute the program at address 11FFh (unused area) in this embodiment (when an instruction is fetched), a reset occurs. When a reset occurs, the registers are initialized while the power is still on, and each area of the program management area is initialized before the user mode starts (specifically, security mode). Various settings of the main control chip are performed based on the values (information) stored in the . After executing the security mode, if no abnormality is detected in the security mode, the programs can be executed sequentially from the first program (program (instruction) at address 0000h). In this way, just by setting the last address for the control area, it is possible to set the control area as an area (designated area) where the reset does not occur, and for the control area outside the use area, set the first and last addresses. By doing so, it is possible to set the control area outside the use area as an area (designated area) where the reset is not applied. In other words, by setting only three addresses instead of setting four addresses, it is possible to set two areas (designated areas) where resetting is not applied. By configuring in this way, the storage area of the program management area can be reduced.

<Interrupt initialization area>
The interrupt initial setting area is an area for setting the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In other words, it is an area for setting a part of the interrupt vector address. Specifically, the interrupt initialization area consists of a 1-byte area at address 3FDAh. FIG. 72 will be used to explain the details of the interrupt initialization address.

FIG. 72A is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initialization area. The interrupt initialization area consists of a 1-byte storage area for bits D0 to D7.
Two bits, the D0 bit and the D1 bit, are used to set the interrupt priority. Although the details of the interrupt priority will be described later, in this embodiment, the D1 bit is set to 0 and the D0 bit is set to 1 (01b is set). By setting 01b as the interrupt priority, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are automatically assigned a value corresponding to 01b (details will be described later). In other words, only by setting a 2-bit value, it is possible to set the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. Although 01b is set as the interrupt priority in this embodiment, any value such as 00b, 10b, or 11b can be set. Lower 4 bits can be set.
A fixed value is set to the D2 bit and the D3 bit. In this embodiment, as fixed values, the D2 bit is set to 0 and the D3 bit is set to 0 (00b is set). If 00b is not set as the fixed value, or if a value other than 00b is set due to noise or the like, the power is turned on and an abnormality is detected in the security mode before entering the user mode. is configured not to start If such a predetermined fixed value is not set, there is a high possibility that the ROM is abnormal. , it is possible to prevent the game store and the player from being disadvantaged.
Four bits D4 to D7 are used to set the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In this embodiment, the upper 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b. In this embodiment, the upper 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b (0h). Can be set.

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priorities and automatic allocation.
As described above, the main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. Specifically, it is possible to execute six types of maskable interrupt processing: "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Among these maskable interrupt processes, if the game machine is capable of executing multiple (at least two) maskable interrupt processes, which of the maskable interrupt processes takes precedence when factors such as interrupts occur at the same time. It is the interrupt priority that determines whether or not to As the interrupt priority, "priority A" is the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt priority decreases in order from "priority A". That is, "priority F" is the lowest interrupt priority. "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. The interrupt priorities "00b", "01b", "10b", and "11b" correspond to the values (interrupt priority) set in the D0 and D1 bits shown in FIG. 72(A). there is

For example, if 01b is set in the interrupt priority setting area of the interrupt initial setting area, as shown in FIG. a) The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC1 are automatically assigned to 0010b, c) The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC2 are automatically assigned to 0100b, and 4) XINT. The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 are automatically assigned to 0110b. The lower 4 bits of the byte are automatically assigned to 1010b. That is, when the PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower 4 bits of the lower bytes of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to 0100b (4h) by automatic allocation of the main control chip. Also, for example, if 10b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority order in the interrupt initialization area and PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is automatically assigned by the main control chip. Of these, the lower 4 bits can be defined as 1000b (8h).
As described above, the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing are 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), 1010b (Ah) can be defined in

As described above, the value of the upper 4 bits of the lower bytes of the interrupt vector address can be set to any value from 0000b (0h) to 1111b (Fh). The values can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), 1010b (Ah). In other words, the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to any value from 00h to FAh according to the value set in the interrupt initialization area. For example, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 04h by the value set in the interrupt initialization area, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 0004h. (and 0005h). When the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 84h by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 0084h. (and 0085h). Although the details are omitted, it should be added that the interrupt vector addresses for the multiple maskable interrupt processes described above can be determined according to the values set in the interrupt initialization area.

<Relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing. A part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is stored from addresses 0000h to 0003h. Interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h. Timer interrupt processing is stored at addresses xxxxh (where xxxx is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to XXXXh (where XXXX is a predetermined hexadecimal value). At addresses yyyyh (where yyyy is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to YYYYh (where YYYY is a predetermined hexadecimal value), the continuation of the power-on process is stored. It should be noted that other programs (instructions) are stored in portions indicated by broken lines.

As is clear from FIG. 73, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and executes power-on process up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, at addresses 0001h to 0003h, a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) is stored in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh (because the jump instruction is a 3-byte instruction, addresses 0001h to 0003h are stored). use the program area up to the address). Note that the power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. An interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored between addresses 0003h and yyyyh. In other words, all instructions that constitute the power-on process are configured so as not to be stored in consecutive addresses. By configuring in this way, the game clerk can grasp that the voltage is starting up in an unstable state. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable and the program (instruction) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip has not started normally). not available). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are composed of a series of instructions, for example, the address next to a certain instruction among the instructions constituting the power-on process may be executed without executing the instruction. Executes stored instructions and may cause the program to behave in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a fear that an error unexpected by the player or the game clerk may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between a part of the power-on process and the continuation of a part of the power-off process, for example, the continuation of the program at address 0003h becomes a jump instruction at address yyyyh. If (JR yyyyh) is executed normally, the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the continuation program at address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (the instruction at address 0004h was executed case), the time until the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is executed is longer (or the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is not executed). That is, for example, if there is a program (instruction) for determining whether to shift to the setting change mode after address yyyyh ("setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" The case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program goes to address yyyyh is executed normally is better than the case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program at address 0003h goes to address yyyyh is not executed normally. , the time to shift to the setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or it will not shift to the setting change mode). It can be determined whether or not the voltage started up in an unstable state depending on whether or not the time until the start was abnormal.

It should be noted that the addresses shown in FIG. 73 are examples, and a part of the power-on processing, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is stored from 0000h to 0003h. For example, it may be part of the power-on process, which is a program that is executed first when the power is turned on from 0000h to 0007h. Similarly, the interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the address following the program for power-on processing, may be used. For example, if part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is set to addresses 0000h to 0007h and yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is set to 0064h, etc. You may set it to In other words, when a jump instruction is stored at address A as a program for power-on processing, and the program for power-on processing continues from address B, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set between addresses A and B. It may be configured to be stored (determined). Also, although xxxxh has a smaller value than yyyyh, xxxxh may have a larger value than yyyyh. Also, the vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than address xxxxh, but the vector address for timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than address xxxxh. In addition, although the dashed line part is explained as another program (instruction), even if data other than the program (instruction) (other interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) is stored, good.

Also, as the processing after address yyyyh, the decision to shift to the setting change mode was taken as an example, but as the processing after address yyyyh, an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on is output. (not shown), the design time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the external signal is not output), so the game It is possible for the store clerk to determine whether or not the voltage started up in an unstable state by checking whether or not the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, as the processing after address yyyyh, even if it is the first “interrupt permission instruction” after the start of power-on processing among multiple “interrupt permission instructions (also called interrupt permission instructions)”, good. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed becomes longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the timer interrupt process is not executed). On the side of the game clerk, the timing of displaying the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) by timer interrupt processing, the lighting timing of the MAX bet lamp, and the lighting timing of the token insertion ready lamp. , it can be determined whether or not the voltage has risen in an unstable state. It should be noted that, once again, after the interrupt mode is set, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to enable interrupts has been issued. Here, the interrupt mode may be set for processing after address yyyyh, or for processing at address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs>
<Pattern 1> in FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs. Various explanations are given using this <Pattern 1>. From addresses 0000h to 0003h, part of the power-on process, which is a program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored. Interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h. The first processing is stored from address 0008h. The second processing is stored from address 0010h. A third process is stored at address 0018h. The fourth processing is stored from address 0020h. The fifth processing is stored from address 0028h. The sixth process is stored from address 0030h. The seventh process is stored from address 0038h. The eighth process is stored from address 0040h. Timer interrupt processing is stored at addresses xxxxh (where xxxx is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to XXXXh (where XXXX is a predetermined hexadecimal value). At addresses yyyyh (where yyyy is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to YYYYh (where YYYY is a predetermined hexadecimal value), the continuation of the power-on process is stored. It should be noted that other programs (instructions) are stored in portions indicated by broken lines.

Here, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process, and eighth process refer to a special call instruction (RST It refers to a process (program) called by an instruction). A special call instruction (RST instruction) differs from a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) when calling a program (instruction) at a specific address (0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, 0040h). It is an instruction that can call a program (instruction) with a smaller program capacity and a shorter processing time (smaller number of states) than a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). For example, a comparison between the case of using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) and the case of using a special call instruction (RST instruction) when calling the first process starting from 0008h is as follows.
a) When calling the program at address 0008h using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) CALL 0008h (program capacity used: 3 bytes, number of states: 5)
b) When calling the program at address 0008h using a special call instruction (RST instruction) RST 08h (program capacity used: 1 byte, number of states: 4)
As described above, the program (instruction) at the above-mentioned specific address is called using the special instruction (RST instruction) rather than the normal call instruction (CALL instruction). (instruction) can reduce the amount of the program to be used to 1/2 or less. Also, the processing time required to call the program (instruction) at the above-mentioned specific address can be shortened. Therefore, the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) At least one of the eighth processes includes an operation for starting a certain game (for example, turning on the start switch) and an operation for starting the next game after a certain game (for example, starting It is preferable to configure the processing to be called multiple times until the switch is turned on. In other words, at least one of the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process, and the eighth process is , is preferably a process that is called frequently. In this way, frequently called processes can be called using a special call instruction (RST instruction) rather than using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). ) can reduce the size of the program.

Also, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, and seventh process called (executed) by a special call instruction (RST instruction). The processing preferably consists of a program of 8-byte capacity, or a program within 8-byte capacity. For example, if the first process is an 8-byte program, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Fh. On the other hand, if the first process is a 4-byte program, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Bh. If the first process is a 4-byte program, addresses 000Ch to 000Fh may be defined as follows.
Example 1) Assume that addresses 000Ch to 000Fh are unused areas (00000000b is stored).
Example 2) Other processing (another program) within 4 bytes is stored in addresses 000Ch to 000Fh. Here, the other processing is called by a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) instead of a special call instruction (RST instruction).

In the above example, the first process is a 4-byte program. ) is the same. Also, although the first processing at address 0008h is shown as an example, the above example is not limited to address 0008h, and the second processing at address 0010h, the third processing at address 0018h, and the third processing at address 0020h. The fourth process, the fifth process at address 0028h, the sixth process at address 0030h, and the seventh process at address 0038h are also applicable.

Also, for example, if the first process at address 0008h is a 15-byte program at addresses 0008h to 0016h, even if the second process called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) is not provided. good. However, if the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) exceeds 8 bytes, the last address (the address with the largest value) among the addresses that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) It is preferable to store in a certain address 0040h (defined as the eighth process of this embodiment). In other words, for the process of storing at address 0040h (eighth process in this embodiment), since there are no addresses that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) in addresses after address 0040h, is no problem. With this configuration, eight processes (the same number of processes as the maximum number of processes that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction)) can be stored as processes that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). can do.

Note that addresses 0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, and 0040h are used as addresses for storing processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). Eight addresses are an example, and are not limited to this. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the address storing the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is 00h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide frequently called processes near the start address (0000h), and in the development stage, the frequently called processes are designed first, and other processes are designed later. be able to. Also, a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) in both the control area and the control area outside the use area, but the special call instruction (RST instruction) Preferably, it is an instruction that is used (stored) in the control area but not used (stored) in the control area outside the use area. By configuring in this way, when a developer or a third party checks the program, an area with a special call instruction (RST instruction) is a control area, and an area without a special call instruction is used. It is possible to grasp at a glance that the control area is outside the area.

Also, two examples of processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) are shown, but the processes are not limited to the following and can be configured with various processes.
Example 1) Command set processing Contents: 1) Disable interrupts. 2) A normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is used to call and execute the process of writing information to be sent to the sub-control means into the RWM area of the main control means. 3) Allow interrupts.
Example of where to call: Sending information indicating that the reels have started spinning. When transmitting information indicating that all reels have stopped to the sub-control means. When sending the error type. When sending setting values. When the start lever is operated and the production group number is transmitted.
Example 2) Interrupt wait processing Contents: 1) Determine whether timer interrupt processing has been executed. 2-1) If it is determined that the timer interrupt process is not executed, return to 1). 2-2) If it is determined that the timer interrupt process has been executed, the process ends.
Example of where to call: When clearing rising data indicating that a predetermined switch (setting switch, 1-bet switch, etc.) has been operated.

As described above, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and executes power-on process up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, the program following address 0003h is configured to execute a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) at address yyyyh (since the jump instruction is a 3-byte instruction, the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h is ). Note that the power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. Between addresses 0003h and yyyyh, interrupt vector addresses for processes called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) and timer interrupt processes are stored. In other words, all instructions that constitute the power-on processing are configured so as not to be stored in consecutive addresses. By configuring in this way, the game clerk can grasp that the voltage is starting up in an unstable state. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable and the program (instruction) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip has not started normally). not available). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are composed of a series of instructions, for example, an instruction following a certain instruction among the instructions constituting the power-on process may be executed without executing a certain instruction. , and may cause the program to behave in an abnormal way. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the game clerk may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between a part of the power-on process and the continuation of a part of the power-off process, for example, the continuation of the program at address 0003h becomes a jump instruction at address yyyyh. If (JR yyyyh) is executed normally, the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the continuation program at address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (the instruction at address 0004h was executed case), the time until the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is executed is longer (or the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is not executed). That is, for example, if there is a program (instruction) for determining whether to shift to the setting change mode after address yyyyh ("setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" If the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that causes the program to address yyyyh is executed normally, it is better if the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that causes the program to address yyyyh that follows address 0003h is not executed normally. , the time to shift to the setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or it will not shift to the setting change mode). It can be determined whether or not the voltage started up in an unstable state, depending on whether or not the time until the start was abnormal.

The addresses described in <Pattern 1> in FIG. 74 are examples, and a part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is stored from 0000h to 0003h. However, as shown in <Pattern 2> in FIG. 74, for example, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored at address 0004h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the continuation address of the program for power-on processing, may be used. For example, if part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is set to addresses 0000h to 0007h and yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is set to 0064h, etc. You may set it to In other words, when a jump instruction is stored at address A as a program for power-on processing, and the program for power-on processing continues from address B, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing and an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing are stored between addresses A and B. , a special call instruction (RST instruction) to store (define) the processing. Also, although xxxxh has a smaller value than yyyyh, xxxxh may have a larger value than yyyyh. Also, although the dashed line part is explained as another program (instruction), even if data other than the program (instruction) (other interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) is stored, good. Although the vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than the address xxxxh, the vector address for timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than the address xxxxh.

Also, as the processing after address yyyyh, determination of transition to the setting change mode was taken as an example, but as the processing after address yyyyh, an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on is output. (not shown), the design time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the external signal is not output), so the game It is possible for the store clerk to determine whether or not the voltage started up in an unstable state by checking whether or not the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, as the processing after address yyyyh, even if it is the first “interrupt permission instruction” after the start of power-on processing among a plurality of “interrupt permission instructions (also called interrupt permission instructions)”, good. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed becomes longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the timer interrupt process is not executed). On the side of the game clerk, the timing of displaying the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) by timer interrupt processing, the lighting timing of the MAX bet lamp, and the lighting timing of the medal insertion ready lamp are abnormal. , it can be determined whether or not the voltage has risen in an unstable state. It should be noted that, once again, after the interrupt mode is set, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to enable interrupts has been issued. Here, the interrupt mode may be set for processing after address yyyyh, or for processing at address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Stage change production>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a stage change effect (also referred to as a switching effect) for switching the effect stage that can be displayed on the liquid crystal. As a production stage, there are a plurality of types of production stages such as a normal stage and a high probability stage that suggests a high probability state in which the probability of winning an AT is higher than that of the normal stage, and a transition from one production stage to another production stage is provided. It is configured to be able to execute a stage change production at times. With this stage change production, the production stage can be switched smoothly. In addition, there are multiple types of stage change production, and the selection ratio of the production stage to be the transition destination is configured to differ depending on the type of stage change production (for example, a predetermined stage change production is a specific stage change production). For example, the degree of expectation for transitioning to a high-probability stage is set higher than the stage-change effect, or when a specific stage-change effect is executed, the transition is always made to a high-probability stage, etc.). In addition, it is configured to suggest a stay mode depending on the type of stage change effect (details are omitted, but the AT win probability and the number of ceiling games until AT win are different depending on the stay mode) and set values are suggested. You may In addition, production corresponding to the production stage (background image (still image or moving image) display on the liquid crystal, BGM output from the speaker, predetermined lamp lighting pattern, predetermined lamp lighting color, etc.) configured to be executed.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a stage change effect in the present embodiment. UI images (also referred to as UI display, UI, game information image) include UI image A (also referred to as first UI image), UI image B ( 2nd UI image) and UI image C (also called 3rd UI image) can be displayed. A UI image is an image that can be displayed on a liquid crystal display in the same (or similar) display mode and in the same display area over a plurality of production stages. Is displayed.

Here, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C will be described in detail.

UI image A is an image indicating the name of the production stage. In FIG. 45(1), the letters "coastal stage" are surrounded by a frame, but the letters may be formed without a frame.

UI image B is an image showing the current credit amount. As the display mode of the UI image B, for example, when the MAX bet switch is pressed and the MAX bet process is executed while "50" is displayed as the number of credits, "50→49→48→47" is displayed. It is configured to be updated and displayed one by one at a speed that can be visually recognized by the player. It should be noted that only the number of credits after processing the MAX bet may be displayed, such as "50→47".

The UI image C is an image showing the number of payouts in one game. As for the display mode of the UI image C, for example, when there is a payout of "10" in one game, (1) "0→1→2→...→9→10" can be visually recognized by the player. It is configured to be updated and displayed one by one at a high speed. It should be noted that only the number of payouts such as "0→10" may be displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that "0" is displayed after the number of payouts is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), or when the number of payouts continues to be displayed and a bet operation for the next game is performed (or , and when the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the next game is accepted), "0" may be displayed.

In addition to these, as UI images, the number of games played by one AT, the number of remaining games, and predetermined points used in the game (for example, it is configured so that it can be accumulated according to the execution of the game and the winning combination). , AT lottery is executed when 1000 points are reached), the number of games in normal games, character display, various types of UI images such as an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during AT can be displayed. You may do so.

Also, the liquid crystal is configured to display a background image corresponding to the current production stage, and in FIG. 45(1), the background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed. In addition, since the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority than the background image (displayed in front), the visibility of the UI image is not lowered by the background image. It is possible to grasp the state of the game at the timing.

In addition, depending on the game state (normal section, advantageous section, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), the type of UI image that can be displayed on the liquid crystal can be changed, or the display mode of the UI image can be changed. In short, the UI image that can be displayed on the liquid crystal may be appropriately changed according to the game state. By doing so, the current game state can be easily grasped from the UI image.

The flow of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
First, in (1) of FIG. 45, the current production stage is the coast stage, and the start switch 12 is operated (depressed) to start a new game. Next, (2) → (3) → (4), the background image and UI image are blacked out (turned dark) from outside the liquid crystal display area to cover the entire liquid crystal display area. A black image is displayed, making the background image and UI image invisible (it may be made invisible by displaying a black image in front of the background image and UI image, or the background image and UI image may not be visible). It may be made invisible by displaying a black image on the display). After that, the background image is displayed from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal in order of (5)→(6)→(7), and the background image corresponding to the production stage after transition (after the stage change) is displayed. It should be noted that the UI image A displays "town stage" corresponding to the production stage after transition. In this way, by configuring the background image and the UI image so as not to be visually recognized during at least a part of the period during the stage change performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which performance stage the game has shifted to. Also, even if the display mode of the UI image is different before and after the stage change effect, the game can be progressed without discomfort. In addition, when the production stage is switched by executing the stage change production, the name of the production stage after the transition may be output from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 45, a voice saying "Town Stage", which is the production stage after transition, is output.

Note that in the present embodiment, the background image and the UI image may be configured so that they cannot be visually recognized at least at some timing during the execution period of the stage change effect (the background image and the UI image are always visible during the stage change effect). may be configured to be invisible), and various methods for making the background image and the UI image invisible can be appropriately applied. Also, during a period in which the background image and the UI image are made invisible (for example, the period (4) in FIG. 45), by displaying a predetermined image (for example, a predetermined character image, title logo image, etc.) Relatively more advantageous to players than normal stage change effects It may be configured so that the stage change effect of a chance-up pattern such as a high probability is used. The stage change effect of the chance up pattern and the normal stage change effect may be different types of stage change effect, or may be configured to be similar stage change effect with a part of the effect mode different. .

Regarding the execution period of the stage change effect (time required from start to finish), in the present embodiment, the execution period of the normal stage change effect and the execution period of the chance up pattern stage change effect are the same length. is configured to be By configuring in this way, the performance execution end timing can be made the same between the normal stage change performance and the chance up pattern stage change performance, so that the subsequent game can proceed without discomfort. It should be noted that the execution period of the stage change effect of the chance up pattern may be longer than the period of execution of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible not to miss the stage change effect of the chance up pattern. It should be noted that the execution period of the stage change effect of the chance up pattern may be shorter than the execution period of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of incompatibility that the end timing of the performance ends relatively quickly when the stage change performance of the chance-up pattern is executed, and the sense of incongruity causes the chance-up pattern. The player can perceive that it is a stage change effect.

In addition, the predetermined stage change effect is relatively more advantageous for the player when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode (advantageous effect stage (e.g., there is a high possibility of winning an AT lottery, an AT game number addition lottery, or a bonus). Further, the execution of a predetermined stage change effect is started based on a predetermined stop operation (either of the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) rather than when the execution is started based on the operation of the start switch 12. It may be configured so that it is relatively advantageous for the player when the game is played. In addition, the production stage and the production mode of the stage change production are made to correspond (in the first production stage, the stage change production is performed in the first production mode, and in the second production stage, the stage change production is performed in the second production mode). , etc.), the player may be more advantageous when the correspondence is different than when the correspondence is not.

Depending on the game situation (game state, effect stage, etc.), the display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position of the UI image (display area), whether or not the UI image is displayed, It may be configured so that the types of UI images can be different. For example, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in game state B, only UI image A may be displayed (or the UI image may not be displayed). In state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in game state B, UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. In addition, as the game state A and the game state B, for example, the AT state may be the game state A and the non-AT state (or the state in which the frequency of executing the push order navigation is relatively low) may be the game state B, or the advantageous interval. A certain game state may be game state A, and a game state with a normal section may be game state B. Alternatively, a state in which the standby demo screen is displayed may be game state A, and a state in which the standby demo screen is not displayed may be game state B. good.

In FIG. 45, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C are displayed, but the number of UI images to be displayed and the type of UI images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the UI image D described above may be newly added, or the UI image displayed before and after the stage change effect may be the same without displaying the UI image A. Further, the UI image A may not be displayed, and an image showing the name of the current production stage may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the stage change production is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 45, when the stage change effect is executed, all the UI images are configured not to be visible for at least a part of the period. All or part of any UI image may be configured to be invisible.

Next, the execution start and end timings of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
Here, a case will be described in which the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum game time elapses from the start of the Nth game, and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game. .
(1) All reels start rotating based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N-th game. It should be noted that the measurement of the minimum playing time starts from the timing when all the reels start rotating.
(2) After that, after all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes valid, and the player stops the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c. Operation stops all reels. The UI image remains displayed during the N-th game (period from when all reels start rotating to when all reels stop).
(3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is operated, but since the minimum game time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, the reels do not start rotating. Also, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game. In other words, the stage change effect is executed based on the N+1th operation of the start switch 12 even if the minimum game time has not passed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the stage change effect here is the same as the effect mode shown in FIG.
(4) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, the mode of FIG. 45(3), etc.). Note that the UI image continues to be displayed from the N-th game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change effect.
(5) Next, the minimum game time elapses from the start of the reel rotation of the Nth game, and the rotation of the reels associated with the N+1th game starts.
(6) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image is visibly displayed, and thereafter the state in which the UI image is visibly displayed continues. Note that the UI image may become visible before the minimum time elapses, depending on the time during which the stage change effect is executed.
(7) After that, the execution of the stage change effect ends.
(8) After that, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes valid.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the stage change effect is executed based on acceptance of the operation of the start switch 12, and ends when a predetermined time period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game is accepted before the minimum game time elapses from the start of rotation of the reels for the N-th game, and the N+1-th game is received. When the stage change effect is executed, before the operation of the stop switch 13 relating to the N+1th game becomes effective, the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is displayed so as to be visible. It is By configuring in this way, the stage change effect is finished at the timing when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image is visible, so that the player can appropriately grasp the game situation. Then, the game can be progressed without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, before a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time elapses from the start of rotation of the reels related to the N-th game, the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1-th game is accepted, and the N+1-th game When the stage change effect is executed in the game, it is assumed that the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visually displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 relating to the N+1th game becomes effective. On the other hand, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time has passed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game and before the minimum playing time has passed, the N+1th game is played. When the operation of the start switch 12 related to is received and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, at the time when the operation of the stop switch 13 related to the N+1th game becomes effective, the stage change effect It may be configured so that the execution is not finished. Even if the operation of the start switch for the (N+1)-th game is received immediately before the minimum game time elapses from the start of the rotation of the N-th reel, the stage change effect is executed before the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective. If the UI image is displayed so that it can be seen after the game ends, the stage change effect execution period becomes extremely short, and the player may miss the stage change effect. , the execution period of the stage change effect can be guaranteed, so that the stage change effect can be appropriately executed so that the player does not miss it.

Further, even when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game is operated. Before it becomes effective, the execution of the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be displayed so as to be visible. By configuring in this way, the stage change effect is completed at the timing when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image can be visually recognized, so that the player can appropriately grasp the game situation. Then, the game can be progressed without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game, the operation of the stop switch 13 related to the N+1th game is valid. It may be configured such that the execution of the stage change effect is not completed at the point in time. In this way, when the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed, in other words, when the player is not in a hurry to proceed with the game, When the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, the player can pay more attention to the stage change performance by configuring so that the execution of the stage change performance is not finished.

As for the execution timing of one stage change effect, it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and if it ends with the passage of time, it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and a predetermined stop operation (first stop , 2nd stop, or 3rd stop), it is executed based on a predetermined stop operation (1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop), and ends with the passage of time If so, it may be configured to have Also, the first stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the lapse of time, but the second stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and stops after a predetermined stop operation. The execution timing may differ depending on the type of stage change effect, such as ending based on (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop).

Further, regarding the UI images, it may be configured such that all the UI images are visible while the demo screen is being displayed, and the UI image A is invisible (not displayed or displayed more than the demo screen). lower priority), and UI image B (image indicating the number of credits) and UI image C (image indicating the number of payouts) may be displayed so as to be visible. With this configuration, the player can appropriately grasp the state of the game regardless of whether the demo screen is being displayed.
In addition, all UI images may be configured to be invisible while the demo screen is displayed, or all UI images may be visible for a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed. Although displayed, all UI images may be configured to be invisible during a specific period different from the predetermined period during display of the demo screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demonstration screen.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute an effect A in which the background image corresponding to the effect stage cannot be visually recognized (the effect may be finished in one game, or may be a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games), and the effect stage is formed. In the situation where the coast stage is set, if the effect A is executed, the execution of the effect A will be completed at a predetermined timing after the end of the N-th game (timing at which the final stop operation is completed). , the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the processing related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet for the N+1th game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted, etc.) The background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed again without executing the stage change effect, and the background image is displayed again (if the background image is a moving image, the background image is displayed from the beginning and effect A is executed. It is conceivable to display the continuation of the previously displayed background image.) may be configured to display an image indicating the name of the production stage. The image indicating the name of the production stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without being displayed as a UI image, and then the display may be terminated. It should be noted that when the same background image is displayed again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be output by voice from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be output by voice from the speaker. .

In addition, it may be configured so that the stage change effect can be executed after the execution of the effect A is completed. stage change effect executed at the timing when the process related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet for the next game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted, etc. , the stage change effect executed under other circumstances may be configured to be a stage change effect with a different display mode. With this configuration, for example, when a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after the effect A is executed in the first game is executed, the effect A is continued until the previous game. It is possible to accurately grasp the state of the game, such as being able to grasp what was being executed.

Further, even if the image indicating the name of the current production stage is not set as a UI image and is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the execution of the stage change production, then it is hidden. When it is determined that the stage change effect and the above-described effect A are executed in the game (in this case, the effect A is executed after the stage change effect is completed), the current effect stage may be configured not to display the image showing the name of By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately switch the effects.

In addition, a predetermined timing after the end of the final game of the advantageous interval (a game that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous interval and becomes a game of the normal interval from the next game) is performed, timing when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (depressed), etc.), the stage change effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify the shift from the advantageous section to the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the advantageous section continues.

In addition, a predetermined timing after the end of the final game of the normal section (the game that satisfies the transition conditions to the advantageous section and becomes the game of the advantageous section from the next game) is performed, the timing when the start switch 12 related to the next game is operated (depressed), etc.), the stage change effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify the shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game despite being in the advantageous section.

In addition, as a production stage, there is a predetermined production stage that is set only in the normal section and a specific production stage that is set only in the advantageous section, and the situation in which the predetermined production stage is set in the normal section Below, when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied and the transition to the advantageous section is made (timing when the final stop operation is completed, timing when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game is completed, bets related to the next game are A stage change effect may be executed at the timing at which the start switch 12 is operated for the next game, etc., and a transition from a predetermined effect stage to a specific effect stage may be performed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has occurred if the player is paying attention to the production stage.

A predetermined performance stage is configured to be set even when the power is turned off in a predetermined situation in which the power is off in an advantageous section and in a non-AT state, and the power is restored without changing the setting. A stage change effect may be executed before a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) of games are executed, and a transition from a predetermined effect stage to a specific effect stage may be performed. In this embodiment, when the setting is changed, the game is always started from the normal section. The flow of the game until the stage change performance is executed can be made similar to the game flow, thereby making it possible to prevent the game player from easily finding out whether or not the setting has been changed. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game with an average of less than 2 games is executed in the normal section, the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, so that the timing at which the stage change effect is first executed after turning on the power is It is configured so that the timing is substantially the same when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

In addition, the type of stage change effect (or the mode of stage change effect) is different between the stage change effect executed in the game in the normal section and the stage change effect executed in the game in the advantage zone. may By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section by visually recognizing the stage change effect.

Also, in the game in which the stage change effect is executed, it may be configured so that the effect other than the stage change effect is not executed. Also, in the game in which the stage change effect is executed, the effect based on the operation of the stop switch 13 may not be executed (the effect not based on the stop operation may be executed) except for the stage change effect. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect.

Further, as the stage change performance, a stage change performance A that can be executed after the end of the predetermined continuous performance and a stage change performance B that can be executed other than after the end of the predetermined continuous performance may be provided. In this case, whether stage change effect A can be executed or not is determined not based on the internal lottery result, but whether stage change effect B can be executed or not is determined based on the internal lottery result. different ratios). Note that the stage change effect A and the stage change effect B may be configured to have different effect modes, or may be configured to have the same effect mode.

Next, the volume of the effect stage BGM, the stage change effect BGM, the error notification sound, etc. will be described.
In this embodiment, the volume level can be adjusted, and when the volume level is high, the volume output from the speaker is relatively high, and when the volume level is low, the volume output from the speaker is relatively low. is configured to be Although the following description assumes that the volume level is set to the maximum value, the configuration may be the same even if the volume level is set to a value other than the maximum value.
It should be noted that it may be configured to have a sound whose volume output from the speaker depends on the volume level and a sound whose volume output from the speaker does not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that reports the first error (recoverable error) depends on the volume level, but the volume of the error notification sound that reports the second error (unrecoverable error) depends on the volume level. It may be configured not to. Note that the distinction between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether it is a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, and can be set as appropriate.

First, in the "non-AT mode", at least the coastal stage and the town stage can be set as the production stage, and the production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. there is For example, on the coast stage, BGM during the coast stage is output from the speaker, and on the town stage, BGM during the town stage is output from the speaker. The effect stage BGM is a sound that is continuously (repeatedly) output during a period in which sounds such as a predetermined effect sound and a predetermined error notification sound are not output. Note that the effect stage BGM may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after the game ends, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the stage change production A or the stage change production B can be executed on either the coastal stage or the town stage, and when the stage change production is executed, a sound corresponding to the stage change production is output from the speaker. configured to be output. The sound volume of the stage change effect is configured so as not to depend on the effect stage before the stage change effect is executed. It should be noted that the stage change effect sound may be configured to end output when a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after the game ends, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the town stage) during "non-AT". is configured to be large. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect. When the stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous for the player than the stage change performance A, the stage change performance B is executed rather than the maximum volume of the sound when the stage change performance A is executed. The maximum sound volume of the time sound may be configured to be larger, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the execution of the stage change performance B.例文帳に追加

In addition, during "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the average volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the town stage). is configured to be large. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect. When the stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous for the player than the stage change performance A, the stage change performance B is executed rather than the maximum volume of the sound when the stage change performance A is executed. The maximum sound volume of the time sound may be configured to be larger, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the execution of the stage change performance B.例文帳に追加

Next, in "during AT", at least the volcano stage can be set as the production stage, and the production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. For example, in the volcano stage, BGM during the volcano stage is output from the speaker as the BGM of the volcano stage. Also, it may be configured to execute the stage change effect even during "AT", and in this case, the maximum volume of the stage change effect sound is larger than the maximum volume of the effect stage BGM. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect as in the case of "non-AT".

Among the sounds output during "AT", the sound with the highest volume is the navigation voice output when the push order navigation is executed (for example, the voice for navigating the push order such as "Left!") or the character may be configured to be a conversational voice for conversation.

Next, regarding the "error notification sound", regardless of the production stage or game state, a predetermined error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the game machine detects the error) and notifies the predetermined error. output when When an error is notified, an image showing the content of the error is displayed on the liquid crystal at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the output of the error notification sound.

In this embodiment, BGM during an error and an error voice are output as sounds during notification of a predetermined error. The error voice is a voice such as "Please call the store clerk".

Also, with respect to a predetermined error, the maximum volume of the error voice is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during the error. If the maximum sound volume of the BGM during an error is louder, the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or an effect. can be accurately conveyed to the player.

Further, for a predetermined error, the average volume of the error voice is higher than the average volume of the BGM during the error. If the average sound volume of BGM during an error is larger, the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a performance. can be accurately conveyed to the player.

Although the hopper-related error was exemplified as the predetermined error, it is only an example, and may be applied to other errors such as selector-related errors, and all errors including the first error and the second error may be applied. It may be applied to errors and is configured to satisfy the above configuration with at least one error.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is It is louder than the average sound volume of the production stage BGM of "non-AT". In addition, the maximum volume of the stage BGM for the “AT” production stage is higher than the maximum volume of the stage change production sound for the “non-AT” production stage, and the average volume of the BGM for the “AT” production stage The volume is higher than the average volume of the sound of the stage change effect "non-AT". By configuring in this way, the game can be played without impairing the exhilarating feeling during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is the average volume of the BGM during error. louder than the volume. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is the average volume of the error voice. is larger than With this configuration, when a predetermined error occurs during AT, the BGM during AT is output at a volume higher than the predetermined error annunciation sound after the predetermined error is cancelled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background music during AT from becoming inaudible, and to progress the game without impairing the refreshing feeling during AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "not in AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the error BGM, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "not in AT" is the same as that of the error BGM. Lower than average volume. In addition, the maximum volume of the "non-AT" production stage BGM is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the "non-AT" production stage BGM is the average of the error voice. is lower than the volume of In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect "not during AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the BGM during the error, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect "not during AT" is It is smaller than the average volume of BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect "non-AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect "non-AT" is equal to the error voice. Lower than the average volume of medium voices. With this configuration, when a predetermined error occurs during non-AT, a predetermined error notification sound is output with a volume higher than that before the predetermined error notification, so that the predetermined error notification sound is output. It can make it easier to notice that an error has occurred.

In the present embodiment, the display priority of the images related to the stage change effect is set higher than the display priority of the UI images, so that the UI images are visible during at least a part of the stage change effect. However, by configuring the display priority of images related to the stage change effect to be lower than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image can be viewed even during the stage change effect. may
Moreover, it may be configured to execute a full-screen effect in which a predetermined display is performed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal, which is a different effect from the stage change effect. As a full-screen effect, for example, the image of a predetermined character and the famous lines of the predetermined character are displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display, suggesting that a so-called rare role such as a cherry or a watermelon has been won. , or when it is suggested that there is a possibility that advantageous benefits may be given to the player, such as a transfer lottery to AT or an addition of AT. It should be noted that the full-screen effects may be configured to have a plurality of types of full-screen effects. By setting the display priority of the image related to the full-screen presentation to be higher than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image may not be visible during at least a part of the full-screen presentation. Alternatively, the UI image may be visible even during the full-screen effect by setting the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect to be lower than the display priority of the UI image.
In addition, the stage change effect execution period (time required from start to end) may be configured to be longer than the full screen effect execution period, or the stage change effect execution period may be longer than the full screen effect execution period. It may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the screen effect.

Further, the display priority relationship between the image related to the stage change effect and the UI image and the display priority relationship between the image related to the full screen effect and the UI image may be configured as follows.
(1) Display priority of image related to stage change effect>Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect>Display priority of UI image (that is, at least one during stage change effect) The UI image cannot be seen during the partial period, and at least part of the period during the full screen effect)
(2) Display priority of image related to stage change effect>Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect<Display priority of UI image (that is, at least one during stage change effect) The UI image cannot be seen during the part period, but the UI image can be seen during the full screen production)
(3) Display priority of image related to stage change effect <Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect> Display priority of UI image (that is, UI image during stage change effect) can be seen, but the UI image cannot be seen at least part of the time during full screen production)
(4) Display priority of image related to stage change effect<Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect<Display priority of UI image (that is, during stage change effect and full screen effect) The UI image can be seen in any of the screen effects)
It should be noted that the relationship may always be one of (1) to (4) regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change effect to be executed, or the type of full screen effect, Depending on the game situation, the type of stage change effect to be executed, and the type of full screen effect, it may be configured to appropriately change which of the relationships (1) to (4) is to be used.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each effect.

In addition, if it is possible to play with 2 bets and play with 3 bets (games with 2 bets have a lower ball output rate than games with 3 bets), stage change effects may be executed in a three-bet game, but may not be executed in a two-bet game. With such a configuration, since the game with the two-bet does not give the player a sense of expectation, the player can be made to recognize that the game with the three-bet is more advantageous.

In addition, when it is possible to play a game with two bets and a game with three bets (a game with two bets has a lower ball output rate than a game with three bets), the UI image is , may be displayed in a three-bet game, but may not be displayed in a two-bet game. By configuring in this way, since a game with two bets gives the player a sense of incongruity, the player can be made to recognize that a game with three bets is more advantageous.

In addition, when it is possible to play a game with two bets and a game with three bets (a game with two bets has a lower ball output rate than a game with three bets), the UI image is , may be configured to be displayed in a game with a 3-coin bet and a game with a 2-coin bet. By configuring in this way, the same UI image as that for a three-coin bet is displayed even in a two-coin bet game. In the game, the stage change effect is not executed, etc.), so that the player can not be given a sense of expectation. It can be made to recognize that it is not a failure.

<Display mode of NEXT image>
In the present embodiment, the result of a predetermined lottery (lottery for whether to shift to AT, lottery for whether to shift to chance zone, AT add-on lottery, AT add-on special zone (AT add-on lottery) When executing a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games as an effect to notify of whether to shift to a period with a high probability of It is configured to be able to display an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the effect is to be continued. The display mode of the NEXT image will be described below.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of continuous effects in which NEXT images are displayed. In FIG. 46, the game progresses from "1" on the upper left to "7" on the lower right. After "7", "8" is displayed when an advantageous result is reported to the player, and "9" is displayed when an unfavorable result is reported to the player after "7". Also, "S" in the drawing indicates the start switch 12, and "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13. As shown in FIG.

At "1" in FIG. 46, the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), and characters of the continuous effect title "Repel the shark!" has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", it means that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and the operation of the stop switch is disabled.

At "2" in FIG. 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which the shark swims from right to left is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which the shark swims from left to right is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 46, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous effect is completed and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 relating to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the lower right of the liquid crystal. .

In "4" of FIG. 46, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal after receiving the third stop operation. After accepting, the character "NEXT" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal, and the character "NEXT" slides from the lower left of the liquid crystal to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right position of the liquid crystal, "NEXT" may be displayed in such a manner that the characters of . Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed so as to slide and move from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving) is less visible than when it is stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (characters are displayed faintly, a different image is displayed instead of the "NEXT" characters, or It may be configured to be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed with an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses the game in the order of the start switch 12→left reel 8a→middle reel 8b→right reel 8c. You can make progress feel smoother. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) after the effect corresponding to the reception of the third stop operation is executed. is configured as follows.

At "5" in FIG. 46, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started. Here, an effect is displayed in which a character on a boat confronts a shark.

At "6" in FIG. 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which a shark attacks is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "7" in FIG. 46, the second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation, the display area of the liquid crystal is divided into two, and the character attacks with a spear and the shark attacks. Comes with a rendition and is displayed.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 46, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image regarding the result of the continuous effect (predetermined lottery result) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation. It is At "8" in FIG. 46, it is notified that the predetermined lottery has been won. This is a case of informing that the player has not been selected, and the text "Lose...?" and the image of the shark are displayed.

In FIG. 46, the "NEXT" image is displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal as shown at "4" in FIG. 46, and the image "Repel!" is displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal as shown at "8" in FIG. , and "9" in FIG. 46, the image of "Defeated...?" is displayed on the upper left corner of the liquid crystal, so that it is displayed in different display areas of the liquid crystal. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the images have different meanings.

In addition, in a plurality of different continuous effects, the image for notifying that the predetermined lottery of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect has been won has a different display mode (characters are different, display positions are different, etc.). , and the NEXT images of the first continuous effect and the NEXT image of the second continuous effect may be configured to have the same display mode. For example, when notifying that a predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the first continuous effect, "Repel" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal to notify that the predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the second continuous effect. In this case, the display mode is such that "Victory" is displayed on the upper right of the liquid crystal, and it is conceivable that the display modes of the NEXT images of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are the same. In the case of such a display mode, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of the continuous effect between different continuous effects.

In addition, although FIG. 46 shows an example in which the effect is switched for each stop operation of the player, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is configured to progress as time elapses after the start switch 12 is operated and the game starts. may For example, even if the stop switch 13 is not operated after "1" in FIG. 46, the effect progresses according to the lapse of time, and the effect may progress to "4" in FIG.

<BGM during continuous production>
Next, the BGM output during the continuous performance will be described based on the continuous performance described with reference to FIG. The flow of the continuous effect in FIG. 46 is omitted because it is as described above.

When indicated by "1" in FIG. 46 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first game of the continuous performance is started), a predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. When "1" in FIG. 46, the BGM corresponding to the effect that the continuous effect starts is output, and at the timing of "2" in FIG. BGM corresponding to the performance may be output.

Thereafter, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation (“2” to “4” in FIG. 46), but the continuous effect BGM is continuously output. Here, after the third stop operation is performed, the next game start operation (insertion of the first medal, operation of the 1-bet switch, operation of the MAX bet switch, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. If not, the effect displayed in response to the third stop operation (the effect displayed by the third stop operation is looped in a situation where the effect cannot proceed any more) and the NEXT image remain displayed. Thus, the BGM during continuous production is also continuously output (when the BGM during continuous production is reproduced to the end, it returns to the beginning and is reproduced in a loop). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat during the continuous performance, which may result in an advantageous result for the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent another player from easily taking a seat when the player is away for a restroom break or the like.

In addition, if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without any bet operation or settlement operation after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped, the demo screen will be displayed. When it is displayed, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and the BGM in the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed. It may be silent. Further, when the sub-switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the third stop operation is performed and the full reel stops, and the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed. When is displayed, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and the BGM in the menu screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the menu screen is displayed. may be silenced.

In addition, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the adjustment operation is performed after all reels are stopped, the BGM during continuous production is output when the demo screen is displayed. may be stopped and the BGM in the demonstration screen may be output instead, or when the demonstration screen is displayed, the output of the BGM being continuously produced may be stopped to silence.

In addition, the demo screen may be configured not to be displayed during the continuous effect. In this case, after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped, no bet operation or settlement operation is performed for a predetermined time. When (for example, 60 seconds) has passed, the volume of the BGM during the continuous performance may be lowered, or the volume of the BGM during the continuous performance may be silenced.

Further, the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during the continuous effect. In this case, the sub-switch 20 is operated after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped. However, the menu screen is not displayed, and the BGM being continuously produced is continuously output. After that, the demo screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since all reels were stopped, or the demo screen may not be displayed.

Subsequently, at timing "5" in FIG. 46, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started.

After that, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation (“6” to “7” in FIG. 46) (the output of the BGM during the continuous effect is continued), and the third stop operation (see FIG. 46). 46 "8" or "9") is performed, and when an image related to the result of the continuous effect (sometimes referred to as a result image) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation, the BGM during the continuous effect is displayed. The output is stopped, and BGM or SE (sound effect) relating to the result of the continuous production is output. Note that once the BGM or SE related to the result of the continuous effect is output, it does not loop, and the output ends when the reproduction time elapses. In addition, as BGM or SE related to the result of the continuous effect, when a predetermined lottery is won, BGM or SE indicating winning (for example, SE with an impression of lively, bright, flashy) is output. It is configured to output BGM indicating non-winning or SE (for example, SE with an impression of disappointment, dark, plain) when not winning, and SE indicating winning when set to the same volume level , may be configured to be louder than the volume of SE indicating non-winning.

In this way, during the continuous effect, the BGM during the continuous effect is continuously output while the NEXT image is being displayed, but the BGM is stopped while the image relating to the result of the continuous effect is being displayed. . When the result of the continuous performance is displayed in this way, unlike the middle of the continuous performance, the sound is silenced, so that the final game of the continuous performance can be clearly notified.

<Display Mode of NEXT Image and Images Concerning Results of Continuous Effects>
Next, the display mode of the NEXT image of each continuous effect and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the flow of a continuous effect (sometimes called a second continuous effect) different from the continuous effect (sometimes called a first continuous effect) shown in FIG. In FIG. 47, the game progresses from "1" on the upper left to "7" on the lower right. After "7", "8" is displayed when an advantageous result is reported to the player, and "9" is displayed when an unfavorable result is reported to the player after "7". Also, "S" in the drawing indicates the start switch 12, and "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13. As shown in FIG.

At "1" in FIG. 47, the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), and characters of the continuous effect title "Let the flowers bloom!" has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", it means that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and the operation of the stop switch is disabled.

At "2" in FIG. 47, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image of the ground where nothing is blooming is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 47, the second stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flower buds are appearing is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 47, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers do not bloom and clouds flow is displayed as an effect in response to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous effect is completed and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 relating to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the lower right of the liquid crystal. .

In "4" of FIG. 47, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal after receiving the third stop operation. After accepting, the character "NEXT" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal, and the character "NEXT" slides from the lower left of the liquid crystal to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right position of the liquid crystal, "NEXT" may be displayed in such a manner that the characters of . Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed so as to slide and move from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving) is less visible than when it is stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (characters are displayed faintly, a different image is displayed instead of the "NEXT" characters, or It may be configured to be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed with an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses the game in the order of the start switch 12→left reel 8a→middle reel 8b→right reel 8c. You can make progress feel smoother. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) after the effect corresponding to the reception of the third stop operation is executed. is configured as follows.

At "5" in FIG. 47, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started. Here, an effect is displayed in which flowers do not bloom and rain clouds flow.

At "6" in FIG. 47, the first stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers are not blooming and it is raining is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "7" in FIG. 47, the second stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and as an effect in response to the second stop operation, flowers are not blooming and it is raining with thunder.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 47, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image regarding the result of the continuous effect (predetermined lottery result) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation. It is At "8" in FIG. 47, it is notified that a predetermined lottery has been won. This is the case of notifying that the lottery has not been won, and the characters "Sorry!?" and the image of the flower bud are displayed.

Here, when comparing the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, the display mode of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display mode of the image related to the result of the continuous effect ("Repel" in the first continuous effect) !” or “Defeated...?” image, and in the second continuous effect, the image “Blossoming!”

Games that notify the results of continuous effects often execute effects that are important for gaming machines (so-called selling points of gaming machines). Interestingness can be improved by changing the display mode of the image regarding the result of the production.

Also, although not shown, in the game following the game in which the result of the continuous effect has been notified, if it is notified that the predetermined lottery has been won, a second game clearly indicating that it has been won 1 After a specific effect (for example, display of "Bonus confirmed" or "Congratulations!", lighting of a predetermined lamp on the gaming machine in rainbow colors, etc.) is performed, and it is announced that the player has not won the predetermined lottery. If so, a second specific effect (for example, darkening the liquid crystal display, performing a stage change effect, etc.) indicating that the continuous effect has ended in failure is performed, and the background image of the normal game state is displayed. Here, the first specific effect is configured to give a brighter impression than the second specific effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 46 and 47, the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are each executed over two games, and the NEXT image is displayed once each. For example, the first continuous effect is configured to be executed over a maximum of three games, and configured so that the NEXT image can be displayed twice in total after the third stop operation in the first game and after the third stop operation in the second game. You may That is, the NEXT image may be displayed twice at maximum in the first continuous effect, and the NEXT image may be displayed once in the second continuous effect.

When configured in this way, the number of times the NEXT image is displayed is greater in the first continuous effect than in the second continuous effect, and the degree of expectation for winning a predetermined lottery is higher.

Further, in the first continuous effect, the expectation of winning the predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, it is configured such that the greater the number of times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the predetermined lottery. By configuring in this way, when the NEXT image is displayed, not only can the presentation be continued, but also the expectation of the continuous presentation can be aroused. In the NEXT image when the NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be the same NEXT image, or the second NEXT image may be the first NEXT image. It may be larger than the image, and the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be composed of different colors for the NEXT characters and the surrounding colors.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image>
Further, when the above-described UI image is configured to be displayed, the UI image and the NEXT image displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display relating to the continuous performance that affects the profit of the player, it is possible to concentrate the results of the continuous performance on the player.

Also, the display priority of the NEXT image may be lower than the display priority of the UI image. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp the state of the game even during the continuous performance.
Also, the display areas of the NEXT image and the UI image may be different display areas so that the images do not overlap each other. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp both the progress of the continuous effect and the game.

<Display area for telops and NEXT images during continuous production>
Next, the display area of the telop and the NEXT image during the continuous effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, a telop (hereinafter sometimes referred to as telop display, telop effect, subtitles, subtitle effect, or text information) refers to characters' lines and narration according to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display. It refers to performance.

In the continuous effect shown in FIG. 46 or FIG. 47, a telop relating to the continuous effect may be displayed during the continuous effect. The display of the telop is displayed according to the progress of the continuous production that changes in chronological order. In addition, when the progress of the continuous effect changes according to the operation or stop operation of the start switch 12, a telop may be displayed according to the operation or stop operation of the start switch 12.

Also, the telop is displayed in the lower display area in the liquid crystal, and the size of the telop display area varies depending on the number of characters to be displayed. In addition, the display area of the telop is configured so that there is a display area of the NEXT image in a straight line in the left-right direction.

Here, the telop display and the NEXT image are configured so that the display areas do not overlap. Specifically, in a game during continuous performance in which the NEXT image is displayed, telops are displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in a game during continuous performance in which the NEXT image is not displayed, and are configured so as not to overlap the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in the game in which the result of the continuous effect is notified, the NEXT image is not displayed, so the telop is displayed with a relatively longer number of characters than in the game during the continuous effect in which the NEXT image is displayed. may Also, if the telop has a large number of characters, the telop may be displayed over a plurality of lines so that the NEXT image and the display area of the telop do not overlap. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop.

In FIG. 48, the telop consists of four characters "What?"

When the NEXT image and the telop are displayed at the same time, the NEXT image may be displayed with an effect at a predetermined period, while the telop may be a fixed image without the effect. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the telop.

Further, when displaying a telop in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be displayed at a predetermined timing after the telop is displayed.

Also, the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be configured so that the display does not end with the lapse of time. When configured in this way, during the continuous effect, from a predetermined timing after the end of the game (the timing when the third stop operation is received, the timing when all the reels are stopped, the timing when the payout process is finished, etc.) to a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured so that it does not shift to the demo screen even after one minute has passed, and is configured to continue displaying the NEXT image and telop until the next game start operation (bet operation, start switch 12 operation, etc.) is performed. You may In addition, even during the continuous performance, the demo screen is displayed when a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined timing after the end of the game, and the NEXT image and the telop continue to be displayed until the demo screen is displayed. The display of the NEXT image and the telop may be terminated at the timing of transition to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop, and it is possible to make it easier to grasp the state of the game.

Further, when the number of telop characters to be displayed in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed is large, the telop may be displayed first, and then the NEXT image may be displayed after the display of the telop is completed. With this configuration, the period during which the NEXT image is displayed and the period during which the telop is displayed can be made different. can be displayed in

The display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the telop may overlap, but in this case, the display priority of the NEXT image should be higher than the display priority of the telop. preferred. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp that the continuous effect will continue in the next game.

<Display mode until the NEXT image is displayed>
Next, the flow until the NEXT image is displayed will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 49, when the NEXT image is displayed, an unrecognizable character (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a slide image) displays a trajectory moving from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and the slide image is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal. It shows a case where the NEXT image is displayed when moving downward. The slide image may be an image such as "1" to "4" in FIG. 49 that cannot be recognized as a character or an object (an image showing an afterimage in "1" to "4" in FIG. 49), Images of specific objects other than characters such as "5" to "8" in FIG. 49 (images of baseballs in "5" to "8" in FIG. 49) may be used.

At "1" or "5" in FIG. 49, in the game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after receiving the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, after the time t1 has passed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or when the start switch 12 is After the time t1 has passed since the operation, a slide image is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal.

At "2" or "6" in FIG. 49, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, the liquid crystal The slide image has moved to near the center of the bottom. Note that t2>t1.

At "3" or "7" in FIG. 49, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after the time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 or after the time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the liquid crystal The slide image has moved to the bottom right of . Note that t3>t2.

At "4" or "8" in FIG. 49, in the game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after the time t4 has passed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 or after the time t4 has passed since the start switch 12 was operated, the slide The display of the image ends, and the NEXT image is displayed on the lower right of the liquid crystal. Note that t4>t3.

By moving the slide image from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal in this way, the player's attention can be attracted, so that the player can recognize the NEXT image after the slide image is displayed.

Further, the display area of the slide image and the display area of the push order navigation image may be configured so that at least a portion thereof overlaps. Further, the display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the push order navigation may be configured so that at least a part thereof overlaps. However, in this case, the slide image and the NEXT image are displayed after the third stop operation.

With this configuration, the display of the push-order navigation image is terminated when the third stop operation is performed, so that the push-order navigation image and the slide image or the push-order navigation image and the NEXT image are displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the push order navigation image, the slide image, and the NEXT image can all be displayed without lowering the visibility.

In addition, the display of the slide image and the telop is configured so that at least a part of the display area overlaps, and there are cases where the display overlaps at the same time. The display priority of the slide image may be higher than the display priority of the telop, or conversely, the display priority of the telop may be higher than the display priority of the slide image.

In addition, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect (for example, the image of "Repel!" As for the timing of ending the display, the display is configured not to end depending on the elapsed time after the display of both the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking important information for grasping the progress of the continuous effect.

It should be noted that the NEXT image includes betting operations related to the next game (including betting operations by operating the MAX bet switch 18, betting operations by operating the 1-bet switch 19, and betting operations by manually inserting medals). The display is not ended even if the bet operation is performed, and the display can be ended at the timing when the start switch 12 is operated as the start operation of the next game, and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed by the bet operation related to the next game. It may be configured to end the display. By not ending the display of the NEXT image by the bet operation in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the continuous effect will be continued even in the next game.

Further, the display areas of the NEXT image and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect are configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 46, the NEXT image is displayed in a predetermined display area at the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the images related to the result of continuous effects are displayed in predetermined display areas at the bottom left and top left of the liquid crystal. ing. In this way, by varying the display position depending on the displayed image, it is possible to appropriately guide the player's viewpoint and make the player gaze at the entire liquid crystal.

Further, as described above, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect may be configured to be displayed according to the elapse of time after the start switch 12 is operated as the game start operation. It may be configured to be displayed according to the elapsed time since the third stop operation (sometimes referred to as the final stop operation) was operated.

Here, the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 is longer than the time (t1) from the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 to the display of the NEXT image. It is designed so that the time (t2) from when the stop operation is performed until the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed is longer.

Specifically, (1) the time from the operation of the start switch 12 to the display of the NEXT image is longer than the time from the operation of the start switch 12 to the display of the NEXT image. (2) The image related to the result of the continuous effect is displayed after the third stop operation is performed, rather than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. (3) The image related to the result of the continuous effect after the third stop operation is performed, rather than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (4) The continuous effect after the start switch 12 is operated is longer than the time from the third stop operation to the display of the NEXT image. It is designed to take longer to display an image of the results of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation until an image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed.

Also, as described above, the NEXT image is first displayed at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal, then moves to the lower right corner of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right corner of the liquid crystal, it stops there and is displayed. In other words, the NEXT image is configured such that the display start position (display start display area) and the display end position (display end display area) are different. On the other hand, the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed without moving from the start to the end of the display. In other words, the images relating to the result of the continuous effect are configured such that the display start position and the display end position are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while moving, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the continuous effect will be continued in the next game. In addition, by displaying the image related to the result of the continuous effect without moving the display position, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the continuous effect.

<Navi image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Here, the push order navigation image (sometimes referred to as stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may be applied to the above-described eye push navigation image and operation mode navigation image. .

In the present embodiment, for example, in a game in which the pressing order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery during AT, etc., an operation mode in which the stop switch is advantageous (the maximum game media that can be acquired in the game is awarded, etc.) It is configured to be able to display on the liquid crystal as a navigator image of the push order. Specifically, it is possible to notify six different pressing orders using the numbers "1", "2", and "3", and "1" indicates the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicates the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicates the stop button operated as the third stop.

In addition, the first stop operation or the third stop operation can be selected from two options (either the stop switch should be operated at positions 1 to 10 on the reel, or the stop switch should be operated at positions 11 to 20 on the reel. For example, either the image of 7 blue symbols or the image of 7 red symbols is notified together with the push order navigation image), and 12 types of operation modes can be notified by multiplying the 6 options of the push order. can be configured to The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal corresponds to the left reel 8a, and the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the liquid crystal corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal. The pressing order navigation image displayed corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the pressing order navigation image, it indicates the pressing order for operating the corresponding stop switches in the order of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c. Note that in this embodiment, a part of the push-order navigation image is referred to as a "push-order navigation image" such as "1", and the entire push-order navigation image is referred to as a "push-order navigation image" such as "123". sometimes referred to as

<Mode of push order navigation image>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the form of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 50, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation will be described as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are similarly configured.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and the display modes of the push order navigation image are "normal mode", "emphasized mode", "failure mode", and "success mode". is configured to have at least four of

A navigation number image is an image of numbers indicating the order of pressing. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers indicating the pressing order, or an image showing an effect around the numbers indicating the pressing order.

First, <1> in FIG. 50 is the normal mode push order navigation image, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should not be operated at present is displayed in the normal mode. It should be noted that the sound corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. Further, among the push-order navigation images in the normal mode, the push-order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next and the push-order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last are displayed separately. good too. In this case, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated at present is displayed. A mode in which the image is displayed smaller than the forward navigation image is conceivable.

Next, <2> in FIG. 50 is the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be currently operated is displayed in the emphasized mode. It should be noted that the speaker S is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push-order navigation image displayed in an emphasized manner. For example, at the timing when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated, a voice saying "Left" is output. It should be noted that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger in the push-order navigation image in the emphasized mode than in the push-order navigation image in the normal mode. It is configured so that the stop switch to be turned on can be visually notified. Furthermore, not only the size but also the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode can be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, or the color and font different from those in the normal mode can be displayed. The stop switch may be notified visually in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 50 is a success mode push-order navigation image, and when the stop switch to be currently operated is operated (the stop switch corresponding to the push-order navigation image currently displayed in the emphasized mode is activated). is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode is displayed in the successful mode. That is, when the stop switch is operated in the correct operation mode, the pressing order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode changes to the successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch to be currently operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in the success mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, the next stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is output. is output from the speaker S), and a push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that the success mode push order navigation image is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the display is terminated.

Further, it may be configured such that when the stop switch is operated in the correct mode, an effect sound or voice (sometimes referred to as a success sound) indicating that the pressing order is correct is output from the speaker S. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the stop switch has been operated in a correct manner not only visually but also aurally.

Further, the push order navigation image in the success mode is configured such that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. It should be noted that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" of the pressing order navigation image in the emphasized mode and the pressing order navigation image in the success mode are configured to have approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in the failure mode. When a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated (a stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is When operated), all currently displayed push order nav images are displayed in a failed mode. That is, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a failure mode, a voice indicating that the push order is wrong (for example, a voice such as "What are you doing?" may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or it may be configured not to output a sound indicating that the pressing order is incorrect. It should be noted that the push order navigation image of the failure mode is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) before the display is terminated. Also, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is not displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images is terminated immediately (for a time shorter than a predetermined time). may be configured as follows.

Also, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode, the size of the push order navigation image is the same as before the stop operation. It is configured to remain as it is. That is, the push order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode before the stop operation is displayed in the failure mode in the size of the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode before the stop operation is displayed. The image is configured to display the push order navigation image of the failure mode in the size of the normal mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time from accepting the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the successful mode push order navigation image is longer than the time from accepting the operation of the stop switch 13 to the failure mode pressing order navigation. It is configured to be longer than the time until the image display ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority due to success, and at the time of failure, it is difficult for surrounding players to recognize that the pushing order has failed, so that the interest in the game is increased. can be improved.

Further, it may be configured to display the push order navigation images in all modes of the normal mode, the emphasis mode, the success mode, and the failure mode with an effect, or to display an effect for at least one mode of the push order navigation image. It may be configured to be displayed together.

Further, the push order navigation images in all modes of the normal mode, the emphasized mode, the success mode, and the failure mode may be configured to be displayed as moving images accompanied by motion, or the push order navigation images in all modes may be displayed still. It may be configured to display it as an image, or it may be configured to display at least one aspect of the push order navigation image as a moving image and another aspect of the push order navigation image as a still image.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is operated as a game start operation, display of all push order navigation images is started in a normal mode, and then the stop switch to be operated first at the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. The push order navigation image corresponding to the (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, when the start switch is operated as a game start operation, the display of the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first is emphasized, and the display of the other push order navigation images is started in the normal form. However, all push order navigation images are displayed as static images from the start of display until the stop switch operation becomes effective, and all push order navigation images are displayed in some way at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective. It may be configured to display as a moving image accompanied by movement.

By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch is valid, and it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order. At the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image. may be referred to as a stop-acceptable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated as a game start operation and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S. is configured as follows.

At this time, the timing of outputting the sound corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (for example, "Left") from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or the rotation of the reel has started. It may be the timing, or it may be the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the signal is output from the speaker S at any timing after the start switch 12 is operated until the operation of the stop switch becomes valid.

By configuring in this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a defect in the liquid crystal display, the stop switch to be operated first can be audibly recognized, so the progress of the game is not hindered and the push switch can be pushed. Order mistakes can be prevented.

Further, FIG. 51 shows an example of the case where the push order navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal in this embodiment. By displaying "123" on the liquid crystal, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a → corresponding to the middle reel 8b. This indicates that the correct order of pressing the stop switch is to operate the stop switch in the order of the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In FIG. 51, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be the first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the push order navigation image in the normal mode. displayed in the image.

<Configuration related to display of push order navigation image and power off>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image when the power is turned off during the display of the push order navigation image, and then the power is restored without changing the settings, winning the prize during AT - A1 condition device, correct answer An example will be described in which the push order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the push order of "left, middle, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Regarding the configuration related to the display of the push order navigation image and power off described below, the timing of power off and the form of the push order navigation image are different ("213" corresponding to "middle left and right" of the correct push order) (navigation image, etc.) can also be applied in combination as appropriate. Also, it can be applied in appropriate combination with <configuration related to display of push order navigation image and predetermined error>, which will be described later.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the speaker S outputs a voice saying "left". A voice such as "Left" corresponding to the stop switch to be operated at present may be simply referred to as a navigation voice.

After that, in a situation where the first stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, timing such as the timing at which the driving voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or the timing at which the driving voltage is supplied to the main control board and the command related to the pushing order is transmitted to the sub-control board. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as predetermined navigation timing), the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed again on the liquid crystal. Note that the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, at this time, the navigation voice is not output again. Further, at this time, the navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again, or may be configured to be output.

In this manner, when the power is turned off before the first stop operation after the push order navigation image is displayed, and then the power is restored, the push order navigation image is restored but the navigation voice is not restored. By not outputting the navigation voice when power is restored in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when power is restored can be reduced, and the push order navigation image can be quickly displayed.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the navigation voice is output again when the power is restored. By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

In addition, if it is configured to execute the above-described operation acceptance effect at the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, it is configured to display the push order navigation image along with the stop reception possible effect even when the power is restored. You may By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

In addition, when the power is restored, the pressing order navigation image may be displayed without the stop reception possible effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power failure recovery and quickly display the push order navigation image.

Also, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed as the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation. The navigation image may be configured to display only the "navigation number image". By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power failure recovery and quickly display the push order navigation image.

In addition, when the push-order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed for all the push-order navigation images that are displayed when the power is restored. may By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner, and then the power is cut off before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal be done. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). Thereafter, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. In other words, the same image display as after the reception of the stop when the first stop pressing order for the stop switch is the correct pressing order is performed.

At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, similarly to before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so "3" is displayed in the normal mode. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the pressing order navigation image. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "1" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored. It should be noted that the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "1" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power has been restored, the display will end after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this way, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the pressing order navigation image of "1" is displayed. is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. With this configuration, even if power is restored during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the power is turned off, and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In addition, since the success mode of pressing order navigation image is displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch was the correct mode before the power was turned off.

Further, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the pressing order navigation image of "1" is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Instead, the push order navigation image of "2" may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in a normal manner.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate the stop operation to be performed on the player at present.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and then the power is turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. be. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and then displayed in a failure manner. When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) elapses, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, the push order navigation image is not displayed even at the timing when the drawing process after the power is restored can be executed. Also, at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again after the power is restored. You can return to the game without raising your senses.

Further, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the first stop is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the predetermined navigation timing after power restoration Also referred to as navigation timing), the push order navigation image is configured not to be displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the display after power-off recovery according to the game situation before power-off, so that the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner before the power is turned off, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations (without carelessly raising the expectations).

It should be noted that if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power failure occurs before the second stop operation, all the push order navigation images will be displayed in a failure mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. It may be configured to be displayed again with . Also at this time, after the power is restored, the failure sound and the navigation voice indicating that the key was pressed in the wrong order are not output. Further, if the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With this configuration, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then power interruption occurs before the second stop operation, the first stop is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after power interruption and recovery. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then power is interrupted before the second stop operation, all push order navigation is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The image will be displayed in failure mode.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. Especially when the stop switch is operated incorrectly before the power is turned off, even if it takes several minutes to recover from the power off, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the gaming machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin even though the AT is in progress.

(4) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. . Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. Displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, as before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. "Navi background image" will be displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "2" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored. In addition, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this way, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, "1" is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after power failure recovery. The push order navigation image of "2" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode.

With this configuration, even if power is restored during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the power is turned off, and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the user can concentrate on the third stop.

Further, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the third stop operation, "1" is pressed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The forward navi image may be displayed in the successful mode, the push order navi image of "2" may be displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navi image of "3" may be displayed in the emphasized mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, since the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed. are displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the display of the push-order navigation images of the successful mode of "1" and "2" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. It is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push-order navigation images of "1" and "2" success mode are displayed again after the power has been restored, the display will end after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again. That is, before the power is turned off, the display mode of the push-order navigation image is switched for each stop operation. The display of the push-order navigation images of the success mode of "1" and "2" ends at the same timing.

With this configuration, even if power is cut off and restored during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the power cut off, and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful manner, it is possible to clarify that only the third stop remains and that the operation is performed in the correct push order.

Further, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the third stop operation, "1" is pressed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The forward navigation image may not be displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate the stop operation to be performed on the player at present.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, "123" The push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the pressing order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed in a failed manner, When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the mode was displayed, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, the push order navigation image is not displayed even at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored. It is possible to return to the game without raising the feeling.

Further, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after power failure recovery is performed. At the timing, the push order navi image of "1" may be displayed in the success mode, and the push order navi images of "2" and "3" may be displayed in the failure mode. Also at this time, the failure sound indicating that the keys are pressed in the wrong order is not output after the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by displaying again the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can grasp which stop operation he has made a mistake.

Further, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after power failure recovery is performed. It may be configured such that all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode at the timing. Also at this time, the failure sound indicating that the keys are pressed in the wrong order is not output after the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes to restore the power after the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed after the power is restored, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

(6) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and the power is turned off again. First, the start switch 12 is operated. Then, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and "3". The pressing order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Note that the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" (if the push order navigation of the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2"). is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the display is completed.

After that, the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" ends (if the configuration is made so that the push order navigation of the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" is displayed). is also finished), and in a situation where the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Is displayed. Also, at this time, a predetermined image (sometimes referred to as a GET image) indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode is displayed.

After that, in the situation where the stop operation has been performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again, and all the display of the liquid crystal ends. After that, even after the power is turned off and restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, none of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are output.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. Especially after the third stop, a new stop operation is not required, so by not reproducing the push order navigation image, it is possible to effectively make the user understand that there is no need to perform a new stop operation.

In addition, when the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is turned off again, at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, all the navigation images in the pressing order of "1" to "3" are in the successful mode. It may be configured to be displayed again with . At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify that all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner.

It should be noted that if the second power cut is before the execution of the payout process, the push order navigation image of "1" will not be displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, or will be displayed in a successful mode, and the "2" push will be displayed. The forward navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is configured to be displayed in an emphasized mode. For example, the push order navigation image may not be displayed at the navigation timing, so that the display contents after power failure recovery may differ depending on whether the situation before power failure is before or after execution of the payout process.

<Explanation about rare role navigation image>
Further, in the present embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning a rare role is displayed as "! !!” is displayed. The navigation background image of the rare combination navigation image and the navigation background image of the push-order navigation image have the same or substantially the same display mode. That is, the pressing order navigation image and the rare combination navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "number" and "!" are different. In addition, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when one of the rare roles is won, or a predetermined privilege (for example, the first hit of AT, the addition of AT, the transition to the chance zone, etc.) etc.) is determined to be granted, as an effect that suggests the possibility of being granted a predetermined privilege, the result of the internal lottery is configured so that it can be displayed even in games that are lost or replayed. You may

In addition, since the rare role navigation image has no advantage or disadvantage depending on the pressing order, it is always displayed in the same size in one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the emphasized mode like the pressing order navigation image). It is configured.

Also, in the game in which the rare combination navigation image is displayed, any timing (the timing when the start switch 12 is operated, the timing when the first stop operation is performed, the timing when the second stop operation is performed, the timing until the third stop operation is performed) is performed, timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (state in which the power is not turned on). Thereafter, the rare combination navigation image is displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. It should be noted that no matter what timing the power supply is cut off, the rare combination navi image that is displayed again when the power supply is restored is displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the player may have won the rare role. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from missing a rare role.

Also, in the game in which the rare combination navigation image is displayed, any timing (the timing when the start switch 12 is operated, the timing when the first stop operation is performed, the timing when the second stop operation is performed, the timing until the third stop operation is performed) is performed, timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare combination navigation image may not be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the pressing order navigation image with the rare combination navigation image.

The display of the rare combination navi images may be terminated one by one in response to the stop operation, or all rare combination navi images may be displayed at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. may be configured. Further, when the display of the rare role navigation image is ended one by one for each stop operation, regardless of which stop switch 13 is operated, the rare role navigation image on the left side and the rare role navigation image in the middle are displayed. , the display may be terminated in response to the stop operation in the order of the rare role navigation images on the right side, or the rare role navigation images at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed may be stopped. The display may be terminated in response to .

<Display of push order navigation image and configuration related to error>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a prescribed error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed, and after that prescribed error is cancelled. , Winning during AT - A1 condition device is won, the pressing order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the correct pressing order "left, middle right" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and a hopper empty error occurs as a predetermined error will be described as an example. It should be noted that the configurations relating to the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be appropriately combined and applied even when the timing of occurrence of the predetermined error and the mode of the push order navigation image are different. In addition, it can be applied in appropriate combination with the above-described <configuration related to display of push-order navigation image and power-off>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, as shown in FIG. The forward navigation image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, The error image may be displayed on the front of the liquid crystal to make it invisible), and the hopper empty error image is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed. The images are displayed in an enhanced manner and the "3" push order nav image is displayed in a normal manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so that they are displayed in the normal mode. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the pressing order navigation image of "3". Also, at this time, the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. It is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored.

After that, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" may be configured so that the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or after being displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is canceled, "1 ” is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of “2” is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of “3” is displayed in a normal manner. With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. . In addition, since the success mode pressing order navigation image is displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the hopper empty error The display of the images is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. may be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate on the stop operation to be performed at present.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 52, and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIGS. are configured to have different designs (patterns, number fonts, colors, etc.). In this manner, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be appropriately changed according to the game situation. For example, when the degree of expectation for adding AT is normal, the design shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is used to display the push order navigation image. may be configured to display In addition, it is possible to select an effect mode related to the effect tendency during AT, and when a predetermined effect mode is set, the push order navigation image is displayed with the design shown in FIGS. When the mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG.

With this configuration, the player can visually grasp the current game situation by designing the push order navigation image.

(2) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. Is displayed. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, The error image may be displayed on the front of the liquid crystal to make it invisible), and the hopper empty error image is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed. It is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navi image is displayed in a highlighted mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, as before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. ” and the “navigation background image” are displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "2" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored.

After that, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" may be configured so that the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or after being displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, then the predetermined navigation after the predetermined error is cancelled. At the timing, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. there is With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. . In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the user can concentrate on the third stop.

Further, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. may be configured to be displayed in an emphasized manner.

At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, since the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed. are displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push-order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2" are displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. is configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. It should be noted that the push-order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to be displayed again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or may be displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses after being displayed. That is, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image is switched for each stop operation. After the error is canceled, the display of the push-order navigation images of the success mode of "1" and "2" ends at the same timing.

By configuring in this way, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operating mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful mode, it is possible to clarify that only the third stop remains and that the operation is performed in the correct push order.

Further, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. may be configured to be displayed. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate on the stop operation to be performed at present.

(3) When the correct mode is performed up to the third stop operation, and then a predetermined error occurs First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c as the final stop operation is operated), the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a successful mode. Further, at this time, since all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image about the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error ends, and the navigation image of the pressing order of "1", "2" and "3" is displayed again in a successful mode. be done. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the push order navigation images of the success modes of "1," "2," and "3," respectively, before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Even if the display has ended due to the passage of time, it is configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cancelled. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or may be configured not to be displayed.

After that, the display of the success modes of "1", "2", and "3" may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed after being displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by reproducing all the push order navigation images in a successful manner after the predetermined error is cleared, it is possible to clarify that all the stop operations have been performed in a correct manner.

In addition, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and a hopper empty error occurs thereafter, an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. is terminated, the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode of "3" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Even if the hopper empty error is released, the display may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is canceled, and the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after being displayed again, or may be displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the predetermined error occurred, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner. .

In addition, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and a hopper empty error occurs thereafter, an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , and none of the push order navigation images of "1" to "3" are displayed. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
With this configuration, the player can recognize that the final stop operation has already been completed.

If a predetermined error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image of "1" to "3" is displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is canceled. , if a predetermined error occurs after the execution of the payout process, a predetermined navigation image of "1" to "3" is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after cancellation of the predetermined error. Depending on whether the situation before the occurrence of the error is before or after the execution of the payout process, the content of the display after the cancellation of the predetermined error may differ.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. to be displayed. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and then displayed in a failure manner. When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) elapses, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

Thereafter, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cancelled, so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, " 123” is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the pressing order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed in a failed manner, When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has passed after the display in the mode, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error is ended, the navigation image of the pressing order of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the pressing of "2" and "3" is displayed. The forward navigation image may be configured to be displayed in a failure mode. With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify in which stop operation the pushing order is wrong.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after cancellation of the hopper empty error, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failure mode. good. With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify in which stop operation the pushing order is wrong.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cancelled, so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

(6) When the first stop operation or the second stop operation is operated in an incorrect manner, and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation of "123" is performed. The image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image displayed at the timing of the failed push order is displayed in a failed manner, and after being displayed in a failed manner, a predetermined When the time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the push order navigation image ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cancelled, so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

<Configuration related to display of push order navigation image and reel stop warning image>
In addition, in a game in which a pressing order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and a pressing order navigation image is displayed, the stop operation is not performed for a predetermined time from the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation). (3 minutes) has elapsed, the reel stop warning image (also referred to as a stop promotion image) is displayed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time. occurs, and after that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected situation such as a power failure occurs during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so that pushing order mistakes can be prevented. As for the display mode of the push-order navigation image at this time, the above-described <configuration related to display of push-order navigation image and power-off> can be appropriately applied.

<Description of Errors and Winning Lamp Effect Regarding Hopper 44 Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between an error related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and a winning effect will be described.

In the production applicable to the present embodiment described below, winning by executing a winning lamp production based on winning a small role such as a winning role, or a winning lamp production based on a replay winning such as a replay role. The purpose is to make the player appropriately recognize the
It is another object of the present invention to allow a player to recognize the result of the game before the occurrence of a hopper empty error after winning a prize.

Errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and configurations related to winning lamp effects will be described below.

<Winning LED lamp>
It is a part (not shown) of an effect lamp (LED lamp) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights, blinks, or emits light when winning a prize. It is also a lamp that lights up or blinks when an error such as a door open error or hopper empty error occurs.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is described in the present embodiment, the description of the winning effect, the settlement effect and the input effect applicable to this embodiment, and the error and winning effect related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment. However, the details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be described below.

<push order>
A combination of symbols that can be won in a winning combination lottery (internal lottery). It is a role that pays out medals based on this. As symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the pressing order, there are a correct symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when operated in the correct pressing order and an incorrect symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when not operated in the correct pressing order. The correct symbol combination is a symbol combination in which, for example, a bell symbol mainly composed of yellow such as bell-bell-bell is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and 12 coins are paid out. As for the incorrect symbol combination, a symbol combination consisting of, for example, blank-replay-watermelon is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and one coin is paid out.

<role of Cherry>
A combination of symbols that can be won in a combination lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning cherry combination is displayed on the active line. It is a role that pays out medals. The symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is a symbol combination in which a cherry symbol mainly composed of red color such as cherry-cherry-cherry is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and one coin is paid out.

<Replay role>
A symbol combination corresponding to a winning replay combination that can be won in a winning combination lottery (internal lottery) is stopped and displayed on the active line. This is a combination that gives a replay. A symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination is a symbol combination in which a replay symbol mainly composed of blue such as replay-replay-replay is stopped and displayed on an active line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined that the winning determination process has won the minor combination. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting payout based on winning (whether adding credits or paying out from hopper 44), and ends payout based on winning. When doing so, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute prize effects such as output of game medal payout sound, back lamp effect (also referred to as BL effect), and execution of winning lamp effect. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a replay combination, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted. Also when a replay combination is won, the sub-control means can execute a winning effect such as outputting a winning sound for the replay combination or a back lamp effect based on a payout start command and a payout end command.

<Automatic input processing>
The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when it is determined by the winning determination process that the replay combination has won. In the automatic insertion process, the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game in which the replay combination won was automatically set without inserting game medals. The main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command according to the number of bets set (inserted) to the sub-control means when the automatic insertion process is executed. In this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute the insertion effect (output of insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but outputs the insertion sound in the same manner as when receiving the medal insertion command or the storage insertion command. You may perform a performance.

Also, even after the automatic insertion process, before starting a game with game medals set to bet or stored in credits (after setting the required number of bets and operating the start lever) As before), when the settlement switch is operated, settlement processing is possible. However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion processing, the set bet number is not paid out, and the number of game medals corresponding to the accumulated number of credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement processing).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect and input effect applicable to this embodiment, error related to the hopper 44 and winning effect etc. applicable to this embodiment Execute the production etc. described in . In addition, in this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is executed.

<Prize-winning performance>
It is an effect executed when game medals are paid out, or an effect executed when a symbol corresponding to a replay combination wins (displays), and is executed based on a payout start command, payout end command, etc. be. When the game medals are paid out, output of a payout sound indicating that the game medals are being paid out, a back lamp effect, and a prize winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to the replay combination wins, a winning sound indicating that the replay has won, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. It should be noted that it is also possible to prevent the execution of the winning effect when the winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery (internal lottery) and the wrong symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

<Output sound>
The game medal payout sounds output during execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound C which are different from each other. Payout sound A is normally (during non-AT) when the pushing order is won, and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is performed. This is the payout sound that is output to the . Payout sound C is a payout sound output when a cherry combination is won in a normal state (during non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is stopped, and payout (payout of one game medal) is performed. be.

The payout sound A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of the first sound (for example, the sound of duo) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, the first specific time ( For example, for 1 second), it is a payout sound that repeats the output of the first sound and ends. The payout sound A is the first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, for example, about 1.2 seconds). By outputting the sound for a period of time obtained by adding one specific time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound over a predetermined payout sound period longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can feel that the payout is being performed during the period when the payout sound is being output. As a result, it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and as a result, when the performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is likely to be executed without being canceled in the middle.

The payout sound C starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of the third sound (for example, the sound of za) until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, the fourth specific time ( For example, for 1.5 seconds), it is a payout sound that repeats the output of a predetermined sound and ends. That is, the payout sound C has a third payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned fourth specific time) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds) This third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A for the smaller number of game medals to be paid out. In this way, the payout sound C has a shorter period than the payout sound A, but is output for a longer period than the payout period. It is possible not to miss anything, and it is possible to recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (finished) by betting setting (receipt of medal insertion command and accumulation insertion command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (reception of start switch reception command).

In addition, after receiving the payout start command, the payout sound started to be output, and the payout sound was output until the specified time elapsed after receiving the payout end command, but when the payout start command was received, the payout end command A payout sound is generated for a predetermined period of time obtained by adding the first specific time and the fourth specific time to the time required from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). may be output.
Also, although the payout sound A and the payout sound C are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Output of winning sound>
There is a prize winning sound A as a prize winning sound output when a replay role is won. Winning sound A is a winning sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and outputs a fourth sound (for example, a sound of ji) until a fifth specific time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. By outputting the prize winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can be prevented from failing to hear it, and can recognize that the replay combination has won.
Winning sound output is not canceled (finished) by payout end command or bet setting (receipt of automatic insertion command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (reception of start switch acceptance command). The output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before the automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end before the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp performance includes a back lamp performance A, a back lamp performance C, and a back lamp performance D which are different from each other. The back lamp effect A is output (executed) when the pushing order is won at normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and 12 cards are paid out. It is a back lamp production. The back lamp effect C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry role is won in the normal time (during non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role is stopped, and one payout is performed. . The back-ramp effect D is a back-ramp effect output (executed) when a replay combination is won in a normal state (during non-AT) and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops.

The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in the first pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a first specific time ( For example, for 1 second), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off according to the first pattern. The back lamp effect A is a first back lamp effect period longer than the actual payout period (for example, about 1.2 seconds) (the first specific time is added to the actual payout period). period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout has been made. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for the first back lamp effect period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the payout is performed during the period during which the back lamp effect A is performed. It can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize it as if it is being played. Easier to execute without being cancelled. It should be noted that the back lamp effect A is canceled (finished) by betting setting (receipt of medal insertion command and accumulation insertion command).

The back lamp effect C starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in the third pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a first specific time ( For example, for 1 second), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off according to the third pattern, and the operation ends. The back lamp effect C is a third back lamp effect period longer than the actual payout period (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (the above first specific time is added to the actual payout period). period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout has been made. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect C for a third back lamp effect period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the payout is performed during the period during which the back lamp effect C is performed. It can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize it as if it is being played. Easier to execute without being cancelled. Like the back lamp effect A, the back lamp effect C is canceled (finished) at bet setting (receipt of the medal insertion command and the reserve insertion command).

The back lamp effect D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing the back lamp in a fourth pattern over a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp effect D over the fourth back lamp effect period (the same period as the first specific time), the player can easily recognize that the replay combination has won. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect D during the fourth back lamp effect period (output), it is as if the processing based on the replay combination is being performed during the period when the back lamp effect D is being executed. It can be expected to make the player recognize the next game and delay the start time of the next game. Furthermore, when the effect according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is executed without being canceled in the middle. easier to be The back lamp effect D is not canceled (finished) by bet setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (receipt of start switch acceptance command).

<Award-winning lamp performance>
The winning lamp effects include a winning lamp effect A, a winning lamp effect C, and a winning lamp effect D, which are different from each other. Winning lamp performance A is output (executed) when the pushing order is won in normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and 12 cards are paid out. It is a prize-winning lamp production. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry hand is won in a normal time (during non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry hand is stopped, and one payout is performed. . Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect output (executed) when a replay combination is won in a normal time (during non-AT) and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops.

Winning lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats lighting and extinguishing of the yellow winning LED lamp until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern). The lighting and extinguishing of the winning LED lamp are repeated in the fifth pattern for one specific time (for example, one second), and the process ends. Winning lamp effect A is a first winning lamp effect period longer than the actual payout period (for example, about 1.5 seconds). period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout has been made. Further, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect A for the first winning lamp effect period longer than the period during which the winning lamp effect A is being paid out, the payout is performed during the period during which the winning lamp effect A is being executed. It can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize it as if it is being played. Easier to execute without being cancelled. Winning lamp effect A is not canceled (finished) by betting setting (receipt of medal insertion command and storage insertion command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (reception of start switch reception command).

Winning lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in red until a payout end command is received (sixth pattern). The winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a sixth pattern for 6 specific times (for example, 2.3 seconds), and ends. Winning lamp effect C is a third winning lamp effect period (actual payout period plus the sixth specific time) longer than the actual payout period (for example, about 0.2 seconds). It is a period, which is the same length as the first prize winning lamp effect period), so that the player can easily recognize that the payout is being performed. Further, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period longer than the period during which the winning lamp effect C is executed, the payout is performed during the period during which the winning lamp effect C is executed. It can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize it as if it is being played. Easier to execute without being cancelled. Note that the prize winning lamp effect C is not canceled (finished) by betting setting (receipt of medal insertion command and storage insertion command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (reception of start switch reception command).

Winning lamp production D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in blue over a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern) . The winning lamp effect D is executed over the fourth winning lamp effect period (which is the same period as the seventh specific time and has the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), so that the player can replay. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that a prize has been won. Further, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period (outputting), it is possible to perform the processing based on the replay combination during the period during which the winning lamp effect D is executed. It can be expected to make the player recognize and delay the start time of the next game, and furthermore, when the effect according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed for a certain period of time, it is executed without being canceled in the middle. easier. Note that the prize winning lamp effect D is not canceled (finished) by bet setting (automatic input command), but is canceled (finished) by game start operation (receipt of start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the lighting and blinking patterns and the length of the execution period are the same, although the lighting colors of the winning LED lamps are different. By making only the colors different, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is the effect resulting from the winning of the role. In addition, by setting the length of the execution period to be the same as the length of the prize-winning lamp effect A, when the cherry combination or the replay combination is won, the next combination of symbols is displayed earlier than when the correct symbol combination of the pushing order combination is stopped. A game can be started, but since the prize winning lamp effect is being executed, the start of the next game can be expected to be delayed until the prize winning lamp effect ends.

Note that the prize winning lamp effects A and C executed the prize winning lamp effects until the first specific time or the sixth specific time passed after receiving the payout end command, but when the payout start command is received, the payout end command is used as a trigger. Winning lamp performance is executed for a predetermined time obtained by adding the first specific time and the sixth specific time to the time required from the start of payout to the end of payout (the longer one compared to the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). You may make it
In addition, the "first winning lamp effect period", "third winning lamp effect period", and "fourth winning lamp effect period" of the winning lamp effects A, C, and D are set to the "first payout effect" of the payout sound A. The "sound period" is the same period, but the "first prize winning lamp effect period", the "third prize winning lamp effect period", and the "fourth prize winning lamp effect period" are replaced with the "first payout sound period". Different periods may be used. It is preferable that the ``first winning lamp effect period'', the ``third winning lamp effect period'', and the ``fourth winning lamp effect period'' are the same period, and the maximum payout possible in one game. The length of time required for paying out the number of medals may be longer than the required time.

<Error notification>
When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door opening error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the obtained number display 27, and the sub control means uses a liquid crystal (display) The fact that an error has occurred is notified by the speaker S and the prize-winning LED lamp. The prize-winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period in which it is notified that an error has occurred. The prize winning LED lamp lights up in red even when the winning of the cherry role is won, but when an error is reported, the red lighting is continued, so that the pattern is different from that when the cherry role wins, and the occurrence of the error is reported. It is possible to discriminate whether it is the one that is being awarded or the one that is notifying the winning.

<Payment performance>
This is a performance executed when the game medals are settled, and output of a settlement sound (settlement performance) indicating that the game medals are paid out and a voice to the effect that the settlement is completed are performed. Since the performance using the winning LED lamp and the back lamp is not executed in the settlement performance, even if the payout is performed, it can be easily recognized that the performance is different from the performance based on the winning of the small combination or the replay combination.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 62. FIG. FIG. 53 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed, and FIG. 54 is the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed. FIG. 55 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed, and FIG. FIG. 57 is a time chart when the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch is performed after the payout processing based on the winning of the replay combination is completed, and FIG. FIG. 58 is a time chart when the game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed, and FIG. FIG. 60 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch after the automatic insertion processing based on the winning of the replay combination is completed. FIG. 61 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch. FIG. 62 is a time chart when the payout is not normally performed after the winning (when the hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. It is a time chart.

Although ON and OFF are used in FIGS. 53 to 62 for convenience of explanation, the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, payout processing / settlement processing / winning lamp effect (winning LED lamp) / BL effect / settlement effect / error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates a state of execution, OFF indicates a state of execution It means that when the state changes from OFF to ON, the process or the like is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. ON of payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. With respect to the payout sound/throwing sound/winning prize sound, ON indicates that the sound is being output, and OFF indicates that the sound is not being output. The MAX bet lamp/medal insertable lamp ON indicates a lighting state, and OFF indicates a lighting state. The MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medals have passed through the medal selector 34 normally (an insertion sensor provided in the medal selector 34 detects the game medals), and OFF indicates that the game medals have not been inserted. indicates ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. ON of the error display indicates a state in which an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates an error code display or an error screen display. is not performed.

It is possible to combine with the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, result notification effect, push effect, and comment effect described above, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in FIGS. 31 to 41 and times in FIGS. t0 to t5, t17 and t18 are the same timing.

<When the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed>
FIG. 53 shows a case where the winning of the pushing order role is achieved by operating in the correct pushing order and stopping display of the correct symbol combination. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts payout processing, and the sub-control means outputs payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) based on the received payout start command, and outputs a winning LED lamp. Winning lamp effect A (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) and back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) in the back lamp are started. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds when normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A as the winning effect for the period T1 (first specific time).

After the payout process is completed at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . At the timing of time t2, the main control means lights the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since the MAX bed switch was not operated, the MAX bed lamp continues to light up. At the timing of time t5, since the period T1 has passed from the timing of time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A, prize winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp effect period, and the first winning lamp effect period. As described above, at the timing after time t1, the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A and the back lamp effect A are continued, and the MAX bet lamp is turned on. It is also appropriate for the player to recognize that the payout has been made by continuing the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, and to be able to set the bet by the MAX bet operation. can be made to recognize, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed>
FIG. 54 shows a case where the operation is performed in the correct pushing order and the correct symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a winning of the pushing order role. Until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch is not performed after the payout processing based on the winning of the pushing order is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch is performed. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4 (During the T2 period) As an effect for throwing-in, a throw-in sound A (referred to as throw-in sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the output of the throwing sound A are combined, whereby the payout is performed. While making the player aware of this, it is possible to make the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At the timing of time t3, the output of the payout sound A and the winning lamp effect A are continued, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the bet setting can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 43, the operation of inserting with the MAX bet switch was explained, but even if the operation of inserting with the 1-bet switch or inserting medals is performed, the back lamp effect A is terminated and the inserting sound A is output in the same manner.

<When the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the win of the cherry hand is completed>
FIG. 55 shows the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line and the winning is won. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts payout processing, and the sub-control means outputs payout sound C (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) based on the received payout start command, and outputs the winning LED lamp. Winning lamp effect C (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) and back lamp effect C in the back lamp (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) are started. The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds when normally executed (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At the timing of time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub control means outputs payout sound C as a winning effect until timing t24 for a period of T4 (fourth specific time), and executes winning lamp effect C until timing t5. During the T6 period (sixth specific time), the back lamp effect C is continued for the T1 period (first specific time) until the timing of time t23.

After the payout process is completed at the timing of time t19, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . At the timing of time t20, the main control means lights the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since the MAX bed switch was not operated, the MAX bed lamp continues to light up. (In this figure, it is assumed that enough credits have been accumulated to set a bet by manipulating the MAX bet switch. If it is impossible to set a bet by manipulating the MAX bet switch, the At the timing, game medals can be inserted, but the MAX bet lamp does not light up.)

At the timing of time t23, the sub-control means terminates the back lamp effect A because the period T1 has passed since the timing of time t19. That is, the period from time t0 to t23 can be said to be the third back lamp effect period. At the timing of time t24, the sub-control means terminates the output of the payout sound C because the period T4 has passed since the timing of time t19. That is, the period from time t0 to t24 can be said to be the third payout sound period. At the timing of time t5, the sub-control means terminates the winning lamp effect C because the period T6 has passed since the timing of time t19. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, at the timing after time t19, output of payout sound C, winning prize lamp effect C and back lamp effect C are continued, and even when various situations such as turning on the MAX bet lamp are combined, smooth control is possible. It is also appropriate for the player to recognize that the payout has been made by continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, and to be able to set the bet by the MAX bet operation. can be made to recognize, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed>
FIG. 56 shows a case where the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry combination is stopped and displayed on the active line and the winning is won. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed, and at the timing of time t21, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C, and from time t21 to time t22 (During the T2 period) As a throwing effect, three bets are made by the throwing operation by the MAX bet switch, so the throwing sound A (referred to as throwing sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing after time t21, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the output of the insertion sound A are combined, and thus the payout is performed. While making the player aware of this, it is possible to make the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At the timing of time t21, the output of the payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C are continued, but by ending the back lamp effect C, it is possible to visually recognize that the bet has been set.

In addition, in FIG. 56, it is assumed that enough credits have been accumulated to set a bet by operating the MAX bet switch. , the game medals can be inserted, but the MAX bet lamp does not light up. Also, although the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch has been described, even if the insertion operation by the 1 bet switch or the medal insertion is performed, the back lamp effect C is similarly terminated and the insertion sound A is output.

<When the game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed>
As shown in FIG. 57, at the timing of time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command indicating that the number of game medals to be paid out is 0 to the sub control means, and the sub control means receives the payout start command. Output of winning sound A (referred to as winning sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter), winning lamp effect D of the winning LED lamp (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter), and back lamp effect D of the back lamp (Indicated as BL effect in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is started. Based on the payout start command, the sub control means outputs a winning sound A as a winning effect for a period of T5 (fifth specific time), a winning lamp effect D for a period of T7 (seventh specific time), and a back lamp effect D for a period of T1. Continue for (first specific time). At the timing of time t25, the main control means starts automatic throwing processing and transmits an automatic throwing command to the sub-control means. At the timing of time t26, after the automatic insertion process is finished, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion enable lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted after that, the lighted state is continued. At the timing of time T29, the sub-control means terminates the back lamp effect D because the period T1 has passed since the timing of time 09. That is, the period from time t0 to t29 can be said to be the fourth back lamp effect period. At the timing of time t5, the sub-control means terminates the winning lamp effect D because the period T7 has passed since the timing of time t0. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the fourth winning lamp effect period. As described above, at the timing after time t26, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the prize winning lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D while turning on the token insertion ready lamp, and winning a prize. By continuing the ramp performance D and the back ramp performance D, the player can be made to recognize that the payout has been made and can be made to appropriately recognize that medals can be inserted, thereby improving the performance of the game machine. can be planned. In this figure, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if the game medals cannot be inserted, the medal insertion enable lamp does not light up at the timing of time t26 (the blocker is turned on). Do not turn ON.

<When game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed>
As shown in FIG. 58, until the timing of time t26, it is the same as when game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion processing based on the winning of the replay combination is completed, and game medals are inserted at the timing of time t27. As a result, the main control means accumulates one game medal in the credit and transmits a reserve number command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means terminates the back lamp effect D based on the reception of the stored number command, outputs a closing sound B (referred to as a closing sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) once as a closing effect, and outputs the time It is output from timing t27 to timing t28. At the timing after time t27, the winning lamp effect D is performed, and smooth control is possible even when various situations such as the output of the input sound B are combined, thereby notifying the player that the replay combination has won. While recognizing it, it is also possible to recognize that it has been carefully inserted and one card has been stored, so that the performance of the game machine can be improved. Also, at the timing of time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the credits have been accumulated.
In addition, in this figure, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the number of accumulated credits is 48 or less). continuing.

<When payment operation is performed with the payment switch after the payout process is completed based on the winning of the pushing order>
As shown in FIG. 59, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pushing order is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the operation of the MAX bet switch is performed. Instead, the settlement switch is operated.
At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bed lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, prize winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A at time t3 without waiting for the elapse of T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. In addition, although a settlement sound is output as a settlement performance, performance using a back lamp, winning LED lamp, etc. is not performed. When the settlement process is started, the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output at the same time so that the player is not confused by the start of the settlement process. By ending the output of sound A, winning lamp effect A, back lamp effect A, and not performing effects using back lamps and winning LED lamps, etc., it is possible to accurately indicate that settlement processing different from payout processing is being performed. Players can be made aware of this.

<When the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed>
As shown in FIG. 60, until the timing of time t26, it is the same as when the game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion processing based on the winning of the replay combination is completed, and the settlement switch is operated at the timing of time t30.
At the timing of time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting of the token insertable lamp (turns off). Then, the sub control means terminates the prize winning lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the T7 period and the back lamp effect D without waiting for the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. In addition, although the adjustment sound is output, the performance using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed. By starting the settlement process, the winning lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D that were scheduled to continue for the period T7 and T1 are ended, and the effect using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed. A player can be made to recognize that settlement processing is being performed. In this figure, it is assumed that 19 or more credits have been accumulated after the automatic insertion process without reaching the upper limit.

<If the payout was not performed normally after winning the role of Cherry (when a hopper empty error occurred)>
As shown in FIG. 61, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means outputs payout sound C, winning lamp effect C, and back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. Start. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out, and the turntable continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels the output of payout sound C, prize winning lamp effect C, and back lamp effect C which have been executed. (After finishing the display), the error screen is displayed, and the winning LED lamp is used to notify the error. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are continuously executed until the timing of time t17. Until the timing of time t17, the winning LED lamp repeats lighting and blinking in red as a winning lamp effect, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification. It can be recognized that the winning lamp presentation has been switched to the error notification. The figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without even one coin being paid out after the start of the payout process. The timing at which the empty error occurs is a timing later than time t17 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals.

<If the payout was not performed normally after winning the prize for the role of Cherry (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 62, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means outputs payout sound C, prize winning lamp effect C, and back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. Start. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since the discharge port of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals, the payout of the game medals is not executed. At the timing of time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detected for 201 ms or more from the start of payout processing, so the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, terminates the payout processing, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub control means outputs the payout sound C that was being executed, the prize winning lamp effect C, and the back Cancel the lamp effect C (end the display) and display the error screen.

Since the payout sound C output, winning lamp effect C, and back lamp effect C are executed from the payout process start timing, they are executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs, so an error screen is displayed. It is possible to confirm the winning effect such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the game is played. Note that this figure shows a case where not even one coin is paid out after the start of the payout process and a hopper retention error occurs. If the hopper retention error occurs after the payout of , the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be the timing later than time t18 by the amount of payout of one game medal, outputting payout sound C, winning lamp effect C, back The period during which the ramp effect C is executed becomes longer.

<Change in mode>
The time to normally pay out 12 game medals is set to 1.5 seconds, and the time to normally pay out one game medal is set to 0.2 seconds, but the number of payouts and the payout process only add credits. The payout time may vary depending on whether the payout of game medals from the hopper 44 is included. In that case, the time for paying out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be longer than the time for adding one game medal to the credit. Conversely, the time for adding one game medal to the credit may be longer than the time for paying out one game medal from the hopper 44 .

In the prize-winning lamp production, the color according to the type of winning role (lights up in yellow when winning the role of pushing order and winning the correct pattern combination, and emits light in red when winning the role of cherry, and replays It emits light in blue when it wins a role), but it may emit light in a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning role. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that any winning combination has been won regardless of the combination of symbols (lots) that stop on the reels. In addition, the prize winning lamp effect can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination to be stopped on the effective line, thereby preventing erroneous recognition.
In addition, the common color regardless of the type of role may be the same white for all roles, or may be divided into several groups according to the type of role (Bell role, Replay role is white, Cherry role, Watermelon role is purple). ).

The prize winning lamp performance is executed for a period of time determined by the role after receiving the payout end command, but it may be performed for a period of time determined by the role after receiving the payout start command. For example, 2.5 seconds may be set when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination are stopped.
Although the execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the payout sound, it may be a different period. Also, although the execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp effect can be longer than the time (1.5 seconds) relating to the payout process and shorter than the time (3.5 seconds) required for setting the hopper empty error.

Although the prize-winning lamp effect A is executed normally (during non-AT), it may also be executed during AT. Also, the colors may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing and the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during AT. By not executing during the AT, the prize winning lamp presentation is executed each time for the correct symbol combination of the winning order, which has increased the winning frequency, so that the player can be prevented from being annoyed.
Similarly, other hands (cherry hand, replay hand) may be executed during the AT, or may be configured so as not to be executed during the AT.

The winning lamp effect does not end with the input operation by the MAX bet switch (receiving the accumulation insertion command) and the insertion of game medals (receiving the accumulation number command), but the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch (receiving the accumulation insertion command), It may be terminated by inserting game medals (receiving a reserve number command). After winning the replay combination, the automatic bet processing may be configured so that the winning lamp effect is not ended, and is ended when game medals are inserted after that.
The back lamp effect is terminated by the input operation by the MAX bet switch (receiving the accumulation input command) and the input of the game medals (receiving the accumulation number command), but it may be configured so as not to be terminated.

As the settlement effect, the effect using the winning LED lamp is not executed, but the effect using the winning LED lamp may be executed. The mode may be the same as the error notification performed when an error occurs, or may be a mode different from the error notification and the prize-winning lamp effect executed when the role is won. As a different aspect, any one of the winning LED lamp light emission color, lighting and blinking pattern, and time is different, and it is desirable to be able to recognize that it is different from the error notification and winning lamp performance.

When an error occurs, the winning LED lamp is used to notify the error, but when the power is turned on or when the door is opened, the winning LED lamp may be used to notify the error in the same manner as the hopper empty error. . When the power is turned on, it continues for a certain period of time after the power is turned on, and in the case of a door open error, it continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has elapsed since the door was closed. In these situations, it is possible to proceed with the game, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp effect will overlap. In the case of overlap, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp effect. Giving priority to error notification may be configured such that while error notification is being performed, the winning lamp effect is not executed even if the opportunity to execute the winning lamp effect is met. In addition, when the error notification is to be executed while the winning lamp effect is being executed, the error notification can be executed after the winning lamp effect is terminated.

Moreover, giving priority to the error notification can be performed by lighting the winning LED lamp, and lighting corresponding to the error notification during execution of the error notification. Specifically, when the opportunity to execute the winning lamp effect is satisfied, the winning lamp effect is executed, and when it is the period for executing the error notification, the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification, and the error When the period for executing the notification is terminated and the period for executing the winning lamp performance continues, the winning LED lamp can be configured to emit light corresponding to the winning lamp performance.

The prize winning lamp performance is executed when the correct symbol combination stops, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops in the game in which the winning combination is won. An advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed regardless of the order of pushing. Executed when winning a combination of no order of pushing (so-called shared bell) and the combination of symbols (combination of correct symbols) corresponding to the combination of no order of pushing is stopped. It may be configured as It may be configured to be executed when winning another role such as a watermelon role or a chance role.
Also, the length of time and period described in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

<Correct operation challenge performance installed in the game machine in the present embodiment>
The game machine in the present embodiment is equipped with an effect for informing only that the pushing order role has been won without notifying the correct pushing order when the pushing order role is won. called. In addition, an effect is provided in which only the fact that the winning combination is won is notified without notifying the correct spot pressing position when the winning combination is won. In addition, when the pressing order + spotting role is won, the correct pressing order + spotting position is not notified, but only the fact that the pressing order + spotting role is won is provided. It is called forward + eye-pushing challenge production. The pressing order challenge effect, the eye pressing challenge effect, and the pressing order+eye pressing challenge effect are collectively referred to as the correct operation challenge effect. The correct operation (correct pressing order or eye pressing position) refers to an operation in which the highest bell among the pressing order bells is stopped.

It should be noted that when the pressing order and the winning combination are won, the correct pressing order is reported but the correct pressing position is not reported, or the correct pressing position is reported but the correct pressing order is not reported. Often, in the case of such a mode, it may be referred to as a pressing order+eye pressing challenge effect, or may simply be referred to as a pressing order challenge effect or eye pressing challenge effect. In any case, these aspects are also called a correct operation challenge presentation.

In addition, in the correct operation challenge presentation, there is a mode in which only the first stop is not notified when the 6-choice push order is won (in other words, a mode in which the correct push order of the 3 choices of the first stop is guessed), and the second stop. It includes a mode in which a first stop is reported and a second stop is not reported (in other words, a mode in which the correct pressing order of two options for the second stop is guessed).

The correct operation challenge performance includes a mode of notifying that one of the positions of the pushing position is different when the winning combination of the three options is selected (in other words, a mode of making the remaining two positions of the pushing position guess).

When the symbol combination of the high bell is stopped by the player's operation after executing the correct operation challenge performance (when the correct operation challenge performance is successful), a privilege corresponding to the game state is given. For example, if it is normal time, it is an AT lottery or CZ lottery, and if it is during AT, it is a lottery related to extending the number of AT games (so-called extra lottery).

The correct operation challenge effect may be executed in a predetermined game state managed by the main control means, or may be executed by lottery when the correct operation challenge effect target role is won.

An example of reel arrangement for realizing the correct operation challenge effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63 .

As shown in FIG. 63, each reel has 20 symbols, and "yellow seven", "red seven", "bar", and "white seven" are provided as large symbols that are easy to spot. In addition, "Yellow Seven", "Red Seven", "Bar", and "White Seven" have different colors, and yellow, red, black, and white are more prominent than other designs. The large size and different colors make it easy for the player to recognize even when the reels are spinning. For advanced users, there is no problem even if "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Blank" are targeted.

An example of a condition device for realizing the correct operation challenge effect will be described with reference to FIG. 64 .

As shown in FIG. 64, one type of BB condition device, RB-B condition device, and RB-A condition device are provided as bonus condition devices. In addition, as winning or replay condition devices, a replay-A condition device, a winning-A1 to A6 condition device, a winning-B1 to B4 condition device, a winning-C1 to C12 condition device, and a winning-D1 to D8 condition device are provided. ing. It goes without saying that the condition device shown in FIG. 64 is only a part, and other condition devices may be provided.

In addition, in a plurality of specifications to be described later, some conditional devices are unnecessary, and not all the conditional devices shown in FIG. 64 must be provided. For example, the winning-A1 to A6 condition device and the winning-B1 to B4 condition device are necessary, but the winning-C1 to C12 condition device and the winning-D1 to D8 condition device may be unnecessary. In the specifications described below, the description is limited to the conditional devices that are always required, and the conditional devices that are not described may or may not be included.

65 and 66 are diagrams showing symbol combinations for each winning symbol or replay symbol. In the figure, the left reel column shows winning symbols corresponding to the left reel, the middle reel column shows winning symbols corresponding to the middle reel, and the right reel column shows winning symbols corresponding to the right reel. It shows the pattern.

67 to 69 are diagrams showing combinations of winning symbols or replay symbols for each condition device and control for each stop operation. For example, in the winning-C1 condition device of FIG. 67, the winning symbols of 01 to 04 and 09 to 104 are combined, the left reel is the first stop, and the left reel red seven symbol is pressed, and the middle reel If it is the second stop and the third stop on the right reel, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped, and if it is the first stop on the left reel and the white seven symbol on the left reel is pressed, the middle If the reel is the second stop and the right reel is the third stop, one of winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped, the left reel is the first stop, the right reel is the second stop, and the middle reel is the third stop. If it is 3 stops, any of the winning symbols 09 to 40 can be stopped, and if it is the middle reel 1st stop, the left reel 2nd stop, and the right reel 3rd stop, it will be 41 to 72. If any of the winning symbols is stoppable, the middle reel is the first stop, the right reel is the second stop, and the left reel is the third stop, any of the winning symbols of the winnings 41 to 72 can be stopped. , the first stop on the right reel, the second stop on the left reel, and the third stop on the middle reel, any one of winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped; If the reel is the second stop and the left reel is the third stop, it indicates that one of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped.

In addition, when the left reel is the first stop, the left reel red seven symbol is pressed, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped. Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a stop reception within the range where the Bell A symbol can be drawn in, and even if the bar symbol is stopped instead of the red seven symbol, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped. It's becoming

In addition, when the left reel is the first stop, the white seven symbol on the left reel is pressed, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop, any of winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped. Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a stop reception within the range where the Bell B symbol can be drawn in, and even if the Yellow Seven symbol is stopped instead of the White Seven symbol, any of the winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped. It has become.

67 to 69 do not describe all the winning symbols, but only necessary winning symbols. Therefore, there are some machines with different conditions that have the same winning symbol combination. For example, winning-A1 and winning-A2 in FIG. 67 describe the same winning symbol combination, but the stop control is different. Originally, in order to make the stop control of Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 different, it is necessary to make a different winning symbol combination such as adding a winning symbol of PB=1 to Winning-A2, but the explanation is complicated. is omitted. In other words, when the same winning symbol combination is described to perform different stop control, the winning symbol combination is different from each other by adding the undescribed winning symbol.

Also, in the winning-C1 to C12 and winning-D1 to D8 shown in FIGS. You may replace the stop symbols with yellow sevens and bars.

Also, the first stop may not have a symbol symbol, and the symbol symbol of the third stop may be symbol symbol. In this case, for example, if it is a 12-choice condition device such as winning-C1 to C12, the first stop is 3 choices of the pushing order, the second stop is 2 choices of the pushing order, and the 3rd stop is 2 of the hitting patterns. The number of correct answers is 12. Moreover, the second stop and the third stop may be in a mode in which the second stop symbol is pressed instead of the second stop symbol. In this case, for example, if it is a 12-choice condition device such as Winning-C1 to C12, the first stop is 3 choices of pushing order, the second stop is 4 choices of pushing order and eye-catching pattern, and the third stop is 1 The number of correct answers is 12.

67 to 69, "123" in the column of "Remark 1" indicates the left reel first stop, the middle reel second stop, and the right reel third stop, and "132" Left reel 1st stop, right reel 2nd stop, middle reel 3rd stop, "213" means middle reel 1st stop, left reel 2nd stop, right reel 3rd stop , "231" indicates the first stop of the middle reel, the second stop of the right reel, and the third stop of the left reel, and "312" indicates the first stop of the right reel, the second stop of the left reel This indicates a stop, a third stop on the middle reel, and "321" indicates a first stop on the right reel, a second stop on the middle reel, and a third stop on the left reel.

In addition, Remark 1 of Replay-A in FIG. 69 shows the stop control at the time of winning Replay-A. "Successful push of the red seven on the upper stage of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is first stopped, and the red seven symbol is pulled into the upper stage of the middle reel, and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the number of symbols becomes less than 1. , ``Failure to push the red seven on the upper stage of the middle reel'' means that the middle reel is first stopped and the red seven symbol is drawn into the upper stage of the middle reel, and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the number of symbols becomes 1 or more, or the middle reel is not the first stop, and ``successful pushing white seven in the middle reel frame'' means that the middle reel is first stopped, and the number of symbols is 2 when the white seven symbol is drawn into the upper part of the middle reel. It means that the stop operation is performed at the timing of less than, and "failure to press the white seven in the middle reel frame" means that the middle reel is first stopped and the white seven pattern is drawn into the upper row of the middle reel. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the number is 2 or more, or if the middle reel is not the first stop, "successful pushing the left reel red seven 5th frame" means the first stop of the left reel In addition, it means that the red seven symbol is pulled into the upper stage of the left reel and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the number of symbols becomes less than 5. It means that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the first stop is made and the red seven pattern cannot be pulled into the upper stage of the left reel, or the left reel is not the first stop.

The explanation using the reel arrangement and the conditional device combination related to the correct operation challenge performance described above is based on the premise that the effective line is one line in the middle, but not limited to this, the left reel upper row, the middle reel middle row, and the right reel Any one line such as the lower right downward line, the left reel lower line, the middle reel middle line, the right reel lower line, or the like may be used as the effective line. Moreover, even if the number of effective lines is not one, but a plurality of lines, it can be designed as appropriate.

Winning-B1 to B4 condition devices in FIG. 67 are condition devices that do not have a left reel first stop correct answer. Winning-D1 to D8 in FIG. 69 are also conditional devices without the left reel first stop correct answer. Such conditioning devices are sometimes referred to as biased bells.

A biased bell is one in which not all reels have a first stop correct answer, a given reel has no first stop correct answer, and only the remaining reels have a first stop correct answer. In other words, when three reels are provided, the correct pressing order for the first stop operation is only for two reels, so there are four types of correct pressing orders. For example, if there is no left reel first stop correct answer, there are only four correct pressing orders: center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center left. Similarly, when there is no middle reel first stop correct answer, there are only four correct pressing orders: left-center-right, left-right-center, right-left-center, and right-center-left. Similarly, when there is no right reel first stop correct answer, there are only four correct pressing orders: left-center right, left-right middle, middle left-right, and middle right-left. In addition, even when there is no first stop correct answer on the middle reel or when there is no first stop correct answer on the right reel, it is also referred to as a biased bell. Hereinafter, the biased bell will be explained using an example in which the first stop correct answer is not assigned to the left reel.

Note that the correct pressing order for the biased bell means the pressing order for obtaining a high bell, and the incorrect pressing order for the biased bell means the pressing order for obtaining a low bell or a small win. It means that it is the pushing order. In particular, regarding incorrect pressing order, when the reel that performs the AT lottery at normal times is stopped first and a low-level bell is obtained, or even when a small winning combination is displayed, a high-level bell cannot be obtained, so the pressing order Call it incorrect.

When a biased bell is provided, the expected value for payout of game medals is higher when operating in the stop operation order other than the left first stop, but if the operation is performed in the stop operation order other than the left first stop, the AT lottery will be left. By giving a colder treatment than the first stop or by not executing the AT lottery, the overall expected value of the ball output is more advantageous to operate with the left first stop. Although the AT lottery has been described, any or all of the lotteries related to the ball output, such as the AT add-on lottery, the CZ shift lottery, etc., may be preferentially treated with the left first stop.

At this time, since it is unknown in which order the player will stop the bells when winning the biased bell, the AT lottery is executed after all reels are stopped. For example, when the AT lottery is executed based on the symbol combination after all reels are stopped, the symbol combination of the single hand when the left reel is first stopped, and when the middle or right reel is first stopped The AT lottery can be executed based on the symbol combination of the one-symbol combination displayed only when the left reel is first stopped by structuring differently from the symbol combination of the one-symbol combination that can be stopped immediately.

Based on winning-A3 in FIG. 67, AT lottery is executed when winning symbols 09 to 40, which are winning symbols that can be stopped in the case of the first stop of the left reel, are stopped, but stop in the case of the first stop of the right reel. Possible winning symbols 105 to 120 are stopped, and when winning symbols 41 to 72 which are possible winning symbols are stopped in the case of the first stop of the middle reel, the second stop of the right reel, and the third stop of the left reel, AT lottery is not executed. By making the winning symbols to be different, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT lottery only by determining the winning symbols after all spinning drums are stopped, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, for example, when the AT lottery is executed after all reels are stopped, the AT lottery can be executed based on the pressing order information indicating that the left reel is stopped first. In this case, the symbol combination for the one-symbol combination when the left reel is first stopped is configured to be different from the symbol combination for the one-symbol combination that can be stopped when the middle or right reel is first stopped. may be configured to be the same. Further, the AT lottery may be executed based on the pressing order information indicating that the pressing order was stopped in the left, middle, right pressing order or the pressing order information that the pressing order was stopped in the left, right, middle pressing order, or that the left reel was stopped first. An AT lottery may be executed based on the pressing order information.

In the advantageous section, when the biased bell is won, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, the ball payout rate is originally the highest when the left reel is stopped first. If an instruction monitor instructing the left first stop is displayed on the instruction monitor each time the bell is won, the player is frequently expected to receive a privilege, and the AT winning probability is biased. A player perceives that a rare role higher than Bell (a rare role has a lower probability of winning than a biased Bell) is not won, or an instruction is displayed on an instruction monitor to calculate an instruction-inclusive role ratio. It is possible to prevent the number of payouts when a biased bell is won from being stored in the storage area of the number of payouts.

In addition, if the pushing order is incorrect when the biased bell is won, you may be able to get a one-piece role when the pushing order is incorrect, or the spilled eyes (payout number 0) of the pushing order bell may be displayed. Conceivable. As the number of payouts for such an incorrect answer, "1" is biased and occurs in the left first stop operation when the bell is won. (The difference between when the ball output rate is low and when the ball output rate is high becomes smaller). Therefore, by not adding the number of payouts 1 generated by the left first stop operation at the time of biased bell winning to the instructed combination ratio, the degree of freedom in designing payout balls is improved.

In addition, when the biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, a mode is conceivable in which the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control means but the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor. It should be noted that the production group number may be transmitted during the advantageous section but not during the normal section, or transmitted during both the advantageous section and the normal section. may be

In this case, for example, when the biased bell is won, "50" is transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means as the effect group number. After that, when the sub-control means receives ``50'' as the performance group number from the main control means, the sub-control means does not execute the correct operation challenge performance and executes the same performance mode as when the error is determined or the mode in which no performance is executed. In addition, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor at this time, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the unbalanced bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is not possible to determine whether the unbalanced bell has been won by the combination of stop symbols). recognizable).

Further, in the case where the performance group number is transmitted when the biased bell is won, it is understood that if the sub-control means stops the middle or right reel for the first time, a small winning combination can be obtained. There is a concern that the sub-control means may be tampered with so as to notify the first stop of the middle or right reel when "50" is received as the number. In order to reduce the effect of such illegal remodeling, the expected value of the differential number of coins during the biased bell winning or when the right reel is first stopped is set to less than 3 (when 3 is placed). For example, when a biased bell is won in a game with three bets, and 11 payouts are obtained with a probability of 1/4 among middle left, right, middle right, right left, right middle left (the difference is 8) ), the expected value of the difference number is 2 in any of the pressing orders of middle left/right, middle right/left, right/left middle, and right/center left, which is less than 3. With such a configuration, even if the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when the biased bell is won and the performance group number is received, there is no correct answer for the left first stop due to unauthorized modification of the sub control means. is reported, the expected value for the difference number is less than 3, so the difference number does not increase. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the pay-out rate due to unauthorized modification of the sub-control means.

In addition, if a biased bell is won in a game with three pieces, and 11 pieces are paid out with a probability of 1/2 among middle left, right, middle right, right left, right middle left (the difference is 8) In this case, the expected value for the number of difference is 4 and the multiplication number is 3 or more. By performing an instruction monitor display in advance that the correct answer is the first stop of the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel, there is no room for unauthorized modification of the sub-control means. In other words, there is no need to tamper with the sub-control means, and since the main control means notifies the pushing order, it is a regular game specification (the relevant information is included in the commanded role ratio).

In addition, it is conceivable that the performance group number is not transmitted to the sub-control means and the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor when the biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed.

In this case, for example, when the biased bell is won, the effect group number is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives a command to stop all reels from the main control means, it does not execute the correct operation challenge performance and executes the same performance mode as when the error is determined or a mode in which no performance is executed. In addition, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor at this time, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the unbalanced bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is not possible to determine whether the unbalanced bell has been won by the combination of stop symbols). recognizable).

<In the case of specifications that combine 6-choice pressing order bell and 4-choice pressing order bell (biased bell)>
As a specification of a game machine having a correct operation challenge effect, a specification that achieves both a bell for pressing 6 options and a bell for pressing 4 options (biased bell) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 67, winning-A1 to A6 and winning-B1 to B4 are 6-choice pressing order bells with no bias in winning-A1-A6, and 4-choice pressing order bells with bias in winning-B1 to B4. It has become.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with the 6-option pressing order bell, and the correct operation challenge effect is not executed with the 4-option pressing order bell>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the prize-award-A1 to A6 6-option pressing order bells without bias.

If the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the winning-A1 to A6 6-choice pressing order bell with no bias, when any of the winning-A1 to A6 is won, the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge presentation is executed. is not performed, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not performed when any of winning-A1 to A6 is won.

By configuring in this manner, for example, when the prize-A1 is won, the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of the prizes 01 to 08 is stopped, the instructed role ratio is calculated. Since it is possible not to store the number of payouts in the storage area of the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be paid out is improved. In addition, by not performing the instruction monitor display during execution of the correct operation challenge effect, the player can intuitively recognize that the stop operation may be performed arbitrarily.

In this mode, in the situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prize-A1 to A6 is won during AT, the instruction monitor display is not performed, and during non-AT and prize-A1 to In the situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any one of A6 is won, instruction monitor display is not performed, and the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any one of A1 to A6 is won during non-AT. In the situation where the instruction monitor is not displayed, the instruction monitor display is not performed, and the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the push order notification effect (push order navigation) is executed when any of the prize-A1 to A6 is won during the AT. may

By configuring in this manner, for example, when the prize-A1 is won, the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of the prizes 01 to 08 is stopped, the instructed role ratio is calculated. Since it is possible not to store the number of payouts in the storage area of the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be paid out is improved. In addition, by not performing the instruction monitor display during execution of the correct operation challenge effect, the player can intuitively recognize that the stop operation may be performed arbitrarily. In addition, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when notifying the pressing order during the AT, the lack of display on the instruction monitor allows the player to more intuitively recognize that the stop operation may be performed arbitrarily. can.

In addition, when the winning probability of the bell in order of pressing the 6th option and the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option are compared, the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option is set to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

Further, when the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 6th option is compared with the probability of winning the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option, the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 6th option may be higher.

By configuring in this manner, the winning probability of the correct operation challenge effect target role is increased, and the correct operation challenge effect can be easily executed at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the payout number of high bells for the 6-option pressing order bell and the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell are set to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell stops in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6-option pressing order bell is stopped. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the 4-choice order bell or the 4-choice push order bell.

Also, when comparing the payout number of high-level bells for the 6-option pressing order bell with the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell, the payout number of the high-level bell for the 4-option pressing order bell is larger. It may be configured as

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, it is possible to reduce the stress of the user who has failed in the correct operation challenge effect, and prevent the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 6-choice push order bell is won, a 6-choice challenge to guess one push order from 6 types of push orders and one incorrect push order for the first stop are notified. 4-choice challenge to guess one push order from four types of push orders by not notifying the second stop in the case of the correct answer (with two choices for the first stop correct push order), and the first stop correct answer Notify the pressing order and not notify the second stop, or notify one incorrect pressing order for the first stop (with two options for the correct pressing order for the first stop) and notify the second stop if the correct answer is correct and a two-choice challenge to guess one push order out of two kinds of push orders. No instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with the 4-option pressing order bell, and the correct operation challenge effect is not executed with the 6-option pressing order bell>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the 4-choice pressing order bell with a bias of winning-B1 to B4.

When the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the 4-choice pressing order bell with a bias of prize-B1 to B4, the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge presentation is executed when one of the prize-B1 to B4 is won. , and in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is not executed when any one of prize-B1 to B4 is won, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell, the correct operation challenge effect always fails at the first stop of the left reel. The AT lottery similar to the AT lottery performed in the state) is not executed. In other words, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed with the biased bell and the left reel is first stopped, the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery executed normally, or the AT lottery is executed. It has become a mode that does not.

By configuring in this way, for example, when Winning-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to notify that the high eye bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform the correct operation.

In this mode, in the situation where the correct operation challenge effect is executed when one of the prize-B1 to B4 is won during the AT, the instruction monitor display is performed, and during the non-AT and the prize-B1 to B4. In the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the above is won, the instruction monitor display is performed, and when any one of the prize-winning-B1 to B4 is won during the AT, the pushing order notification performance is executed. It may be a mode of performing an instruction monitor display.

By configuring in this way, for example, when Winning-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to notify that the high eye bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform the correct operation. In addition, since the instruction monitor display is performed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed and when the push order notification effect is executed, when the left reel can be stopped first and when the left reel must not be stopped first are clarified. can do.

In addition, when the winning probability of the bell in order of pressing the 6th option and the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option are compared, the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option is set to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the winning probability of the correct operation challenge effect target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the payout number of high bells for the 6-option pressing order bell and the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell are set to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell stops in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6-option pressing order bell is stopped. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the 4-choice order bell or the 4-choice push order bell.

Also, when comparing the payout number of high-level bells for the 6-option pressing order bell with the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell, the payout number of the high-level bell for the 4-option pressing order bell is larger. It may be configured as

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 4-choice push order bell is won, a 4-choice challenge to guess one push order from four types of push orders and two incorrect push orders for the first stop are reported. By not informing the second stop (with the first stop correct pushing order as one option), or by notifying the first stop correct pushing order and not informing the second stop, one of the two types of pushing orders can be selected. and a two-choice challenge to guess the order of the pushes. The instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<<When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 4th option pressing order bell and executing the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 6th option pressing order bell>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the prize-A1 to A6 unbiased 6-choice pressing order bell and the prize-B1 to B4 biased 4-choice pressing order bell.

If the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the winning-A1 to A6 6-choice pressing order bell with no bias, when any of the winning-A1 to A6 is won, the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge presentation is executed. is not performed, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not performed when any of winning-A1 to A6 is won. In addition, when the object of the correct operation challenge performance is the 4-choice pressing order bell with a bias of winning-B1 to B4, when one of the winning-B1 to B4 is won, the correct operation challenge performance is executed. A mode is adopted in which monitor display is performed and instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation in which the correct answer operation challenge performance is not performed when any one of prize-B1 to B4 is won.

By configuring in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether the six-choice correct operation challenge presentation or the four-choice correct operation challenge presentation is performed, thereby preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when the winning probability of the bell in order of pressing the 6th option and the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option are compared, the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option is set to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the winning probability of the four-choice correct operation challenge effect target combination is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at an arbitrary timing.

Further, when the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 6th option is compared with the probability of winning the bell in the order of pressing the 4th option, the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing the 6th option may be higher.

By configuring in this way, the winning probability of the six-choice correct operation challenge effect target role is increased, and the correct operation challenge effect can be easily executed at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the payout number of high bells for the 6-option pressing order bell and the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell are set to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell stops in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6-option pressing order bell is stopped. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the 4-choice order bell or the 4-choice push order bell.

Also, when comparing the payout number of high-level bells for the 6-option pressing order bell with the payout number for the 4-option pressing order bell, the payout number of the high-level bell for the 4-option pressing order bell is larger. It may be configured as

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 6-choice push order bell is won, a 6-choice challenge to guess one push order from 6 types of push orders and one incorrect push order for the first stop are notified. 4-choice challenge to guess one push order from four types of push orders by not notifying the second stop in the case of the correct answer (with two choices for the first stop correct push order), and the first stop correct answer Notify the pressing order and not notify the second stop, or notify one incorrect pressing order for the first stop (with two options for the correct pressing order for the first stop) and notify the second stop if the correct answer is correct and a two-choice challenge to guess one push order out of two kinds of push orders. No instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 4-choice push order bell is won, a 4-choice challenge to guess one push order from four types of push orders and two incorrect push orders for the first stop are announced. By not informing the second stop (with the first stop correct pushing order as one option), or by notifying the first stop correct pushing order and not informing the second stop, one of the two types of pushing orders can be selected. and a two-choice challenge to guess the order of the pushes. The instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of failures of the correct operation challenge effect>
Processing (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery, etc.) relating to the instruction function is executed according to the number of operations (lower bell is stopped) in the wrong answer pressing order when the correct operation challenge performance is executed.

For example, during AT, when winning any of A1 to A6, when executing a 6-choice correct operation challenge effect, the first correct operation challenge effect fails (operated in the order of pressing incorrect answers) Executes an extra lottery of 50 games with a probability of 2.5%, and if you fail in the second correct operation challenge production (operated in the order of incorrect answers), add 50 games with a probability of 5.0% If a lottery is executed and the 3rd correct operation challenge effect is unsuccessful (operated in the order of incorrect answers), an additional lottery of 50 games will be executed with a probability of 7.5%, and the 4th correct operation challenge effect will be performed. If you fail (operated in the order of pressing incorrect answers), an extra lottery of 50 games will be executed with a probability of 10%. Executes an extra lottery of 50 games with a probability of 50%, and if the 6th correct operation challenge effect fails (operated in the order of pushing incorrect answers), an extra lottery of 50 games is executed with a probability of 100%. Things are mentioned.

According to such a configuration, even if the player operates in the order of pressing the incorrect answers when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the probability of winning the additional lottery increases according to the number of incorrect answers (number of failures). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's willingness to play to decrease even if the player operates in the wrong order.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when one of the prizes -A1 to A6 is won, prizes 09 to 40 and prizes 105 to 120 are provided as prize patterns for incorrect pressing order. Prizes 09-40 are winning patterns that can execute AT lottery when not AT, and prizes 105-120 do not execute AT lottery when not AT (or execute AT lottery with a lower probability than prizes 09-40). ) is a winning design.

There is a possibility that winning 09-40 and winning 105-120 will be stopped when the incorrect answer is pressed in the correct operation challenge performance, but if the correct operation challenge performance fails, an addition is added according to the number of failures. The same lottery is executed for winning prizes 09-40 and winning prizes 105-120.

Further, a predetermined storage area for storing the number of failures of the correct operation challenge effect is initialized by initialization processing when the advantageous section ends. For this reason, for example, when the number of failures of the correct operation challenge effect is five times, the advantageous section ends, and even if the correct operation challenge effect is failed again in a new advantageous section, the correct operation challenge effect in the new advantageous section cannot be performed. An additional lottery is executed with the number of times of failure set to the first time.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as playing the game across the advantageous section.

In addition, when the number of failures is stored in a prescribed storage area for storing the number of failures of the correct operation challenge performance, the prescribed storage area is initialized at the time of winning the additional lottery corresponding to the number of failures.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit based on the number of failures and prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, when the number of times of failure of the correct operation challenge presentation is stored in a predetermined storage area, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the correct operation challenge presentation is successful.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit based on the number of failures and prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, when the number of times of failure of the correct operation challenge presentation is stored in a predetermined storage area, the predetermined storage area may not be initialized even if the correct operation challenge presentation is successful. In this case, the predetermined storage area is initialized at the time when the extra lottery corresponding to the number of failures is won.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit based on the number of failures and prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, as the execution mode of the correct operation challenge effect, the mode of guessing the pressing order has been described, but it may be a mode of guessing the pressing pattern, or a mode of guessing the pressing order and the hitting pattern.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of successes of the correct operation challenge effect>
Processing (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery, etc.) relating to the instruction function is executed according to the number of operations (the high-level bell is stopped) in the order of pressing the correct answer when the correct operation challenge performance is executed.

For example, winning a prize in the case of executing the game five times as a trigger for ending a predetermined game state-Stay for five games when executing a six-choice correct operation challenge effect when one of A1 to A6 is won If the number of successful (operated in the order of pressing the correct answer) is 1 in the correct operation challenge performance in a predetermined game state, an additional 10 games are given, and the correct operation challenge in a predetermined game state to stay for 5 games. If the number of successful performances (operated in the correct order) is 2, an additional 20 games are added, and the correct operation challenge performance in a predetermined game state of staying for 5 games is successful (in the correct order). If the number of times the player has been operated is 3 times, an additional 30 games are given, and if the number of times the player has succeeded in the correct operation challenge performance (operated in the correct order) is 4 times in a predetermined game state of staying for 5 games. 50 games are added, and if the number of successful correct operation challenge effects (operated in the correct answer pressing order) in a predetermined game state in which the player stays for 5 games is 5 times, an extra 100 games is added. , when the number of successes (operated in the order of pressing the correct answer) in the correct answer operation challenge effect in a predetermined game state in which the player stays for 5 games is 0 times, an addition of 20 games is given.

According to such a configuration, since the player's expectation can be increased step by step according to the number of times of the correct answer pressing order when the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, if the number of successful correct operation challenge effects (operated in the order of pressing the correct answer) in a predetermined game state in which the user stays for 5 games is 0, there may be a mode in which no addition is made, or during 5 games. If the number of successful (operated in the order of pressing the correct answer) in the correct operation challenge effect in the predetermined game state to stay is 0, even if the predetermined game state is extended until the correct answer is given in the correct operation challenge effect. Alternatively, a mode may be employed in which execution of the correct operation challenge effect five times is used as a trigger for ending a predetermined game state.

Further, a predetermined storage area for storing the number of successes of the correct operation challenge effect is initialized by initialization processing when the advantageous section ends. For this reason, for example, when the number of successes of the correct operation challenge presentation is four, the advantageous interval ends, and the predetermined storage area for storing the number of successes of the correct operation challenge presentation is 0 in a new advantageous interval.

According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to illegally prolong the life of the correct answer operation challenge performance by a game method that is not executed in a normal game, the initialization is performed at the end of the advantageous section, so that the damage caused by the illegal operation to put out balls can be reduced.

Further, as the execution mode of the correct operation challenge effect, the mode of guessing the pressing order has been described, but it may be a mode of guessing the pressing pattern, or a mode of guessing the pressing order and the hitting pattern.

<Processing when 4 or 2 options are selected in the correct operation challenge effect when the bell is won>
A description will be given of a mode of increasing the probability of correct operation being possible by notifying part of the operation modes when the correct operation challenge presentation is executed.

As described above, some operation modes may be notified when the correct operation challenge presentation is executed. For example, when the 6-choice push order bell is won, one of the first stop incorrect push order is notified (the first stop correct push order is set to two choices), and in the case of the correct answer, the second stop is not notified. 4-choice challenge to guess one push order from 4 types of push order, 6-choice push order When the bell is won, the first stop correct push order is notified and the second stop is not notified, or the first stop One incorrect press order for stop is reported (the first correct press order for stop is set to two choices), and in the case of the correct answer, the second stop is reported, so that one of the two types of press order is selected. 2-choice challenge, or when the 4-choice push order bell is won, notify two of the first stop incorrect push order (with the first stop correct push order as one choice) and do not inform the second stop, or There is a two-choice challenge in which one push order is guessed from two kinds of push orders by announcing the first stop correct pushing order and not reporting the second stop.

A case in which winning-A1 is won will be described specifically. In the case of executing the correct answer operation challenge performance when A1 is won, and when the first stop correct answer is notified and the two-choice challenge is executed, "1??" ” is displayed. The left "1" corresponds to the left reel, the middle "?" corresponds to the middle reel, and the right "?" corresponds to the right reel.

Here, when the player first stops the left reel, "-?" Also, the bell A symbol or the bell B symbol is stopped on the active line in the middle of the left reel. The "-" on the left side of the liquid crystal indicates that the correct operation has been performed, and other modes such as a mode in which nothing is displayed, a mode in which "○" is displayed, etc., can be designed as appropriate. When "-?" is displayed on the liquid crystal, it is unclear whether the correct operation for the second stop is the middle reel or the right reel. can.

Then, when the player stops the middle reel for the second time, "-?" Further, the bell A symbol or the bell B symbol is stopped on the middle active line of the middle reel. Although the liquid crystal display does not change even after the second stop, another mode may be such that the liquid crystal display changes, such as displaying "--?". If "-?" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct answer for the second stop is correct or incorrect, so you can have a sense of anticipation until the end. In this embodiment, it is determined that the correct answer is obtained when two bells A or B stop on the activated line. Therefore, a player who checks the main reel can understand whether the correct answer is given by the stop symbol. It is possible. In addition to this, it is also possible to make it impossible to know whether the main reel is correct or not until the third stop.

Then, when the player makes the third stop of the right reel, a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional number such as "+100" is displayed on the liquid crystal. In addition, the bell A symbol or bell B symbol stops on the active line in the middle row of the right reel, and either "bell A or bell B - bell A or bell B - bell A or bell B" is displayed. Symbol combination stops. In addition, since the processing related to the instruction function such as the addition lottery is executed according to the combination of symbols when all the reels are stopped or the pushing order information, a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" and the number of additions such as "+100" are displayed. The timing of displaying is after execution of processing related to the instruction function when all reels are stopped.

In addition, if the player first stops the middle reel or the right reel when winning-A1 is won, the display of "1?" Then, it is possible to hide the display. In addition, as a symbol combination displayed when all spinning drums are stopped at this time, any symbol combination of "replay - red seven, yellow seven, bar, or white seven - red seven, yellow seven, bar, or white seven". stops. In this case, at the time of the first stop, either the middle reel or the right reel will stop with any of the symbols "red seven, yellow seven, bar or white seven", so the middle reel or the right reel will be stopped for the first time. At this time, the pressing order is determined to be incorrect, and the process related to the instruction function to be executed when all reels are stopped is not executed, or a lower profit is given compared to when the pressing order is correct.

In addition, if the player stops the left reel first and the right reel secondly when Winning-A1 is won, "Bell A or Bell Any symbol combination "B--Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven--Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" is stopped. In this case, at the time of the second stop, any of the patterns of "red seven, yellow seven, bar, or white seven" will stop on the right reel, so when the right reel is stopped for the second time, the pressing order is incorrect. There is a mode in which the process related to the instruction function executed when all reels are stopped is not executed, and a mode in which a lower profit is given compared to when the pressing order is correct. Winning prizes 09 to 40 execute the processing related to the instruction function if the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, but if the stop occurs when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the processing related to the instruction function is not executed or the correct answer A profit with an expected value lower than the expected value of the profit that can be obtained when the operation challenge presentation is not executed is given.

<Perform the correct operation challenge effect according to the skill at the time of winning the replay>
In addition to the pressing order bell, the conditional device for executing the correct operation challenge effect can be a replay or a common bell, and the case where the correct operation challenge effect is executed in the replay will be described below. Note that the instruction monitor display is not displayed when the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed in the replay.

An example of executing the correct answer operation challenge effect when the replay-A shown in FIG. 69 is won will be described.

When the correct operation challenge effect is executed when the replay-A is won, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the stop operation position of the player.

For example, when the red seven is pushed to the upper stage at the first stop of the middle reel, the red seven symbol stops at the middle reel upper stage (the cherry symbol stops at the middle reel middle stage which is the effective line). Then, when the left reel and the right reel are stopped in an arbitrary stop order and stop timing, the replay 01 is stopped, and when the replay 01 is stopped when all reels are stopped, a process related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if the red seven can not be pushed to the upper stage when the middle reel is stopped for the first time, the replay 04 is stopped. No processing is executed, or a processing relating to an instruction function with a lower profit than when the replay 01 is stopped is executed.

Also, when the white seven is pressed in the frame at the time of the first stop of the middle reel, the white seven symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel (the blank symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, which is the effective line). Then, when the left reel and the right reel are stopped in an arbitrary stop order and stop timing, the replay 02 is stopped, and when the replay 02 is stopped when all reels are stopped, a process related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if the white seven cannot be pressed within the frame at the first stop of the middle reel, the replay 04 is stopped. This processing is not executed, or the processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when the replay 02 is stopped is executed. In addition, the process related to the instruction function executed when the replay 02 is stopped is the process related to the instruction function that provides a lower profit than the process related to the instruction function executed when the replay 01 is stopped. This is because it is less difficult to push the white seven pattern in the frame of the middle reel than to push the red seven pattern on the upper part of the middle reel (the number of patterns drawn is large).

Also, when the red seven is pressed within five frames when the left reel is first stopped, the red seven symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel (the red seven symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel, which is the effective line). Then, when the middle reel and the right reel are stopped in an arbitrary stop order and stop timing, the replay 03 is stopped, and when the replay 03 is stopped when all reels are stopped, a process related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if the red seven cannot be pressed within 5 frames when the left reel is stopped for the first time, the replay 04 is stopped. is not executed, or a process related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when the replay 03 is stopped is executed. In addition, the processing related to the instruction function executed when the replay 03 is stopped is the processing related to the instruction function that provides a lower profit than the processing related to the instruction function executed when the replay 02 is stopped. This is because it is less difficult to hit the red Seven symbol within the 5 frames of the left reel than to hit the white Seven symbol within the frame of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn in). .

In this way, by changing the combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the stop position when replay-A is won, the combination of symbols that can be stopped according to the stop position is stopped, and the combination of symbols is changed according to the combination of symbols at the time of full stop. It becomes possible to execute processing related to the instruction function. As an example of the processing related to the instruction function according to the symbol combination, the number of AT games is increased by 20 when replay 01 is stopped, the number of AT games is increased by 10 when replay 02 is stopped, and the number of AT games is increased by 5 when replay 03 is stopped. For example, the replay 04 is stopped and the number of AT games is not increased.

In addition, as described above, even when a common bell is won, the number of payouts does not change depending on the order of pressing regardless of the replay, the same mode as when winning the replay-A is used in which the processing related to the instruction function according to the position of the eyeball is different. may

<In the case of specifications that combine 12-choice pressing order + eyeball bell and 8-choice pressing order + eyeball bell (biased bell)>
As a specification of a game machine having a correct operation challenge effect, a specification that achieves both the 12-choice pressing order + eye-pushing role and the 8-choice pressing order + eye-pushing role will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 69, Winning-C1 to C12 and Winning-D1 to D8 are the 12-choice pressing order with no bias in Winning-C1 to C12 + bell, and Winning-D1 to D8 are biased. There are 8 choices of pressing order + eye-pushing bell.

<<If you execute the correct operation challenge effect with the order of pressing 12 options + the bell, and do not execute the correct operation challenge effect with the order of pressing the 8 options + the bell>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is winning - the 12-choice pressing order without bias of C1 to C12 + the bell to be pressed.

If the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is winning-C1 to C12 in an even 12-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell, the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge presentation is executed when winning-C1 to C12 is won. is not performed, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation in which the correct answer operation challenge presentation is not performed when prize-C1 to C12 are won.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the prize-C1 is won, the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of the prizes 01 to 04 is stopped, the instructed role ratio is calculated. Since it is possible not to store the number of payouts in the storage area of the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be paid out is improved. In addition, by not performing the instruction monitor display during execution of the correct operation challenge effect, the player can intuitively recognize that the stop operation may be performed arbitrarily.

In this mode, when any one of winning-C1 to C12 is won during AT, no indication monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and during non-AT and winning-C1 to In the situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any one of C12 is won, instruction monitor display is not performed, and the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any one of C1 to C12 is won during non-AT. In the situation where it is not, no instruction monitor display is performed, and in the situation where the press order + eye push notification effect (press order + eye push navigation) when any one of winning - C1 to C12 is won during AT is executed, the instruction monitor is performed. A mode of displaying may be used.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the prize-C1 is won, the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of the prizes 01 to 04 is stopped, the instructed role ratio is calculated. Since it is possible not to store the number of payouts in the storage area of the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be paid out is improved. In addition, by not performing the instruction monitor display during execution of the correct operation challenge effect, the player can intuitively recognize that the stop operation may be performed arbitrarily. In addition, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when notifying the pressing order and eye pressing during the AT, the player can more intuitively recognize that the stop operation can be performed arbitrarily by the absence of the instruction monitor display. can be made

In addition, when the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is compared with the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell, the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, when the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell is compared with the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell, the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell is higher. You may

By configuring in this manner, the winning probability of the correct operation challenge effect target role is increased, and the correct operation challenge effect can be easily executed at an arbitrary timing.

Also, the order of pressing 12 options + the number of payouts of the high bells of the bells to be pressed and the order of pressing the 8th options + the number of bells to be paid out of the high bells of the bells to be pressed are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell is stopped in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12-option pressing order + It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the winning bell is won or the 8-choice pressing order and the bell winning.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for 12-option pressing order + high-level bell and 8-option pressing order + high-level bell payout, the number of 8-option pressing order + high-level bell It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, it is possible to reduce the stress of the user who has failed in the correct operation challenge effect, and prevent the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge effect when the 12-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell is won, 12 types of pressing are performed by not informing the first stop correct pushing order and the hitting pattern and not reporting the second stop correct pushing order. A 12-choice challenge to guess the order of pressing one from the order + eye pressing + 12-choice challenge to guess the eye pressing, and the first stop incorrect answer pressing order, but not the eye pressing pattern (first stop correct pressing order + An 8-choice challenge to guess one push order out of eight kinds of push orders + eye push by not reporting the second stop correct push order (with four choices for eye push), and the first stop correct push order and eyes. The pressing pattern is not reported and the second stop correct pressing order is reported, or the first stop correct pressing order is not reported, but the spot pressing pattern is reported and the second stop correct pressing order is not reported. A 6-choice challenge to guess the order of pressing one of the pressings, and the correct pressing order for the first stop is reported, but the pressing is not reported and the correct pressing order for the second stop is not reported, and the incorrect pressing order for the first stop. , but do not notify the symbol (first stop correct pressing order + eye pressing as 4 options) to notify the second stop correct pressing order, or the first stop incorrect pressing order as one By announcing the target pressing pattern (with two options for the first stop correct pressing order) and not reporting the second stop correct pressing order, one pressing order is guessed from among four kinds of pressing order + eye pressing 4. 3-choice challenge and 3-choice challenge in which the correct pushing order for the first stop is not reported, but the symbol for the first stop is informed and the correct pushing order for the second stop is also reported, so that one of the three types of pushing order is guessed. , 1st stop correct pressing order is reported, but the marking pattern is not reported, and the 2nd stop correct pressing order is reported, the 1st stop correct pressing order and marking pattern are reported, but the 2nd stop correct pressing order is not reported. Or, by notifying one of the first stop incorrect pressing order and the symbol symbol, and notifying the second stop correct pressing order, one of the two types of pressing order + eye pressing will be guessed. a two-choice challenge; No instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with the order of pressing 8 options + the bell pressed, and the correct operation challenge effect is not performed with the order of pressing 12 options + the bell pressed>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the 8-choice pressing order bell with a bias of winning -D1 to D8.

When the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is the 8-choice pressing order bell with a bias of prize-D1 to D8, when one of the prize-D1 to D8 is won, the instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge presentation is executed. is performed, and in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is not executed when any one of prize-D1 to D8 is won, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

When the correct operation challenge performance is executed with the biased bell, when the left reel is first stopped, the AT lottery normally performed is not executed, and the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery normally executed. , or AT lottery is not executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to inform that the high eye bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform the correct operation.

In this mode, when any one of winning-D1 to D8 is won during AT, instruction monitor display is performed in the situation where the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and during non-AT and winning-D1 to D8. In the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the above is won, the instruction monitor display is performed, and during the AT, the winning-push order when any of D1 to D8 is won + eye-pressing notification performance is executed. In such a situation, an instruction monitor display may be performed.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to inform that the high eye bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform the correct operation. In addition, since the instruction monitor display is performed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed and when the push order notification effect is executed, when the left reel can be stopped first and when the left reel must not be stopped first are clarified. can do.

In addition, when the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is compared with the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell, the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the winning probability of the correct operation challenge effect target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at an arbitrary timing.

Also, the order of pressing 12 options + the number of payouts of the high bells of the bells to be pressed and the order of pressing the 8th options + the number of bells to be paid out of the high bells of the bells to be pressed are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell is stopped in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12-option pressing order + It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the winning bell is won or the 8-choice pressing order and the bell winning.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for 12-option pressing order + high-level bell and 8-option pressing order + high-level bell payout, the number of 8-option pressing order + high-level bell It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 8-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell is won, 8 types of pressing are performed by not informing the first stop correct pushing order and the hitting pattern and not reporting the second stop correct pushing order. An 8-choice challenge where you guess one push order + eye push from the order + eye push, the first stop correct answer push order, and the second stop correct answer push order without notifying the eye push pattern, the first stop correct answer The pressing order is reported but the marking pattern is not reported and the second stop correct pressing order is not reported, or the first stop correct pressing order is not reported but the highlighting pattern is reported but the second stop correct pressing order is not reported. A 4-choice challenge in which you guess one of the four types of pressing order + eye pressing, and the first stop correct pressing order is reported, but the eye pressing pattern is not reported, and the second stop correct pressing order is reported. , 1st stop correct pressing order and symbols are reported, but 2nd stop correct pressing order is not reported, or 1st stop correct pressing order is not reported, highlighting symbols are reported, and 2nd stop correct pressing order is reported. Thus, there is a two-choice challenge in which one of the two types of pressing order + eye pressing is guessed. The instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<<When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect with the order of pressing the 8 options + the bell pressed, and executing the correct operation challenge effect with the order of pressing the 12 options + the pressing bell>>
It is conceivable that the object of the correct operation challenge performance is the winning-12-choice pressing order with no bias of C1 to C12 + eye-button bell, and the winning-8-choice pressing order with bias D1 to D8 + eye-bell. .

If the object of the correct operation challenge presentation is winning-12-choice pressing order with no bias of C1 to C12 + a bell, the correct operation challenge presentation is executed when any of winning-C1 to C12 is won. No instruction monitor display is performed, and no instruction monitor display is performed in a situation in which the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any one of winning-C1 to C12 is won. In addition, when the object of the correct operation challenge performance is the winning-D1 to D8 biased 8-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell, the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any one of the winning-D1 to D8 is won. In such a situation, instruction monitor display is performed, and in a situation in which the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when one of prize-D1 to D8 is won, no instruction monitor display is performed.

With this configuration, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether the 12-choice correct operation challenge presentation or the 8-choice correct operation challenge presentation is performed, thereby preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is compared with the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell, the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-bell bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the winning probability of the 8-choice correct operation challenge effect target combination is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell is compared with the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell, the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + spot-bell bell is higher. You may

By configuring in this way, the winning probability of the 12-choice correct operation challenge effect target role is increased, and the correct operation challenge effect can be easily executed at an arbitrary timing.

Also, the order of pressing 12 options + the number of payouts of the high bells of the bells to be pressed and the order of pressing the 8th options + the number of bells to be paid out of the high bells of the bells to be pressed are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high-level bell is stopped in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the pressing order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12-option pressing order + It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the winning bell is won or the 8-choice pressing order and the bell winning.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for 12-option pressing order + high-level bell and 8-option pressing order + high-level bell payout, the number of 8-option pressing order + high-level bell It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge effect when the 12-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell is won, 12 types of pressing are performed by not informing the first stop correct pushing order and the hitting pattern and not reporting the second stop correct pushing order. A 12-choice challenge to guess the order of pressing one from the order + eye pressing + 12-choice challenge to guess the eye pressing, and the first stop incorrect answer pressing order, but not the eye pressing pattern (first stop correct pressing order + An 8-choice challenge to guess one push order out of eight kinds of push orders + eye push by not reporting the second stop correct push order (with four choices for eye push), and the first stop correct push order and eyes. The pressing pattern is not reported and the second stop correct pressing order is reported, or the first stop correct pressing order is not reported, but the spot pressing pattern is reported and the second stop correct pressing order is not reported. A 6-choice challenge to guess the order of pressing one of the pressings, and the correct pressing order for the first stop is reported, but the pressing is not reported and the correct pressing order for the second stop is not reported, and the incorrect pressing order for the first stop. , but do not notify the symbol (first stop correct pressing order + eye pressing as 4 options) to notify the second stop correct pressing order, or the first stop incorrect pressing order as one By announcing the target pressing pattern (with two options for the first stop correct pressing order) and not reporting the second stop correct pressing order, one pressing order is guessed from among four kinds of pressing order + eye pressing 4. 3-choice challenge and 3-choice challenge in which the correct pushing order for the first stop is not reported, but the symbol for the first stop is informed and the correct pushing order for the second stop is also reported, so that one of the three types of pushing order is guessed. , 1st stop correct pressing order is reported, but the marking pattern is not reported, and the 2nd stop correct pressing order is reported, the 1st stop correct pressing order and marking pattern are reported, but the 2nd stop correct pressing order is not reported. Or, by notifying one of the first stop incorrect pressing order and the symbol symbol, and notifying the second stop correct pressing order, one of the two types of pressing order + eye pressing will be guessed. a two-choice challenge; No instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge presentation when the 8-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell is won, 8 types of pressing are performed by not informing the first stop correct pushing order and the hitting pattern and not reporting the second stop correct pushing order. An 8-choice challenge where you guess one push order + eye push from the order + eye push, the first stop correct answer push order, and the second stop correct answer push order without notifying the eye push pattern, the first stop correct answer The pressing order is reported but the marking pattern is not reported and the second stop correct pressing order is not reported, or the first stop correct pressing order is not reported but the highlighting pattern is reported but the second stop correct pressing order is not reported. A 4-choice challenge in which you guess one of the four types of pressing order + eye pressing, and the first stop correct pressing order is reported, but the eye pressing pattern is not reported, and the second stop correct pressing order is reported. , 1st stop correct pressing order and symbols are reported, but 2nd stop correct pressing order is not reported, or 1st stop correct pressing order is not reported, highlighting symbols are reported, and 2nd stop correct pressing order is reported. Thus, there is a two-choice challenge in which one of the two types of pressing order + eye pressing is guessed. The instruction monitor display is performed in any mode of the correct operation challenge presentation.

<Guarantee lottery at the time of failure of the eye-catching challenge>
12-choice pressing order + eye-pushing bell, 8-choice pushing order + eye-pushing bell, or replay-A When winning, the correct operation challenge effect (eye-pushing challenge effect) is executed, and as a result of the player's stop operation, A mode will be described in which a certain amount of profit is given even if the hit challenge fails.

When the player fails in the stop operation by executing the eye-pushing challenge presentation, the guarantee lottery is executed with reference to the symbol combination when all reels are stopped.

For example, when winning-C1 is won, if the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, any symbol combination of winning 01 to 04 will stop when all reels are stopped, and the white seven on the left reel will be stopped. When the first stop is made aiming at the symbols, one of the winning symbol combinations 25 to 40 is stopped when all reels are stopped. Then, when any symbol combination of winning prizes 01 to 04 is stopped in the process of stopping all reels, an AT addition lottery is executed, and when any symbol combination of winning prizes 25 to 40 is stopped. can be considered to execute a guarantee lottery.

In this case, when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games is increased by 50 with a probability of 100%, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, the probability is 50%. A mode in which the number of AT games is increased by 50 games with a probability, and when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games is increased by 50 games with a probability of 100%, and the white seven symbol on the left reel. When aiming for the first stop, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games is added by 10 games, and when the first stop is aimed at the red seven pattern on the left reel, the number of AT games is 100%. 50 games are added, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven pattern on the left reel, there is a probability of 10% that the number of AT games is added by 10 games, and the red seven pattern on the left reel is the first When it stops, there is a 100% chance to add 50 AT games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven pattern on the left reel, there is a 10% chance to add 100 AT games. Conceivable.

In other words, the expected value of the profit given to the player is lower when the hit challenge fails than when the hit challenge succeeds.

By configuring in this way, even a player who is not confident in eye-pushing can actively challenge the eye-pushing challenge, increasing the interest in the game.

<Left push recommended lamp>
When the above-mentioned biased bell is won, the AT lottery is executed with a higher probability than the first stop of the left reel when the left reel is first stopped. Although the acquisition frequency of the bell is lowered, it is a relatively advantageous operation mode because it can receive the AT lottery. Also, even if the biased bell wins during normal times (non-AT), the instruction monitor is not displayed (no instruction information is displayed).

However, since a player without prior knowledge may stop the middle reel or the right reel first without knowing that the left reel is the first stop, the left reel recommendation lamp is provided and the left reel is the first stop. It is configured so that the left push recommendation lamp lights up in the game to be paused.

The left push recommendation lamp consists of a single red LED and is provided at a position (for example, the middle panel, the operation panel 11, the lower panel 5, etc.) that can be visually recognized by the player. However, the left push recommendation lamp may be configured with a green LED or a full-color LED.

The left-push recommendation lamp has a lighting area smaller than that of the instruction monitor, and the instruction monitor is easier for the player to visually recognize than the left-push recommendation lamp.

The left-push recommended lamp may be a lamp managed by the main control means or a lamp managed by the sub-control means. This is because the lights can be turned off.

The left push recommended lamp is kept lit when the AT is not on, lights up when the AT is not on after the power is turned on, and remains lit until the AT is started.

Also, when it is not AT, the situation where the profit does not change even if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped first or the left reel is stopped first Even if the AT lottery is not performed or the AT lottery is performed irrespective of the pressing order, the left push recommendation lamp keeps lighting.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the winning combination based on the lighting condition of the lamps. In addition, it is possible to reduce the movement of the player's line of sight due to the repetition of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp, thereby suppressing fatigue in the game.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment displays the demo screen after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from a certain timing after all reels have stopped (demonstration time clocking timing of the sub-control means). To maintain the lit state of the left-press recommended lamp even when the screen is displayed (it is lit when the left-press recommended lamp is lit, and is off when it is off).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player who starts the game while the demo screen is displayed recognize that the left reel is to be stopped first.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment displays the menu screen when the sub switch 20 is pressed at a certain timing (timing when the menu screen can be displayed) after all reels are stopped. The lighting state of the left-push recommendation lamp is maintained even when the left-push recommendation lamp is on (it is on when the left-push recommendation lamp is on, and is off when it is off).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who starts the game while the menu screen is displayed recognize that the left reel is to be stopped first.

Also, when starting AT from non-AT, the left push recommendation lamp is extinguished. The time to start this AT may be triggered by the time when the AT state is set and after all reels are stopped (after the end of the game immediately before the start of AT), or the start switch of the next game when the AT state is set when all the reels are stopped. (AT start game) may be used as a trigger.

Further, when AT is changed to non-AT (when AT ends), the left push recommended lamp lights up. The time from AT to non-AT may be triggered by stopping all reels in the final AT game, may be triggered by the operation of the start switch in the next game after the final AT game, or the end of the advantageous section. It may be triggered by time. In addition, if the left push recommended lamp lights up, it will be confirmed that the AT will not continue (such as suggesting a revival during the defeat stage, but the left push recommended lamp lights up). In this case, the left push recommended lamp is turned on after it is confirmed that it will not be revived.

Further, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode while the left-push recommendation lamp is lit, the left-push recommendation lamp may be extinguished or kept lit. If the left-press recommended lamp goes off, it should be turned on again when the setting confirmation mode ends.

This is because, with such a configuration, the setting is made by the administrator during the setting confirmation mode, and thus there is no need to notify the player. By turning off the left-push recommended lamp during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left-push recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be turned on and off). be. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode is entered while the left-push recommended lamp is off, the left-push recommended lamp can be kept off or turned on (the left-push recommended lamp is off). When the setting confirmation mode is entered and the left-push recommended lamp lights up, the left-push recommended lamp turns off when the setting confirmation mode ends).

When the power is turned off when the left-push recommended lamp is lit, and when the power is turned on again, the setting key is turned on and the setting change mode is entered, the left-push recommended lamp can be turned off or kept lit. good. If the left-press recommended lamp is turned off, it should be turned on again when the setting change mode ends.

This is because, with this configuration, it is not necessary to notify the player during the setting change mode because the setting is set by the administrator. By turning off the left-push recommended lamp during the setting change mode, it is possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left-push recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be turned on and off). be. In this case, if the setting change mode is entered while the left-push recommended lamp is off, the left-push recommended lamp can be kept off or turned on (the left-push recommended lamp is off). When the setting change mode is entered and the left push recommended lamp lights up, the left push recommended lamp goes out when the setting change mode ends).

Also, the left push recommended lamp may be kept lit during AT. In this case, even when the left first stop correct bell is won, even when the middle first stop correct bell is won, and even when the right first stop correct bell is won, the left push recommended lamp keeps lighting. . This lights up in the sense that the left push is recommended for the gaming machine as a whole, and has a configuration that can be taken when individual condition devices are not made to correspond. Since the instruction monitor display is performed during the AT, the player can grasp the pressing order even if the left-press recommended lamp is lit.

In this case, since lighting control of the left push recommended lamp according to the state is not performed, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and eliminate the complication of the program.

When the power is turned off when the left-push recommended lamp lights up, the left-push recommended lamp lights up. It is designed not to light up.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the player has to press the left button due to the configuration that the light is turned on even for a moment.

<Mode related to BGM>
In this embodiment, a normal mode (sometimes referred to as a first mode) and a distribution mode (sometimes referred to as a second mode) are installed as modes related to BGM.
In normal mode, regardless of whether it is BGM that incurs a music usage fee or copyright-free BGM that does not incur a music usage fee (not protected by copyright), it is preset for each production stage, continuous production, and chance production. It is configured such that the BGM that has been recorded can be output from the speaker S.
In the distribution mode, only copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S without outputting from the speaker S the BGM for which a music usage fee is required. When BGM that requires a music usage fee is set in advance as the BGM, etc., copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S instead of the BGM that incurs a music usage fee. It should be noted that output from the speaker S may simply be referred to as BGM being reproduced.

In this way, even if the same production stage, the same continuous production, or the same chance production is performed, the BGM output from the speaker S when the normal mode is set and when the delivery mode is set. are configured to have different cases.

Conventionally, in order to prevent copyright infringement when uploading videos of playing games to SNS or video distribution sites, the part where the BGM that uses the music is played is cut by editing. It was also necessary to deal with this by muting the sound or covering it with another BGM.

In this embodiment, instead of the BGM that incurs a music usage fee if set to the distribution mode, it is configured to play copyright-free BGM. Then, uploading the captured video to SNS or video distribution sites does not constitute copyright infringement of the music recorded in the gaming machine. By setting the distribution mode in this way, it is possible to greatly reduce the trouble of avoiding copyright infringement.

In addition, even if it is set to distribution mode, certain situations (for example, during the so-called bonus or ending, etc.) In situations such as when the BGM is strongly related to the BGM and changing the BGM would reduce the quality of the video, the BGM output from the speaker S may be configured not to be changed to copyright-free BGM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the presentation from being extremely lowered.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the distribution mode is set, the BGM that is copyright-free is played back. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured to In the case of such a configuration, while the BGM for which a music usage fee is charged regardless of the set volume level is played silently, SE such as prize winning sound, payout sound, stop sound, etc. and copyright-free BGM are reproduced. It is preferable that the sound is output from the speaker S at a volume corresponding to the set volume level. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the copyright infringement of the musical piece from being infringed, while preventing the entertainment of the performance from being extremely lowered.

<Description of BGM Mode Switching Period> It is configured so that it is possible to switch the BGM-related mode during the period from the timing after two seconds have passed since the start) to the next game start operation (bet operation or start switch operation). In other words, the BGM-related mode cannot be switched during the game from the start of one game to the end of the one game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the progress of the game or being unable to concentrate on the performance by mistakenly switching the BGM-related mode during the game. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the mode relating to the BGM can be switched even during the game.

Also, if it is possible to switch the BGM-related mode, it is possible to switch the BGM-related mode regardless of whether the game screen is being displayed or the demo screen is being displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that mode switching regarding BGM cannot be performed while the demo screen is being displayed. In addition, after the end of a predetermined game (for example, after the end of a game during a continuous effect or after the end of a game in which a predetermined chance effect is executed, etc.) or during the display of a menu screen, the BGM-related mode cannot be switched. You may

Also, the configuration may be such that the BGM-related mode can be switched regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. With this configuration, the player can switch the BGM-related mode without waiting for the transition to the advantageous section.

Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the BGM-related mode can be switched only in the advantageous section. By configuring in this way, it is possible to see whether the section is a normal section or an advantageous section depending on whether or not the BGM-related mode can be switched.

<Description on how to switch modes related to BGM>
If you want to set the distribution mode, touch the liquid crystal (in this embodiment, a so-called touch panel combining a display device and an input device) a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in a situation where the mode related to BGM can be switched. By doing so, the normal mode is switched to the delivery mode.
Further, when the distribution mode is to be ended, the distribution mode is switched to the normal mode by holding down the liquid crystal for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched.

By complicating the operation when setting the delivery mode in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally setting the delivery mode, and by simplifying the operation when returning to the normal mode. It is possible to reduce the trouble of the player.

In this embodiment, the BGM-related mode is configured to be switched by touching the liquid crystal. may be switchable. By configuring in this way, setting items related to the game that can be arbitrarily set by the player can be collected on the menu screen, and even a player who is playing for the first time can easily switch the mode related to the BGM by opening the menu screen. can be recognized.

Also, instead of the touch operation on the liquid crystal, it may be possible to switch the BGM-related mode by operating a predetermined switch (for example, an effect switch or the middle stop switch 13b). Specifically, when it is desired to set the distribution mode, in a situation where the mode related to BGM can be switched, by touching the predetermined switch a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the normal mode is switched to the distribution mode, When it is desired to end the distribution mode, the distribution mode may be switched to the normal mode by holding down the liquid crystal for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily set the BGM-related mode setting. Specifically, in the administrator menu that can be set while checking or changing settings (detailed explanation is omitted, but generally it is a mode that allows you to set power saving mode and check error history) may be configured so that only By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the distribution mode from being set carelessly by the player's mischief.

Next, the liquid crystal displays when the normal mode is set and when the distribution mode is set will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the normal mode is set. As shown in the figure, when the normal mode is set, the liquid crystal is configured so as not to display the currently set BGM mode.

FIG. 70(b) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the distribution mode is set. As shown in the figure, when the distribution mode is set, "Distribution mode" is displayed at the left end of the liquid crystal as a display indicating the mode related to the currently set BGM, and it is visually recognized that the distribution mode is set. configured to be possible. Also, two seconds have passed since the end of one game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, the payout process has ended, etc.), and when it becomes possible to switch to the normal mode, the "distribution mode" is activated. Under the display, the explanation of mode switching is displayed as "You can switch the mode by pressing and holding the liquid crystal", and the next game start operation (bet operation or start switch operation) is performed and it is not possible to switch to normal mode. is configured to end the display of the explanation for mode switching. In this way, when the game is finished in the delivery mode, the next player can know that the delivery mode is in effect and how to return to the normal mode.

Note that (1) even during the display of the demo screen, the display indicating the currently set BGM mode and the display of the explanation for mode switching may be continued, or (2) the demo screen may be displayed. During the display, neither the display indicating the currently set BGM mode nor the display of the explanation for mode switching may be displayed. It is also possible to display the mode related to the BGM that is being played, but not to display the explanation of the mode switching.

In this way, the display of "distribution mode" is always displayed (it may be configured not to be displayed during CZ, during continuous production, or on the demo screen), but the explanation for mode switching is (Fig. 70 (b) The display of "mode switching possible by long-pressing the liquid crystal") is configured to be displayed only when the delivery mode is set and the delivery mode can be switched to the normal mode.

In this way, by notifying with the display on the liquid crystal only when the distribution mode is set, it is possible to reduce the number of displays that are not directly related to the effect related to the progress of the game, and the player who does not intend to distribute moving images can can maximize the enjoyment of the performance. In addition, when the distribution mode is set, "distribution mode" is displayed on the liquid crystal display, so that it is possible to recognize at a glance that if you want to listen to BGM that incurs a music usage fee, you should return to the normal mode. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a specific piece of music is not recorded in the game machine.

It should be noted that even when the normal mode is set, it may be configured to display "normal mode" as a display indicating the currently set BGM mode on the left end of the liquid crystal. In this case, it is preferable to display an explanation for mode switching in a situation where it is possible to switch the BGM mode even when the normal mode is set. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp the mode related to the BGM.

<Regarding distribution mode and song selection function during AT>
In this embodiment, there is provided a music selection function that allows the player to arbitrarily select BGM output from the speaker S during AT. For example, in a situation where BGM1 is output from the speaker S as default BGM predetermined for each production stage or game state, when BGM2 is selected by the music selection function, the BGM output from the speaker S will be changed from BGM1 to BGM2. is changed to

Music selection is performed at a predetermined timing after the end of the game during AT (for example, timing 2 seconds after the end of the game (after all reels are stopped, after winning determination processing is completed, payout processing is completed, etc.)). The name of the currently reproduced BGM is displayed on the liquid crystal at the predetermined timing, and each time the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, the selected BGM is switched in order and selected. The music name of the BGM is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the BGM corresponding to the currently displayed (selected) music name is reproduced by operating the subswitch 20 . For example, assume that the music list is configured in the order of "BGM1 (copyright free") -> "BGM2 (with music usage fee)" -> "BGM3 (copyright free)", and the currently played BGM is BGM1. In this case, "BGM1" is displayed in a predetermined display area of the liquid crystal (for example, the edge of the liquid crystal such as the upper right or lower right) at a predetermined timing after the game ends, and "BGM1" is displayed each time the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. BGM2"→"BGM3"→"BGM1"→"BGM2" . . .

It should be noted that the music selection function may not be used after the end of a game in a predetermined situation such as a game during continuous performance or a game in which a predetermined chance performance is executed. In this case, even if it comes to a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, timing 2 seconds after the end of the game (after all reels stop, after the winning judgment process ends, after the payout process ends, etc.)) The music name of the BGM currently being reproduced is not displayed, and the BGM is not changed even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately understand that the music cannot be selected.

Also, the music selection function is a function that can be used when the normal mode is set, and is configured so that the music selection function cannot be used when the distribution mode is set. Specifically, when AT is in progress and the distribution mode is set, copyright-free BGM is reproduced as the default BGM, and a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, the end of the game (all reels) After the stop, after the prize determination process is completed, after the payout process is completed, etc.), the name of the BGM song currently being reproduced is not displayed, and the sub cross key switch 21 is pressed. It is configured so that the BGM cannot be changed even if it is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately understand that the music cannot be selected.

It should be noted that even when AT is in progress and the distribution mode is set, the music selection function may be used for copyright-free BGM. In this case, it is preferable that even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, only copyright-free BGM song titles are displayed, and BGM song titles requiring a song usage fee are not displayed (cannot be selected). . For example, assume that the music list is configured in the order of "BGM1 (copyright free") -> "BGM2 (with music usage fee)" -> "BGM3 (copyright free)", and the currently played BGM is BGM1. In this case, at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, timing 2 seconds after the end of the game (after all reels are stopped, after the winning determination process is completed, after the payout process is completed, etc.), "BGM1 ", and when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, "BGM3" is selected and "BGM3" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. BGM is configured to be selected and displayed on the liquid crystal display.By configuring in this way, the BGM that generates a music usage fee can be selected, but it is not played back, and the player misunderstands that the gaming machine is out of order. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the intermediate game other than the continuous effect and the final game of CZ, the effect to notify in advance that the privilege is given in the final game ), the BGM being played is changed to a dedicated BGM (sometimes referred to as fixed BGM), and a specified LED lamp among the LED lamps for production is illuminated in rainbow colors (this can be called a fixed production A). is configured to be executable.

In the present embodiment, since the BGM for which a music usage fee is charged is used as the confirmed BGM, when the confirmed effect A is executed when the distribution mode is set, the BGM being played is changed to the confirmed BGM. It is configured to continuously reproduce the BGM being reproduced without switching. Even when the distribution mode is set, as in the normal mode, as part of the fixed effect A, predetermined lamps among the effect LED lamps are configured to emit light in rainbow colors. On the other hand, when the fixed effect A is executed when the normal mode is set, the BGM being reproduced is switched to the fixed BGM.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify that a privilege will be given in a continuous effect or in the final game of CZ, while preventing copyright infringement of the music.

It should be noted that in the case of using copyright-free BGM as the fixed BGM, it is supplemented that even when the delivery mode is set, switching to the fixed BGM as the fixed effect A is no problem, just like in the normal mode. Keep

<Explanation on ball delivery specifications across advantageous sections>
In order to update all the parameters affecting the performance related to the indication function to 0 by the RAM initialization processing when the advantageous section ends and the transition to the normal section (also referred to as the RAM initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section), the conventional In the game machine 1, when one advantageous section ends and then a new advantageous section shifts through the normal section, the information regarding the instruction function in the previous advantageous section cannot be carried over at all. For this reason, for example, even if there are 500 AT games remaining in one advantageous section, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the AT is terminated and the remaining number of AT games is initialized. As a result, the player often felt as if he had lost money. In view of this problem, by allowing a bonus to be won before the end of the advantageous section, predetermined parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function (for example, a predetermined mode regarding AT winning, predetermined points regarding AT winning, etc.) (also referred to as a carryover parameter) is indirectly carried over to the next advantageous interval.

Here, the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and internal lottery numbers are basically the same as those shown in FIGS. It is configured so that the replay probability does not fluctuate (maintain non-RT). In other words, it is configured so as not to have RT1 (inside 1 type BB). In addition, it is configured to have RT2, which shifts after the end of type 1 BB and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). In addition, since it is configured so that the transition to the advantageous section is determined even in the game winning replay-A and replay-B, the transition to the advantageous section is approximately 1/1 (65532/65536) in the normal section. is configured to determine Also, for convenience of explanation, the state where non-RT and type 1 BB is not operating is referred to as non-RT1, and the state where non-RT and type 1 BB condition device is operating is referred to as non-RT2. RT2 is the same RT, and the internal lottery numbers are also the same, except that the type 1 BB single win with the number 4 in non-RT1 is lost in non-RT2.

RT transition starts from non-RT1, and if 1-type BB is won during non-RT1 and the 1-type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (may be at the end of the game) becomes non-RT2, and non-RT2. When the 1st kind BB symbol combination stops during RT2, the non-RT2 ends and the 1st kind BB operates from the next game (also called during the 1st kind BB), and when the operation of the 1st kind BB ends, RT2 starts from the next game. When the game is shifted to RT2 and the game is executed a predetermined number of times, RT2 is finished and the next game is shifted to non-RT1. In addition, when 1 type BB is won during RT2, if 1 type BB pattern combination stops, RT2 is terminated and 1 type BB is activated from the next game, and if 1 type BB pattern combination does not stop When five games are executed in RT2 without ending RT2, RT2 is ended and the next game is shifted to non-RT2. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT (non-RT1), if the setting change device is activated while the type 1 BB condition device is operating (during non-RT2) or during the type 1 BB operation, the setting change device will be activated. Set non-RT (non-RT1) when finished. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off when the setting change device does not work (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed.

In addition, some of the games that won 1 type BB during non-RT1, the games that were lost during non-RT2, and the games that won any of the push order bell group C (winning-C1 to C6) during non-RT2 1 type of BB symbol combination can be stopped by the operation mode of the stop switch. In addition, in the game in which any one of the push order bell group C is won during the advantageous interval, the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the 1 type BB symbol combination is notified except for some situations, so the game is played according to the notified operation mode. The user can then maintain non-RT2.

In this embodiment, the carry-over parameter (also referred to as the degree of expectation regarding AT, the degree of expectation regarding the information game state, the predetermined information regarding the information game state) in one advantageous interval (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous interval 1) is set to the next advantageous In order to indirectly carry over to the section (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous section 2), first, in the advantageous section 1, certain conditions during AT (for example, the number of acquisitions during AT exceeded 2000 or The number of games has reached a predetermined number of times, the number of games in one advantageous section has reached a predetermined number of times, etc. (also referred to as an ending condition) is met), AT at the timing when a specific condition is met (e.g., the number of remaining AT games, the number of remaining difference that can be obtained during AT, etc.) until a predetermined condition is met (for example, the value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., the upper limit of the MY counter such as 2350 It is configured to continue AT until a value less than a value) is exceeded.

After that, in a game after the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in a game in which the one-type BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect for prompting the stop of the one-type BB symbol combination is executed. . It should be noted that when executing a predetermined effect that prompts the stop of the 1 type BB symbol combination, even if one of the push order bell C group is won, the 1 type BB symbol combination is not stopped even if one is won. It is configured to notify the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping the seed BB symbol combination. Further, if the 1-type BB symbol combination does not stop in a game that executes a predetermined effect prompting the stop of the 1-type BB symbol combination, the 1-type BB symbol combination is restarted in a subsequent game in which the 1-type BB symbol combination can be stopped. It is configured to execute a predetermined effect prompting to stop the combination.

After that, when the operation of the type 1 BB ends, the next game shifts to RT2, and the advantageous section 1 ends in the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all the parameters are updated to 0. Then, from the next game, it shifts to the normal section and non-RT1. It should be noted that the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends or the game in RT2, which game ends the advantageous section 1 is carried over at the end of the game that satisfies the ending conditions in the advantageous section 1. It is configured so that it can be determined at the end of the game that satisfies the ending condition according to the value of the parameter.

After that, the value of the carry-over parameter can be newly determined according to the number of games played in RT2 after shifting to the advantageous section 2 through the normal section.

Specifically, when the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of the game that satisfies the ending condition in the advantageous section 1 is the first value, the advantageous section 1 ends in the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB is finished. However, since it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section 2 in the first game of RT2, four games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2.例文帳に追加Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, the value of the carry-over parameter is set to the first value.
Further, when the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of the game that satisfies the ending condition in the advantageous section 1 is the second value, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the advantageous section is played in the first game of RT2. 1 is completed, and it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section 2 in the second game of RT2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, the value of the carry-over parameter is set to the second value.
In this manner, the value of the carry-over parameter at the timing of transition to non-RT in the advantageous section 2 is configured to differ according to the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of the game that satisfies the ending condition in the advantageous section 1 .

In this way, by changing the number of games played at RT2 at the start of the next advantageous interval according to the value of the carry-over parameter in one advantageous interval, the number of games played at RT2 at the start of the advantageous interval changes the previous advantageous interval. The value of the carryover parameter at the end can be generally known, and the value of the carryover parameter can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the timing for determining which of the games in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends or the game in RT2 to end the advantageous interval 1 is set as the ending condition in the advantageous interval 1. However, not limited to this, in the advantageous section 1, a predetermined condition (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter such as 2350) etc.), or at the end of the game when the 1 type BB symbol combination after satisfying the predetermined condition in the advantageous section 1 is stopped.

Further, even if the ending condition is not satisfied during the AT but the advantageous section ends after the AT ends, the value of the carry-over parameter may be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous section by the same technique. good. In this case, it is preferable to execute a predetermined effect for prompting the stop of the 1-type BB symbol combination in a game in which the 1-type BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT is finished. Also, in this case, at the end of AT's final game, according to the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of AT's final game, either the game in which the operation of type 1 BB ends or the game during RT2. It may be configured to determine whether to end the advantageous section in the game.

In addition, if the player stops the 1-type BB symbol combination by mistake in a situation where the predetermined performance prompting the stop of the 1-type BB symbol combination is not executed, it is advantageous even after the operation of the 1-type BB is finished. It is configured to continue without ending the section. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending at an unintended timing. Also, by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally ending the advantageous section according to the game situation.

<<Concrete example 1 of ball output specification across advantageous section>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a case will be described in which predetermined points relating to winning of AT are carried over to the next advantageous section as carryover parameters.

Although the details are omitted, the predetermined points related to the winning of the AT are points managed by a predetermined counter, and are given to the player according to the execution of the game, such as when the continuous effect fails or when the CZ fails. Points are accumulated when a disadvantageous event occurs, and when reaching 100 points, predetermined benefits such as winning AT or adding to the remaining AT period are granted.

Pattern A in FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a case where the predetermined points relating to the winning of the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1. FIG.

In the pattern A of FIG. 75, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 ends in the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends, and the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 2 is decided in the first game of RT2. At the start, four games will be played at RT2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 30 is set to the predetermined points regarding winning of the AT.

Pattern B in FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a case where the predetermined points relating to winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1. FIG.

In pattern B of FIG. 75, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the first game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the second game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, the game is executed three times at RT2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 50 is set as a predetermined point regarding the winning of the AT.

Pattern C in FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a case where the predetermined points relating to the winning of the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1. FIG.

In pattern C of FIG. 75, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the second game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the third game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, two games are executed at RT2. Then, based on the fact that two games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 70 is set as a predetermined point regarding the winning of the AT.

Pattern D in FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a case where the predetermined points relating to winning of the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1. FIG.

In the pattern D of FIG. 75, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the 3rd game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the 4th game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, one game is executed at RT2. Then, based on the execution of one game at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 100 is set as a predetermined point regarding winning of the AT.

<<Concrete example 2 of ball output specification that straddles the advantageous section>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a case will be described in which a predetermined mode relating to AT winning is carried over to the next advantageous section as a carryover parameter.

Although the details are omitted, there are four modes, normal A, normal B, heaven preparation, and heaven, for the predetermined mode related to the winning of AT. configured to have different degrees.

Pattern A in FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a case where the player stays in normal A at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in advantageous section 1 .

In the pattern A of FIG. 76, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 ends in the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends, and that the normal section shifts to the advantageous section 2 in the first game of RT2. At the start, four games will be played at RT2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, normal A is set as a predetermined mode regarding winning of AT.

Pattern B in FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a case where the player stays in normal B at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in advantageous section 1 .

In pattern B of FIG. 76, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the first game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the second game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, the game is executed three times at RT2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, normal B is set as a predetermined mode regarding winning of AT.

Pattern C in FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a case where the player stays in heaven preparation at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1 .

In pattern C of FIG. 76, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the second game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the third game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, two games are executed at RT2. Then, based on the fact that two games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, it is configured to set heaven preparation as a predetermined mode regarding winning of AT.

Pattern D in FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a case where the player is staying in heaven when the game that satisfies the ending condition in .

In the pattern D of FIG. 76, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 will end in the 3rd game of RT2, and that the normal section will shift to the advantageous section 2 in the 4th game of RT2. Therefore, at the start of the advantageous section 2, one game is executed at RT2. Then, based on the execution of one game at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, Heaven is set as a predetermined mode regarding winning of AT.

<<Concrete example 3 of ball output specification across advantageous section>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which predetermined information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next advantageous section as a carryover parameter.

Here, in which game of RT2 the advantageous section ends is determined according to the remaining AT stock number at the end of the advantageous section, but the remaining AT stock is cleared when the ending condition is satisfied. In this case, it may be configured to determine in which game of RT2 the advantageous section is to be ended according to the remaining AT stock number at the timing when the ending condition is satisfied. In addition, as the predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT, instead of the AT remaining stock number, in the case of a game number management type AT, the AT remaining game number carryover parameter may be used, or in the case of a difference number management type AT. The number of remaining acquisitions that can be acquired by AT may be used as a carryover parameter.

The AT remaining stock number is information related to the AT remaining period in a so-called set management type AT, and details are omitted. If there is any remaining stock, the next set is started, and if there is no remaining stock, a continuous lottery for AT is performed, and if no winning is made, the AT ends.

Pattern A in FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a case where the AT remaining stock number is 0 at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1 .

In the pattern A of FIG. 77, it is decided to end the advantageous section 1 in the game in which the operation of the type 1 BB is finished, and it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section 2 in the first game of RT2. At the start of the advantageous section 2, four games are executed at RT2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, the AT remaining stock number is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a case where the AT remaining stock number is 1 at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1 .

In the pattern B of FIG. 77, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is decided to end the advantageous section 1 in the first game of RT2, and the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section 2 in the second game of RT2. is determined, three games are executed at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 1 is set to the AT remaining stock number as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a case where the AT remaining stock number is 2 at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1 .

In the pattern C of FIG. 77, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is decided to end the advantageous section 1 in the second game of RT2, and the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section 2 in the third game of RT2. is determined, two games are executed at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2. Then, based on the fact that two games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 2 is set to the AT remaining stock number as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a case where the AT remaining stock number is 3 or more at the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous section 1 .

In the pattern D of FIG. 77, after the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, it is decided to end the advantageous section 1 in the third game of RT2, and the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section 2 in the fourth game of RT2. is determined, one game is executed at RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2. Then, based on the execution of one game in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, 3 is set as the AT remaining stock number as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring as in the above specific examples 1 to 3, the value of the carryover parameter in one advantageous section can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the loss of the player due to initialization by the initialization process at the time. In addition, even when one advantageous section ends and the next advantageous section shifts to another, it is possible to form a motivation to continue the game.

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the higher the value of the carryover parameter, the later the timing at which the advantageous interval ends. It's for. For example, pattern B in FIG. 75 is designed to set 50 to the predetermined points related to the winning of the AT at the start of the advantageous section 2. Since two games will be played in RT2, 70 is set as a predetermined point regarding winning of AT. In this way, the larger the value of the carry-over parameter, the later the timing at which the advantageous section ends, so that even if the normal section accidentally continues for two games or more, the player will not lose. be able to.

It should be noted that it may be configured such that the larger the value of the carry-over parameter, the earlier the timing at which the advantageous section ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game parlor from losing money even if the normal section is accidentally continued for two games.

Although RT2 is configured to end after five games, the number of times RT2 ends can be appropriately set according to carry-over parameters to be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous section.

It is also possible to indirectly carry over a plurality of carry-over parameters to the next advantageous section by increasing the number of games that end RT2.
For example, any one of the predetermined points regarding winning of AT, the predetermined mode regarding winning of AT, and predetermined information regarding remaining period of AT may be used as a carryover parameter, or any two of them may be used as carryover parameters. Alternatively, all three may be carried over parameters.
It should be noted that four or more carryover parameters may be provided in addition to the above three carryover parameters.

Also, although the method of indirectly carrying over certain parameters that affect the performance of the pointing function to the next advantageous interval has been described, the method described above can be used for other applications.
For example, when a specific flag is won (for example, a part of the game where the hand of 4/65536 is won), AT continues until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 2350) in one advantageous section, and MY In a game capable of stopping the combination of 1 type BB symbols after the value of the counter exceeds a predetermined value, a predetermined performance is executed to urge the stop of the combination of 1 type BB symbols, and then the operation of the 1 type BB is finished. End the interval. After that, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the next advantageous section in the first game of RT2, and four games are executed in RT2 at the start of the next advantageous section. At the start of the advantageous interval, based on the fact that four games are played at RT2, after a predetermined number of premonitory games (for example, 32 games), AT is shifted to, and AT is continued until the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 and the end condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied. Configure to continue. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a game value exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous interval based on the winning of the specific flag.

Also, for example, when the ending condition is satisfied in one advantageous section, AT can be continued until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value, and one type of BB symbol combination can be stopped after the value of the MY counter exceeds the predetermined value. A predetermined performance for prompting the stop of the 1st type BB symbol combination is executed in a normal game, and then the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the operation of the 1st type BB is completed. After that, in the first game of RT2, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the next advantageous section, and at the start of the next advantageous section, the rest of the game of RT2 is set to a high-probability state in which AT's winning expectation is high. You may In addition to the high probability state, a lottery may be performed to add to the remaining period of the AT when winning the AT. By configuring in this way, even when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the next advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, only one type of BB is the lottery target, but instead of this, RB or MB may be the lottery target, or two or all of the one type BB, RB, and MB may be the lottery target. .

<Processing for Ending the Advantageous Section with the Differential Number of Game Media>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine having a normal section and an advantageous section as game sections, in which the advantageous section ends when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. (Prior art document: JP 2020-010896)

Here, the MY of the advantageous section in the conventional gaming machine (prior art document) is based on the point where the player has the lowest ball output after the start of the advantageous section as a reference (0), and the number of differences from that reference is When it exceeded "2400", the advantageous section ended. The point where the player's ball output is the lowest is synonymous with the point where the difference in the number of game media is the lowest.

Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine (prior art document), it was possible to give the player only a profit of a maximum difference number of "2414" in one advantageous section. Therefore, when a player spends a lot of game media in a game in an advantageous section, the game medium spent in the advantageous section cannot be recovered, and the player finds the conventional gaming machine attractive. could not.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine, even if a predetermined game state (for example, AT state) is entered from a game in which the difference number of game media in the advantageous section is -3000, if MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, finish. Therefore, only about 2400 game media were obtained in one advantageous section at most (the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section was about -600 and ended).

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous section when the MY of the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the start time of the advantageous section is set as the starting point (0), and the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous section (advantageous section The difference between the total number of game media awarded and the total number of game media betted in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400). Specifically, the total number of game media IN in the advantageous section (also referred to as the total number of inputs and the total number of bets) and the total number of game media OUT in the advantageous section (also referred to as the total number of payouts and the total number of grants) are considered. . That is, when the difference between the number of game media OUT in the advantageous section and the number of game media IN in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section) exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is terminated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming performance compared to the conventional one, while suppressing the gambling nature within a certain range.

For example, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, when a predetermined game state (for example, AT state) occurs from a certain game in which the difference number of game media in the advantageous section is -3000, the start time of the advantageous section is the starting point. , the advantageous section can be terminated when the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. Therefore, from a game in which the difference in the game media in the advantageous section is -3000, a maximum of about 5400 game media can be obtained (the difference in the game media in the advantageous section is +2400 at one time). Advantageous section ends).

Note that the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous interval (difference between the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous interval and the total number of gaming media betted in the advantageous interval) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400). If configured to end when exceeded, the advantageous interval may end at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start time of the advantageous interval is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous interval is a predetermined number (precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum value in one game). is the difference number of game media)).

Further, even if the advantageous section is terminated when the number of difference in game media obtained in one advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the difference in game media obtained in one advantageous section may be set. It is also possible to terminate the advantageous section if any termination condition is satisfied before the number exceeds a predetermined number.

In this way, since the game ends when the number of game media differences obtained in one advantageous interval exceeds a predetermined value, even if the number of game media differences in the advantageous interval is a negative value, It is necessary to be able to store the difference number of the game media.

Specific processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media will be described below with reference to the drawings.

≪Processing to end the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media (additional version)≫
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media. This processing corresponds to a modification of the advantageous section clear counter management processing in FIG.

FIG. 78 has an advantageous section difference number counter. The advantageous section difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the (total) difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear accompanying the end of the advantageous section. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by power-on accompanied by setting change (RWM clear accompanying setting change). Further, information indicating that the stopping condition is satisfied is stored in the stopping flag area, and is not cleared when the stopping state occurs.

Turning on the power with setting change specifically corresponds to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, when the power is turned on with a setting change, the setting change mode is entered, and the end condition of the setting change mode (for example, the setting key switch is turned off after the start switch is turned on) is satisfied. is completed, the game becomes possible.

The value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is configured to be able to be updated by executing a game in the advantageous interval.

Although the advantageous section difference number counter is composed of 2 bytes, the advantageous section difference number counter may be composed of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in the "advantageous section clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is less than 0 (if there is a carry-down), the carry flag becomes 1. Further, when the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not fall below 0 (when there is no carry-down), the carry flag becomes 0. Further, when the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 and the result is 0, the zero flag is set to 1.

The advantageous interval clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, as described above, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the result is NO. Specifically, if the carry flag is not 1, the result is NO. In other words, if it is determined as NO in the question "Before subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the question "Before subtraction of advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that the current game is in the normal section.

In the case of "Is the next game an advantageous section?", determination is made according to the information of the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, in the current game (game in the normal section), the transition to the advantageous section may be determined, and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area storing the information indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Also, for example, if it is a specification that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the current game (game in the normal section) and also determines the game state of the transition destination, the game state of the transition destination is stored. The determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area. In any case, it is possible to determine whether or not the next game is in the advantageous section according to the information that enables determination of whether the next game is in the advantageous section. If the next game is in the advantageous section, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in the advantageous section, the result is NO.

In the "advantage zone clear counter initial value storage", the initial value is stored in the RWM area in which the value of the advantageous zone clear counter can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and may be any predetermined value. For example, the number of games (for example, 65535) that does not end in one day may be set.

In the "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set in the register. That is, when starting the advantageous interval (when the current game is the normal interval game and the next game is the advantageous interval game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the maximum value 65535 that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous interval difference counter). This is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference number of game media in the section. In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. However, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section is 2400. is not limited to exceeding For example, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to set a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4,800. If, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

Also, in this example, the advantageous section difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can be 3 bytes. If the advantageous section difference number counter is set to 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the difference number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous section difference counter" - "value corresponding to the number of game media differences in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section". will be described later.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction=1?", it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before "advantage zone clear counter -1" is performed. For example, if the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 1) is YES. On the other hand, if the advantageous interval clear counter value is not 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 0) is NO.

It should be noted that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is transferred to a predetermined register (e.g., HL register).

In the case of "At the time of replay operation?", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a game by replay), YES is determined. On the other hand, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), NO is determined.

In "Number of IN<Number of OUT?", it is determined whether or not the number of OUT is greater than the number of IN.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, it is judged as NO.
b) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the decision is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the decision is NO.
d) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, YES is determined.

More specifically, IN number-OUT number is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). As a result of the calculation of the number of INs and the number of OUTs, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag becomes 1), YES is determined; case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is larger in the number of IN than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. In addition, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is smaller than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 1 and it is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=0, the A register=3 and the carry flag=0.
b) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the A register=0 and the carry flag=0.
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the IN number, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay as a result of the previous game is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets in the current game is automatically betted (for example, "3" is set by automatic betting). ), and, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by automatic betting is deal.

On the other hand, as a result of the current game, the number of IN and the number of OUT are determined to be "IN number< Number of OUTs?” is not judged. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the IN number. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of OUTs.

In addition, although the number of IN - the number of OUT is performed for "the number of IN < the number of OUT?", the determination may be made by the number of OUT - the number of IN. In other words, it suffices if the number of game media in the current game can be calculated using the number of INs and the number of OUTs.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the calculation result (IN number - OUT number ) value. Note that the carry flag is set to 1 when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction".
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
a) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, the HL register=65535 and the carry flag=1. Although 2-3=-1, a negative value cannot be stored in the register. As a result, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
b) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=1, the HL register=0 and the carry flag=0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

In "advantageous section difference number counter < 0", it is determined whether or not a carry-down has occurred by "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". It is judged as YES when a lower digit occurs, and as NO when a lower digit does not occur. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, YES is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=1, it is determined as NO. Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, c) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, it is judged as NO.

If the result of "advantageous section difference number counter < 0" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a predetermined calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set", when a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", a predetermined lower limit is set in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. Store the value (0). In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) when the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, the HL Register=65535. In such a case, 0 is stored in the HL register by "advantage section difference number counter lower limit value set".

In other words, when the value stored in the HL register undergoes a carry-down and an abnormal value is stored, by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register, the number of game media in the advantageous section can be calculated as accurately as possible. It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter lower limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed while the advantageous interval continues in the game after the "advantageous interval difference number counter lower limit value set" is executed.

Although FIG. 78 includes the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set", the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set" may not be provided. Specifically, when it is determined as YES based on "advantageous interval difference counter<0", the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, and the number of INs and the number of OUTs in the game is a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, then the value is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter. It may be configured such that the value of the counter is 2 (the value is the same as the value of the advantageous interval difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value with a lower value) from being stored in the "advantageous section difference number counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a digit is dropped by "advantageous section difference counter subtraction", the advantageous section difference counter value is As such, it prevents abnormal values from entering. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantage section can be ended using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section as accurately as possible.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement of the value (value stored in the A register) of the operation result (IN number - OUT number) in "IN number < OUT number?" Remember. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is added to the HL register.

It should be noted that the complement in the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" refers to the smallest number among the numbers that carry over 1 byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 2+7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (because there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, under a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 65530+7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Although 65530+7 becomes 65537, 2 is stored in the HL register because it exceeds 65535 (due to a carryover). Also, since there is a carry, the carry flag is 1.

In the "advantageous section difference counter storage", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section difference counter. In other words, this is the process of updating the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "advantage section difference counter initial value set", 63135 is stored in the advantageous section difference counter by "advantage section difference counter save".

For example, if the result is YES in the "replay operation", the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. The same value as the advantageous section difference number counter is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if the result of "advantageous section difference counter < 0?" is NO, the difference number of game media in the current game (IN number - OUT number) is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference counter in the previous game. Since the value is stored in the HL register, the value obtained by subtracting the difference of the game medium of the current game from the value of the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game is stored as the advantageous interval difference by “advantage interval difference counter storage”. Store in a number counter.

For example, if "advantageous section difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register. 0) is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, after the "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value obtained by adding the medium difference number (OUT number-IN number) of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game medium of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference number counter of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter by "advantage section difference number counter storage".

In “advantageous interval difference >2400?”, it is determined whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. The case where the carry flag is 1 means that there is a carry due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". On the other hand, when there is a carry-down due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1. Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in the case of “advantageous interval difference > 2400?”, it is possible to determine whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media in the advantageous section with the constant (2400).

In this way, in the case of “advantageous section difference > 2400?”, it is determined whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the “advantageous section difference "Number counter initial value set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in the storage area of 2 bytes (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous interval difference number counter). This is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference number of game media. That is, when the difference number of game media in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the carry flag is set to 1 because it exceeds 65535.

Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -63135 as the number of differences in game media with the starting time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, the situation where the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 13135 means that the difference number is -50000 from the start time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0).

As described above, the initial value is 63135, which is "the value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous section difference number counter" - "the value corresponding to the number of game media differences in the advantageous section determined as the condition for ending the advantageous section". , the program capacity for determining whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 can be reduced. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -63135 as the number of game media differences in the advantageous section. Although 63135 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 63135, a value other than 63135 may be adopted as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

In the "RWM initialization", all the parameters affecting the performance related to the indication function are updated to 0, and the advantageous section clear counter management processing ends. The parameters that affect performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game state related to AT, an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section difference number counter, and the like. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game becomes a game in the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous section, the game next to the game in which the "RWM initialization" is not executed becomes the game of the advantageous section (the advantageous section does not end).

In other words, when an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carry-down, by storing 0 as the lower limit in the HL register, it becomes possible to calculate the number of differences in the advantageous interval as accurately as possible. . It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter lower limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed while the advantageous interval continues in the game after the "advantageous interval difference number counter lower limit value set" is executed.

In addition, although the number of OUT is subtracted from the number of IN in "number of IN<number of OUT?", the number of IN may be subtracted from the number of OUT. In the case where the number of IN is subtracted from the number of OUT, when it is judged as NO in "the number of IN < the number of OUT?" ”, the complement is calculated by a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game), then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter ), the value stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game) can be subtracted. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

Similarly, in the case where the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" ), in the "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter) is stored in the A register without calculating the complement. The value (difference number of game media in the current game) should be added. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

≪Processing to end the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media (subtraction version)≫
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media. This processing corresponds to a modification of the advantageous section clear counter management processing in FIG.

FIG. 79 has an advantageous section difference number counter. The advantageous section difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear accompanying the end of the advantageous section. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by power-on accompanied by setting change (RWM clear accompanying setting change). Further, information indicating that the stopping condition is satisfied is stored in the stopping flag area, and is not cleared when the stopping state occurs.

Although the advantageous section difference number counter is composed of 2 bytes, the advantageous section difference number counter may be composed of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in the "advantageous section clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is less than 0 (if there is a carry-down), the carry flag becomes 1. Further, when the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not fall below 0 (when there is no carry-down), the carry flag becomes 0. Further, when the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 and the result is 0, the zero flag is set to 1.

The advantageous interval clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, as described above, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the result is NO. Specifically, if the carry flag is not 1, the result is NO. In other words, if it is determined as NO in the question "Before subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the question "Before subtraction of advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that the current game is in the normal section.

In the case of "Is the next game an advantageous section?", determination is made according to the information of the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, in the current game (game in the normal section), the transition to the advantageous section may be determined, and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area storing the information indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Also, for example, if it is a specification that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the current game (game in the normal section) and also determines the game state of the transition destination, the game state of the transition destination is stored. The determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area. In any case, it is possible to determine whether or not the next game is in the advantageous section according to the information that enables determination of whether the next game is in the advantageous section. If the next game is in the advantageous section, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in the advantageous section, the result is NO.

In the "advantage zone clear counter initial value storage", the initial value is stored in the RWM area in which the value of the advantageous zone clear counter can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and may be any predetermined value. For example, the number of games (for example, 65535) that does not end in one day may be set.

In the "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set in the register. That is, when starting the advantageous interval (when the current game is the normal interval game and the next game is the advantageous interval game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is a value “2400” corresponding to the number of game media difference in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section. In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. However, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section is 2400. is not limited to exceeding For example, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to set a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4,800. If, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 4,800, the initial value is set to 4,800.

Also, in this example, the advantageous section difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can be 3 bytes. The advantageous section difference number counter is set to 3 bytes, and if the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the difference number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section" will be described later.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction=1?", it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before "advantage zone clear counter -1" is performed. For example, if the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 1) is YES. On the other hand, if the advantageous interval clear counter value is not 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 0) is NO.

It should be noted that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is transferred to a predetermined register (e.g., HL register).

In the case of "At the time of replay operation?", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a game by replay), YES is determined. On the other hand, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), NO is determined.

In "Number of IN<Number of OUT?", it is determined whether or not the number of OUT is greater than the number of IN.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, it is judged as NO.
b) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the decision is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the decision is NO.
d) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, YES is determined.

More specifically, IN number-OUT number is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). As a result of the calculation of the number of INs and the number of OUTs, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag becomes 1), YES is determined; case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is larger in the number of IN than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. In addition, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is smaller than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 1 and it is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=0, the A register=3 and the carry flag=0.
b) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the A register=0 and the carry flag=0.
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the IN number, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay as a result of the previous game is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets in the current game is automatically betted (for example, "3" is set by automatic betting). ), and, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by automatic betting is deal.

On the other hand, as a result of the current game, the number of IN and the number of OUT are determined to be "IN number< Number of OUTs?” is not judged. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the IN number. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of OUTs.

In addition, although the number of IN - the number of OUT is performed for "the number of IN < the number of OUT?", the determination may be made by the number of OUT - the number of IN. In other words, it suffices if the number of game media in the current game can be calculated using the number of INs and the number of OUTs.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the calculation result (IN number - OUT number ) is added. Note that the carry flag is set to 1 when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition".
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
a) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, the HL register=1 and the carry flag=1. Although 65534+3=65537, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 1.
b) When the number of IN is 3 and the number of OUT is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Although 65534+2=65536, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the HL register=65534 and the carry flag=0.

In "advantageous section difference number counter>upper limit value?", it is determined whether or not carry has occurred by "advantageous section difference number counter addition". If a carry occurs, YES is determined, and if no carry occurs, NO is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, YES is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=1, it is determined as YES. Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, c) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, then NO is determined.

If the result of “advantageous section difference number counter>upper limit value?” is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a predetermined operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. FIG. For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set", when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", a predetermined upper limit is set in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. Store the value (65535). In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" Register=1. In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous interval difference number counter upper limit value set".

In other words, when a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register, the difference number of game media in the advantageous section can be calculated as accurately as possible. It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter upper limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 79 is executed while the advantageous interval continues even in the game after the "advantageous interval difference number counter upper limit value set" is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 79, the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set" is provided, but the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set" may not be provided. Specifically, if YES is determined based on "advantage interval difference counter>upper limit", the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534 and the number of INs and the number of OUTs in the game is a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, then the value is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter. 65534 (the same value as the value of the advantageous section difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value with a lower value) from being stored in the "advantageous section difference number counter". In addition, since processing corresponding to "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value setting" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value of the advantageous section difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry. As such, it prevents abnormal values from entering. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantage section can be ended using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section as accurately as possible.

Also, although the upper limit value has been described as 65535 (maximum value that can be stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) as an example, the upper limit value is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12400, which is less than the maximum value that can be stored by the advantageous section difference number counter. If 12400 is adopted as the upper limit value, the advantageous section difference number counter can store up to a value equivalent to -10000 as the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the complement of the value (value stored in the A register) of the operation result (IN number - OUT number) in "IN number < OUT number?" Remember. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number among the numbers carried beyond 1 byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". Then, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry down), the carry flag is 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Since 10-7 does not fall below 0 (because there is no carry-down), the carry flag is 0.

In the "advantageous section difference counter storage", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section difference counter. In other words, this is the process of updating the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", 2400 is stored in the advantageous section difference counter by "advantageous section difference counter save".

For example, if the result is YES in the "replay operation", the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. The same value as the advantageous section difference number counter is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if "advantageous section difference counter>upper limit?" is NO, the game media difference (IN number - OUT number) of the current game is added to the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game. Since the value obtained is stored in the HL register, the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game medium of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference counter value of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section by "advantage section difference counter storage" Store in the difference counter.

For example, if “advantageous section difference counter>upper limit?” is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register. (65535) is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, after the “advantageous section difference counter subtraction”, the value obtained by subtracting the game medium difference number (OUT number−IN number) of the current game from the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of the game medium of the current game from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter by "advantage section difference number counter storage".

In “advantageous interval difference >2400?”, it is determined whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. Note that the case where the carry flag is 1 means that there is a carry-down due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". On the other hand, if there is a carry due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1. Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in the case of “advantageous interval difference > 2400?”, it is possible to determine whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media in the advantageous section with the constant (2400).

In this way, in the case of “advantageous section difference > 2400?”, it is determined whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the “advantageous section difference 2400 is stored as the initial value by "number counter initial value set".

As described above, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section. That is, when the difference number of game media in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section exceeds 2400, it is less than 0, so the carry flag is set to 1.

Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -63135 as the number of differences in game media with the starting time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, the situation where the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 30000 means that the difference number is -27600 from the start of the advantageous section as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section", the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. It is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether or not Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -63135 as the number of game media differences in the advantageous section. Although 2400 is stored as the initial value, even if the initial value is a value other than 2400, a value other than 2400 (for example, 2401 ) can be adopted.

In the "RWM initialization", all the parameters affecting the performance related to the indication function are updated to 0, and the advantageous section clear counter management processing ends. The parameters that affect performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game state related to AT, an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section difference number counter, and the like. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game becomes a game in the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous section, the game next to the game in which the "RWM initialization" is not executed becomes the game of the advantageous section (the advantageous section does not end).

In addition, although the number of OUT is subtracted from the number of IN in "number of IN<number of OUT?", the number of IN may be subtracted from the number of OUT. In the case where the number of IN is subtracted from the number of OUT, when it is judged as NO in "the number of IN < the number of OUT?" ”, the complement is calculated by a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game), then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter ) to the value stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game). In other words, if the question "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

Similarly, in the case where the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" ), the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter) is stored in the A register without calculating the complement in the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction". The value (difference number of game media in the current game) can be subtracted. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media has been described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it suffices if the advantageous section can be ended with the difference in the number of game media.

In addition, in FIGS. 78 and 79, as one of the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the number of games played in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number. may not be used as the termination condition for . In that case, the advantageous section clear counter in FIGS. 78 and 79 may not be provided.

If the advantageous section clear counter is not provided, processing equivalent to "advantageous section clear counter -1" in FIGS. A process corresponding to "initial value storage" may not be provided.

<Regarding the difference number counter that stores the difference number from when the power is turned on>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of payout medals (number of payouts, number of payout game media, number of grants, number of grant medals, number of grant game media, number of wins, number of win medals, number of win game media) starts from power-on. , payout points, awarded points, earned points, or number of OUTs.) to the number of inserted medals (number of inserted, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, input points, bet points, or A difference number counter is provided in a predetermined RWM area to calculate a value (difference number) obtained by subtracting the IN number for each game and to store the accumulated value (total difference number) of the difference number. there is When the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 19000), a process of stopping the progress of the game (hereinafter also referred to as "stopping process") is executed. The process of determining whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value is referred to as difference counter determination process. In addition, processing related to update of the difference number counter and judgment before execution of stop processing is referred to as stop monitoring processing.

In the following description, an example in which the stopping process is executed when the difference number of game media exceeds a predetermined value with the power-on as the starting point (0) will be mainly described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the point where the player has the lowest ball output may be set as a reference (0), and the stopping process may be executed when the number of game media difference from the reference exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, MY may be used to execute stop processing.

For example, after the power is turned on, the point where the player has the lowest ball output is set as a reference (0), and when the number of game media difference from the reference exceeds a predetermined value, the stopping process is executed. Second, the number of differences in game media from the point where the player's lowest ball output is the reference (0), or the reference when the player's lowest ball output is the reference (0). It is possible to store a value corresponding to the number of difference in game media from (a value that allows the number of difference in game media from the reference to be grasped when the point where the player has the lowest ball output is set as the reference (0)).

This stopping monitoring process is executed not only in the advantageous section but also in the normal section (it is executed regardless of the game section).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of paid-out medals is 50001 starting from when the power is turned on and the total number of inserted medals is 31000 starting from when the power is turned on, the value of the difference number counter exceeds 19000. Information indicating that a stop condition is satisfied is stored in a stop flag storage area in a game, and stop processing can be executed.

A stop flag storage area is one in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, when the number of difference in game media exceeds 19000 from the time of power-on, a predetermined value (for example, "1", "255", etc.) is stored in the stop flag storage area as information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied. (predetermined numerical value of ).

Then, when information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, the stop processing can be executed.

The information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by simply turning on the power (normal power on) or turning off the power (turning off the power switch) without changing the settings. Also, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by the RWM clear following the end of the advantageous section. Note that turning on the power without changing the setting corresponds to, for example, turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) and the power is turned on without changing the settings while the stop processing is being executed, the stop processing is not canceled and the stop processing is executed. do. In addition, even if the end game of the advantageous section is a game that satisfies the stopping condition, the RWM clearing of the ending of the advantageous section may be performed by initializing the value of the difference number counter related to the stopping condition or information stored in the stopping flag storage area. is not cleared and the stop processing is executed.

The information stored in the quit flag storage area can be initialized (information indicating that the quit condition has been met) by turning on the power accompanied by a setting change (RWM clear processing accompanying a setting change). can be cleared).

In addition, a RWM clear switch different from the setting key switch is provided, and even if the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is being operated (under the condition that the RWM clear switch is on), the stop flag is stored in the storage area. It is also possible to clear the information that has been stored. When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is being operated, the setting change mode is not entered, but the RWM clear processing accompanying the RWM clear switch is performed.

The RWM clear switch may be shared with the reset switch. In other words, when the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on with a setting change while the stopping process is being executed, the setting change mode is entered, and then the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. After the setting change mode is finished, the stopping process is not executed, and the game becomes executable (betting possible).

The information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by the operation of a reset switch capable of canceling a predetermined error (door opening error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stopping process is being executed, the stopping process is not canceled and the stopping process is executed.

Although the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the stop flag storage area have been described here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the temporary stop flag storage area, which will be described later, are also explained. , the conditions for clearing the information stored in the stop flag storage area and the conditions for not clearing the information.

Stop processing includes not executing the addition of the number of bets or the number of credits due to insertion of medals, turning OFF the blocker so that the number of bets or the number of credits is not added even if the number of medals is inserted, MAX bet switch or 1 bet. Do not execute the bet process even if the operation of the switch is accepted, do not accept the operation of the MAX bet switch or the 1 bet switch, and do not carry out the reel rotation start process even if the operation of the start switch is accepted , to prevent the operation of the start switch from being accepted, not to execute the reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or to prevent the operation of the stop switch from being accepted. It may be processing, or it may be all processing.

In other words, the stopping process prevents an operation for executing the game next time (also referred to as stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stopping process is being executed is sometimes referred to as the stopping state or the operation of the complete function.

Even when the progress of the game is stopped by the stopping process, the reception of the operation of the settlement switch is effective, and the settlement process can be executed. In a gaming machine that does not use real medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the game medals (electronic medals) that are bet are displayed on the game medal number display device (the concept of the tray 28 of the conventional gaming machine). 16383), and the count switch operation reception for moving the number of game medals stored in the game medal number display device to the lending unit are valid. It is configured to be able to execute the processing by accepting the operation of each switch.

If the progress of the game is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be canceled even by turning on the power, and the stop of the progress of the game (stop state) can be canceled by executing the RWM initialization processing by turning on the power along with the setting change. It has become. In other words, a game machine that is in a stopped state during the business hours of the game arcade cannot be operated during the business hours of the day.

In this way, when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, there is a possibility that the player may be given an excessive sense of gambling. By stopping the progress, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

The difference number counter includes a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, game medium number storage means, game medium number storage area, game medal number storage means, game Medal number storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, stop counter, difference number counter for stop, difference number counter for stop, MY counter for stop, MY storage means for stop , may also be referred to as the MY storage area for stopping.

The value stored in the difference number counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on in a state of stopping or not in a state of stopping. In this embodiment, since the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and addition is performed from the initial value, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. If the initial value is set to 19000 and the counter is used for subtraction, the value of the difference number counter will be set to 19000 when the power is turned on. Note that power-on includes not only normal power-on but also power-on with setting change and power-on with RWM abnormality. In addition, the value stored in the difference number counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous interval (for example, the MY during the advantageous interval exceeds 2400, the number of games played during the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number, etc.). It is designed not to be initialized in the RWM initialization process executed when the

In addition, if the difference counter is initialized only by turning on the power, it is easy to be initialized by fraud. The difference counter may be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a predetermined switch that cannot be operated by the operator.

In addition, when the value of the difference number counter exceeds a predetermined value and the progress of the game is stopped, the power supply is interrupted, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF position, and the game starts normally ( When the power is turned on normally), the value of the difference number counter is initialized, but the progress of the game remains stopped. This is because the stopping process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value. This is because the stopping process is started even when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs. It should be noted that when the stop processing is executed, the interrupt processing and the interrupt processing are executed as usual, but the stop processing is looped without returning to the normal main loop processing from the interrupt processing.

In addition, even if an event that shuts off the power (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the abort process, the interrupt process is executed as usual during the abort process. , the above-described power-off processing is configured to be normally executable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being allowed to progress due to illegal power-off and power-on after the progress of the game has been stopped by the stopping process.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of payout medals for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the difference counter will be described. The process of updating the value of the difference number counter is executed at a predetermined timing from after all the reels have stopped until game medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Since the process of updating the value of the difference number counter is executed at the timing when one game is finished, the predetermined timing may be referred to as "after one game is finished". Also, the difference number counter is explained as 2-byte data. "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates a delimiter of each byte, and the numbers in parentheses after the binary value indicate the binary value in decimal notation.

<Difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), Number of paid out medals = 00001010b (10), Number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7). , the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/01100100b (100), 00000000b (0 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = -00000011b (-3) is calculated on the register. Then, the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of payout medals = 00001010b (10), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/00000000b(0), 00001010b (10 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = 00000111b (7) is calculated on the register. , the value of the difference counter is obtained, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter is stored (updated) in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/00000111b(7).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/00000000b(0), 00000000b (0 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = -00000011b (-3) is calculated on the register. Then, the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

<When the difference counter = 00000000b (0), the number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), and the number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)> The calculation result is -00000011b (-3), but it is stored in the difference counter. The reason why the value is 10000000/00000011b (32771) is that when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates a positive value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates a negative value. It's for. In the case of a 2-byte counter, even if the most significant bit is not used, the value of the difference number counter can be normally stored up to 01111111/11111111 (32767). In other words, when the value of the difference number counter is 11111111/11111111b, it can be indicated that it is -32767.

It should be noted that there are parts that are omitted in each of the examples of the above calculations. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid out medals, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value. , and updates the difference counter value with the added value. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid out medals, and the subtracted value is set to 10000000/00000000b (32768) as a fixed value from the obtained difference counter value. is subtracted, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference number counter.

Also, if the result of calculating the value for updating the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value for updating the difference counter value is The value set to 1 is updated as the value of the difference number counter.

In each example of the above calculation, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals was added to the value of the obtained difference number counter. The number of paid out medals may be added to the value of the difference counter, and then the number of inserted medals may be subtracted from the addition result. The number of payout medals may be added from the result of the subtraction.

Further, when the number of payout medals is not 0, it means that a minor combination has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination has stopped. Incidentally, the number of payout medals may be 3 or 0 when the replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops. When the number of payout medals is set to 3 when the replay role is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, the number of inserted medals is set to 3, and the symbols corresponding to the replay role are won and the replay role is won. If the number of payout medals is set to 0 when the combination is stopped, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

Further, when the replay combination is won, the difference counter update process may be executed, or the difference counter update process may not be executed.
Further, when the replay combination is won, the difference counter determination process may be executed, or the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

Also, the difference number counter need not be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608). Since the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, even if the number of payout medals is 0 in 10,000 games played during the business hours of the amusement arcade, it will be -30,000 (10,000 (games played in a day) Possible number of times)×3 (number of inserted medals)), so 2 bytes of the difference counter is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect of updating the difference number counter>
A payout medal count storage area for storing the total payout medal count since the game machine was powered on, an inserted medal count storage area for storing the total payout medal count since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference from when the gaming machine was powered on. A difference number counter for storing numbers is provided, and the payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are configured to be initialized when power is turned on, and are executed after one game is completed. When updating the difference counter in the difference counter update process, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area becomes a positive value. In this case, the result of subtracting the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area from the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is stored in the difference number counter, and the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is used to insert the result. The game machine may be configured to store 0 in the difference number counter when the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal number storage area is a negative value.

With such a configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are storage areas of 2 bytes. A storage area may be used, the number of inserted medals storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference number counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and as the initialization process, 0 is stored in each storage area. It is the same as the above-described mode that setting change and RWM abnormality are included as power-on time.

The number-of-paid-out medals storage area is a storage area for accumulating and storing the number of paid-out medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game state or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number-of-paid-out medals storage area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area, if the N-th game is executed and 10 paid-out medals are paid out, 110 is stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area after the Nth game is completed. When the N+1th game is executed and 0 coins are paid out as payout medals (no payout), 110 is stored in the payout medal number storage area after the N+1th game is finished.

The number-of-inserted-medals storage area is a storage area for accumulating and storing the number of inserted medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game state or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number-of-inserted medals storage area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the inserted medal number storage area, if the Nth game is executed and three inserted medals are inserted, 53 is stored in the inserted medal number storage area after the Nth game is completed. , when the N+1-th game is executed and two inserted medals are inserted, 55 is stored in the paid-out medal number storage area after the N+1-th game is completed.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the game The difference counter value is updated by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter is set to 0. update as the value of Therefore, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts for each game, but it is a counter for determining whether or not the difference counter exceeds 19000. , there is no problem.

Further, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference number Although the mode in which 0 is stored in the counter has been described, the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area updated for each game is stored in the number-of-inserted-medals storage area updated for each game. If the subtracted value is a negative value, the difference counter may not be updated, or a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19000 may be stored in the difference counter. However, a fixed value of 19000 or more may be stored in the difference number counter, or the number of inserted medals updated for each game based on the value stored in the number of payout medals storage area updated for each game may be used. Alternatively, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the area may be stored as it is.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, a difference number counter. is not updated, or a fixed value exceeding 0 and less than 19000 is stored in the difference counter, the determination process of whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 is executed every game. Since the value of the difference number counter never exceeds 19000, the progress of the game is not stopped, and the inserted medals updated for each game based on the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. When the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number storage area becomes a positive value, the correct value is stored in the difference number counter, so there is no problem. Further, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference number A mode may be adopted in which the determination processing of whether or not the value of the counter exceeds 19000 is not executed.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, a difference number counter. A fixed value of 19000 or more is stored in , or the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. In the case where the value is stored as it is, there is a possibility that it will be determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 if the processing for determining whether the value of the difference number exceeds 19000 is executed every game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area is a negative value, does the value of the difference number counter exceed 19000? There is no problem by not executing the determination process of whether or not.

The difference counter update process is the same as the above-described mode, and is executed at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped until game medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Note that the difference number counter update process may include the payout medal number storage area update process and the inserted medal number storage area update process.

<Difference number counter judgment processing when the accessory continuous operation device or the first type special accessory is operating>
Whether or not the accessory continuous operation device is operating before executing the determination processing as to whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 as the difference counter determination processing, and whether the type 1 special accessory is operating It is determined whether or not the accessory continuous operation device or the first type special accessory is operating, and if it is determined that it is operating in either case, the difference number counter determination process is not executed. There may be.

This is because there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to play will be greatly diminished if the game stops while the accessory continuous actuating device or the type 1 special accessory is operating (during the so-called bonus). During the bonus, the game can be progressed even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000, and the progress of the game is stopped after the bonus is completed, so that the player's desire to play is not diminished. It is possible to give a feeling. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to increase the number of balls paid out during the bonus.

Even in such a mode, the process of updating the difference counter is performed even when the accessory continuous operation device is operating or when the type 1 special accessory is operating. . Therefore, as the processing order of the program, "update processing of the difference number counter" → "whether or not the accessory continuous operation device is operating, whether or not the first class special accessory is operating, Alternatively, it is preferable that the processing is configured as follows: processing for judging whether or not the type 1 special accessory is operating”→“difference number counter judgment processing”.

Further, even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus and the value of the difference counter is less than 19000 when the bonus ends, the progress of the game is stopped after the bonus ends. may

In this mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 even during the bonus. store a predetermined value (for example, an arbitrary value such as "1", "255", etc.) in a flag storage temporary storage area), determine whether the value of the stop flag temporary flag is the predetermined value at the end of the bonus, If it is the predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped. When the bonus is finished, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop flag provisional flag is a predetermined value. Also, if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 when the bonus is not in progress, as long as the predetermined value is stored in the stop flag provisional flag, it can be performed every time during the bonus or not. A configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether or not the stop flag provisional flag is at a predetermined value after the end of the game, and the progress of the game is stopped according to the value of the stop flag provisional flag. If the configuration does not store the predetermined value in the stop flag provisional flag when it is determined that the counter value exceeds 19000, it is determined whether the stop flag provisional flag is at the predetermined value after each game not during the bonus is completed. A configuration is conceivable in which the progress of the game is stopped depending on whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds 19000.

It should be noted that the provisional stop flag is not initialized by the RWM initialization upon power-on, and is cleared by the RWM initialization upon power-on accompanied by a setting change.

In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which progress of the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus. A mode in which progress of the game is not stopped may be adopted. However, since the AT can extend (change) the end condition as described above, the progress of the game is not stopped only for the AT whose end condition is not extended.

In addition, if there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting the game, there may be cases where one prescribed number cannot execute processing related to the instruction function, and if one prescribed number cannot execute processing related to the instruction function, the end condition will be changed. Therefore, even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000, the progress of the game is not stopped. Specifically, when it is possible to bet 3 or 2 as the specified number related to the start of the game, it is possible to update the AT end condition with 3 bets (the number of games at which AT ends and the update of the difference possible), but if the end condition of AT cannot be updated with double play (the number of games where AT ends and the number of differences cannot be updated), and the difference number counter reaches 19000 during AT, AT To prevent the progress of the game from being stopped until the end condition of is satisfied.

As a result, even if the AT looks like a bonus, the AT behaves like a bonus, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to increase the number of balls paid out during the bonus.

If the progress of the game does not stop even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus or AT, during the bonus after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 or in the game during AT To prevent the execution of a lottery advantageous to a player such as a lottery or a CZ lottery.

As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive gambling while the progress of the game is confirmed to stop.

During the bonus, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19000. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19000, a stop flag temporary flag (stop flag temporary flag storage area) is set. A predetermined value (for example, an arbitrary value such as "1", "255", etc.) is stored, and at the end of the bonus, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop flag temporary flag is the predetermined value, and if it is the predetermined value, Although the mode of stopping the progress of the game has been described, the stop flag provisional flag may not be provided.

Specifically, when the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus, the value of the difference counter is not updated in the subsequent game during the bonus, and the difference counter after the bonus ends. It may be configured such that the stop processing is executed by the judgment processing. For example, when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 19000 (for example, 19001) during the bonus, the difference number counter is not updated in subsequent games, and the value of the difference number counter at the end of the bonus is , 19,000.

<Regarding the initialization of the difference number counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference number counter is initialized when the power is turned on, the initial value is 0 for the addition formula and 19000 for the subtraction formula. Any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65,535. In the case where the progress of the game is to be stopped when the difference number from when the power is turned on exceeds 19000, the difference number counter needs to count up to 19000, so the initial value is 46535 which is 65535-19000. Also, in this case, if the value of the difference number counter exceeds 65535, the progress of the game is stopped. has exceeded 19000 sheets. In addition, 1 is stored in the carry flag even if it falls below 0, but as described above, the theoretical maximum number of inserts per day is around 30,000, so there is a margin for 16,535, which is 46,535-30,000. It has been enough. In fact, since a small winning combination or a replay winning combination is won, the number of coins will not decrease by 30,000 in a day.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing related to the update of the difference number counter and to compress the program capacity.

Also, for example, as described above, if the difference number exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. Since the increment during the bonus cannot be counted, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46535 when the difference counter is a 2-byte counter. A value smaller than 46535 may be 40000, for example. In this case, there is room to acquire up to 6535 cards after the difference exceeds 19000, so even if the difference exceeds 19000 during the bonus, the difference will continue to be counted until the bonus ends. can. Also, even if the difference number exceeds 19000 sheets during AT, AT can only acquire up to 2414 sheets due to the relationship with the advantageous section, so even if the difference number exceeds 19000 sheets during AT The counting of difference numbers can continue until finished. When determining whether or not the difference number exceeds 19,000 when the initial value of the difference number counter is 40,000, it is possible to determine whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds 59,000. Also, when the value of the difference counter exceeds 59000, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the bonus state, and if the bonus state is in effect, the progress of the game is continued until the end of the bonus.

In this example, the initial value of the difference number counter is set to a value smaller than 46535, but the value of the initial value to be set is a value (32767 or more) that is larger than half of the maximum value (65535) that can be counted in 2 bytes. It is preferable to This is because when the set value of the game machine is the value that indicates the lowest ball payout rate (for example, a set value of 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be less than 100%, so the difference does not increase but decreases. This is because the possibility is higher. Therefore, by setting the initial value of the difference number counter to a value larger than half of the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility that the value of the difference number counter becomes 0 can be reduced, and normal operation can be realized in the market. can be made possible and easier.

It should be noted that when the difference number counter exceeds 19000, the difference number may not be counted normally. It is possible to prevent the game from being stopped. In the case of such specifications, when the difference counter exceeds 65535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65535 or when it is determined that 1 is stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag provisional flag, It is determined whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped depending on whether or not the every game stop flag temporary flag is a predetermined value. In this way, when the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus, the difference number counter exceeds 65535 and counts from 0, but whether or not to stop the progress of the game depends on the stop flag provisional flag. Therefore, although the value of the difference counter is not normal, it is possible to realize normal operation as a whole.

Although the difference counter subtracts the number of inserted medals and adds the number of paid-out medals, the difference counter may add the number of inserted medals and subtract the number of paid-out medals. In this case, the initial value of the difference number counter may be 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766.

Although the difference counter has been described as a 2-byte counter, it may be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value is set to 16758215. When the difference exceeds 19000 sheets, a carry flag is generated. 1 can be stored in . In addition, by using 3 bytes or more, there is a game hall where the power of the game machine is not turned off, and the set value is always below 100%, and 10,000 games have been played every day. Even so, since the difference counter does not fall below 0 for several years, the possibility of defects occurring in the market can be further reduced.

<Regarding the test signal for stopping>
As described above, when the stopping process is executed, the progress of the game stops (enters a stopped state). If the progress of the game suddenly stops during the test by the testing institution, it is accurately determined whether the progress of the game is stopped due to a defect or the stop process is activated. Can not. Therefore, when the stopping process is executed, a process for outputting a test signal relating to the stopping process, which can be grasped that the progress of the game has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process, may be executed. With this configuration, when the progress of the game is stopped due to the stopping process, the testing agency side can confirm that the progress of the game is stopped by the execution of the stopping process, not by a problem. It can be identified and the test by the testing laboratory can be the correct result.

At this time, the processing for outputting the test signal related to stopping may be executed continuously during the stopping state, may be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times ( For example, it may be executed once or multiple times (five times).

In addition, when executing the stop processing, it is possible to execute processing for outputting a test signal related to the stop that can be grasped that the progress of the game has stopped due to the execution of the stop processing. A process for outputting a test signal relating to stopping from the game may be executed. In other words, it may be possible to execute processing for outputting a test signal related to stopping in advance. For example, in a specification that executes stop processing when the number of differences from when the power is turned on exceeds 19000, when the number of differences from when the power is turned on reaches 18900, a test signal related to stopping is output. It may be configured to be able to execute a process for doing so. In the case of such a configuration, since the number of differences from when the power is turned on has not yet reached 19000, it is possible to proceed with the game even under the condition that the test signal relating to stopping is being output. It is By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the testing agency side in advance that there is a possibility that the stop processing will be executed, and the testing by the testing agency can be performed smoothly.

At this time, the processing for outputting the test signal related to stopping may be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), or may be executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, once or multiple times (5 times)). You can do it. Also, when the number of differences from when the power is turned on is a value of 18900 or more, it may be executed (if the number of differences from when the power is turned on is less than 18900, a test signal for stopping (It is also possible not to execute processing for outputting).

Note that the timing of executing the process for outputting the test signal related to stopping in advance was when the number of differences from when the power was turned on reached 18,900. Any value such as 18000 or 18985 can be set.

Also, processing for outputting not only test signals but also external signals may be executed. At this time, it is possible to apply the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the termination described above to the external signal (for example, the security signal). By outputting the external signal in this way, it is possible to inform the hall staff in advance that there is a possibility that the stop processing will be executed.

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the difference number counter>
The main control means is arranged to be able to send information about the value of the difference number counter to the sub-control means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, when the number of remaining 100 sheets exceeds 19,000, it is conceivable to display the ending "100 remaining" on the liquid crystal display or to execute a voice. Then, every time the number of differences is updated and the number of remaining differences decreases, the ending display such as "90 remaining" or "85 remaining" is updated. When the difference number exceeds 19000, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment by means of a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or the execution of a voice.

By doing so, it is possible to set the game goal to stop the game when the differential number exceeds 19000, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, for example, when the difference number of the remaining 100 sheets exceeds 19,000, if the ending display of "100 remaining sheets" is displayed on the liquid crystal display, the remaining difference number increases and the remaining difference number exceeds 100 sheets. If the number of remaining differences is exceeded, it is conceivable to erase (hide) the display of the ending of the remaining difference. At this time, when the remaining difference number reaches 100 again, the ending display of "remaining 100 sheets" is executed on the liquid crystal display.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered due to the ending display not disappearing due to the number of differences continuing to fall.

Also, for example, if the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and the progress of the game is not stopped until the end of the bonus, the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and after the blessing display is displayed, the difference number is 19000. Blessing display does not disappear even if it falls below . In addition, the blessing display continues until the end of the bonus.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of accomplishment from being hindered due to the disappearance of the blessing display, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

In the example described above, the number of remaining differences was displayed as the ending display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect with a story may be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be stopped more than necessary by ending the ending display when the number of remaining differences falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display.

When the difference number reaches 19,000, a blessing effect is suddenly displayed and the game is stopped. At the time of insertion or in the middle of the game, a notice regarding the stop processing (for example, display or voice such as "Aim for 19000 coins!", "End with 19000 coins", etc.) may be performed, or a demo screen or menu screen may be displayed. A notification (for example, display or voice of "Aim for 19000 sheets!", "Finish with 19000 sheets", etc.) may be performed.

<Regarding signal output to the outside based on the value of the difference counter>
As a result of updating the value of the difference number counter by the main control means during stop processing or by monitoring processing, a specific value (18900 ), a process for outputting a test interruption request signal to the test IF board is executed.

As a result, the test can be interrupted before the gaming machine stops and the progress of the game stops during the gaming machine test, and when the test is interrupted, the tester turns off the gaming machine, and By turning on the power again, the value of the difference counter is initialized, and the gaming machine test can be continued until the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 again. In other words, by turning off the power when the value of the difference counter reaches 18900 and then turning it on again, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from stopping until the value of the difference counter substantially exceeds 37900, thereby conducting a stable test. can be realized.

Although the specific value before the predetermined value (19000 in this embodiment) at which the stop processing is executed is 18900, the maximum payout is from 9500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed. Even if it is a number, any value up to 18985, which is a value at which the stopping process is not executed, may be used as the specific value.

Further, in the present embodiment, processing for outputting a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test is executed, but any signal may be output as long as it is communicated to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when reaching a specific value prior to the predetermined value at which stop processing is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal). Processing for outputting toward the IF board may be referred to as processing for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the difference number counter>
When the stop processing is executed by the main control means, information based on the value of the difference number counter can be transmitted to the sub control means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the progress of the game has stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "stop notification").

For example, when the number of remaining 100 sheets exceeds 19,000, it is conceivable to display the remaining difference number of "remaining 100 sheets" on the liquid crystal display, and to execute an ending effect or sound. Then, every time the difference number is updated and the remaining difference number decreases, the display of the remaining difference number such as "90 remaining sheets" or "85 remaining sheets" is updated. When the difference number exceeds 19000, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment by means of a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or the execution of a voice. Such a sub-control means can be used to display the remaining difference number until the stop, the ending effect or voice is being executed, or the state where the remaining difference number until the stop is not displayed but the ending effect or sound related to the stop is being executed. It is called an operation advance notification state (regarding stopping). It should be noted that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing so, it is possible to set the game goal to stop the game when the differential number exceeds 19000, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Also, for example, if the remaining difference number exceeds 19,000 after the remaining 100 sheets, and the remaining difference number display of "100 remaining sheets" is executed on the liquid crystal display, the remaining difference number increases and the remaining difference number becomes 100 sheets. is exceeded, it is conceivable to erase (hide) the remaining difference number display. At this time, when the remaining difference number becomes 100 again, the remaining difference number display of "remaining 100 sheets" is executed on the liquid crystal display.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered due to the remaining difference number display not disappearing due to the difference number continuing to fall.

Also, for example, if the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and the progress of the game is not stopped until the end of the bonus, the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and after the blessing display is displayed, the difference number is 19000. Blessing display does not disappear even if it falls below . In addition, the blessing display continues until the end of the bonus.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of accomplishment from being hindered due to the disappearance of the blessing display, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

The ending effect or sound may be a continuous effect with a story or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or voice can be prevented from being executed more than necessary by ending the ending performance or voice when the residual difference number is less than the threshold value that triggers execution of the ending performance or voice.

When the difference number reaches 19,000, a blessing effect is suddenly displayed and the game is stopped. At the time of insertion or in the middle of the game, a notice regarding the stop processing (for example, display or voice such as "Aim for 19000 coins!", "End with 19000 coins", etc.) may be performed, or a demo screen or menu screen may be displayed. A notification (for example, display or voice of "Aim for 19000 sheets!", "Finish with 19000 sheets", etc.) may be performed.

<Aspect of production in the operation advance notification state>
As a mode of display on the display device in the operation advance notice state, a mode as shown in FIG. 85 is conceivable. In FIG. 85, the effect image in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither the operation advance notice state nor the stop state. , lion and girl character display, heart effect display, line display "Today was fun", and total acquisition number display "TOTAL: 18000" are performed. In addition, in addition to the effect image displayed in the normal state as a effect image in the operation advance notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), "Coming soon The complete function will be activated. The number of remaining difference is displayed as "100 sheets remaining until activation". In addition, the effect image that was displayed in the normal state and the activation notice notification state is not displayed as the effect image in the stop notification state (the state in which the progress of the game is stopped). The function has been activated." (notification regarding the termination process, termination notification) is performed. It should be noted that the display of the total acquisition number in the normal state does not always need to be displayed, and the total acquisition number is set to a predetermined threshold value (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 85 or a value for transmitting a test interruption request signal to the test IF board). 18900, etc.) is displayed.

In the operation advance notification state, all of the display of the total number of acquisitions, part of the character display of the girl, and all of the effect display are invisible due to the remaining difference number display. However, since the display area of the remaining difference number display is smaller than 50% of the display area of the entire screen, the player can generally grasp the effect image being executed. In FIG. 85, since the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference number display is set to 0%, the display of the layer behind the remaining difference number display cannot be seen, but the remaining difference number display has a transparency of 10%. to 90%. This makes it possible to grasp both the remaining difference number display and the effect image.

In addition to the above-described congratulatory display, the stop notification may be a display of stop characters such as "The game has been stopped" or "The game has ended" or a voice. The stop character display may be displayed at the same time as the congratulatory display, or after the congratulatory display is performed, the congratulatory display may be terminated and the stop character display or voice may be performed. In addition to displaying stop characters, a warning display such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the count switch" or a voice may be executed together.
In addition, the remaining difference number display in the operation advance notification state is displayed above the display area of the display device, but the remaining difference number display may be displayed below or in the center of the display area of the display device. good. However, if it is displayed on the lower side or in the center, it may overlap with the display area of various information displays (game medal number display, awarded number display, or bet number display) and most of the effect image. By setting the transparency of the number display to an arbitrary value between 20% and 90%, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various information displays and effect images.

In addition, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notice state, the immersion prevention is given priority over the display of the remaining difference number. showing the display. As a result, the player can be made to visually recognize the addiction prevention display rather than the remaining difference number display, so that addiction to the game can be effectively prevented.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notice state, the remaining difference The number display may be displayed with priority over the immersion prevention display. As a result, the player can quickly visually recognize the number of remaining differences until the stop state is reached.

In addition, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of times of AT navigation, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display are displayed differently. area may be displayed. This allows the player to visually recognize both pieces of information. In this case, if the display area for the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display are configured to be displayed in a display area that originally overlaps, the display area for the immersion prevention display may be changed. The display area of the number display may be changed. Also, the display areas for the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display may be determined in advance so that they do not overlap even if they are displayed at the same time.

In addition, in the total score threshold reached state and the total score upper limit abnormality, a notification to prompt counting (counting switch prompt display) is performed. Both the remaining difference number display and the count switch promotion display are displayed. This allows the player to recognize both the display of the remaining difference number and the operation of the counting switch.

Further, when the total score threshold value reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality occurs in the operation advance notification state, the counting switch promotion display may be displayed with priority over the remaining difference number display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch promotion display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold value (15000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference number display is displayed. As a result, the state of reaching the total score threshold value can be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then recognize the display of the remaining difference.

Further, when the total score threshold value reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality occurs in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference number display may be displayed with priority over the counting switch prompt display. As a result, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction when he/she wants to preferentially recognize the number of remaining differences.

<Production mode in stop notification state>
In the stop notification state, the character display of the lion and the girl, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total acquisition number display are all invisible. In addition, instead of displaying the number of remaining differences, a stop display is performed. In FIG. 85, the stop display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the effect image is not displayed (transparency of the stop display is 0%). May be displayed anywhere including

Further, the stop display in the stop notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when displaying other information (display that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub switch or display to call attention), the stop display in the stop notification state is 50% to 90% of the display area of the full screen. Any value between

Although the congratulatory display is not displayed in the stop notification state of FIG. 85, a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of the black background image. However, even when the blessing display is displayed, the effect image during the game is not displayed.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop When displaying the display, an immersion prevention display may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the immersion prevention display, which is originally displayed on the end screen of the AT, from not being displayed. The immersion prevention display at this time may be the same display mode and display time as when displayed on the AT end screen, or may be a different display mode and display time than when displayed on the AT end screen. good too. In addition, the display area of the immersion prevention display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display area of the stopping display, but the immersion prevention display is hidden (becomes invisible) after a predetermined time. In this case, the display area for the immersion prevention display and the display area for the stop display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (although an arbitrary end condition of AT (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is not met) When the stop condition is satisfied), when the stop display is displayed, it is not necessary to display the immersion prevention display. As a result, the visibility of the stopping display is not lowered, so that the player can quickly recognize that the game is in the stopping state.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop Even if the immersion prevention display is not displayed when displaying the display, when any AT termination condition is satisfied and the stopping condition is satisfied ) may display the immersion prevention display when the stop display is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the AT has ended even when the game is stopped, and can give a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop This is the case where the immersion prevention display is not displayed when the display is displayed, and even when the AT's arbitrary end condition is satisfied and the stop condition is satisfied (when the AT's arbitrary end condition and stop condition are satisfied at the same time) The immersion prevention display may not be displayed when the stop display is displayed. As a result, the visibility of the stopping display is not lowered, so that the player can quickly recognize that the game is in the stopping state.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the stopping process>
When the stop processing is executed by the main control means, the main control means and/or the sub-control means notify the player that the progress of the game has stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "stop notification"). run against.

As the stop notification by the main control means, a display indicating that the stop has occurred may be executed on a predetermined display device controlled by the main control means.

Examples of the predetermined display device controlled by the main control means include an acquired number display device and a credit number display device.

For example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door opening error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while a display (e.g., EE) indicating that a stoppage has occurred is displayed on the acquired number display, the number of acquired A display (for example, E1) indicating that a predetermined error has occurred may be displayed on the display. Then, when the predetermined error is cleared by operating the reset switch, it is possible to display the fact that the number of winnings has been stopped again on the display of the number of winnings.

With this configuration, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means, it is possible to accurately notify that the game has been stopped. Further, when a predetermined error occurs in a state of stopping, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means, it is possible to accurately notify that the predetermined error has occurred. Further, when the predetermined error is cleared, it is possible to notify that the predetermined error has been cleared and that the operation is in a halted state.

Also, for example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door opening error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while a display (e.g., EE) indicating that a stop has occurred is displayed on the acquired number display, It is also possible not to display the display (for example, E1) indicating that a predetermined error has occurred on the acquired number display. In other words, even if a predetermined error has occurred, the number-of-acquisitions display may continue to display that the game has been terminated.

By constructing in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a predetermined error has occurred or the stoppage state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified of the occurrence of the stoppage state. .

Although the number-of-acquisitions display has been given as an example of the predetermined display controlled by the main control means, the number of credits display may be used as described above.

For example, a credit number indicator displays the number of credits. However, when the cancellation condition is satisfied (when information indicating that the cancellation condition is satisfied is stored in the cancellation flag storage area), automatic settlement, which will be described later, may be performed. In this configuration, the credit amount becomes 0 after the cancellation condition is satisfied and the automatic settlement is made, so a display (for example, EE) indicating that the cancellation state has occurred is executed on the credit amount display. be able to.

In a gaming machine that does not perform automatic settlement when the stop condition is satisfied, the credit number indicator indicates that the stop state has occurred after the player operates the settlement switch and the credit amount becomes 0. Display (eg, EE) can be performed.

When nothing is displayed on the acquired number display and the display indicating that the credit number display is in a stop state, a predetermined error (e.g., door open error, medal retention error, etc.), a display (e.g., E1) indicating that a predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the number-of-acquisitions display, and a stop state has occurred on the credits display. Display may be executed. Then, when the predetermined error is canceled by operating the reset switch, the display indicating that the predetermined error has occurred disappears from the acquired number display (the display processing is terminated), and the credit display displays may continue to display a display indicating that a halt condition has occurred.

With this configuration, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means, it is possible to accurately notify that the game has been stopped. Further, when a predetermined error occurs in a state of stopping, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means, it is possible to accurately notify that the predetermined error has occurred. Further, when the predetermined error is cleared, it is possible to notify that the predetermined error has been cleared and that the operation is in a halted state.

Also, for example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door opening error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while a display (e.g., EE) indicating that a stop has occurred is being displayed on the credit display, It is also possible not to display the display (for example, E1) indicating that a predetermined error has occurred on the acquired number display. In other words, even if a predetermined error has occurred, the credit display may continue to display that the transaction has been terminated.

By constructing in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a predetermined error has occurred or the stoppage state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified of the occurrence of the stoppage state. .

In addition to the blessing display described above, the stop notification by the sub-control means may be a stop display such as "Complete function activated", "Stopped state", "Game finished", etc. shown in FIG. It may be one that executes voice. The stop display may be displayed at the same time as the blessing display, or after the blessing display is performed, the blessing display may be ended and the stop display or voice may be performed. In addition to the stop display, a warning display (various switch prompt display) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or a voice may be executed together.

As an end notice, it is possible to execute stop processing before executing the blessing display and display the blessing during the stop processing, or execute a predetermined period of freeze before executing the stop processing, and perform a predetermined period of time. When executing the congratulatory display and executing the stop processing after a predetermined period of time, the stop character display may be executed.

In addition, when performing the ending character display after the blessing display, the attention calling display is not executed while the blessing display is being executed, and the attention calling display is executed when the stopping character display is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or the counting switch, and since the feeling of accomplishment caused by executing the blessing display is not hindered, the amusement of the game is improved. .

In addition, during the stop notification, there will be BGM, etc. other than the sound such as the stop character voice "Stopped" etc. No sound is output and it is silent. In addition, during the stop notification, sounds such as BGM, etc. other than sounds such as the stop character sound "Stopped" and the warning sound "Please press the checkout switch" are higher than the volume at the time of the error notification. may be output at a low volume.

By constructing in this way, the impression of the stop state is less likely to be bad for the player, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize it as an event to be aimed at, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the function of the sub-switch managed by the sub-control means is valid during the stop notification. For this reason, even during stop processing (during stop notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or open the volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the stop notification, so the volume during the stop notification cannot be changed.

In addition, by opening the menu screen during the stopping process and displaying the two-dimensional code including the game history, the game history can be read by the mobile terminal and saved on the server (so-called "gaming machine interlocking service"). can be provided to the player. In addition, since the stop display is displayed on the display device, when the two-dimensional code is displayed from the menu screen except during the stop notification, it is displayed in a predetermined area in the center of the screen of the display device. Since the area overlaps with the stop display, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the stop notification is displayed in a region that is different from the predetermined area and does not overlap with the stop display.

Further, as another aspect of displaying the stop display and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the stop display and the two-dimensional code overlap, by alternately displaying the stop display and the two-dimensional code, It may be configured to enable reading of the two-dimensional code while executing the stop notification.

Incidentally, when the stop processing is executed, the game media may be automatically settled. For example, if the stop processing is executed under the condition that "50" is stored as the number of credits, the game media of "50" are automatically settled even if the settlement switch is not operated. paid out). With this configuration, the game media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player without the player operating the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to prevent the warning voice such as "Please press the adjustment switch" and the warning display such as "Please press the adjustment switch" and "Please press the counting switch".

Further, the stop notification is not terminated due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the suspension notification continues until the suspension state is canceled (until the setting change process or the RWM abnormality process is executed).

During the termination process, even if any of the above-described recoverable errors occurs, the specified error may not be detected, or the specified error may be detected but the specified error may occur. A mode in which no processing is performed may be adopted. In any case, it is configured so as not to execute notification regarding a predetermined error.

This is because, as described above, the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a predetermined error is detected in the interrupt processing, the predetermined error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. . It should be noted that if the interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the predetermined error will not be detected.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the trouble of canceling the error even though the game cannot be progressed by executing the stopping process, and it is possible to reduce the work load of the game parlor clerk.

If the configuration is such that predetermined error processing is executed within interrupt processing, the predetermined error processing will be executed even during abort processing. Predetermined error processing can be prevented from being executed during the stop processing by determining whether or not and not executing the predetermined error processing during the stop processing. Alternatively, it may be realized by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In view of the fact that fraud can be quickly detected by executing predetermined error processing even during cancellation processing, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined error processing can be executed during cancellation processing.

In this mode, interrupt processing is permitted even during stop processing, and when a predetermined error is detected in interrupt processing, predetermined error processing in interrupt processing is executed to execute predetermined error notification processing. By executing predetermined error processing when a predetermined error is detected in stop processing, predetermined error processing during loop processing of stop processing after a predetermined error is detected in interrupt processing can be performed. to execute predetermined error notification processing.

By doing so, it is possible to execute fraud-related processing even during the termination processing, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

It should be noted that an external signal may be output when the stopping process is executed. For example, it is conceivable to output an external signal as a security signal. A security signal is a signal that is output due to a predetermined error (door opening, etc.). By outputting the security signal, the game store side can grasp that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the game machine where the stop processing has been executed, so even if the error is not notified during the stop processing , can deter fraud.

<Other configurations related to stop monitoring processing or stop processing>
Stop monitoring processing and stop processing are configured to be executed outside the use area. Alternatively, the suspension monitoring process may be executed outside the usage area and the suspension process may be performed within the usage area, or the suspension monitoring process and the suspension process may be configured to be performed within the usage area. may be

In the case of a medalless game machine, the stop monitoring process and the stop process may be executed outside the use area of the main control board, or the stop monitor process and stop process may be executed outside the use area of the game medal number control board. processing may be executed.

During the stopping process, the process for outputting the external signal is continued to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the outside that the stop processing is in progress, so that the game hall manager can quickly grasp the situation of the game machine.

The stop notification may be made not only by the liquid crystal display or the voice output from the speaker, but also by the lighting mode of each LED such as the frame lamp, the lower panel lamp, the win number indicator, or the credit indicator.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify that the game is in a stop state even in a game machine without liquid crystal.

A specific example of the stop monitoring process will be described below with reference to the drawings. Here, the stopping monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of game media (winning award awarding process relating to the symbol combination displayed in FIG. 9) is completed. For example, as one of the processes executed in the game end check of FIG. 9, a stopping monitoring process may be executed.

In addition, stop monitoring processing is executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game section (normal section, advantageous section). Also, it is executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), internal bonus state). In addition, it is executed regardless of the number of game media betted (1-bet game, 2-bet game, 3-bet game).

<Stop monitoring processing (version without difference counter>
FIG. 80 has an input medal number storage area and a payout medal number storage area.

The inserted medal number storage area (also referred to as total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of inserted game media (total number of bets). . For example, the inserted medal number storage area can be a 2-byte storage area (a storage area capable of storing 0 to 65535).

A payout medal number storage area (also referred to as a total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out (total number of payouts). . For example, the payout medal number storage area can be a 2-byte storage area (a storage area capable of storing 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the inserted medal number storage area is the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, in a situation where the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area is 2000, if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on, An initial value (0) is stored in the inserted medal number storage area, and an initial value (0) is stored in the payout medal number storage area.

Note that power-on includes both power-on without setting change and power-on with setting change. However, the initial value may not be stored when the power is turned on without changing the setting, and the initial value may be stored when the power is turned on with the changing of the setting.

The initial value (0) is not stored for the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area and the value stored in the payout medal number storage area when the RWM is cleared at the end of the advantageous section. In other words, when the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area is 2000, the advantageous section ends (the RWM clear associated with the end of the advantageous section is executed). ), the next game (game in the normal section) is configured to start from a situation where 1000 is stored in the inserted medal number storage area and 2000 is stored in the payout medal number storage area. It is assumed that the power is not turned off from the end of the advantageous section to the next game.

First, in the "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. That is, in a game in which a replay combination is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, YES is determined. On the other hand, for example, in a game (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stop-displayed) in which the push-order bell combination was won by internal lottery, it is determined as NO. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay can also be referred to as the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (the same applies hereinafter).

In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the current game, YES is given to the question "replay operation symbol display?", and the stop monitoring process is terminated.

In the "total OUT counter update process", the value stored in the payout medal number storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of payouts in the current game is added to the value stored in the number of payout medals storage area. Then, the result obtained by adding the number of payouts for the current game to the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is stored in the number-of-payout-medals storage area. For example, in a situation where "1000" is stored in the payout medal number storage area, if the payout number "9" is obtained as a result of the game this time, "1009" is stored in the payout medal number storage area.

In the "total IN counter update process", the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of inserted medals in the current game is added to the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area. Then, the result obtained by adding the number of inserted medals in the current game to the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area is stored in the inserted medal number storage area. For example, in a situation where "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area, if the number of bets in the current game is "3", "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area.

Even if the game is automatically betted this time, the number of bets for the automatic bet is used as the number of inputs for the game this time. For example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game and "3" is betted by the automatic bet, the number of insertions in the current game is "3". However, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in both the previous game and the current game (two games in a row), the "replay operation symbol display?" Since the result is YES, the stop monitoring process is terminated without executing the "total IN counter update process".

In the ``total OUT counter<total IN counter?'', it is checked whether the total number of payouts after being updated by the ``total OUT counter updating process'' is smaller than the total number of inputs after being updated by the ``total IN counter updating process''. to decide.

Specifically, subtraction processing is performed to subtract the "total number of inputs after being updated by the 'total IN counter updating process'" from the "total number of payouts after being updated by the 'total OUT counter updating process'". If the carry flag is 1 as a result of this subtraction processing, YES is determined, and the stop monitoring processing ends. In other words, the next process "difference number>19000" is not executed. On the other hand, as a result of this subtraction processing, if the carry flag is not 1 (if it is 0), NO is determined.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "1000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "2000", then "2000 ”-“1000”. As a result of this subtraction processing, the carry flag becomes 0 because no carry occurs. That is, NO is determined.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "2000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "1000", then "1000 ”-“2000”. As a result of this subtraction processing, the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs. That is, YES is determined.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "2000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "2000", then "2000 ”-“2000”. As a result of this subtraction processing, the carry flag becomes 0 because no carry occurs. That is, NO is determined.

In the “difference number>19000?”, it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 when the power-on is set as the starting point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process executed with "total OUT counter<total IN counter?" Here, the "value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be in the stopped state" is set to "19001", and the judgment is made.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "1000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "2000", then "2000 '-'1000' results in '1000'. As a result of the comparison operation (1000-19001) between "1000" and "19001", the carry flag becomes 1, so NO (the difference does not exceed 19000) is determined.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "10000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "29000", then "29000 '-'10000' results in '19000'. As a result of the comparison operation (19000-19001) between "19000" and "19001", the carry flag becomes 1, so it is determined NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter updating process" is "10000" and the total payout number after being updated by the "total OUT counter updating process" is "29005", then "29005" '-'10000' results in '19005'. As a result of the comparison operation of "19005" and "19001" (19005"-"19001"), the carry flag becomes 0, so it is determined YES (the difference exceeds 19000).

In the "stop flag storage", information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

Note that the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by power-on or power-off (power-off processing) without changing settings. Also, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by the RWM clear following the end of the advantageous section.

The information stored in the stop flag storage area can be initialized by turning on the power accompanied by setting changes (RWM clear processing accompanying setting changes). , the information indicating that the termination conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, when the power is turned off after storing the information indicating that the cancellation conditions have been satisfied in the stop flag storage area by "save stop flag", and then the power is turned on (the power is turned on without changing the settings). , the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will be the initial values (0), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (condition of stop is not initialized).

Therefore, in a situation where the information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the number of inserted medals The difference between the value stored in the storage area and the value stored in the paid-out medals storage area does not exceed 19000 (when the power-on is set as the starting point (0), the difference in game media does not exceed 19000). has not exceeded), but it will be in a stop state.

In addition, when information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area (in the case of the stop state), the betting operation for executing the next game is prohibited. . For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the position of the blocker is set to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning the inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in a gaming machine that does not perform automatic settlement of game media after information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area. The adjustment switch may be operated after the payment has been made. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine that automatically settles game media after information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, the operation of the settlement switch may be disabled.

That is, in the stopping monitoring process of FIG. 80, the "total number of inputs after being updated by the 'total IN counter updating process'" is subtracted from the 'total number of payouts after being updated by the 'total OUT counter updating process''. Perform subtraction processing. Then, when the "total number of payouts after updating by the 'total OUT counter updating process'" is greater than the 'total number of inputs after being updated by the 'total IN counter updating process'', the specified value Determine whether it is greater than (19000). As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the value is larger than the specified value (19000), information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area. Therefore, the next game cannot be executed unless the setting is changed.

Also, in the stop monitoring process of FIG. 80, the "total number of inputs after being updated by the 'total IN counter updating process'" is subtracted from the 'total number of payouts after being updated by the 'total OUT counter updating process''. Perform subtraction processing. Then, if the "total number of payouts after being updated by the 'total OUT counter updating process'" is smaller than the "total number of inputs after being updated by the 'total IN counter updating process'", the specified value It does not judge whether it is greater than (19000). Therefore, information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is not stored in the stop flag storage area, so that the next game can be executed.

In other words, if the total number of payouts is larger than the total number of inputs, the comparison is made with the specified value, but if the total number of payouts is smaller than the total number of inputs, the comparison with the specified value is not performed. I have to.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed when the total number of payouts is smaller than the total number of inputs. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and to reduce erroneous judgments due to noise or the like.

Although the initial value stored in the inserted medal number storage area and the initial value stored in the paid out medal number storage area have been described as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0". As long as the initial value stored in the inserted medal number storage area and the initial value stored in the paid out medal number storage area are the same, any value can be set.

Also, although the number of inserted medals storage area is a 2-byte storage area and the number of paid-out medals storage area is a 2-byte storage area, the number of inserted medals storage area is a 3-byte storage area, and the number of paid-out medals storage area is a 3-byte storage area. It may be used as a storage area.

In addition, when the number of difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) is less than the lower limit, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is stored in the number of paid out medals storage area. It may be configured not to update the existing value.

For example, when the lower limit value is -10000, in a game where the number of game media difference is less than -10000 when the power is turned on (0), based on the number of bets in the game, the input medal number storage area is stored. Do not update the stored value. Further, the value stored in the payout medal number storage area is not updated based on the payout number in the game.

By setting the lower limit value in this way, it is possible to enter the stopping state when the difference number of game media exceeds 29000 (the absolute value of the lower limit value (10000)+19000) at the maximum. In other words, it is possible to reduce the number of game media that the player may obtain before the game is stopped, compared to the case where no lower limit value is set. That is, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming significantly high.

Although the lower limit is set to -10000 in the description, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and may be any value.
stomach

<Stop monitoring processing (addition version of difference counter)>
FIG. 81 has a difference number counter. Since the explanation of the difference number counter is as described above, the explanation is omitted. It should be noted that the size of the storage area of the difference number counter is explained as 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the difference counter in FIG. 81 is a value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference number of the game media to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the storage area of the difference counter".

The "value corresponding to the storage area of the difference counter" is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the storage area of the difference counter when the storage area of the difference counter is 2 bytes. If the storage area of the difference counter is 3 bytes, the maximum value that can be stored in the storage area of the difference counter is 16777215.

The "value corresponding to the number of game media to be stopped" is, for example, 19000 when the difference between game media exceeds 19000 with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). Become. Further, for example, when the difference number of game media exceeds 10,000 with the time of turning on the power as the starting point (0), it is set to 10,000 in the case of the stopping state. Further, for example, when the point where the player's lowest ball output is set as the reference (0) and the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, the stop state is set to 19,000.

In FIG. 81, 65535 is used as the "value corresponding to the storage area of the difference number counter", 19000 is used as the "value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be stopped", and 46535 is used as the initial value.

The initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on without changing the setting (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter (not shown) even when the power is turned on with a setting change.

First, in the "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. That is, in a game in which a replay combination is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, YES is determined. On the other hand, for example, in a game (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stop-displayed) in which the push-order bell combination was won by internal lottery, it is determined as NO.

In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the current game, YES is given to the question "replay operation symbol display?", and the stop monitoring process is terminated.

In the "difference number counter set", the value stored in the difference number counter is stored in a predetermined register. For example, when the value stored in the difference number counter is 10000, 10000 is stored in the HL register. The value stored in the difference number counter at this time is the value before the difference number counter is updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game.

In the case of "the number of put-in<the number of pay-outs?", it is determined whether the number of pay-outs is greater than the number of put-in.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payouts = 0, it is determined as NO.
b) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 1, the judgment is NO.
c) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 3, it is judged as NO.
d) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 10, the judgment is YES.

Specifically, the number of inputs minus the number of payouts is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). In addition, as a result of the number of inputs minus the number of payments, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag is 1), it is judged as YES, and when there is no carry flag (when the carry flag is 0) case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of inserted game media is greater than the number of payouts in the current game, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. Further, when the number of inserted game media is smaller than the number of payouts in the current game, the carry flag is 1 and NO is determined.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the A register is 3 and the carry flag is 0.
b) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the number of inputs, as a result of the previous game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets for this game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet). ), and as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by the automatic bet is deal.

On the other hand, the number of inputs and the number of payouts are determined as follows: "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?” In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the number of inputs. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of payouts.

In the case of "number of inputs < number of outputs?", the number of inputs minus the number of outputs was used, but the number of outputs minus the number of inputs may be used. In other words, it suffices to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game using the number of insertions and the number of payouts.

In "difference number counter<0?", it is determined whether or not the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game from the value stored in the difference number counter is below the lower limit value (0). Specifically, the result of subtracting the value stored in the A register (the number of inputs in the current game - the number of payouts in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the difference number counter) , to determine whether or not there is a lower digit. If there is a lower digit, it is judged as YES, and if there is no lower digit, it is judged as NO. The carry flag is set to 1 when there is a carry-down, and is set to 0 when there is no carry-down. Note that the result of the calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, 2 is stored in the difference number counter (HL register), and as a result of the game this time,
a) When the number of inputs=3 and the number of OUTs=0 (when the A register=3), the HL register=65535 and the carry flag=1. Although 2-3=-1, a negative value cannot be stored in the register. As a result, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
b) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3 (when the A register is 0), the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

That is, in the case of the above example, a) if the number of input = 3 and the number of OUT = 0, YES is determined. Further, a) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 1, it is determined as NO. In addition, c) when the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 3, it is determined as NO.

If YES in the "difference number counter<0?" For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "lower limit value set", when a carry-down occurs due to "difference number counter < 0?" Remember. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the difference number counter is 2, a) if the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payments = 0, the HL register = It is 65535. In such a case, "Low Limit Set" stores a 0 in the HL register.

In other words, when the value stored in the HL register undergoes a carry-down and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register to reduce the number of game media differences as much as possible. Accurate calculation becomes possible. It should be noted that the next game can be played even when the "lower limit value set" is executed. In other words, the process in FIG. 81 is also executed in the game after the "lower limit value set" is executed.

Although FIG. 81 includes the "lower limit value set" process, the "lower limit value set" process may not be included. More specifically, when it is determined as YES based on "difference number counter < 0?", the value stored in the difference number counter of the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 2, and the number of inputs and the number of payouts in the game are a) the number of inputs=3 and the number of payouts=0, then the value stored in the difference counter is 2 (the same value as the value of the difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value with a lower value) from being stored in the "difference number counter". In addition, since processing corresponding to "lower limit value set" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a digit is dropped due to "difference number counter < 0?" I try not to enter. In other words, even if the difference in game media is a negative value, the stop state can be generated using the difference in game media as accurately as possible. Also, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is used as the value of the difference number counter, so that it is possible to avoid giving too many game media until the stop state is reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from significantly increasing.

In "update difference number", the complement of the value (the value stored in the A register) of the calculation result (the number of inputs - the number of payments) in the "difference number counter < 0?" is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is added to the HL register. That is, "the value stored in the difference number counter" + "absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game" is executed.

Note that the complement in the "update of the difference number" refers to the smallest number among the numbers carried over one byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived in the "difference number update". Then, by calculating 2+7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (because there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, under a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived in the "updating the difference counter". Then, by calculating 65530+7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Although 65530+7 becomes 65537, 2 is stored in the HL register because it exceeds 65535 (because there is carry). Also, since there is a carry, the carry flag is 1.

In "update difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the difference counter.

For example, if the result of "difference number counter < 0?" ) is stored in the HL register, the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game is subtracted or added from the value of the difference counter in the previous game by "update the difference counter". Store the value in the difference number counter.

For example, if the answer to "difference number < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register. Store in a number counter.

In the “difference number>19000?”, it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. Note that when the carry flag is 1, there is a carry due to the "update of the difference number". On the other hand, if there is a carry-down due to "number of inputs < number of payments?" 19000?" can be determined to be NO.

That is, in the case of "difference number>19000?", it is possible to determine whether or not the difference number of game media has exceeded 19000 with the power-on as the starting point (0) depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media with the constant (19000) with the starting point (0) when the power is turned on.

In this way, in the case of "difference number > 19000?", it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media has exceeded 19000 from when the power is turned on (0), depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. , 46535 are stored as initial values.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the maximum value ``65535'' that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference number counter) to the difference number of game media to be stopped. It is the value obtained by subtracting the corresponding value "19000". That is, when the difference number of game media with the starting point (0) at power-on exceeds 19000, the carry flag is set to 1 because it exceeds 65535.

Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -46535 as the difference number of the game media, with the power-on as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, the situation in which the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 16535 means that the difference number of the game media is -30000 with respect to the starting point (0) when the power is turned on.

Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference number of game media that the player can obtain until the stop state is reached is about 65535 (initial value (46535) to the absolute value of the difference from the lower limit (0) (46535)+19000).

As described above, by storing 46535, which is "the value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference number counter" - "the value corresponding to the difference number of the game media to be in the stop state" as the initial value, when the power is turned on, It is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether or not the number of game media differences from the starting point exceeds 19,000. Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value corresponding to -46535 as the number of differences in game media from when the power is turned on. Although 46535 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 46535, a value other than 46535 may be adopted as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

In the "stop flag storage", information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by turning on the power without changing the settings or by turning off the power (executing the power-off process). Also, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by the RWM clear following the end of the advantageous section.

The information stored in the quit flag storage area can be initialized (information indicating that the quit condition has been met) by turning on the power accompanied by a setting change (RWM clear processing accompanying a setting change). can be cleared).

In other words, when the power is turned off after storing the information indicating that the cancellation conditions have been satisfied in the stop flag storage area by "save stop flag", and then the power is turned on (the power is turned on without changing the settings). , the value stored in the difference number counter becomes the initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) is not initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while information indicating that the cancellation condition has been satisfied is stored in the cancellation flag storage area, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the difference counter will be set to the initial value. However, it will be stopped.

In addition, when information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area (in the case of the stop state), the betting operation for executing the next game is prohibited. . For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the position of the blocker is set to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning the inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in a gaming machine that does not perform automatic settlement of game media after information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area. The adjustment switch may be operated after the payment has been made. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine that automatically settles game media after information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, the operation of the settlement switch may be disabled.

Further, in the "difference number counter < 0?", it is determined whether or not the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game from the value stored in the difference number counter is below the lower limit (0). However, in consideration of the case where the lower limit value is not 0, it is also possible to express "difference number counter<lower limit value?" instead of "difference number counter<0?".

For example, if the lower limit is 36535, the question "Difference counter<lower limit?" 36535). Then, if the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game from the value stored in the difference number counter is below the lower limit value (36535), 36535 is set to the HL register by "lower limit value set". You may make it memorize|store.

By setting the lower limit value to 36535 in this way, when the difference number of the game media exceeds 29000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit value (36535) (10000) + 19000), the game will be stopped. state can be In other words, compared to the case where the lower limit value is set to 0, it is possible to reduce the number of difference in game media that the player may obtain until the game is stopped. That is, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming significantly high.

Also, even when the lower limit value is set to 36535, the value stored in the difference counter of the previous game may be used when the "difference number counter<lower limit value?" is determined to be YES.

Although the case where the lower limit value is 36535 has been described, the lower limit value is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, the starting point (0) when the power is turned on has been described as an example of a stop state when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19000, but the point where the player's ball output is the lowest is taken as the reference (0). , when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped.

The point where the player's ball output is the lowest is taken as a reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19000 and the game is stopped, the lower limit value should be the same as the initial value. can be considered. For example, if the initial value is 46535, which is "the value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference number counter" - "the value corresponding to the difference number of the game media to be stopped", the lower limit value is also 46535. . By doing so, when the difference number of the game media becomes smaller than the initial value, the answer to "Difference number counter<Lower limit value?" ("Difference number counter<0?" , 46535 is stored as the lower limit value. Therefore, the point where the player's lowest ball output is taken as a reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to enter a stopped state.

Similarly, the point where the player has the lowest ball output is taken as the reference (0), and when the game medium difference number from the reference exceeds 19000, the stop state is set, the initial value is set to 0, and the lower limit By setting the value to 0 as well, when the difference number of the game media becomes smaller than the initial value, YES in "Difference counter<lower limit value?" ("Difference counter<0?"). Thus, 0 is stored as the lower limit value. Then, for "difference number>19000?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the difference number counter updated by "difference number counter update" is less than 19001 or not. With this configuration, the point where the player's lowest ball output is set as the reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19000, the stop state can be set.

<Stop monitoring processing (subtraction version of difference number counter)>
FIG. 82 has a difference number counter. Since the explanation of the difference number counter is as described above, the explanation is omitted. It should be noted that the size of the storage area of the difference number counter is explained as 2 bytes.

It should be noted that the initial value of the difference number counter in FIG. 82 is assumed to be "a value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be in the stopped state".

The "value corresponding to the number of game media to be stopped" is, for example, 19000 when the difference between game media exceeds 19000 with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). Become. Further, for example, when the difference number of game media exceeds 10,000 with the time of turning on the power as the starting point (0), it is set to 10,000 in the case of the stopping state.

In FIG. 82, 19,000 is used as the "value corresponding to the number of game media difference in the stop state", and 19,000 is used as the initial value.

The initial value of the difference number counter is stored in the difference number counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter (not shown) even when the power is turned on with a setting change.

First, in the "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. That is, in a game in which a replay combination is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, YES is determined. On the other hand, for example, in a game (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stop-displayed) in which the push-order bell combination was won by internal lottery, it is determined as NO.

In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the current game, YES is given to the question "replay operation symbol display?", and the stop monitoring process is terminated.

In the "difference number counter set", the value stored in the difference number counter is stored in a predetermined register. For example, when the value stored in the difference number counter is 10000, 10000 is stored in the HL register. The value stored in the difference number counter at this time is the value before the difference number counter is updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game.

In the case of "the number of put-in<the number of pay-outs?", it is determined whether the number of pay-outs is greater than the number of put-in.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payouts = 0, it is determined as NO.
b) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 1, the judgment is NO.
c) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 3, it is judged as NO.
d) If the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 10, the judgment is YES.

Specifically, the number of inputs minus the number of payouts is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). In addition, as a result of the number of inputs minus the number of payments, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag is 1), it is judged as YES, and when there is no carry flag (when the carry flag is 0) case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of inserted game media is greater than the number of payouts in the current game, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. Further, when the number of inserted game media is smaller than the number of payouts in the current game, the carry flag is 1 and NO is determined.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the A register is 3 and the carry flag is 0.
b) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the number of inputs, as a result of the previous game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets for this game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet). ), and as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by the automatic bet is deal.

On the other hand, the number of inputs and the number of payouts are determined as follows: "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?” In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the number of inputs. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of payouts.

In the case of "number of inputs < number of outputs?", the number of inputs minus the number of outputs was used, but the number of outputs minus the number of inputs may be used. In other words, it suffices to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game using the number of insertions and the number of payouts.

At "Exceed upper limit?", it is determined whether or not the result of adding the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game from the value stored in the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 65535). Specifically, the result of adding the value stored in the A register (the number of inputs in the current game - the number of payouts in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the difference number counter). , determine whether there is a carry. If there is a carry, it is determined as YES, and if there is no carry, it is determined as NO. The carry flag is set to 1 when there is a carry, and the carry flag is set to 0 when there is no carry. Note that the result of the calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
a) When the number of inputs=3 and the number of payouts=0, the HL register=1 and the carry flag=1. Although 65534+3=65537, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 1.
b) When the number of insertions=3 and the number of payouts=1, the HL register=0 and the carry flag=1. Although 65534+2=65536, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 0.
c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the HL register is 65534 and the carry flag is 0.

That is, in the case of the above example, a) if the number of input = 3 and the number of OUT = 0, YES is determined. Also, a) if the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 1, it is determined as YES. In addition, c) when the number of coins to be put in = 3 and the number of coins to be paid out = 3, it is determined as NO.

If the answer to the question "Exceeds upper limit value?" For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "upper limit value set", when a carry occurs due to "upper limit exceeded?" . Although the upper limit value in the present embodiment is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, the upper limit value is not limited to 65535 and may be a predetermined value.

In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the difference number counter is 65534, a) when the number of input = 3 and the number of payout = 0, the HL register = 2 by "Exceeding the upper limit?" It's becoming In such a case, the "high limit set" stores 65535 in the HL register.

Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the difference number counter is 65534, a) when the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payouts = 1, the HL register = 0. In such a case, the "high limit set" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, when a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register, the number of differences between game media can be reduced as much as possible. Accurate calculation becomes possible. It should be noted that the next game can be played even when the "upper limit value set" is executed. In other words, the processing in FIG. 82 is also executed in the game after the "upper limit value set" is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 82, the "upper limit value set" process is provided, but the "upper limit value set" process may not be provided. More specifically, if YES is determined in response to "Exceed upper limit value?", the value stored in the difference number counter of the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 65534, and the number of inputs and the number of payouts in the game are: a) the number of inputs=3 and the number of payouts=0, the value stored in the difference counter is It may be configured to be 65534 (the same value as the value of the difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value carried up) from being stored in the "difference number counter". In addition, since processing corresponding to "upper limit value setting" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "Exceeding the upper limit value?" I try not to enter. In other words, even if the difference in game media is a negative value, the stop state can be generated using the difference in game media as accurately as possible.

For values exceeding the upper limit, the upper limit or the previous value is used as the value of the difference number counter. The difference number cannot be given. Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of game media that the player can obtain until the stop state is reached is approximately 65,535 (initial value The absolute value of the difference between (19000) and the upper limit (65535) can be suppressed to (46535)+19000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from significantly increasing.

In the "updating the difference", the complement of the value (the value stored in the A register) of the calculation result (the number of inputs - the number of the payouts) in the "upper limit exceeded?" is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "the value stored in the difference number counter" - "the value of the difference number of the game medium in the current game" is executed.

Note that the complement in the "update of the difference number" refers to the smallest number among the numbers carried over one byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
d) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived in the "difference number update". Then, by calculating 65534-7, 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that the carry flag is 0 because the operation result of 65534-7 does not fall below 0 (because there is no carry-down).

Also, for example, under a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived in the "updating the difference counter". Then, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Although 2-7 is -5, it is less than 0 (because there is a carry-down), so 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, since there is a carry down, the carry flag is 1.

In "update difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the difference counter.

For example, if the answer to the question “Exceeds upper limit value?” is NO, the difference between the value of the difference counter in the previous game and the game media in the current game (the number of insertions - the number of payouts or the number of payouts - the number of insertions) is updated. Since the value obtained is stored in the HL register, the value of the difference counter of the previous game and the difference of the game media of the current game are updated (subtracted or added) by the "update of the difference counter". Store the value in the difference number counter.

For example, if the answer to "Exceeds upper limit value?" is YES, the upper limit value (65535) is stored in the HL register. memorize to

In the “difference number>19000?”, it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. Note that when the carry flag is 1, there is a carry-down due to the "update of the difference number". On the other hand, if there is an increase due to "number of inputs <number of payments?" ?” can be determined as NO.

That is, in the case of "difference number>19000?", it is possible to determine whether or not the difference number of game media has exceeded 19000 with the power-on as the starting point (0) depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media with the constant (19000) with the starting point (0) when the power is turned on.

In this way, in the case of "difference number > 19000?", it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media has exceeded 19000 from when the power is turned on (0), depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. , 19000 is stored as an initial value.

As described above, this 19000 is the value "19000" corresponding to the difference number of game media to be in the stopped state. That is, when the difference number of game media from the power-on time (0) exceeds 19000, the carry flag is set to 1 because it falls below 0.

Also, by storing 19000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -46535 as the difference number of the game media with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19000, the situation where the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 49000 means that the difference number of the game media is -30000 with respect to the starting point (0) when the power is turned on.

As described above, by storing 19000 as the initial value, which is "the value corresponding to the number of game media to be stopped," it is possible to determine whether or not the number of game media has exceeded 19000 from when the power was turned on. It is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining Also, by storing 19000 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value corresponding to -46535 as the number of differences in game media from when the power is turned on. Although 19000 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 19000, a value other than 19000 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

In the "stop flag storage", information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by turning on the power without changing the settings or by turning off the power (executing the power-off process). Also, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by the RWM clear following the end of the advantageous section.

The information stored in the quit flag storage area can be initialized (information indicating that the quit condition has been met) by turning on the power accompanied by a setting change (RWM clear processing accompanying a setting change). can be cleared).

In other words, when the power is turned off after storing the information indicating that the cancellation conditions have been satisfied in the stop flag storage area by "save stop flag", and then the power is turned on (the power is turned on without changing the settings). , the value stored in the difference number counter becomes the initial value (19000), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) is not initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while information indicating that the cancellation condition has been satisfied is stored in the cancellation flag storage area, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the difference counter will be set to the initial value. However, it will be stopped.

In addition, when information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area (in the case of the stop state), the betting operation for executing the next game is prohibited. . For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the position of the blocker is set to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning the inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in a gaming machine that does not perform automatic settlement of game media after information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, information indicating that the stop condition has been satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area. The adjustment switch may be operated after the payment has been made. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine that automatically settles game media after information indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, the operation of the settlement switch may be disabled.

Although 65535 is used as an example of the upper limit value, if the upper limit value is 29000, for example, when the question "Exceeds upper limit value?" As a result of adding the absolute value of , it is determined whether or not it exceeds the upper limit (29000). If the result of adding the absolute value of the difference number of the game media in the current game to the value stored in the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value (29000), 29000 is set to the HL register by "upper limit value set". You may make it memorize|store.

By setting the upper limit value to 29000 in this way, when the difference number of game media exceeds 29000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19000) and the upper limit value (29000) (10000) + 19000), the game is stopped. state can be In other words, compared to the case where the upper limit is set to 65535, it is possible to reduce the number of difference in game media that the player may obtain until the game is stopped. That is, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming significantly high.

Also, even if the upper limit is set to 29000, the value stored in the difference number counter of the previous game may be set to the value stored in the previous game if YES is determined in response to "Exceeding the upper limit?"

Although the upper limit is set to 29000, the upper limit is not limited to 29000 and may be any value.

In addition, the starting point (0) when the power is turned on has been described as an example of a stop state when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19000, but the point where the player's ball output is the lowest is taken as the reference (0). , when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped.

The point where the player's ball output is the lowest is taken as the reference (0), and when the number of game media difference from the reference exceeds 19000 and the game is stopped, the upper limit value should be the same as the initial value. can be considered. For example, if the initial value is set to 19000, which is “a value corresponding to the number of difference between game media to be stopped”, the upper limit is set to 19000 as well. By doing so, when the difference number of the game media becomes smaller than the initial value, YES is returned to the question “exceeding the upper limit value?”, and 19000 is stored as the upper limit value. Therefore, the point where the player's lowest ball output is taken as a reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to enter a stopped state.

As described above, by performing the processes shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 82, when the number of game media exceeds 19000, the stop flag storage area satisfies the stop condition, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0). An example has been shown in which information (predetermined value) indicating that it is possible to store (can execute stop processing).

81 and 82, the point where the player's lowest ball output is set as a reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19000, a stop flag is generated. An example is shown in which information (predetermined value) indicating that the termination condition is satisfied can be stored in the storage area (ie, termination processing can be executed).

The control processes shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 82 are only examples, and even if the order of the control processes is different, the order of the control processes can be changed as long as the same effect can be achieved. It can be.

Similarly, the control processes described in FIGS. 80, 81, and 82 are examples, and even if addition and subtraction in the control process are different (for example, addition and subtraction are reversed), Any arithmetic processing may be used as long as it exhibits the same effect. In other words, "add" or "subtract" can be expressed as "update."

In addition, the stop monitoring process shown in FIGS. 80, 81, and 82 is also executed in the bonus game state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus game state (the game before the end condition of the bonus game state is satisfied), the stopping flag storage area is set when the number of game media exceeds 19000, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0). Information (predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the memory, and the stop state is set even in the middle of the bonus game state.

Similarly, in the stopping monitoring process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, even during the bonus game state (the game before the end condition of the bonus game state is satisfied), the point where the player's ball output is the lowest is the reference point. (0), and when the number of game media exceeds 19000, information (predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition is satisfied is stored in the stop flag storage area, and the stop state is set even in the middle of the bonus game state. I was like

By constructing in this way, even in the bonus game state, it can be set to a stop state when the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the starting point (0) when the power is turned on, and the gambling property is not remarkably increased. Amusement machines can be provided.

However, stopping the game in the middle of the bonus game state makes the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the middle of the bonus game state (the game before the end condition of the bonus game state is satisfied), even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power as the starting point (0), the game is immediately stopped. An example of setting the stop state by storing information (predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition is satisfied in the stop flag storage area when the end condition of the bonus game state is satisfied without entering the state will be described below.

<Stop monitoring process (subtraction version of difference number counter, stop state after bonus game state ends by temporary stop flag)>
FIG. 83 is a modification of FIG. FIG. 83 has a stop provisional flag storage area.

The stop temporary flag storage area is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. Specifically, information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the provisional condition for stopping the game is satisfied is stored when the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the power-on as the starting point (0). storage area.

The information stored in the temporary stop flag storage area is not initialized just by turning the power on and off. Further, the information stored in the stop provisional flag storage area is not initialized by the RWM clear following the end of the advantageous section.

Further, the information stored in the provisional stop flag storage area can be initialized (for example, to "0") by turning on the power accompanied by setting changes (RWM clear processing accompanying setting changes). You can clear the information indicating that it has been satisfied).

When the game for which the information indicating that the provisional condition for stopping is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in the bonus game state, the information indicating that the condition for stopping is satisfied is not stored in the stop flag storage area. . In other words, if the game in which the information indicating that the provisional condition for stopping is satisfied is stored in the provisional stopping flag storage area, the game does not enter the stopping state.

When the game in which the information indicating that the provisional condition for stopping is satisfied is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in the bonus game state, the stop condition is satisfied in the stop flag storage area in the game in which the bonus game state is completed. Stores information indicating that In other words, if the game for which the information indicating that the provisional condition for stopping is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in the bonus game state, the stop state is entered after the game in which the bonus game state ends. .

In the following, the points different from FIG. 82 will be mainly described.

First, in the "temporary stop flag ON?", it is determined whether or not information indicating that the temporary stop condition is satisfied is stored in the temporary stop flag storage area.

If it is determined as YES in the "provisional stop flag ON?", then the "bonus game state?" is determined.

When it is judged as NO in the question of "Temporary stop flag ON?", it judges "Replay operation symbol display?".

Since "replay operation symbol display?" is the same as "replay operation symbol display?"

"Differential number counter set" is the same as "Differential number counter set" in FIG. 82, so description thereof is omitted.

Since "the number of inserted coins<the number paid out?" is the same as "the number inserted <the number paid out?" in FIG. 82, the explanation is omitted.

"Exceeds upper limit value?" is the same as "Exceeds upper limit value?"

The "upper limit value set" is the same as the "upper limit value set" in FIG. 82, so the description is omitted.

"Difference number update" is the same as "difference number update" in FIG. 82, so the description is omitted.

"Difference number counter update" is the same as "Difference number counter update" in FIG. 82, so description thereof will be omitted.

"Difference number>19000?" is the same as "Difference number>19000?"

In the "save provisional cancellation flag", information indicating that the temporary cancellation condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional cancellation flag storage area. For example, numerical information such as a predetermined value (for example, "1") corresponds to the information indicating that the provisional condition for termination is satisfied.

In "Bonus game state?", it is determined whether or not the next game is a game in the bonus game state. Specifically, the bonus activation flag is checked to determine whether or not any of the 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, and RB is in operation.

Here, the bonus operation flag is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. For example, in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the 1st type BB in the bonus operation flag is turned on (1), and when the 1st type BB is finished, the bit is turned off (0). becomes. Similarly, in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 2 types of BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the 2 types of BB in the bonus operation flag is turned on (1), and when the game ends with the 2 types of BB, it turns off (0). ). Similarly, in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to RB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to RB in the bonus operation flag is turned on (1), and is turned off (0) from on in the game in which RB is finished.

It should be noted that the ON/OFF state of the bonus operation flag is stored in a process prior to the stop monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (any of 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, and RB), the current game is in a bonus state (either 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, or RB). is completed, NO is determined at the question "Bonus game state?".

For example, the previous game is in a bonus game state (one of 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, or RB), and the current game ends the bonus game state (one of 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, or RB). If not, YES is determined for "Bonus game state?"

For example, if the previous game was not in the bonus game state (one of 1 type BB, 2 type BB, or RB) (it is a non-bonus game state), the current game is in the bonus game state (1 type BB, 2 type BB, RB), it is judged as YES in "Bonus game state?".

Since "save stop flag" is the same as "save stop flag" in FIG. 82, the explanation is omitted.

As described above, by providing the provisional stopping flag storage area, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 from the time of turning on the power during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), , the information indicating that the conditions for stopping are satisfied is not stored in the stop flag area. In other words, when the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Further, after the information indicating that the temporary cancellation condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional cancellation flag storage area, the difference number counter is not updated. By configuring in this way, useless processing can be avoided.

However, the difference counter may be updated even after the information indicating that the temporary cancellation condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional cancellation flag storage area. By configuring in this way, processing can be shared.

Further, after the information indicating that the provisional stop condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area, it is not determined whether or not the difference number of game media has exceeded 19000. FIG. By configuring in this way, useless processing can be avoided.

Further, as is clear from FIG. 83, after the information indicating that the temporary stop condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area, even if the difference number of game media falls below 19000, the provisional stop flag storage area Do not update the stored information (do not clear the information indicating that the stop provisional condition is satisfied). With this configuration, if the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 even once during the bonus game state, even if the difference number of game media is less than 19000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends. can also be stopped.

Although FIG. 83 has been described as a modification of FIG. 82, it is also applicable to FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG.

For example, a process corresponding to "temporary stop flag ON?" A process corresponding to "save provisional stop flag" of FIG. 83 is provided, and a process corresponding to "bonus game state?" of FIG. 83 is provided before "save stop flag" of FIG. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power supply during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the stop flag area will remain open until the bonus is completed. No information is stored indicating that the condition is satisfied. In other words, when the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the stop state can be set after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, a process corresponding to "temporary stop flag ON?" 83, and before the "save stop flag" in FIG. 81, the process corresponding to "bonus game state?" in FIG. 83 is provided. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power supply during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the stop flag area will remain open until the bonus is completed. No information is stored indicating that the condition is satisfied. In other words, when the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of turning on the power during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the stop state can be set after the bonus game state ends.

It should be noted that FIG. 83 can also be applied to the case where the point where the player has the lowest ball output is set as the reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19000, the stopping state is set. .

For example, the point where the player has the lowest ball output during the bonus game state is taken as the reference (0), and even if the number of game media exceeds 19000, the stop flag area is displayed until the bonus is completed. No information is stored indicating that the condition is satisfied. In other words, the point at which the player has the lowest ball output during the bonus game state is taken as the reference (0), and when the number of game media exceeds 19000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. can be done.

<Stop monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter, stop state after bonus game state ends by difference counter)>
FIG. 84 is a modification of FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. In FIG. 84, similarly to FIG. 83, when the power is turned on during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), when the number of game media exceeds 19000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. matches with . However, unlike FIG. 83, it differs in that it does not have a stop provisional flag storage area.

Also, let 19001 be the “value corresponding to the difference number of game media in the stopped state”. In other words, the initial value stored in the difference number counter is 19001 when the power is turned on without changing the settings while the power is off. Similarly, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on with a setting change, the initial value stored in the difference number counter is 19001.

In the following, the points different from FIG. 83 will be mainly described.

First, in "difference number counter=specific value?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the difference number counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is 0, it is determined whether the value stored in the difference counter is 0 or not. In FIG. 83, the specific value is assumed to be 0, but any value other than 0 may be used as long as it is a predetermined value.

Also, games for which YES is determined in the "difference number counter=specific value?" , the game until the execution of "save stop flag". Details will be described later.

Since "Replay operation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay operation symbol display?"

"Differential number counter set" is the same as "Differential number counter set" in FIG. 83 (FIG. 82), so description thereof will be omitted.

Since "the number of inserted coins<the number paid out?" is the same as "the number inserted <the number paid out?" in FIG. 83 (FIG. 82), the explanation is omitted.

"Exceeds upper limit value?" is the same as "Exceeds upper limit value?"

The "upper limit value set" is the same as the "upper limit value set" in FIG. 83 (FIG. 82), so the description is omitted.

In the "updating the difference", the complement of the value (the value stored in the A register) of the calculation result (the number of inputs - the number of the payouts) in the "upper limit exceeded?" is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "the value stored in the difference number counter" - "the value of the difference number of the game medium in the current game" is executed. If this calculation result is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in the "update of the difference number" refers to the smallest number among the numbers carried over one byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, under a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534, if the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payments = 10, then the A register = 249. , we first derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 65534-7, 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that the carry flag is 0 because the operation result of 65534-7 does not fall below 0 (because there is no carry-down).

When there is no carry-down (when the carry flag is 0), no processing is performed to update the value of the HL register to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the calculation result of "the value stored in the difference number counter" - "the value of the difference number of the game media in the current game".

Also, for example, under a situation where the value stored in the difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2, if the number of inputs = 3 and the number of payouts = 10, then the A register = 249. In "Number Counter Update", we first derive 7, the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Although 2-7 is -5, it is less than 0 (because there is a carry-down), so 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, since there is a carry down, the carry flag is 1.

When there is a carry-down (when the carry flag is 1), processing is performed to update the value of the HL register to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register will be the specified value (0).

"Difference number counter update" is the same as "Difference number counter update" in FIG. 83 (FIG. 82), so description thereof is omitted.

In the “difference number>19000?”, it is determined whether or not the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 with the time of power-on as the starting point (0). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the difference number counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the difference number counter is the specific value (0), it is judged YES, and if the value stored in the difference number counter is not the specific value (0), it is judged NO.

In addition, when the value stored in the difference number counter is a specific value (0), a) the "value stored in the difference number counter" minus "the value of the game medium in the current game" by "update the difference number" If the result of the calculation performed by performing the "value of the difference number" falls below a specific value (0), or a) "value stored in the difference number counter" by "update the difference number" minus "the game medium of the current game is the case where the result of the calculation of "the value of the difference between" is a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above a) corresponds to the case where the number of game media difference from the time of power-on (0) is greater than 19001, and the above-mentioned b) is the time of power-on. This corresponds to the case where the difference number of game media from (0) becomes 19001.

In other words, in the case of "difference number > 19000?", the difference number of the game media with the time of turning on the power as the starting point (0) depends on whether or not the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0). It is possible to determine whether or not the limit has been exceeded.

In addition, by storing 19001 as an initial value when power is turned on without setting change or when power is turned on with setting change, it is equivalent to -46534 as the difference number of game media with the time of power on as the starting point (0). values can be stored. For example, when the initial value is 19001, the situation in which the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 49001 means that the difference number of the game media is -30000 with respect to the starting point (0) when the power is turned on.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be in the stop state" as the initial value, it is possible to determine whether or not the difference number of game media exceeds 19000 from when the power is turned on. can be determined by whether or not the value of the difference number counter is "0", the program capacity can be reduced. Also, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value corresponding to -46534 as the number of differences in game media from when the power is turned on. Although 19001 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 19001, a value other than 19001 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

"Bonus game state?" is the same as "Bonus game state?" If YES is determined in "Bonus game state?", stop monitoring processing is executed without executing "Save stop flag". In other words, when it is determined as YES in the "bonus game state?" Then, the next game (game during the bonus game state) can be executed.

In other words, when the next game is executed in a state where the specific value (0) is stored, and the stop monitoring process is executed, the first judgment of the stop monitoring process, ie, "difference number counter=specific value?" to decide. In other words, during the bonus game state, if the number of game media starting from the power-on (0) exceeds 19000 and the "save stop flag" is not executed, the "difference number counter=specific value? , it is determined whether or not it is in the bonus game state without performing processing such as "renewal of the difference counter".

Since "save stop flag" is the same as "save stop flag" in FIG. 83 (FIG. 82), the explanation is omitted.

As described above, in the stopping monitoring process in FIG. 84, the game medium is set to the starting point (0) when the power is turned on during the bonus game state without providing a temporary stopping flag storage area (without compressing the storage area of the RWM). Even if the number exceeds 19000, it can be put into a stopped state after the bonus game state is finished.

In addition, if the number of game media starting from the power-on (0) during the bonus game state exceeds 19000, the game media starting from the time of power-on (0) in the game in which the bonus game state ends Even if the number is less than 19000, it can be stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give the player a capture element.

In addition, in the stopping monitoring process of FIG. 84, since no provisional stopping flag storage area is provided, the number of game media exceeding 19,000 with the time of turning on the power as the starting point (0) during the bonus game state, and the difference counter is set to a specific value. In the predetermined game in the bonus game state after the is stored, if the power is cut off (the power is turned off) and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the difference counter will change from the specific value to the initial value. (the bonus game state continues), so that the stopping state does not occur after the bonus game state ends.

That is, in the middle of the bonus game state, if the number of game media exceeds 19,000 with the power turned on as the starting point (0), the power is turned on after that, and the bonus game state continues. If you do, make sure you are not stuck. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not invite the misunderstanding that the player has stopped due to the power failure that occurred during the bonus.

Although FIG. 84 has been described as a modification of FIGS. 82 and 83, it can also be applied as a modification of FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 84, the initial value is set to 19001, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the stop state". "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference number counter" - "value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be in the stop state". For example, if the storage area of the difference number counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference counter" is 65535, and the "value corresponding to the difference number of game media to be stopped" value” is 19001 and the initial value is 46534.

Also, in FIG. 84, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modification of FIG. 81, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial value and the specific value in FIG. 84 can be any predetermined values.

Although FIG. 84 has been described with a specific example, the processing order and processing contents are not limited to this. However, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 with the power-on as the starting point (0) during the bonus game state, it is sufficient if the stop state can be set after the bonus game state ends.

It should be noted that FIG. 84 can also be applied to the case where the point where the player has the lowest ball output is set as the reference (0), and when the difference number of game media from the reference exceeds 19000, the stopping state is set. .

For example, the point where the player's lowest ball output during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and when the number of game media exceeds 19000, the stop state can be set after the game ends the bonus game state. can. However, if the power is turned off during the bonus game state and then turned on without changing the settings, the difference counter will change from the specific value to the initial value (the bonus game state will continue). After the bonus game state is finished, the stop state can be prevented.

<Regarding other game machine specifications (referred to as “specification 1”) applicable to the present embodiment>
Specification 1 applicable to the game machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 1, the prescribed number for starting the game is two or three when the accessory is not activated (while the BB is inside or not), and only three when the RB is activated.

In specification 1, the effective line consists of the left reel upper stage, the middle reel upper stage, and the right reel lower stage.

In Specification 1, there are 10 kinds of patterns. They are called seven, bar, replay A, replay B, lemon, hat, apple A, apple B, cherry, and blank, respectively.

The reel arrangement of Specification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 86, one reel has 20 symbols, and includes a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in specification 1 are shown in FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. In the figure, the item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. In addition, the "prescribed number and game state" shows the privilege to be given when the symbol combination for each prescribed number is stopped. If "Specified number and game state" is described as "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is described as "Replay" indicates that replay is given when the symbol combination is stopped, and if a number is indicated, it indicates the number of payouts when the symbol combination is stopped, and if indicated as "-", it is applicable It shows that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state.

In specification 1, two types of 1 type BB are provided for the bonus, 1 type BB01 is a termination condition of paying out more than 2 game medals, and 1 type BB02 is a termination condition of paying out more than 20 game medals. I have to. In addition, this type BB01 is a type in which RB-A operates continuously, and type 1 BB02 is a type in which RB-B operates continuously. Both RB-A and RB-B will end when either 2 wins or 2 games are satisfied, and when the end condition of RB-A or RB-B is satisfied, 1 type BB01 or 1 type BB02 The specification is that RB-A or RB-B will automatically operate until the termination conditions are met. In addition, during RB-A, there are cases where a loss is determined as a result of an internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 87, there is one type of symbol combination of one type BB01 and one type BB02. ) is not 100%. Therefore, when displaying the 1 type BB01 symbol combination and the 1 type BB02 symbol combination, it is necessary to press each reel.

In specification 1, RT transition starts from non-RT (1 type BB01 and 1 type BB02 non-internal), and 1 type BB-A wins during non-RT and 1 type BB01 symbol combination does not stop ) shifts from the next game (may be at the end of the game) to RT1 (also called inside 1st kind BB-A), and when the 1st kind BB01 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and 1st kind BB from the next game -A operates (also referred to as type 1 BB-A), and when the operation of type 1 BB-A ends, the next game shifts to non-RT. Also, if 1 type BB-B wins during non-RT and the 1 type BB02 symbol combination does not stop, from the next game (may be at the end of the game) to RT2 (also referred to as 1 type BB-B inside) , and when the 1st type BB02 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 ends and the 1st type BB-B operates from the next game (also referred to as the 1st type BB-B), and the 1st type BB-B operates. When finished, the next game is shifted to non-RT. Also, when the setting is changed in 1st class BB-A, the 1st class BB-A state will be inherited, and the state other than 1st class BB-A (1st class BB01 and 1st class BB02 non-internal, 1st class BB-A When the setting is changed in the internal mode, 1 type BB-B internal mode, and 1 type BB-B mode, it becomes non-RT. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off without the setting change device operating (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed.

The condition device in specification 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. The item "Condition device number" in FIG. 94 describes a number corresponding to the winning number. In addition, the conditional device to be activated is described in the item of "conditional device". In addition, the simple name of the operating condition device is described in the item of "common name". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is shown in the item of "component".

The internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when 3 is placed in Specification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when playing 3 cards are: 1 type BB-B, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E , Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-A7, Win -A8, Prize-A9, Prize-A10, Prize-A11, Prize-A12, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-B7, Prize-B8 , Prize-B9, Prize-B10, Prize-B11, Prize-B12, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-C7, Prize-C8, Prize -C9, Prize-C10, Prize-C11, Prize-C12, Prize-D1, Prize-D2, Prize-D3, Prize-D4, Prize-D5, Prize-D6, Prize-D7, Prize-D8, Prize-D9 , Prize-D10, Prize-D11, Prize-D12, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K, Prize-L, Prize-M, Prize -N, prize-O, prize-P, prize-Q, and there is no exception.

The item "internal lottery" in FIG. 95 indicates whether or not the game is subject to internal lottery for each game state. there is In addition, the item "advantageous zone transition" indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state. Indicates not to execute. It should be noted that, in specification 1, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, it is configured to win 100% and move to the advantageous section. The items "R1" to "R6" indicate the number of wins in the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, and 65536 numbers are assigned to each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to the setting value "1", "R2" corresponds to the setting value "2", "R3" corresponds to the setting value "3", and "R4" corresponds to the setting value "3". corresponds to the setting value "4", "R5" corresponds to the setting value "5", and "R6" corresponds to the setting value "6".

Fig. 96 shows internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT1 when three cards are played in Specification 1; FIG. 98 shows the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT3 when betting, and FIG. 99 shows the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at non-RT when betting two. The description of each figure is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. In addition, regarding the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT1 and RT2 when playing two tickets, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means at non-RT when playing two tickets is BB-A. Since the number becomes 0 and the set number of replay-A becomes 21638 (8978+12660), it is omitted.

In specification 1, RT1 3-coin game is the normal game method. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), a double-play game is performed in non-RT, and when the first type BB01 symbol combination does not stop in the game in which the first type BB-A is won, RT1 , and a 3-coin game is played at the shifted RT1. In addition, although a game can be played by a game method other than the RT1 3-ply game, in the case of 2-ply, the AT lottery is not performed, and in the 3-ply game at RT other than RT1, the AT winning probability is higher than that of RT1. Therefore, the RT1 3-coin game is the game method with the highest payout rate.

Stop control in specification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 100 indicates that it is a conditional device that does not draw a lottery in that gaming state. Also, ``123: Winning 01 (PB8000)'' in the ``Winning-A1 condition device'' in FIG. is shown. In addition, "(PB8000)" means that 20 symbols are drawn on each of the three reels, so the total number of all symbol combinations is 20×20×20=8000, and the operation is performed in the left, middle, right pressing order. 100% (8000/8000×100) probability that winning 01 will stop. If this is "132: Winning 11 (PB4000)", if you press in the order of left and right, there is a 50% (4000/8000 x 100) probability that Winning 11 will stop, and there is a 50% chance that It means to drop it. Since the other condition devices are the same, the description is omitted. In addition, the portion marked with "-" in FIG. 100 indicates that the conditional device always stops regardless of the pressing order. In addition, in the "remarks", the combination of symbols that appear when operated in the order of pressing the correct answer is described. For example, "remarks" of "winning-A1 condition device" is described as "lower right lemon", and when operated in the left center right, lemon is on the left reel upper row, middle reel lemon is on the middle reel, right reel lower row Indicates that the lemon will stop.

In the specification 1, winning-A1 to A12, winning-B1 to B12, winning-C1 to C12, and winning-D1 to D12 are provided as pushing order. When the pressing order is correct, the lemon patterns or the hat patterns are arranged in a straight line.

Here, in the conventional so-called accelerator AT machine, when it is equipped with a push order bell of 6 options (left middle right, left right middle, middle left right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left), each push order Since it was necessary to stop different winning symbols, in the case of the most common gaming machine with three reels and three reel stop areas, upper, middle and lower, the straight lines are the upper line, the middle line and the lower line. Since you can only have five lines, a line, an upward right line, and a downward right line, the line where the winning pattern stops when the bell is pressed correctly (for example, the upper, middle, upper so-called small V line, , the so-called Oyama line in the lower row, etc.). However, it is difficult for the player to understand the combination of winning symbols on the curved line, and it is difficult for the player to know whether the pressing order is correct or not.

Note that the accelerator AT machine is, as shown in FIGS. ), the number (6200) of winning-P (winning 01-10, 53-63) is winning-A1-A12 in the game state other than 1 type BB (non-RT, RT1, or RT2) , Prize-B1 to B12 (923) and less than the sum of Prize-A1 to A12 and the sum of Prize-B1 to B12 (11076). In other words, the placement number of the predetermined winning combination that can obtain a predetermined number (for example, 13) in the 1st type BB is a predetermined number that can obtain a predetermined number (the same number as the predetermined number in the 1st type BB) if the correct answer is given. A machine that is set to have a number larger than each entry number of the first group (for example, winning-A1 to A12) and less than the total number of entries of a predetermined pushing group is called an accelerator AT machine.

On the other hand, in specification 1, by providing two types of pattern combinations, lemon pattern combination and hat pattern combination, as a pattern combination that aligns in a straight line when the pushing order is correct, even if it is an accelerator AT machine, the pushing order is achieved without using a bending line. All correct symbol combinations can be arranged in a straight line.

For example, as described in the notes of prize-A1 to A12 in FIG. , Winning-Lemon in the middle row in the order of pressing the middle left and right when winning A5 and A6, Winning-Hat in the upper row in the order of pressing right and left in the middle when winning A7 and A8, Winning-Hat in the bottom row in the order of pressing right and left when winning A9 and A10, Winning- When A11 and A12 are won, the right, center, and left buttons are pressed in the right-bottom right-bottom direction, and when the pressing order is correct, all lemons or hats are arranged in a straight line.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in terms of the outcome of the game while improving the performance of putting out balls with the accelerator AT.

Also, as described in the remarks of prize-B1 to B12 in FIG. 102, when winning-B1 and B2 are won, the upper lemon is pressed in the order of left, middle, and right. , Winning - Lemon in the middle row in the order of pressing the middle left and right when winning B5 and B6, Winning - Top hat in the order of pressing right and left when winning B7 and B8, Bottom hat in the order of pressing right and left when winning B9 and B10, Winning - When winning B11 and B12, the right, middle, and left buttons are pressed in the order of right-center-left pressing, and the hats are right-down. Furthermore, when compared with the case of winning-A1 to A12, the right-down lemon stops in the order of pressing left, middle, and right when winning prize-A1 and A2. Lemons are supposed to stop. Similarly, the upper lemon stops in the order of pressing left, middle, and right when winning prizes A3 and A4, while the lemons falling to the right stop in the order of pressing left, middle, and right when winning prizes B3 and B4.

According to such a configuration, when the player first stops the left stop switch, second stops the middle stop switch, and third stops the right stop switch (so-called forward pressing), the lower right lemon and the upper lemon are displayed. Since there is a possibility that the buttons may stop, different outcomes appear even when playing the game in the same order of pushing, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, when the player first stops the left stop switch, the second stop the right stop switch, and the third stop the middle stop switch (so-called forward pinching), the lower right lemon and the upper lemon may stop. Therefore, since the same outcome may appear in a game with a plurality of pressing orders, it is possible to realize diversification of the outcome and improve the interest of the game.

Also, as described in the remarks of winning-C1 to C12 in FIG. , Winning-C5, C6 winning middle left and right pressing order, top hat, winning-C7, C8 winning middle right left pushing order, right rising lemon, winning - C9, C10 winning right left middle pushing order, middle row lemon, winning -When C11 and C12 are won, the right, middle, and left are pressed in the order of right-to-left, and the right-to-left descending hat.

In addition, as described in the remarks of prize-D1 to D12 in FIG. 104, when winning-D1 and D2 are won, left, middle, and right are pressed in the order of lower hat, and when winning-D3 and D4 are won, left, right, and middle are pressed in order of right-up hat. , Winning-D5, D6, the top hat in the order of pressing the middle left and right when winning, Winning-D7, D8, pressing the middle right, left, right, rising lemon, Winning-D9, D10, the middle lemon in the order of pressing right, left, winning -When D11 and D12 are won, the right-center-left press order is a right-down hat, and when the press order is correct, all lemons or hats are aligned in a straight line.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the numbers that come out at the time of forward pressing. In addition, the winning probability of winning-C1, C2 and winning-D1, D2 is set lower than the winning probability of winning-A1, A2 and winning-B1, B2. And by setting the winning probability of AT higher than winning in A1, A2, and winning in B1, B2, realization of diversification of numbers when pushing forward. And it is possible to realize the creation of the expectation of AT winning.

<Regarding another game machine specification (referred to as “specification 2”) applicable to the present embodiment>
Specification 2 applicable to the gaming machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 2, the prescribed number for starting the game is 2 or 3 when the accessory is not activated (during BB or not), and is only 3 when RB is activated.

In specification 2, the effective line consists of one line consisting of the left reel middle row, the middle reel upper row, and the right reel lower row.

In specification 2, there are 10 kinds of patterns. They are called black bar, blue seven, blank A, blank B, upper, lower, replay, bell, cherry, and watermelon, respectively.

The reel arrangement of Specification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106, one reel has 20 symbols, and includes a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in specification 2 are shown in FIGS. In the figure, the item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. In addition, the "prescribed number and game state" shows the privilege to be given when the symbol combination for each prescribed number is stopped. If "Specified number and game state" is described as "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is described as "Replay" indicates that replay is given when the symbol combination is stopped, and if a number is indicated, it indicates the number of payouts when the symbol combination is stopped, and if indicated as "-", it is applicable It shows that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state.

In specification 2, three types of 1 type BB are provided for the bonus, 1 type BB01 is a termination condition that more than 41 game medals are paid out, and 1 type BB02 is a termination condition that more than 41 game medals are paid out. BB03 of type 1 has a condition for ending the payout of more than one game medal. The type BB01 is a type in which RB-A continuously operates, the type BB02 is a type in which RB-A continuously operates, and the type BB03 is a type in which RB-B continuously operates. Both RB-A and RB-B will end when either 2 wins or 2 games are satisfied, and when the end condition of RB-A or RB-B is satisfied, 1 type BB01, 1 type BB02, or The specification is such that RB-A or RB-B will automatically operate until the termination conditions for type 1 BB03 are met. It should be noted that during RB-B, there is a case where a loss is determined as a result of an internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 107, there is one pattern combination of one type BB01, one type BB02, and one type BB03, and one type BB01 pattern combination, one type BB02 pattern combination, and one type BB03 pattern combination for each reel. (probability of stopping symbols related to the symbol combination) is not 100%. is required.

In specification 2, RT transition starts from non-RT (1 type BB01, 1 type BB02, and 1 type BB03 non-internal), 1 type BB-A wins during non-RT and 1 type BB01 pattern combination stops If not, or if the 1st type BB-B wins and the 1st type BB02 symbol combination does not stop, from the next game (it may be at the end of the game) to RT1 (inside the 1st type BB-A, or 1 When the 1st class BB01 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st class BB-A operates from the next game (also called 1st class BB-A). , When the 1 type BB02 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and 1 type BB-B operates from the next game (also referred to as 1 type BB-B), 1 type BB-A, or 1 type BB- When the operation of B is completed, the next game is shifted to non-RT. Also, if 1 type BB-C wins during non-RT and the 1 type BB03 pattern combination does not stop, RT2 (also referred to as 1 type BB-C inside) from the next game (may be at the end of the game) , and when the 1 type BB03 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 ends and 1 type BB-C operates from the next game (also referred to as 1 type BB-C), and 1 type BB-C operates. When finished, the next game is shifted to non-RT. Also, when the setting is changed while in 1st class BB-C, the 1st class BB-C state is inherited, and the states other than 1st class BB-C (1st class BB01, 1st class BB02, and 1st class BB03 non-internal, 1 BB-A inside, 1 inside BB-B, 1 inside BB-C, 1 inside BB-A, and 1 inside BB-B) will be non-RT. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off without the setting change device operating (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed.

The condition device in specification 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. In the item of "condition device number" in FIG. 113, a number corresponding to the winning number is described. In addition, the conditional device to be activated is described in the item of "conditional device". In addition, the simple name of the operating condition device is described in the item of "common name". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is shown in the item of "component".

The internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when 3 is placed in Specification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when playing 3 are: 1 type BB-A, 1 type BB-B, replay-A, replay-B, replay-C, replay- D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 , Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-A7, Prize-A8, Prize-A9, Prize-A10, Prize-A11, Prize-A12, Prize-B1, Prize -B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-B7, Prize-B8, Prize-B9, Prize-B10, Prize-B11, Prize-B12, Prize-C, Prize-D , Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J.

In addition, the item "internal lottery" in FIG. 114 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state, "○" indicates that the internal lottery is applicable, and "X" indicates that the internal lottery is not applicable. there is In addition, the item "advantageous zone transition" indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state. Indicates not to execute. In addition, in the specification 2, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, it is configured to win 100% and move to the advantageous section. The items "R1" to "R6" indicate the number of wins in the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, and 65536 numbers are assigned to each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to the setting value "1", "R2" corresponds to the setting value "2", "R3" corresponds to the setting value "3", and "R4" corresponds to the setting value "3". corresponds to the setting value "4", "R5" corresponds to the setting value "5", and "R6" corresponds to the setting value "6".

Fig. 115 shows the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT1 when playing 3 cards in Specification 2, and Fig. 116 shows the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT2 when playing 3 cards, 3 cards Fig. 117 for internal lottery results that can be determined by internal lottery means during operation of 1 type BB-A or RB-A during operation of 1 type BB-B, RB during 1 type BB-C operation when 3 pieces are placed Fig. 118 shows internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during the -B operation, and Fig. 119 shows internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-RT time of two-play. The description of each figure is omitted because it is the same as that of FIG. Regarding the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at RT1 when playing two tickets, the set number of 1 type BB-C of the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means at non-RT when playing two tickets is 0 , which is the same as the replay-A set number is 15000 (8978+6022) and the lost set number is 7970 (13992-6022), which can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when playing two Regarding the internal lottery result, the number of internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when playing two cards is 0, and the number of replay-A is 22970 (8978 + 13992). It is omitted because it is the same as the one that has become.

In specification 2, the RT2 3-coin game is the normal game method. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), a double-playing game is performed in non-RT, and when the 1st type BB03 symbol combination does not stop in the game in which the 1st type BB-C is won, RT2 , and a 3-coin game is played at the transferred RT2. In addition, it is possible to play a game with a game method other than the RT2 3-ply game, but in the case of 2-ply, the AT lottery is not performed, and in the 3-ply game at RT other than RT2, the AT winning probability is higher than RT2. Therefore, the RT2 3-coin game is the game method with the highest payout rate.

Stop control in Specification 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 and 121, the parts marked with "x" indicate condition devices that do not draw lots in that game state. In addition, "123: 1/1 win 01" in the "win-A1 condition device" in FIGS. It indicates that it will be done. In addition, "132: 1/2 win 17, win 18" in the "win-A1 condition device" has a 50% chance of stopping win 17 or win 18 when operated in the order of left and right. This indicates that there is a 50% probability that the item will be lost. Since the other condition devices are the same, the description is omitted. In addition, ``2--: 1/4 winning 21'' in the ``winning-A1 condition device'' means that winning 21 stops at a probability of 25% in any pressing order of middle left, right, middle right, left, and 75 It shows that you will miss it with a probability of %. In addition, the "remarks" describes the combination of visual symbols. For example, in the "remarks" of "no conditional device", "3--: blue 7 fake" is described, and the blue seven pattern combination does not stop visually in either order of pressing right, left, middle, or right, middle, left. That's what it means.

The "double line" in FIGS. 120 and 121 means that the symbol combination stops on a plurality of seemingly straight lines, and the "single line" means that the symbol combination stops on a seemingly one straight line. ``left reel'' means that the upper and lower reels stop on the left reel, and ``left middle dragon'' means that the upper and lower reels stop on the left and middle reels. is to stop. Other descriptions are omitted because they can be explained based on the contents described above.

In specification 2, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, any of the replay-A to M condition devices can stop the blue seven symbol combination on a single line or double line. However, when the left first stop is operated, the blue seven pattern combination cannot be stopped on the single line and the double line. In specification 2, if the left reel is not stopped first in a game other than the game for which the pressing order is instructed, a penalty occurs, and the AT lottery for the game is reduced or the AT lottery is not performed. As a result, if any of the replay-A to M condition devices is determined in a game in which the pressing order is not specified, the player is caused to stop the left reel first (the left stop switch is first stopped) ), so that the blue seven symbol combination is not stopped.

In specification 2, it is determined whether the blue seven symbol combination is stopped on the single line or the double line when the sub-bonus is won. Stopping the blue 7 symbol combination on a double line gives preferential treatment to the AT lottery during the sub-bonus (AT winning probability is high, or the amount of addition at the time of additional winning is large. ), it is advantageous for the player to stop the blue seven symbol combination on the double line. Then, according to the stop line of the blue 7 symbol combination determined when the sub-bonus is won, push order navigation is executed when the replay-A to M condition device is won.

For example, if you decide to stop the blue seven symbol combination on a single line when you win a sub-bonus in a certain game, and if replay-A wins in the game after that game, you can say, "Right first stop blue "Aim for the seven symbols" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the player stops the blue seven symbol combination on a single line by first stopping the right stop switch. At this time, the contents of the instruction may or may not be displayed on the instruction monitor. Then, if the player stops the right stop switch first and stops the blue seven symbol combination, the sub-bonus is started. Also, at this time, if the player ignores the pressing order and stops the middle stop switch first, the blue seven pattern combination may stop at the double line, but the blue seven pattern combination stops at the double line. Also start the sub-bonus. However, during the sub-bonus, the same content (AT winning probability, etc.) as when the blue seven pattern combination is stopped on a single line is carried out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate strategy elements such as the player intentionally ignoring the pressing order and stopping the blue seven pattern combination on the double line, realizing a fair game and quickly sub-bonus. can be started.

Also, for example, when a sub-bonus is won in a certain game, it is decided to stop the blue seven symbol combination on a single line, and if replay-A is won in the game after the game, "Right first stop Aim at the blue seven pattern with "is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the player stops the right stop switch first to stop the blue seven pattern combination on a single line. If the blue seven symbol combination does not stop on either the single line or the double line due to a mistake in order, the sub-bonus is not started. Then, if the sub-bonus is not started, when the replay-A to M is won in the next game and thereafter, the pressing order navigation capable of stopping the blue seven pattern combination on the single line again is notified, Make the blue seven symbol combination stop on a single line.

In specification 2, the blue seven symbol combination can be stopped on a single line or a double line in any of replay-A to M, so even if the player makes an operation mistake and the sub-bonus cannot be started, the next game and after If any one of replay-A to M is won in the game 1, the sub-bonus can be started again, so that the sub-bonus can be started quickly. If there are cases where only the single line stops and cases where only the double line stops according to the replay role, if the replay role other than the line to be stopped is won, the push order navigation cannot be performed, and the line to be stopped The game must be continued until the replaying role corresponding to is won, and the failure of the start operation of the sub-bonus makes the player strongly feel the demerit, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.

According to the configuration of specification 2, it is possible to provide a moderate technical intervention at the start of the sub-bonus, improve the interest of the game, and provide a chance to start the sub-bonus quickly even if the sub-bonus cannot be started. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Regarding AT Game Features in the Present Embodiment>
The AT game properties applicable to the present embodiment, specification 1, and specification 2 will be described. The following description is based on specification 2.

First, when a predetermined lottery condition for the AT (e.g. winning the AT lottery by winning the predetermined condition device, winning the AT lottery by reaching the predetermined number of games, etc.) is satisfied, the AT start screen is displayed on the liquid crystal.

Subsequently, a lottery is executed to determine the initial difference number of the main AT from the next game in which the AT start screen is displayed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, the period during which the lottery for determining the initial difference number of ATs is referred to as the introduction period.

<< lottery to determine the initial difference number of AT >>
The initial difference number of sheets of the main AT indicates a period during which the main AT can be executed, and can be renewed every game. For example, when the initial difference number is 500, if the result of the internal lottery of the 3-ply game is win-A1 and the stop operation is performed on the left, middle and right, and 7 coins are paid out, 500-(7-3). = The remaining number of sheets becomes 496 sheets. In this way, the increment is subtracted, and when the difference number becomes 0 or less, the AT is terminated.

The lottery for determining the initial difference number of the main AT is a lottery to determine the number of initial difference numbers, and the larger the initial difference number, the more medals can be obtained. Even after the initial difference number is determined, the difference number can be increased by winning the extra lottery, so even if the initial difference number is small, you can still aim for a chance to win a large amount of medals.

A lottery method for determining the initial difference number of sheets for the main AT will be described with reference to FIG. 122 .

The liquid crystal screen of FIG. 122 will be explained. The initial difference number of sheets (left), the initial difference number of sheets (middle), and the initial difference number of sheets (right) in the lower part of FIG. 122 indicate the accumulated initial difference number of sheets. The initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) correspond to the left reel (left stop switch), middle reel (middle stop switch), and right reel (right stop switch), respectively. Each value corresponding to the initial difference number of sheets is stored in each RWM storage area indicated by each different RWM address.

The reserved ball (relevant) and the three reserved balls on the right side of FIG. It indicates to which initial difference number of sheets to add. For example, the number "+100" is written on the right arrow of the reserved ball (relevant), which indicates that +100 is added to the initial difference number (right). In addition, among the three reserved balls, the number "+500" written on the left arrow indicates that +500 is added to the initial difference number (left). In addition, among the three reserved balls, the number "+50" indicated by an upward arrow indicates that +50 is added to the initial difference number (middle). Note that the ratio of whether or not to add to which initial difference number of sheets among the initial difference number of sheets (left), the initial difference number of sheets (middle), and the initial difference number of sheets (right) is equally assigned.

The introduction period continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and the predetermined termination condition includes winning a termination lottery that is executed every game. However, if the end lottery is won at the beginning of the introduction period and the introduction period ends, the interest in the game will decrease significantly, so there is a period in which the end lottery is not executed, and the end lottery will be held for 5 games from the start of the introduction period. is set not to run. Note that the period during which the end lottery is not executed is not limited to 5 games, and any number of games can be set. Moreover, it is not necessary to provide a period during which the end lottery is not executed.

The reserved ball (relevant) and three reserved balls on the right side of FIG. 122 are updated for each game. For example, the state in FIG. 122 is a state in which all the reels are rotating (after accepting the operation of the start switch or after executing the internal lottery), and the initial difference number (right) indicated by the reserved ball (relevant) It is determined whether or not 100 is added to the initial difference number, and the three reserved balls are to be used after the next game. In other words, the reserved balls in the reserved balls (relevant) are the reserved balls with the right to add the initial difference number in the game.

Whether or not this reserved ball (relevant) is added to the initial difference number is related to the result of the internal lottery and the stop order of the stop switch. As a result of the internal lottery, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, prize-A1 to A12, prize-B1 to B12, prize- C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H are the cases where the reserved ball (relevant) may be added to the initial difference number, and other internal In the result of the lottery, the reserved ball (relevant) is not added to the initial difference number. In addition, as a result of the internal lottery, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, winning-C, winning-D, winning-E, In the case of Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, the reserved ball (in question) is always added to the initial difference number, but Win-A1 to A12 and Win-B1 to B12 In this case, the reserved ball (relevant) is not added to the initial difference number unless it is operated in the correct order. For example, when Winning-A1 is won, if the stop switch is operated in the order of left, middle, right, the reserved balls (relevant) will be added to the initial difference number, and if the stop switch is operated in the order other than left, center, right The reserved ball (relevant) is not added to the initial difference number. In other words, when winning a rare role, a common bell, and a bell in the order of pressing, it is a chance that the initial difference number is added. In addition, since notification of the pressing order is not executed during the introduction period, the player guesses the pressing order by intuition. In addition, since there is no penalty for the pressing order during the introduction period, the player can freely select the pressing order.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to design the wave of the paid balls to be rough due to the fact that there is a case where it is not added, and the wave of the paid balls changes according to the player's intuition, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to add the additional value of the reserved ball (relevant) when the rare combination is won, and the additional value may be added when the additional lottery is won. In addition, when a rare combination is won, all of the reserved ball (relevant) displayed on the liquid crystal and the three reserved balls, or a plurality of any of them may be obtained. Also, when a rare combination is won, a value obtained by adding an extra value to the added value of the reserved ball (in question) may be added to the initial difference number, and in this case the extra value may be determined by lottery, It may be a predetermined value or a value obtained by multiplying the added value by an integer.

Then, after all the reels have been stopped and the process of adding the initial difference number for the held ball (in question) is completed, the next held ball (in FIG. '+500' held ball) moves, the next held ball becomes a held ball (relevant), and can be acquired according to the result of the internal lottery of the next game. In addition, two held balls (“+50” and “+200” held balls), excluding the held ball that became the held ball (relevant) out of the three held balls, move to the upper place and move to the empty place. A new reserved ball (“+10” reserved ball) is added. As a result of the internal lottery, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, prize-A1 to A12, prize-B1 to B12, If you win or lose a condition device other than Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, the additional value indicated by the pending ball (relevant) will be the initial difference. The reserved ball (relevant) disappears without adding to the number (including adding 0), and the next reserved ball (relevant) moves to the place of the reserved ball (relevant). In other words, even if the additional value of the reserved ball in the reserved ball (in question) cannot be acquired, it will be replaced with the next reserved ball at the end of the game, so that it is possible to acquire the reserved ball for each game. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, when winning a rare role, if you want to acquire all of the reserved balls (relevant) displayed on the liquid crystal and the three reserved balls, or any of more than one, the number of used reserved balls will be newly reserved. It needs to be replenished as a ball.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the game whether or not to acquire the reserved ball every game until the termination condition of the introductory period is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 123b), if the ending lottery, which is the condition for ending the introductory period, is won, an icon labeled "judgment" (hereinafter referred to as "judgment ball") is displayed instead of the reserved ball. Even if the referee ball is displayed, it does not end immediately, but ends when it moves to the position of the reserved ball (in question). In the case of FIG. 123b), since the referee ball moves to the position of the reserved ball (relevant) in the fourth game, the opportunity to add the initial difference number continues during the three games during that time. Then, when the fourth game is finished, the introduction period ends, and an acquisition period (hereinafter referred to as "referee period") for determining the initial difference number of the main AT starts. The lottery and display of the reserved ball after the referee ball is displayed may or may not be performed.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to end the introduction period in a game where the referee ball is consumed, and the referee ball may be displayed even though the introduction period continues (hereafter, the referee ball whose introduction period continues is referred to as "fake referee ball"). ”). According to such a configuration, even if the referee ball appears, it is impossible to know whether the game will end or not, so the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the referee ball and the fake referee ball are displayed so as to have the same appearance, it is not possible to tell from the appearance whether or not the introduction period is over. In addition, since it is not possible to visually distinguish between referee balls and fake referee balls, the game after displaying referee balls and fake referee balls will also draw lots and display reserved balls to determine the additional value of the initial difference number. conduct. In addition, in the case of false referee balls, if the initial difference is not added when continuing, the interest in the game may decrease. The calculated addition value may be added to any location of the determined initial difference number.

Further, if the game progresses without winning the ending lottery for the introduction period, the introduction period may be ended when the specified number of games are played during the introduction period. For example, when 50 games have been played during the introduction period, the introduction period is terminated and the judgment period is started even if the end lottery is not won. When the introduction period ends after the specified number of games have been played, an icon different from the referee ball (hereinafter referred to as "blessing ball") is displayed. If the blessing ball is displayed in the reserved ball area, the player can visually recognize that the introduction period is over (because the introduction period will always end when the blessing ball is displayed), so the blessing ball is displayed. Lottery and display of reserved balls are not executed in the game after being drawn. Then, in a game executed with the blessing ball moving to the position of the reserved ball (relevant), a special blessing image is displayed to inform the player that the introduction period has ended.

In the introductory period, an example was explained in which the pressing order was not notified when any of the winning-A1 to A12 and winning-B1 to B12 conditional devices were determined. may For example, when only the first stop is notified, the pressing order correct rate can be set to 50%. Alternatively, a lottery may be used to decide whether to notify the correct pressing order or not to notify the correct pressing order. For example, when the correct pressing order is not reported, the accuracy rate of the pressing order bell is about 17%, but when the correct pressing order is reported, the accuracy rate of the pressing order bell is 100%. Alternatively, a lottery may be used to determine whether the correct pressing order is not reported or the correct pressing order is partially reported.

During the introduction period of the above-described embodiment, the ratio of whether or not to add to which initial difference number of sheets among the initial difference number of sheets (left), the initial difference number of sheets (middle), and the initial difference number of sheets (right) is equally allocated. However, without being limited to this, an introductory period that is allocated unevenly may be provided separately. Hereinafter, the introduction period in which the ratio of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is evenly assigned is referred to as the "first introduction period", and the ratio of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is unevenly assigned. The introductory period is referred to as the "second introductory period", but simply calling it the "introductory period" means any introductory period.

For example, the second lead-in period may be set to initial difference number of sheets (left):initial difference number of sheets (middle):initial difference number of sheets (right)=8:2:0. Since 80% is added to the initial difference number (left) in the second introduction period in this case, the initial difference number (left) is designed to increase the additional value. In addition, since the initial difference number (right) is not assigned, the second introduction period ends with the initial difference number (right) set to the initial value (0) and the transition to the trial period is started.

It is possible to decide whether to use the first introduction period or the second introduction period by lottery when the transition of the introduction period is decided, or to decide whether to use the first introduction period or the second introduction period at the start of the introduction period. Whether or not the introduction period is set may be determined by the operation of the player. When the player decides whether to use the first introduction period or the second introduction period at the start of the introduction period, the selection may be made according to the order in which the stop switch is pressed in the game at which the introduction period starts, or the introduction period. Depending on the operation of the switch connected to the main control means such as the MAX bet switch, start switch, stop switch, etc. during the game standby immediately before the start, during the freeze at the start of the introduction period, or after all reels have stopped at the start of the introduction period Let the player decide.

By providing the second introductory period, the number of balls released becomes rougher and the interest in the game is improved.

<<Regarding the trial period>>
During the trial period, which of the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) added during the introduction period will be used as the initial difference number for the main AT. is the period for determining

For example, as a result of executing the introduction period, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500". As a result of executing the trial period, if the initial difference number (left) is determined, the initial difference number of the main AT starts from 1000, and if the initial difference number (middle) is decided, the main AT The initial difference number starts from 200 sheets, and when the initial difference number (right) is determined, the initial difference number for the main AT starts from 500 sheets.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to realize the playability of determining which initial difference number can be acquired among the initial difference numbers added in the introduction period, the interest in the game is improved.

Whether or not any initial difference number can be obtained during the referee period is determined by the result of internal lottery during the referee period. , Replay-M, Win-A1~A12, Win-B1~B12, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H As a result of internal lottery, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, prize-A1 to A12, prize- If conditions other than B1 to B12, Prize-C, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H are determined, or if a failure is determined, the judging period will continue. In other words, after the trial period starts, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, prize-A1 to A12, prize-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H Until any conditional device is determined, the refereeing period continues, and replay during the refereeing period- H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E , Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, the initial difference number of the main AT is determined in the first game, and the judgment period ends.

As a method of determining the initial difference in the number of sheets during the judgment period, in a game in which either Winning-A1 to A12 or Winning-B1 to B12 is won during the judgment period, the first stop correct reel (first stop correct stop switch) You can get the initial difference number corresponding to . For example, if the initial difference number (left) is "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is "+500", an internal lottery will be performed. When winning-A1 (left, middle, right correct bell) is determined, 1000 corresponding to the initial difference number (left) becomes the initial difference number of the main AT. Also, for example, when "+1000" is displayed for the initial difference number (left), "+200" is displayed for the initial difference number (middle), and "+500" is displayed for the initial difference number (right). When winning -A5 (middle right and left correct bells) is determined by lottery, 200 sheets corresponding to the initial difference number (middle) becomes the initial difference number of the main AT. Also, for example, when "+1000" is displayed for the initial difference number (left), "+200" is displayed for the initial difference number (middle), and "+500" is displayed for the initial difference number (right). If winning -A9 (right, left, middle, correct bell) is determined by lottery, 500 cards corresponding to the initial difference number (right) will be the initial difference number of the main AT.

During the judgment period, any of Replay-H, Replay-I, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H was won during the judgment period. In a game (a game in which a weak rare combination is won), any initial difference number can be acquired by lottery (processing related to the instruction function). For example, if the initial difference number (left) is "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is "+500", an internal lottery will be performed. When replay-H is determined and the initial difference number (left) is determined by lottery, 1000 corresponding to the initial difference number (left) becomes the initial difference number of the main AT. Also, for example, when "+1000" is displayed for the initial difference number (left), "+200" is displayed for the initial difference number (middle), and "+500" is displayed for the initial difference number (right). When Replay-H is determined by lottery and the initial difference number (medium) is determined by lottery, 200 corresponding to the initial difference number (medium) becomes the initial difference number of the main AT. Also, for example, when "+1000" is displayed for the initial difference number (left), "+200" is displayed for the initial difference number (middle), and "+500" is displayed for the initial difference number (right). When Replay-H is determined by lottery and the initial difference number (right) is determined by lottery, 500 corresponding to the initial difference number (right) becomes the initial difference number of the main AT.

As a method of determining the initial difference number during the referee period, the game in which any of Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-C was won during the referee period (strong rare role In the winning game), all the initial difference numbers can be obtained. For example, if the initial difference number (left) is "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is "+500", an internal lottery will be performed. When winning-C is determined, it is the sum of 1000 sheets corresponding to the initial difference number (left), 200 sheets corresponding to the initial difference number (middle), and 500 sheets corresponding to the initial difference number (right). 1700 sheets is the initial difference number of sheets of this AT. It should be noted that, even when a strong rare combination is won, it may be determined by lottery whether any initial difference number or whether all initial difference numbers can be obtained. A strong rare combination is a combination that has a lower probability of winning in an internal lottery than a weak rare combination.

According to such a configuration, the result of the internal lottery during the referee period affects the initial difference number of ATs, so that the result of the internal lottery of each game can be expected, and the interest of the game is improved. do.

As a result of the internal lottery during the judgment period, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Prize-A1~A12, Prize-B1~B12 , Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H When any condition device is determined, execute freeze for a predetermined period before rotating all reels Then, rotate the reel corresponding to the initial difference number obtained during the freeze.

For example, if the prize-A1 (left, middle, right, correct answer bell) is determined by the internal lottery, the freeze is executed before the correct answer order is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the left reel is rotated during the freeze, so that the initial difference The player is notified that the number (left) has been obtained. After the freeze is over, the order of pressing the correct answers corresponding to the left, middle, and right correct answers is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the player gets the correct answer bell.
The timing for displaying the correct pressing order on the liquid crystal may be before the end of the freeze, but in this case, the correct pressing order may be displayed after informing the player that the initial difference number (left) has been obtained. can be made easier for the player to recognize.

According to such a configuration, the player can visually recognize the acquisition method of the initial difference number, ensuring the fairness of the game and improving the interest of the game.

Also, the freeze period may be changed according to the amount of the initial difference number that can be obtained. For example, if the initial difference number (left) is "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is "+500", an internal lottery will be performed. If Prize-A1 (left, middle, right, correct bell) is determined, the freeze period will be 5 seconds, and if Prize-A5 (middle, left, right, correct bell) is determined, the freeze period will be 2 seconds, and Prize-A9. If (right, left, middle, correct bell) is determined, the freeze period is set to 3 seconds.

According to such a configuration, the longer the freeze, the greater the number of initial difference, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the judgment period.

As a result of the internal lottery during the referee period, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Prize-A1~A12, Prize-B1 ~B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H Condition devices other than Winning-H, or when a loss is determined, the lottery or freeze, etc. will not be executed, but the freeze lottery Freeze may be determined by and executed. In this case, the freeze period is set to a relatively short period (for example, 2 seconds), and the continuation of the judgment period after the freeze is announced or nothing is produced.

In the above-described mode, the initial difference number is determined in the introduction period and the referee period. Also, although the case where there are three reels, left, middle, and right, has been described, the number of reels may be four.

<<How to manage ball on hold>>
In FIG. 122, four held balls (including held balls (relevant)) are displayed. Each held ball is stored in the corresponding RWM storage area of the main control means, and under the situation of FIG. A third storage area corresponding to the held ball 2, a fourth storage area corresponding to the held ball 3, and a fifth storage corresponding to the held ball not displayed on the liquid crystal (hereinafter referred to as "held ball (reserve)"). have an area. In the following description, it is assumed that "30" is stored in the fifth storage area under the conditions shown in FIG. At the start of the introductory period, the addition value or the addition value and the addition place are determined by lottery, and the determined values are stored in the first to fifth storage areas.

As a method of managing held balls, the correspondence relationship between the positions of held balls and storage areas is changed. In other words, even if "500" is stored in the second storage area as +500 corresponding to the held ball 1 in FIG. , "500" remains stored in the second storage area as the value corresponding to +500. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third storage area as +50 corresponding to ball 2 on hold in FIG. "50" remains stored in the third storage area as the value corresponding to +50. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth storage area as +200 corresponding to the held ball 3 in FIG. Even in the case of +200, "200" remains stored in the fourth storage area. Similarly, "30" is stored in the fifth storage area as +30 corresponding to the reserved balls (reserve) in FIG. "30" remains stored in the 5 storage area as the value corresponding to +30. Also, "100" is stored in the first storage area as +100 corresponding to the held ball (in question) in FIG. Since it is either converted or discarded, when the held ball 1 moves to the held ball (relevant) on the liquid crystal display, a new addition value is determined by lottery in the first storage area, The new added value is stored.

In this case, the main control means has a counter value corresponding to each storage area and a storage area for storing the counter value. Information (addition location information) indicating to which initial difference number of sheets the value corresponding to the fifth storage area is added is sent to the sub-control means to match consistency on the liquid crystal.

For example, let the value of the counter corresponding to the first storage area be "1", the value of the counter corresponding to the second storage area be "2", the value of the counter corresponding to the third storage area be "3", Assume that the value of the counter corresponding to the fourth storage area is "4" and the value of the counter corresponding to the fifth storage area is "5". In other words, when the counter value is "1", it indicates the first storage area, when the counter value is "2", it indicates the second storage area, and the counter value is "3". indicates the third storage area, the counter value of "4" indicates the fourth storage area, and the counter value of "5" indicates the fifth storage area. indicates

Then, the value in the storage area indicated by the counter value corresponds to the added value of the reserved ball (in question).

For example, in the case of FIG. 122, the counter stores a value "1" indicating the first storage area. Note that "100" is stored in the first storage area at this time.

When the game shown in FIG. 122 is finished (all reels are stopped), the value stored in the first storage area is initialized (cleared to 0), a new addition value is selected, and stored in the first storage area. and update the counter value to "2" indicating the second storage area, and correspond to the added value and the counter value stored in each storage area in the sub control means and the first to fifth storage areas. Send information about which initial difference number the value will be added to. In other words, at the start of the introduction period, the added value determined by lottery is stored in each of the first to fifth storage areas, but after that, it is determined by lottery in one of the first to fifth storage areas for each game. store the added value.

Then, when the sub-control means receives the information about the added value and the counter value stored in each storage area transmitted from the main control means, it is set to the second storage area indicated by the counter value on the liquid crystal display. The display of '+500' related to the received '500' is moved to the position of the held ball (relevant), and other held balls are also moved to fill the vacant place.

The above-described processing is executed every game during the introduction period. The counter value is incremented for each game, and when the counter value is "5", the next value is "1". In other words, the value of the counter will cycle from 1-5.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to instruct the effect display on the liquid crystal only by changing the value of the counter, it is possible to reduce the program capacity of the main control means.

In the above description, the addition value is stored in the first to fifth storage areas, but the present invention is not limited to this, and information including the addition value and information on which initial difference number of sheets to be added may be used. . For example, "0" to "13" are provided as values that can be stored in each of the first to fifth storage areas, and "0" indicates "empty (added value 0)", " In the case of "1", it indicates "initial difference number (left) + 10", "2" indicates "initial difference number (left) + 50", and "3" indicates " "Initial difference number (left) + 100", "4" indicates "Initial difference number (middle) + 10", "5" indicates "Initial difference number (middle)" +50", "6" indicates "initial difference (middle) + 100", and "7" indicates "initial difference (right) + 10". "8" indicates "initial difference number (right) + 50", "9" indicates "initial difference number (right) + 100", and "10". In the case of , it indicates that it is a “judgment ball”.

According to such a configuration, the information of the first to fifth storage areas can be held in 1 byte, and furthermore, a new storage area is provided because the information on which initial difference number of sheets is added is also included. Since it is not necessary, further compression of the program capacity of the main control means can be realized.

Also, the range of values that can be stored in each of the first to fifth storage areas is not limited to "0" to "13" and may be increased according to specifications. For example, "14" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (left)", and "15" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (middle)". "16" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (right)", and "17" indicates "initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle) , the values of the initial difference number (right) are doubled."

In addition, in the case of adding an addition value to a predetermined addition value determined by lottery when winning a rare combination, a sixth storage area for storing the value of the addition is provided. For example, in the game shown in FIG. 122, when it is determined that a rare combination is won and +50 is added to the initial difference number (left), "2" is stored in the sixth storage area and then sent to the sub control means. "9" stored in the first storage area and "2" stored in the sixth storage area are transmitted (the values of other storage areas are also transmitted), and the sub control means and "2" stored in the sixth storage area, the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+50", and the initial difference number (right) is "+100". ” is displayed.

Such addition to a predetermined additional value can be realized with a simple program, and compression of the program capacity of the main control means can be realized.

As another aspect of the method for managing held balls, the correspondence relationship between the positions of held balls and storage areas may be fixed. In other words, "100" is stored in the first storage area as +100 corresponding to the held ball (relevant) in FIG. When moving, "500" is stored in the first storage area as a value corresponding to +500. That is, the first storage area always stores a value corresponding to the position of the held ball (in question). Similarly, "500" is stored in the second storage area as +500 corresponding to ball 1 on hold in FIG. "50" is stored in the second storage area as a value corresponding to +50. That is, a value corresponding to the position of the held ball 1 is always stored in the second storage area. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third storage area as +50 corresponding to ball 2 on hold in FIG. "200" is stored in the third storage area as a value corresponding to +200. That is, a value corresponding to the position of the held ball 2 is always stored in the third storage area. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth storage area as +200 corresponding to the held ball 3 in FIG. If so, "30" is stored in the fourth storage area as a value corresponding to +30. That is, a value corresponding to the position of the reserved ball 3 is always stored in the fourth storage area. Further, when the relevant game is finished and all the reserved balls are moved on the liquid crystal display, a new addition value is determined by lottery and the determined new addition value is stored in the fifth storage area.

According to such a configuration, since the relationship between the storage area of the main control means and the apparent held balls does not change, the display method of the held balls of the sub-control means can be realized with a simple program.

When the introductory period ends and shifts to the referee period, the addition values stored in the first to fifth storage areas are initialized (cleared to 0), so the game is reintroduced after the introductory period ends. Even if the period starts, the additional value is not taken over.

<<Other contents>>
The initial difference number (left), the initial difference number (middle), and the initial difference number (right) have upper limits for display, and when the upper limit is exceeded, a special display is performed. For example, the upper limit value of the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) is set to "+2400", and "2500" is stored in the initial difference number (left) storage area. If so, "Congratulations" is displayed as the display mode of the initial difference number (left) on the liquid crystal. In this way, when the upper limit is exceeded, it is not clearly reported how many cards can be acquired, and only the information indicating that the number of cards exceeds 2400 is reported, thereby suppressing the gambling spirit and allowing the player to play the game. It is possible to prevent sinking into.

Also, during the referee period, if a strong rare combination is won and the sum of the initial difference numbers stored in the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) exceeds 2400 Also displays "Congratulations" instead of displaying the number of acquisitions.

Then, when a value of 2400 or more is obtained as the initial difference number during the judgment period, a special effect (so-called ending effect) is executed at the start of the main AT.

In addition, the upper limit of 2400 may be any value, especially if the advantageous section has an upper limit of 2400 differences, it is possible to obtain 2400 or more in the same advantageous section, so the upper limit may be changed depending on the situation. However, the number of sheets may be fixed to 5000 sheets. For example, if the difference number from the start of the advantageous section during the trial period is -1000, the upper limit is set to 3400, and if the difference number from the start of the advantageous section during the trial period is +400, the upper limit is set. The upper limit value may be changed for each situation such that 2000 is set as the value.

According to such a configuration, since the number of coins that can be obtained changes flexibly according to the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved.

<Control of another effect mode using the effect switch according to the present embodiment>
In this embodiment, an effect (so-called "long press effect") is provided to continue pressing the effect switch. can be notified.

The execution timing (start timing) of the long press effect is either after the start switch operation or after the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped), and it is executed after the first stop operation and after the second stop operation. not. The first stop operation is often used to prevent a small winning combination from being missed, and the second stop operation is often used to prevent a small winning combination from being missed and whether or not the pattern will be heard. If it is executed after the first stop operation or after the second stop operation, the long-press effect is executed when the result desired by the player is not obtained (when a small win is missed or when the pattern is not picked). It is possible that the long-press effect cannot be enjoyed. Also, if the long press effect is executed after the first stop operation or after the second stop operation, the player may pay attention to the long press effect, which may make it easier to miss a small win. In order to prevent such a situation, the timing is set to either after the start switch is operated or after the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped). However, the execution timing of the long press effect may be any timing after the start switch operation, after the first stop operation, after the second stop operation, or after the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped). If the execution timing of the long press effect is not specified, it means that the long press effect may be started at any timing.

In the following embodiments, an example in which AT management is managed by the number of games will be described. For example, AT ends when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number from the start of AT. However, the AT is not limited to this example, and may be managed by the difference in the number of sheets, by the number of points, or by the number of push order navigation times. In these cases, the unit for the additional number shall be the unit according to each management method.

A long-pressing effect when notifying the number of additions will be described with reference to FIG. 124 . In FIG. 124a), an image of "0000", which is the initial value of the add-on number, and an image of an effect switch are displayed on the liquid crystal. FIG. 124b) is a diagram when the effect switch is pressed once from FIG. 124a), and the added number is incremented by 1 and "0001" is displayed. In addition, even if the effect switch is not long-pressed, the additional number is +1 when the effect switch is detected to be pressed. However, the number of additions is +1. In addition, since the number of additions is predetermined at the start of the long-pressing effect, the long-pressing effect ends when the effect switch is continuously pressed and the predetermined number of additions is reached. For example, if the addition of 300 games is determined by the game before the start of the long press effect or the addition lottery in the game at the time of the start of the long press effect, +300 is reached by the long press effect ("0300" The image is displayed) and the long press effect is ended.

In addition, as a performance mode when a performance switch is continuously pressed in a long-pressing performance and reaches a predetermined addition number, the final addition result is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, when the number of additions is being added, the performance switch is moved away and updating of the number of additions is stopped, and when a predetermined number of additions is reached and updating of the number of additions is stopped. And change the production mode of. Specifically, if the effect switch is moved away while the number of additions is being added and the update of the number of additions is stopped, the number of additions is displayed as if it vibrates finely up and down, and the number is determined in advance. When the number of additions is reached and the update of the number of additions is stopped, the number of additions is displayed as if it has stopped. Also, when the number of additions is added, the update of the number of additions is stopped when the predetermined number of additions is reached, rather than when the performance switch is released and the update of the number of additions is stopped. is displayed so that the number of additions is displayed larger. Also, when the number of additions determined in advance is reached and updating of the number of additions is stopped, a dedicated sound effect is output.

As a display mode when the additional number is added, only the digit to be added may be variably displayed, or the digit not to be added may also be variably displayed. For example, when changing from 0 to 1, only the number corresponding to the rightmost digit of 0000 may be changed, or the second digit from the right, the third digit from the right, and the fourth digit from the right. You may vary so that 0 corresponding to each digit may be rotated. According to the configuration in which only the digits to be added are variably displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the digits to be variably displayed are added by addition. According to the configuration in which the digits that are not added are also variably displayed, by variably displaying all the digits, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation by not knowing how much the number of additions will be.

Also, as a display mode when the additional number is added, the time required for changing from n (a positive integer) to n+1 may be shorter than the time required for changing from 0 to 1. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not 1 is added first and whether or not the digit is increased, so that the interest of the player is improved.

In FIG. 124, the number is four digits, and the upper limit of the number of additions displayed is "9999". You can switch to the character display. Also, the upper limit of the display of the additional number is set to an arbitrary value such as "2400", and when the additional number exceeds an arbitrary value such as 2400, the display of the additional number can be switched to the character display of "Congratulations". good.

It should be noted that although the example in which the additional number increases by +1 by pressing the effect switch once or by pressing the effect switch for a long time has been described, this is not limited to this, and pressing the effect switch once or by pressing the effect switch for a long time , the number of additions may be displayed as +2 or +3. Further, when the effect switch is pressed, a command indicating that the effect switch is pressed is transmitted from the sub control means to the effect control means.

Also, during the long-press effect, when the effect switch is pressed, the frame lamp on the front door lights up in a dedicated lighting pattern, a dedicated sound effect is output, and the LED built into the effect switch is dedicated. The production is livened up by lighting with the lighting pattern.

As a method of determining whether or not the switch for effect is long pressed, a timer for long press of the switch for effect (hereinafter referred to as "long press timer") is provided in a predetermined storage area of the sub control means. For example, if the timer interrupt period of the sub control means is 1 ms and the long press timer is managed by the interrupt processing of the sub control means, the long press timer is set to "0" when the operation of the effect switch is accepted. Set (initialize). At this time, the number to be added is incremented by 1 and displayed on the liquid crystal. In other words, regardless of whether the effect switch is pressed for a short time (an operation method in which the effect switch is separated before 500 ms has passed since the operation of the effect switch is accepted) or long pressed, the effect switch is pressed. +1 is added to the display of the number of additions. While the operation of the performance switch is continuously detected, the long press timer is incremented by 1 for each interrupt process. Then, when the long-press timer reaches "500" (when 500 ms have elapsed since the depression of the effect switch), it is determined that the long-press has been performed, and the long-press flag is stored in a certain storage area (for example, a certain "1" is stored in the storage area). The long-press timer continues to be updated even after it is determined to be a long-press, and each time the long-press timer is updated 100 times (every 100 ms after it is determined to be a long-press), the number of additions is incremented by 1. Display on the liquid crystal (the sub-control means sends a command indicating that the long-press timer is incremented by 100 to the effect control means every 100 ms after it is determined to be a long-press). Further, when the operation of the effect switch is released while the long-press timer is counting, the long-press timer and the long-press flag are initialized. In addition, after the long-press timer reaches "500" and the long-press flag is set, 100 is set in the continuous-press interval timer (stored in a specific storage area), and each interrupt processing of the sub-control means It is also possible to decrement the repeated hitting interval timer by -1 and, when the repeated hitting interval timer reaches "0", add 1 to the number added and display it on the liquid crystal. Also, the period from when the effect switch is pressed until it is determined to be a long press may be the same period as the interval between successive hits.

When executing the long press effect, a feedback command (hereinafter referred to as "FB") is transmitted from the effect control means to the sub control means. FB is a command transmitted from the effect control means to the sub-control means, and is used to specify the timing of executing the effect of the sub-control means. In the long-pressing performance, when the timing for pressing the performance switch comes, the performance control means transmits FB to the sub-control means.

For example, when an image prompting the user to press the effect switch is displayed one second after the start of the long-press effect, when the time comes to display the image prompting the user to press the effect switch after the start of the long-press effect. The performance control means transmits FB to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means executes processing to validate pressing of the performance switch. It should be noted that "enable the pressing of the effect switch" means that even if the effect switch is pressed before the elapse of one second from the start of the long press effect, the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect switch is not executed, This means that when the effect switch is pressed after one second has elapsed from the start of the pressing effect, the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect switch is executed. Also, the timing at which the effect control means transmits the FB to the sub-control means is a predetermined timing, and is associated with the timing at which an image prompting pressing of the effect switch is displayed.

In other words, by using the FB without managing the elapsed time of the performance when the performance switch is pressed, the relationship between the performance and the control of the performance switch can be appropriately controlled.

According to such a configuration, since the timing of activating the effect switch and the timing of executing the effect prompting the pressing of the effect switch match, the effect switch is activated before the effect prompting the pressing of the effect switch is executed. You will no longer have to enable it.

If the effect switch is pressed and held during the long press effect and +1 is repeatedly displayed as the number of additions, if the effect switch is released, the number of additions at the time of separation will be displayed. Pause the addition of numbers. For example, if the effect switch is released while "0100" is being displayed as the display of the additional number, the display of the additional number temporarily stops at "0100". Then, when the performance switch is pressed again, the display of the added number becomes "0101", and after that, the added number is displayed with +1 until the long-pressing effect that continues the long-pressing ends.

In addition, when the effect switch is released during the long press effect, the effect control means sends a command indicating that the effect switch has been released to the effect control means, so that the effect control means executes the long press effect. When a command indicating that the effect switch has been released is received during the process, a process of pausing the long-press effect that is being executed can be executed. In other words, the effect switch is pressed when the effect switch is pressed without the sub control means periodically transmitting information indicating that the effect switch is being pressed during the long press effect to the effect control means. The sub control means transmits to the effect control means information indicating that the effect switch has been pushed and information indicating that the effect switch has been released when the effect switch is separated, thereby operating and long-pressing the effect switch. Since the effect mode of the effect can be linked, the number of commands that the sub control means transmits to the effect control means can be reduced.

According to such a configuration, even when the player leaves the seat during the long-pressing effect, the player can continue to enjoy the long-pressing effect when he or she is seated. It should be noted that if the start timing of the long-pressing effect is after all reels have stopped, the player can be entertained even after leaving the seat for a long time by preventing the transition to the demo screen during the long-pressing effect. .

In addition to an image prompting the user to press the effect switch during the long press effect and an image showing the number of additions, a series of moving images having a story are displayed. When the effect switch is released while the moving image is being displayed, the moving image is also temporarily stopped in the same manner as the display of the added number.

According to such a configuration, since the long-press effect can be temporarily stopped at the player's timing, the interest in the game is improved.

Also, when the moving image during the long-press effect is paused, only some layers may be stopped and the other layers may continue to be reproduced. For example, a mode is conceivable in which a layer in which characters are displayed is paused, but a layer in which the background is displayed is continued without pausing. Further, for example, a mode is conceivable in which the layer displaying the additional number is stopped, and the surrounding layers such as the concentration line display for emphasizing the additional number continue to be reproduced.

According to such a configuration, it becomes visually easy to understand that the long-press effect is continuing, so the interest in the game is improved.

Further, when a layer for superimposed display is incorporated in a part of the moving image, when the part of the moving image and the superimposed display are executed, the sub-control means instructs the display of the part of the moving image and the superimposed display with one command. (Instructions to play some videos and superimposed displays, and instructions to pause some videos and superimposed displays), so even if the long-press effect is interrupted or resumed, the effect The number of commands can be reduced, the program capacity can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved. For example, by configuring the display of the added number and the concentration line display for emphasizing the added number on the same layer, it becomes possible to control the update of the added number and the highlight display of the added number with the same production command.

Further, when the effect during the long-pressing effect is temporarily stopped, the effect may be temporarily stopped even while the effect is fluctuating, or may be temporarily stopped after progressing to some extent. For example, as shown in FIG. 125, as an update display of the display of the added number, in the case of a display mode in which the numbers 1 to 9 arranged in a ring are rotated and updated, as shown in FIG. is rotated to the correct position and then paused, and as shown in FIG. Conceivable. Also, not limited to the example of FIG. 125, if the effect switch is released while the effect during the long press effect is changing, a special effect is generated and the effect is in the process of changing. can be shown.

In the long-press effect, when the effect switch is pressed and the value of the first stage is obtained as a result of adding the number of additions (when the first period has passed since the effect switch was pressed), the long-press effect (before switching to the second stage moving image, the first stage moving image is displayed). In addition, when the effect switch is pressed and the value of the second stage is obtained as a result of adding the number of additions (when the second period has passed since the first period has passed since the effect switch was pressed) ) switches to the third stage moving image as a long press effect (the second stage moving image is displayed before switching to the third stage moving image).

When the stages of the long-pressing performance are switched, the performance control means transmits an FB to the sub-control means at the timing of switching the stages, and the sub-control means transmits a command to execute the performance of the next stage to the performance control means. is realized.

The length of the first period and the second period (magnitude of the number of additions) may be the same, the first period may be greater than the second period, or the first period may be less than the second period. There may be.

In addition, the length of the continuous pressing period of the effect switch in the long press effect of the first period and the second period may be changed. For example, the effect switch may be repeatedly hit every 100 ms during the long press in the first period, but the effect switch may be repeatedly hit every 50 ms during the long press in the second period.

Also, the length of the period during which the moving image is switched (magnitude of the number of additions) may be configured so that the range becomes wider in the latter half, and the continuous hitting period of the effect switch becomes shorter. For example, if the number of additions for switching from the first period to the second period is 100, the repetition period is 100 ms, the number of additions for switching from the second period to the third period is 300, the repetition period is 50 ms, and the period from the third period to the fourth period is A mode is conceivable in which the number of additions to be switched is set to 1000, the repetition period is 30 ms, and the number of additions is not upper limit after the fourth period, and the repetition period is set to 10 ms.

Further, when the effect switch is separated during the second period and the effect switch is pressed again in the case where the length of the continuous pressing period of the effect switch in the long-press effect of the first period and the second period changes. may resume from the repeated hitting period of the second period, or even if the moving image of the second period is displayed from when the effect switch is pressed again until the first period elapses, it corresponds to the first period. It may be a continuous hitting period.

According to such a configuration, since the moving image is switched according to the progress of pressing the effect switch, the interest in the game is improved even when the player is pressing the effect switch for a long time. In particular, since the update speed of the number of additions increases as the addition progresses, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation.

Further, even when the front door is opened during the long-pressing effect, the long-pressing effect can be continued. For example, when the front door is opened (when a door open error occurs) in a situation where the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect and the additional number is added, the effect switch is pressed. The addition display of the added number based on the depression is continuously displayed. At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED built in the performance switch is switched to the door opening lighting pattern. In addition, the front door frame lamp switches to the lighting pattern for opening the door. In addition, "door is open" is displayed in a part of the display area of the LCD screen. Also, a voice saying "the door is open" is output from the speaker. Even if the effect switch is pressed long, the door open error can be canceled when the front door is closed. In addition, when the front door is opened (when a door opening error occurs) in a situation where the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect and the additional number is added, the effect switch is pressed. The door open error display "The door is open" may be superimposed on a part of the additional display of the additional number based on the pressing, or may be displayed in a separate display area (non-overlapping display area). good. When the door open error is cleared (when the door is closed or when the error reset switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period of time has passed since the door open error was cleared (during the predetermined period, various (Continuing the notification mode of the door open error in the device), the lighting pattern of various LEDs, the liquid crystal display, and the sound output from the speaker are controlled to the display mode corresponding to the additional effect.

According to such a configuration, even if the front door is opened during the long-press effect, the long-press effect can be continued. It is possible to notify that the door is open by the voice output from the.

Also, for example, when the front door is opened (when a door open error occurs) in a situation where the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect and the number of additions is added, the effect Although the process of adding the additional number based on the depression of the switch is continued, the configuration may be such that the information regarding the door open error is displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal screen. At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED built into the production switch switches to the door open lighting pattern, the frame lamp of the front door switches to the door open lighting pattern, and the voice of "the door is open" is heard from the speaker. output. Even if the effect switch is pressed long, the door open error can be canceled when the front door is closed. When the door open error is cleared (when the door is closed or when the error reset switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period of time has passed since the door open error was cleared (during the predetermined period, various (Continuing the notification mode of the door open error in the device), the lighting pattern of various LEDs, the liquid crystal display, and the sound output from the speaker are controlled to the display mode corresponding to the additional effect. In this case, when the front door is open, the number of additions corresponding to the long depression of the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When the performance switch is pressed long while the front door is open and the predetermined number of additions is reached, the result of addition is displayed after the door open error is cancelled.

According to such a configuration, the process based on the operation of the effect switch can proceed while the door open display is preferentially displayed, and the progress or result of the long-press effect can be notified after the door is closed. can be done.

In addition, if a predetermined error occurs during the long-press effect (while all reels are rotating) started after accepting the operation of the start switch, and if the game continues to progress (predetermined at the end of the game after the third stop) When the progress of the game is stopped due to an error), the long press effect can be executed even when a predetermined error occurs.

Also, if a predetermined error (recoverable error such as a selector error or hopper error) occurs during the long-press effect started after the third stop, the progress of the game is stopped due to the occurrence of the predetermined error, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Error display, various lamps and speakers are controlled to report errors, and the long-press effect cannot be executed. At this time, the long-press effect may be resumed after the predetermined error is cleared, or the long-press effect may not be resumed after the predetermined error is cleared. Even if the long-pressing effect cannot be resumed, the player is not harmed because the addition is performed internally before the start of the long-pressing effect. Even if the effect switch is pressed long, a predetermined error can be canceled by operating the reset switch.

A predetermined error (recoverable error such as a selector error or hopper error) occurs during the long-press effect that started after the third stop. If the long-pressing effect cannot be executed by performing notification control regarding an error with a lamp or a speaker, and the long-pressing effect cannot be resumed after a predetermined error is canceled, the addition result may be notified at a predetermined timing. As the predetermined timing, for example, the operation reception of the MAX bet switch related to the next game, the operation reception of the 1 bet switch, the detection of the inserted medals, the operation reception of the start switch related to the start of the next game, the next game at the start of rotation of the drum. Then, as a mode for notifying the additional result, the notification mode in the long press effect is not implemented, and the remaining number of games is displayed in a state in which the extra amount has already been added to the remaining number of games displayed before the start of the long press effect. A display mode is conceivable. According to such a configuration, there is no need to provide a dedicated effect pattern when recovering from a predetermined error, so the number of effects can be optimized and the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, as a mode for notifying another result of addition, the notification mode in the long-press effect is not implemented, and after displaying the remaining number of games displayed before the start of the long-press effect, the display is incremented and displayed. A mode of adding numbers is conceivable. According to such a configuration, even if the long-press effect is interrupted due to a predetermined error, the addition display of the number of remaining games after recovery from the predetermined error allows the player to recognize how much has been added. .

Further, when power interruption occurs during the long-press effect, the long-press effect may be restarted when the power is restored, or the long-press effect may not be restarted. When restarting the long-press effect, it may be restarted from the beginning of the long-press effect, it may be resumed from the timing when the long-press effect was interrupted, or it may be restarted from the break point of the long-press effect. Good (for example, restart from the beginning of the second period when the power is restored during the second period).

In addition, when power failure occurs during the long-press effect and the long-press effect is not restarted when the power is restored, the number of additions may be announced at a predetermined timing. As a predetermined timing, operation reception of various switches connected to the main control means (for example, reception of operation of the start switch of the next game in which the long-press effect is executed, first stop of the game in which the long-press effect is executed) Operation reception, second stop operation reception, third stop operation reception, operation reception of the settlement switch after the game in which the long press effect is executed is completed), or it is executed after the long press effect is completed. It may be the timing at which the AT is completed (because the amount that was supposed to be added by the long-press effect remains internally), or it may be at the time of power failure recovery. In addition, it is also possible to add the portion that is displayed halfway and display the portion that is not displayed halfway at a predetermined timing, or even if it is displayed halfway, there is no additional display regardless. You may display all the additional parts at a predetermined timing as .

Also, if the setting confirmation mode is entered by opening the front door and turning on the setting key during the long-press effect that occurred after the third stop, the long-press effect will not be executed during the setting confirmation mode. Even if the switch is operated, the additional number will not be added, but when the setting confirmation mode ends, the long press effect may be resumed to enable the operation reception of the production switch, or the setting confirmation mode ends and the previous When the door is closed, the long-press effect may be restarted to validate the operation reception of the effect switch.

The long-press effect started after accepting the third stop is terminated by operating the MAX bet switch, operating the 1 bet switch, inserting game medals, or accepting the start switch for the next game. In other words, the long-press effect can be canceled, and the display mode of the additional number when canceled may be to notify all the added number at the time of cancellation, or not to notify the added number at the time of cancellation at a predetermined timing. may be notified by

Also, FB may be used for stage change effects. For example, the performance control means transmits the FB to the sub-control means at the timing when the stage change performance is finished, and the sub-control means transmits the performance command after the stage change performance to the performance control means when receiving the FB. . According to such a configuration, since the performance after the stage change performance can be executed immediately after the stage change performance is finished, the execution timing of the stage change performance and the performance after the stage change performance are not deviated and displayed appropriately. can be done.

<Example 1 of configuration regarding bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display device>
A configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 applicable to the present embodiment will be described.
126 to 128 are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display device applicable to this embodiment. 126 to 128, "during payout" is the period from the start to the end of the payout process, and "non-display of the number of payouts" is the state in which the number of payout display is turned off (nothing is displayed). not yet), or a situation in which a predetermined display (for example, "0") is displayed on the payout number display, or a predetermined recoverable error on the payout number display in a predetermined recoverable error state. A situation in which corresponding information is displayed, a situation in which information corresponding to the setting value in the setting confirmation mode or information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed. Also, in FIGS. 126 to 128, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated in a situation where there are credits of "3" or more, three bets are made, one of the pressing order bells is hit, and the high bell is raised. It is assumed that a prize is won and 10 game values are paid out.

In FIG. 126, first, three bets are placed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. Although the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light substantially simultaneously, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light in order. You may

After that, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels start rotating at the timing shown in FIG. 126(2).

After that, due to the player's stop operation, all the reels are stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 126(3), the payout process is started by the winning of the high-level bell, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. is displayed ("0→1→2→...→9→10" may be configured to be updated by 1 at a speed that the player can visually recognize, or "0→10 ”, so that only the number of payouts is displayed.). At the timing of FIG. 126(3), a specific timer for measuring the lighting time of the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c and the display time of the payout number on the payout number display is started. Note that the specific timer is a decrement timer, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has passed.

After that, the payout process ends at the timing shown in FIG. 126(4).

After that, at the timing of FIG. 126(5), when the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0") (when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all the reels stopped), 1 bet. The lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, and the display of the number of payouts on the number-of-payouts display disappears.

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 126, after a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, and the display of the payout number on the payout number indicator is hidden. is configured to be

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from avoiding the game by mistakenly thinking that another player is playing when he or she tries to play on an empty table. .

<Configuration example 2 regarding bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display device>
FIG. 127 shows predetermined recoverable errors during measurement of a predetermined time after all the reels have stopped (errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error , hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc.) have occurred.

In FIG. 127, first, three bets are placed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 at the timing of FIG. 127(1), and the 1-bet lamp 25a, the 2-bet lamp 25b, and the 3-bet lamp 25c are lit. Although the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light substantially simultaneously, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light in order. You may

After that, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels start rotating at the timing shown in FIG. 127(2).

After that, due to the player's stop operation, all the reels are stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 127(3), the payout process is started by the winning of the high-level bell, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. is displayed. Also, at the timing of FIG. 127(3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

After that, the payout process ends at the timing shown in FIG. 127(4).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 127(5), a predetermined recoverable error occurs to enter an error state, and the display of the number of payouts on the display of the number of payouts disappears. At this time, information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error is displayed on the number-of-payouts display. For example, if it is a hopper empty error, it is configured to display "HE". Further, the 1-bed lamp 25 to the 3-bed lamp 25c are continuously lit even during a predetermined recoverable error. Furthermore, the specific timer continues to measure the predetermined time even during a predetermined recoverable error.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 127(6), the predetermined recoverable error is released, the state becomes normal, and "10" is again displayed as the payout number on the payout number display.

After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing of FIG. 127(7), the 1-bet lamp 25a to 3-bet lamp 25c are extinguished, and the display of the payout number on the payout number indicator is hidden. It is configured.

Also, FIG. 127 shows the case where the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value after the predetermined recoverable error is canceled. In this case, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are extinguished when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value even during a predetermined restorable error, and after that the predetermined restorable error is cancelled. The 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are kept turned off, and the payout number indicator remains hidden without displaying the payout number again.

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 127, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring a predetermined time even during a predetermined recoverable error. Further, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are configured to keep lighting until the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value even during a predetermined recoverable error. In addition, during a predetermined recoverable error, the payout number indicator hides the display of the payout number, displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and displays the value of the specific timer during the predetermined recoverable error. becomes a predetermined value, after the predetermined recoverable error is cleared, the number of payouts is hidden without being displayed again. , the number of payouts is displayed again after a predetermined recoverable error is canceled, and the display of the number of payouts disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.

With this configuration, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs, error notification can be appropriately executed, and the bet number of the previous game is maintained by keeping the bet number display lamp 25 lit. can do. Also, even if the number of payouts is displayed again after the predetermined recoverable error is canceled, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from being excessively displayed.

In addition, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are kept lit, and the payout number indicator shows the payout number. The display is hidden and the information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error is displayed, and when the predetermined recoverable error is canceled after that, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted from the middle, and the 1 bed ramps 25a to 3 The bet lamp 25c keeps lighting, and the payout number display device again displays "10" as the payout number. After that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, The display of the number of payouts on the display of the number of payouts may be hidden. In this case, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c keep lighting up until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, even if the predetermined time has passed since all the reels actually stopped. Supplement what to do. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during a predetermined recoverable error, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c keep lighting even if a predetermined time has passed after all the reels actually stop.

By configuring in this way, even if an error occurs before the predetermined time has elapsed after all the reels have stopped, the number of bets and the number of payouts of the previous game are maintained over an appropriate period of time. can be notified.

In addition, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, and the payout number indicator displays the payout number. Information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error is displayed in non-display, and when the predetermined recoverable error is canceled after that, measurement of a predetermined time is newly started by a specific timer, and the 1-bed ramp 25a to 3-bed ramp 25a to 3-bed ramp are restarted. 25c lights up again, the number of payouts "10" is displayed again on the number of payouts display, and after that, when the measurement of the predetermined time is newly started and the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to The 3-bet lamp 25c may be extinguished and the display of the number of payouts on the display of the number of payouts may be hidden. In this case, even if a predetermined time has passed after all the reels have actually stopped at the timing when the predetermined recoverable error is cancelled, the value of the specific timer becomes 1 until the value reaches the predetermined value. It is supplemented that the bed lamps 25a to 3 bed lamps 25c are kept on.
With this configuration, the type of error can be appropriately notified by the number of payouts during an error, and the number of bets and the number of payouts of the previous game can be appropriately notified to the player.

In addition, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are extinguished, The payout number indicator hides the payout number display and displays information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error. After that, when the predetermined recoverable error is canceled, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished. The number of payouts may be maintained, and the display of the number of payouts on the display of the number of payouts may remain hidden.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the lighting mode of the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c and the number-of-payouts indicator constant after error cancellation.

<Configuration example 3 regarding bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display device>
FIG. 128 shows an example of shifting to the setting confirmation mode during measurement of a predetermined time after all reels have stopped. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bet has been placed, the setting confirmation mode can be entered.

In FIG. 128, first, three bets are placed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. Although the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light substantially simultaneously, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c are configured to light in order. You may

After that, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels start rotating at the timing shown in FIG. 128(2).

After that, due to the player's stop operation, all the reels are stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 128(3), the payout process is started by the winning of a high-level bell, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. is displayed. Also, at the timing of FIG. 128(3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

After that, the payout process ends at the timing shown in FIG. 128(4).

128(5), the 1-bed lamp 25a, 2-bed lamp 25b, and 3-bed lamp 25c keep lighting, and the payout number indicator keeps displaying the payout number. Also, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted.

After that, the setting confirmation mode ends at the timing of FIG. 128(6), the 1-bed lamp 25a, the 2-bed lamp 25b, and the 3-bed lamp 25c keep lighting, and the payout number indicator keeps displaying the payout number. Also, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed.

After that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing of FIG. 128(7), the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are extinguished, and the payout number display on the payout number display disappears. In this case, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c keep lighting up until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, even if the predetermined time has passed since all the reels actually stopped. However, it should be added that the payout number indicator maintains the display of the payout number. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are kept lit and the payout number is maintained even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels actually stopped. The indicator is configured to maintain an indication of the number of payouts.

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 128, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted from the middle. there is Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c maintain lighting, the payout number display maintains the display of the payout number, and then a specific number after the setting confirmation mode ends. When the value of the timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are extinguished, and the display of the number of payouts on the number-of-payout display is turned off.
At this time, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c keep lighting up until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels actually stopped. , the display of the number of payouts on the number-of-payouts display is not hidden. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are kept lit even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels actually stopped, and the number of payouts is maintained. The display of the number of payouts on the display is configured not to be hidden.

With this configuration, it is possible to maintain the notification of the number of bets and the number of payouts of the previous game even during the setting confirmation.

In addition, even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are kept lit, and the payout number indicator hides the payout number and sets the value. Information corresponding to (display the number corresponding to the setting value, display the number corresponding to the setting value and light up the DP of the payout number display, the number corresponding to the setting value and alphabets such as A and C ) may be displayed.
At this time, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c keep lighting until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout number indicator is set. Information corresponding to the value may be displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c may be extinguished, and the number-of-payout display may be hidden.
In addition, if the value of the specific timer does not reach the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of payouts is displayed again on the payout number indicator when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Then, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, and the display of the payout number on the payout number display is not displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue reporting the number of bets in the previous game even during the setting confirmation, and after the setting confirmation mode ends, even if the number of payouts is displayed again on the display of the number of payouts, excessive It is possible not to display the number of payouts.

In addition, even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c are kept lit, and the number-of-payouts indicator is configured to indicate a door open error. You may
At this time, even in the setting confirmation mode, when the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, the 1 bed lamps 25a to 3 bed lamps 25c are extinguished, and the payout number indicator displays a display corresponding to the door open error. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c may be kept turned off, and the number-of-payout display may be turned off.
In addition, if the value of the specific timer does not reach the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the number of payouts is displayed again on the display of the number of payouts, and after that the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Then, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished, and the display of the payout number on the payout number indicator is not displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue reporting the number of bets in the previous game even during the setting confirmation, and after the setting confirmation mode ends, even if the number of payouts is displayed again on the display of the number of payouts, excessive It is possible not to display the number of payouts.

In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1 bed lamps 25a to 3 bed lamps 25c keep lighting during the setting confirmation mode, Information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the payout number indicator, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are extinguished and the payout number indicator is hidden. .

By configuring in this way, the lighting mode of the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c and the number-of-payouts indicator after the end of the setting confirmation mode can be made constant.

In the examples of FIGS. 126 to 128, the trigger for starting the measurement of a specific timer is the stoppage of all the reels. may be considered to have ended. In other words, at least at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped, a specific timer for measuring a predetermined period of time starts measuring.

126 to 128, the lighting time of the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c and the display time of the payout number displayed by the payout number display are measured by a specific timer, but the present invention is not limited to this. A first timer for measuring the lighting time of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and a second timer for measuring the display time of the payout number by the payout number indicator may be provided separately. In this case, the time until the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are turned off and the time until the display of the payout number on the payout number indicator disappears may be configured to be the same, or may be different. may be configured.

<<Structure of bet number display lamp 25 at normal time>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration related to the bet number display lamp 25 during normal operation. The normal state is a state in which the game can be progressed except in the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, the error state, and the like.
(1) When it is determined that a predetermined time has passed after all the reels have stopped, the light is turned off.
(2) The lighting is maintained even after a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have stopped.
<<Configuration of bet number display lamp 25 in setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration regarding the bet number display lamp 25 in the setting confirmation mode.
(1) The lighting is maintained even in the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time is continued by a specific timer even in the setting confirmation mode, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light is turned off even in the setting confirmation mode.
(2) Keep lighting even in the setting confirmation mode, continue to measure a predetermined time by a specific timer even in the setting confirmation mode, and enter the setting confirmation mode after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode. If you exit the setting confirmation mode before the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer will turn off after the setting confirmation mode is finished. It turns off when the value is reached.
(3) The lighting is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, and after the setting confirmation mode is finished, the specific timer restarts the measurement of the predetermined time. is turned off when the value of the timer reaches a predetermined value.
(4) The lighting is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished, and when the setting confirmation mode is finished, the lamp is turned off.
(5) The lighting is maintained during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished, and after the setting confirmation mode is finished, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is newly started. , and then turn off when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(6) Turns off when shifting to setting confirmation mode, continues to measure a predetermined time with a specific timer even during setting confirmation mode, and switches to setting confirmation mode after the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is finished, it remains off even after the setting confirmation mode is finished. If the setting confirmation mode is finished before the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, it is turned on again when the setting confirmation mode is finished. , and then turns off when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light turns off, the specific timer stops measuring the predetermined time, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the light turns on again, the specific timer restarts measuring the predetermined time, and then the specific timer. When the value of reaches a predetermined value, it goes off.
(8) When the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the light is turned off, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished, and the light is kept turned off even after the setting confirmation mode is ended.
(9) Turns off when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, finishes measuring a predetermined time with a specific timer, lights up again when the setting confirmation mode ends, restarts measurement of a predetermined time with a specific timer, and then specifies When the value of the timer reaches a predetermined value, it goes off.

<<Configuration for bet number display lamp 25 during predetermined error>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the bet number display lamp 25 during a predetermined error.
(1) The lighting is maintained even during a predetermined error, the measurement of a predetermined time is continued by a specific timer even during a predetermined error, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light is turned off even during a predetermined error.
(2) Maintaining lighting even during a predetermined error, continuing measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer even during a predetermined error, and performing a predetermined error after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during a predetermined error. If the specified error is canceled before the value of the specified timer reaches the specified value during the specified error, the specified timer turns off when reaches a predetermined value.
(3) Maintain lighting even during a predetermined error, interrupt measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer when a predetermined error occurs, resume measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer after the predetermined error is canceled, and specify When the value of the timer reaches a predetermined value, it goes off.
(4) The lighting is maintained even during a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error occurs, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer is finished, and when the predetermined error is canceled, the light is turned off.
(5) Maintaining lighting even during a predetermined error, ending measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer when a predetermined error occurs, and restarting measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer after canceling the predetermined error. , and then turns off when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(6) Turns off when a predetermined error occurs, continues to measure a predetermined time with a specific timer even during a predetermined error, and outputs a predetermined error after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during a predetermined error. If the error is canceled, the light remains off even after the specified error is canceled, and if the specified error is canceled before the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value during the specified error, it will resume when the specified error is canceled. Lights up, and then turns off when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) Turns off when a predetermined error occurs, suspends measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer, turns on again when the predetermined error is canceled, restarts measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer, and then specifies When the value of the timer reaches a predetermined value, it goes off.
(8) When a predetermined error occurs, the light is turned off, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer is finished, and the light is kept turned off even after the predetermined error is canceled.
(9) turns off when a predetermined error occurs, terminates measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer, turns on again when the predetermined error is canceled, and restarts measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer; After that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light is extinguished.

Note that the bet number display lamp 25 may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is finished (4) When the menu screen display is started (5) When the menu screen display is finished

<<Configuration for normal payout indicator>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration relating to the number-of-payouts indicator for normal times. The normal state is a state in which the game can be progressed except in the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, the error state, and the like.
(1) When it is determined that a predetermined time has passed after all the reels have stopped, the display disappears.
(2) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even after a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have stopped.
<<Configuration related to payout number indicator in setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration relating to the number-of-payouts indicator during the setting confirmation mode.
(1) Maintaining the display of the number of payouts even during the setting confirmation mode, continuing to measure a predetermined time with a specific timer even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, even during the setting confirmation mode displayed.
(2) Maintaining the display of the number of payouts even during the setting confirmation mode, continuing the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer even during the setting confirmation mode, and after the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode If the setting confirmation mode is ended, it will not be displayed after the setting confirmation mode is ended, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, it will be specified after the setting confirmation mode is ended. is hidden when the timer reaches a predetermined value.
(3) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted when the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted after the setting confirmation mode ends. However, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, it is hidden.
(4) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished, and when the setting confirmation mode is finished, the display is turned off.
(5) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished, and after the setting confirmation mode is finished, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted. , and then disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(6) After shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the number of payouts is terminated, and even during the setting confirmation mode, the specified timer continues to measure the predetermined time, and the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended later, it will not be displayed after the setting confirmation mode is ended, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation mode is ended. Then, the number of payouts is displayed again, and then disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the number of payouts is ended, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the number of payouts is displayed again, and the predetermined time is measured by the specific timer. is resumed, and then disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(8) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, display of the number of payouts is terminated, measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated, and display is hidden after the setting confirmation mode is terminated.
(9) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the number of payouts is terminated, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the number of payouts is displayed again, and the predetermined time is measured by the specific timer. is newly started, and then disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
In addition, in the above (6) to (9), the display may be hidden during the setting confirmation mode, the display corresponding to the setting value may be displayed, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed, and the door A display corresponding to the open error may be provided.

<<Structure related to display of number of payouts during predetermined error>>
One or more of the following configurations are applicable to the payout indicator during a given error.
(1) When a predetermined error occurs, a display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed, and even during the predetermined error, a specific timer continues to measure the predetermined time, and the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value during the predetermined error. If the error is canceled after the specified error is canceled, it will not be displayed, and if the error is canceled before the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value during the specified error, the specified error will be canceled Then, the number of payouts is displayed again, and then disappears when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(2) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, and when the predetermined error is canceled, the number of payouts is displayed again, and the number of payouts is displayed again by the specific timer. Time measurement is resumed, and after that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the display disappears.
(3) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed, and when the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is finished and the predetermined error is canceled, the display disappears.
(4) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated, and when the predetermined error is canceled, the number of payouts is displayed again, and the number of payouts is displayed again by the specific timer. Time measurement is newly started, and after that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the display disappears.

The number-of-payouts indicator may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is finished (4) When the menu screen display is started (5) When the menu screen display is finished

The configuration related to the bet number display lamp 25 and the configuration related to the payout number indicator described above can be combined as appropriate.

<Structure related to gap between medal selector 34 and chute member>
A configuration relating to the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member applicable to this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, a chute member for guiding medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 is provided on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 34 .

Here, the medal selector 34 requires regular maintenance, such as having the amusement store clerk check if there is an abnormality in the sensor when an error related to the selector occurs, and removing the dirt attached due to the passage of medals. . Therefore, in this embodiment, a gap is provided between the medal selector 34 and the chute member in order to facilitate the maintenance work of the medal selector 34 .

In addition, a return member for returning the medals paid out from the hopper 44 and the medals removed from the medal selector 34 to the tray 28 from the medal payout port 45 is provided below the medal selector 34 on the back surface of the front panel PS2. ing.
The return member has a medal return receiving port (sometimes called return path entrance) for receiving medals removed from the medal selector 34 and a medal payout receiving port for receiving medals paid out from the hopper 44. - 特許庁
Also, when the return member is attached to the front panel PS2, a return passage is formed in the space between the return member and the front panel PS2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the chute member has a medal guide passage for guiding the medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 . The medal guide passage slopes gently downward from upstream (toward the medal selector 34) to downstream (toward the hopper 44). In addition, the medal guide passage has a shape gently curved at approximately 90 degrees from the middle of the medal guide passage toward the hopper 44 side in order to guide the medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 side. .
In addition, the chute member has a bottom portion that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, an outer wall portion that forms the outer side surface of the medal guide passage, and an inner wall portion that forms the inner side surface of the medal guide passage. The upper side of the medal guide passage is open. In addition, the chute member has a stepped portion at a position about the middle of the medal guide passage on the bottom portion, the height of which is higher on the upstream side than on the downstream side.
The chute member also has a fixing portion for fixing the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 with one predetermined locking part (screw). The fixing portion is provided at a position protruding upward from the vicinity of the end of the outer wall portion on the medal selector 34 side, and when the chute member is attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2, the fixing portion and the predetermined locking member is configured to be positioned above the medal guide passage.

A predetermined engaging part for fixing the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 is made of metal and configured to conduct electricity. is configured to be energized through a predetermined locking part.
Further, the predetermined locking component is a magnetic material such as iron, and is configured to be attracted to a magnet. On the other hand, the medals used in the game are made of stainless steel and are constructed so as not to be attracted to magnets.
With this configuration, even if predetermined locking parts come off and enter the hopper 44 or the auxiliary tank 46 due to deterioration over time or an action such as a player hitting the surface of the front panel PS2, the magnets will keep the predetermined locking parts in place. Only the stop part can be easily taken out.

Although not shown, the chute member is provided with a locking portion for locking the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2. With the member locked to the back surface of the front panel PS2, the chute member can be fixed to the back surface of the front panel PS2 by screws passed through the screw holes of the fixing portion. Therefore, even if the screw fixing the chute member is removed, the chute member does not drop from the rear surface of the front panel PS2.

130 and 131 are diagrams for explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

As shown in FIG. 130, vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, an upper edge portion corresponding to the peripheral edge portion of the return acceptance opening at the upper portion of the return member is arranged. In other words, it is configured such that no return receiving port is arranged vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Also, as shown in FIG. 130, when the thickness of the medal is "A", the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is "B", and the width of the upper edge is "C", the following configuration is adopted. configured to meet
(1) B>A
That is, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal.
(2) B≈2×A
That is, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is substantially equal to the thickness of two medals.
(3) C>A
That is, the width of the upper edge is greater than the thickness of one medal.
(4) C>B
That is, the width of the upper edge is larger than the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Therefore, it is configured such that medals can be inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In addition, since the upper edge portion is arranged vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal can be placed on the upper edge portion and held in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. It is

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the medal placed on the upper edge portion and placed in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member blocks the exit of the medal passage. Therefore, in a state in which medals are present in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal inserted from the medal slot 17 moves toward the medal guide passage of the chute member from the exit of the medal passage. It collides with the medal in the gap between the chute member and stops, and stays at the exit of the medal passage. At this time, the thrown-in sensor 1 and the put-in sensor 2 remain on (only the put-in sensor 2 may remain on), so an error relating to the selector is detected by the main control means. Then, a medal retention error is reported as an error related to the selector.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the inserted medal collides with the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and stays at the exit of the medal passage, the inserted medal is located closer to the medal selector than the center of the inserted medal. The upper end of the medal in the gap between 34 and the chute member is located at a higher position. Therefore, the thrown-in medal cannot pass over the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

With this configuration, it is not possible to directly detect that there is a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. You can indirectly know that there is a medal in the gap between the

In addition, with this configuration, when a store clerk checks whether or not the medal selector 34 normally detects an error related to the selector, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member can be If the medals are thrown in from the medal slot 17 with the medals inserted, the inserted medals cannot pass through the exit of the medal passage due to the medals put in the clearance between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. is detected by the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not an error related to the selector is normally detected.

As described above, since the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal, the medal placed in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member by the staff of the amusement arcade may get caught and cannot be taken out. no.

FIG. 132 shows the positional relationship between the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the front panel PS2 is closed, the hopper 44 is arranged below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.
Therefore, when the front panel PS2 is closed while the medal is placed on the upper edge and remains in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member fall due to the impact at that time. Even if it does, the hopper 44 is configured to store the dropped medals.

With this configuration, the game store clerk inserts a medal into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member in order to confirm whether or not the medal selector 34 normally detects an error related to the selector. Even if the user forgets to close the front panel PS2 and the medals drop, the dropped medals will not enter the medal return receiving opening and be discharged from the medal paying-out opening 45 to the receiving tray 28. It is possible to prevent the medals used for the work from being given to the player by mistake.

By lowering the position where the return member is attached, the medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member can pass through the medal passage even when the medal is placed on the upper edge and stays in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. It is structured so as not to be blocked (structured so that the top of the medal is displaced below the medal passage between the medal selector 34 and the chute member even when the medal is placed on the upper edge), and the medal selector 34 is inserted and passed. It may be constructed such that medals permitted to pass through the exit of the medal passage and pass through the medal guide passage. With this configuration, even if a game store clerk accidentally drops a medal during the medal replenishment work or the like and the medal falls into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal can be inserted. Therefore, it is possible not to hinder the progress of the game.

FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the radius of the medal, the height of the medal guide passage, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage, and the width of the medal guide passage.

As described above, the medal guide path has a shape gently curved at approximately 90 degrees to guide the medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 side.
Therefore, the medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 are decelerated by coming into contact with the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the medal guide passage when passing through the medal guide passage.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a stepped portion is provided at a position about the middle of the medal guide passage on the bottom portion, the height of which is higher on the upstream side than on the downstream side.
By dropping the medals when passing through the stepped portion, the medals that have been decelerated by coming into contact with the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the medal guide passage can be accelerated.

By constructing in this way, even when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 at once, the inserted medals are stored in the hopper 44 without remaining in the medal guide passage. be able to.

Also, as shown in FIG. 130, the thickness of the medal is "A", the radius of the medal is "D", the height of the medal guide passage is "E", and the height of the stepped portion of the medal guide passage is "E", as shown in FIG. F", and the maximum value of the width of the medal guide passage is "G", the following configuration is satisfied.
(1) G>A
That is, the maximum width of the medal guiding passage is greater than the thickness of the medal.
(2) G<2×D
That is, the maximum width of the medal guiding passage is smaller than the diameter of the medal.
(3) F<D
That is, the height of the stepped portion of the medal guide passage is smaller than the radius of the medal.
(4) F<E
That is, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is smaller than the height of the medal guide passage.

By configuring as described in (1) and (2) above, when the medal passes through the medal guide passage, it does not stop in a state of lying sideways in the middle of the medal guide passage, but can stand up vertically. You can pass while rolling.

In addition, by configuring as in the above (3) and (4), even though the medal is accelerated by the stepped portion of the medal guide passage, the medal may be dislodged by the impact of the drop when passing through the stepped portion of the medal guide passage. It is possible to prevent the user from jumping out of the guide passage. In addition to the configurations of (3) and (4), E>D (the height of the medal guide path is greater than the radius of the medal) may be satisfied. In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the medal from jumping out of the medal guide passage due to the shock of falling when passing through the stepped portion of the medal guide passage.

FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the position and dimensions of a locking component that secures the chute member in a state where the fixed portion of the chute member is secured to the front panel PS2 by a predetermined locking component (screw).

As shown in FIG. 134, when the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with a screw, the medal guide passage is arranged vertically below the screw that fixes the chute member, and the medal return port is not arranged. It is configured.
Therefore, even if the screw for fixing the chute member comes off and falls, the screw for fixing the chute member does not come out of the receiving tray 28 through the return passage and the medal pay-out port 45 from the medal return receiving port. It is

With this configuration, even if the screw that fixes the chute member comes off and falls, the player will not be injured by cutting his or her hand by forcefully grasping the screw that fixes the chute member together with the medal. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw that fixes the chute member from popping out of the game machine due to the impact of the drop and being lost.

As described above, the chute member is configured so that it can be locked to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 by the lock portion of the chute member. It is constructed so as not to fall from the back surface of the panel PS2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 134, "G" is the maximum value of the width of the medal guide passage, "H" is the total length of the screw (also referred to as the length in the longitudinal direction), and the diameter of the screw head (length in the lateral direction). ) is defined as "I", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) G<H
That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the total length of the screw that fixes the chute member.
(2) G<I
That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the screw head fixing the chute member.

With this configuration, even if the screw that secures the chute member comes off and falls, the screw that secures the chute member does not enter the medal guide passage. can be prevented.

Alternatively, it may be configured to be "G<H" and "G>I". That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be smaller than the overall length of the screw fixing the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head fixing the chute member.

In the case of such a configuration, if the screw that secures the chute member comes off and falls, there is a possibility that the medal will fall into the medal guide passage. can prevent the screws from being lost.

Alternatively, the configuration may be such that "G>H" and "G>I" are satisfied. That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be larger than the total length of the screw fixing the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head fixing the chute member.

In the case of such a configuration, if the screw fixing the chute member comes off and falls, it will enter the medal guide passage, but the screw that has come off will pass through the medal guide passage and drop, so that the passage of the medal is not hindered. can be made

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixing portion of the chute member is provided at a position protruding upward from the outer wall of the medal guide passage. A concave portion may be provided in the inner portion of the housing, and a screw hole may be provided in the concave portion to serve as the fixing portion. In this case, it is preferable that the length of the depth of the concave portion is larger than the total length "H" of the screw for fixing the chute member. With this configuration, even if the screw fixing the chute member comes off, it can be prevented from entering the medal guide passage and preventing passage of the medal.

Further, the medal slot 17 has a mounting section on which a plurality of medals can be stacked and placed vertically. can be continuously inserted from the medal slot 17.

When the thickness of the medal is "A", the maximum width of the medal guide path is "G", and the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the mounting portion is "J", then "G< (A×J)÷2”. That is, the maximum value of the width of the medal guiding path is configured to be smaller than half the thickness of the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the placing portion.

Also, the upper edge may be gently inclined toward the hopper 44 when the return member is attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2.
With this configuration, even if a medal is placed on the upper edge portion and enters the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal rolls and falls. can be prevented from interfering with the passage of selectors, and errors relating to selectors can be made less likely to occur.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing another aspect of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment, and FIG. Other configurations are the same as in FIG. 129 except for the size of the inlet.

As shown in FIG. 135, vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, not the upper edge portion but the medal return reception opening is arranged.
In the example shown in FIG. 135, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the medal return receiving port are designed to be larger than the diameter of the medal.
With this configuration, even if a game store clerk accidentally drops a medal during the medal replenishment work or the like and gets into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal can be returned from the medal return reception port. Since the medals pass through the path and are discharged from the medal payout port 45 to the tray 28, the medals placed in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member do not interfere with the passage of the inserted medals. It can make errors less likely to occur.

<Explanation about error history>
Display of error history applicable to this embodiment will be described.
The error history can be displayed on the LCD during the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, an administrator menu screen (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal. A plurality of administrator menus are displayed on this administrator menu screen, and "error history" is provided as one item of the administrator menu. When the sub-switch 20 is operated in this state (when the sub-switch 20 is turned on), the error history is displayed on the liquid crystal. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bet is placed, the setting confirmation mode can be entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an error notification start command is received from the main control means, an error is notified by the sub control means, and an error history and an error content are stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub control RAM controlled by the sub control means. It is configured to be stored in association with the error occurrence time. The information about the error occurrence time is configured to be acquired using, for example, an RTC (real time clock) function provided in the gaming machine.

Also, the error history is configured not to be erased by power on/off and setting change processing. Further, the error history is configured to store a predetermined number of histories (for example, 120), and when the predetermined number is exceeded, the oldest error history is deleted in order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation mode, but it may be configured so that the error history can be confirmed in the setting change mode as well.

Further, the error history may be displayed on the liquid crystal when the subswitch 20 is operated on the administrator menu screen, or the error history may be displayed on the liquid crystal upon switching to the setting confirmation mode. Alternatively, the error history may be displayed on the liquid crystal by touching the error history item on the administrator menu screen using the liquid crystal as a touch panel.

Also, when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the administrator menu screen, an operation sound is output from the speaker S, and for selecting an item displayed on the user menu screen. The operation sound is different from the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated.
It should be noted that the operation sound of the sub cross key switch 21 may not be output on the administrator menu screen so that the sound output differs from that on the user menu screen. Further, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated on the administrator menu screen may be a sound that is not output at all other than on the administrator menu screen. Furthermore, it may be configured such that predetermined BGM is output from the speaker S on the user menu screen, but no BGM is output on the administrator menu screen.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily recognize the difference between the user menu screen and the administrator menu screen, and prevent the administrator from making an operational error.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen.
Note that the door open in FIG. 136 corresponds to the state in which the door open signal is ON, and the door closed corresponds to the state in which the door open signal is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 136, on the error history screen, each error content is displayed together with the time when it occurred.

Also, the error history screen is configured to be displayed in descending order from the latest history.

The opening/closing of the front door, power on/off, start/end of setting change, and start/end of setting confirmation are not errors, but are configured to be displayed in the error history.

In addition, the start point and end point of each error content are displayed as an error history, such as the occurrence and cancellation of errors, the start and end of setting changes, and the start and end of setting confirmations. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and only the starting point of the error content may be displayed as the error history.

Also, the error history can be displayed up to 12 pages per page, and the page of the error history screen can be switched by operating the sub cross key switch 21 .

In this embodiment, the error history screen is configured to display the "occurrence time" of each error, such as "007 Medal retention error occurred 2021/11/11 10:01:01" in FIG. However, in practice, the ``time when notification started'' of each error is stored in the error history as the ``occurrence time'' and displayed on the error history screen. In addition, the content of the error and the time of occurrence of the error are not the timing when the error occurs (the timing when the error is detected), but the timing when the error notification is started (timing when the sub-control means receives the error notification start command). It is configured to be stored as history.

The reason for this configuration is that when an error is detected but error notification is not started, such as when the reel is rotating, in other words, there may be a time lag between error detection and error notification. be.
For example, if a predetermined error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game, the error is notified at the timing when the predetermined error is detected (the predetermined error occurs). Instead, a predetermined error state occurs at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (timing when all the reels are stopped, timing when the payout process is finished, etc.) so that the game cannot proceed and a predetermined error is notified. It is At this time, assuming that it takes about 3 minutes for the player to stop all the reels due to, for example, leaving the reels while the reels are rotating, there is a delay of about 3 minutes from the detection of the error to the notification of the error. It will happen.
Even in such a case, by displaying the time when the error notification was started as the error occurrence time, there is no difference between the error notification timing and the error occurrence time on the error history screen. To prevent a clerk of a game parlor from erroneously recognizing that a game machine is defective or that some kind of fraud has been done.

In addition, as described above, if a predetermined error is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game, and the power is turned off before the end of the game, the power will be cut off before the end of the game. Therefore, the predetermined error and the time of occurrence of the predetermined error are not stored in the error history, and the power is turned off. After that, when the setting change mode is entered after the power is restored, the information about the predetermined error is deleted in the initialization process in the setting change process. It is configured not to be stored even as a history.
By configuring in this way, errors that have not been notified are not stored as error history and are not displayed on the error history screen, so it is possible to maintain consistency between notified errors and error history. It is possible to prevent the store clerk from erroneously recognizing that there is a problem with the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Also, on the error history screen, error history is displayed in a predetermined color (e.g., red), and other history (power on/off, setting change start/end, etc.) is displayed in a specific color (e.g., white or black). may be configured to
By configuring in this way, the error history can be displayed more prominently than other histories, and the error history can be easily confirmed.

In addition, the start/end of setting change and start/end of setting confirmation are not displayed in the error history. It may be configured such that the history of confirmation start/end is displayed together with the time.
By configuring in this way, the contents displayed on the error history screen can be simplified, so that the error history or the setting change history will not be overlooked when the store clerk checks the error history or the setting change history. can be done.

Also, as a history of setting change completion, for example, "setting change end (6)" is displayed ((6) indicates a setting value), and the setting value set in the setting change process can also be confirmed in the setting change history. may be configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, if there is a suspicion that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, the setting value set in the last setting change process can be checked, so it is possible to check whether there is any illegality. can be done.

In addition, the error history may be configured to display the time that has elapsed since the power was turned on, starting from the timing at which the power was turned on. Specifically, if the error content occurs in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door closed" → "medal retention error", from the top of the error history screen (newest history first) “Medal retention error: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds passed” → “Door closed: 0 hours 0 minutes 10 seconds passed” → “Door open: 0 hours 0 minutes 1 seconds passed” → “Power on: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds passed” Seconds elapsed" may be displayed. The time that has passed since the power was turned on is calculated by performing a predetermined arithmetic process using the time when the power was turned on and the time when each error occurred, which is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM. be done.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intuitively grasp the time from when the power is turned on to when the content of the error occurs.

Further, the error history may be configured to display the elapsed time since the content of the error occurred. If the error content occurs in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door closed" → "medal retention error"... Error occurred: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds ago" → "Door closed: 0 hours 9 minutes 50 seconds ago" → "Door opened: 0 hours 9 minutes 59 seconds ago" → "Power on: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds ago" may be configured to be displayed as In addition, regarding the time that has elapsed since the error content occurred, a predetermined time is obtained using the time when each error content occurred stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM and the current time obtained by the RTC function. It is calculated by performing arithmetic processing.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intuitively grasp the elapsed time since the content of the error occurred.
In this configuration, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 31 days) has passed since the occurrence of the error content, it is preferable to display "a predetermined period of time or more has elapsed".

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is being displayed.
In (1) of FIG. 137, the front door is being opened, and 001 (latest error content) displays "setting check start".
After that, when the front door is closed, the door open signal is turned off, the error history is updated, and "door closed" is displayed in 001.
After that, when the front door is opened again, the door open signal is turned on, the error history is updated, and "door open" is displayed in 001.

In this way, when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is being displayed, the error history related to the opening and closing of the front door is updated in real time each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, and the error history screen is also displayed. configured to be updated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the display of the error history is operating correctly.

While the error history screen is displayed, the error history is updated each time the front door is opened/closed, but the error history screen is configured not to be updated. The error history screen may be updated when the history screen is displayed.
With this configuration, even if you open or close the front door while checking the error history, the error history screen will not be updated. It is possible to prevent the error history screen from being erased.

Also, while the error history screen is being displayed, the opening/closing of the front door is detected. If there is no error history, the error history is not updated, and if a predetermined time has passed since the last update of the error history, the error history may be updated and the error history screen may be updated.
In other words, opening and closing of the front door while the error history screen is being displayed is not recorded in the error history unless a predetermined time has passed since the previous error history was updated, and is recorded in the error history if the predetermined time has passed. You may
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the display of the error history is operating correctly. In addition, the opening and closing of the front door before the specified time has passed since the error history was updated will not be recorded in the error history, so even if the front door is opened and closed unintentionally, the old error history will be displayed on the error history screen. You can prevent it from being erased.

Further, the opening/closing of the front door may not be detected while the error history screen is being displayed, or may be detected but not stored as an error history.
With this configuration, even if you open or close the front door while checking the error history, the error history screen will not be updated. You can prevent it from being erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected (when the door open signal is turned on), a predetermined image is displayed on the LCD as a display corresponding to the door open error (such as "The door is open"). "dE" is displayed on the number-of-payouts indicator, and the door opening sound is output from the speaker S. However, it is configured to end the display of the predetermined image and stop the output of the door opening sound (or set the volume to "0") at the timing of shifting to the setting confirmation mode. It should be noted that the display corresponding to the door open error may be continued on the payout number display even after shifting to the setting confirmation mode. may also be configured to end the display corresponding to .
In addition, the output of the door opening sound may be continued in a situation where the setting confirmation mode is entered and the administrator menu screen is displayed, and the output of the door opening sound may be stopped at the timing when the error history screen is displayed. .
With this configuration, it is possible to set the administrator menu and check the error history in the setting confirmation mode in a quiet situation.

Note that the door opening sound may be continuously output from the speaker S even during the setting confirmation mode or while the error history screen is being displayed.
By configuring in this way, even if the store clerk forgets to end the setting change mode and leaves the game machine, he or she can be notified by the door opening sound.

In this embodiment, "time setting" is provided as one of the setting items in the administrator menu, and when "time setting" is selected by operating the sub cross key switch 21, the sub switch 20 When operated (when the subswitch 20 is turned on), a time setting screen is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the time can be changed on the time setting screen.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of the time setting screen.
FIG. 138 shows an example in which the time setting screen is displayed when the current time on the gaming machine is November 11, 2021, 11:11:11.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the time setting screen is displayed, the current time is displayed on the liquid crystal.
The time setting screen is configured so that you can change the values of each item of "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second". The time setting screen is displayed in the selected state. By operating (depressing) the left switch and the right switch of the sub cross-key switch 21 on the time setting screen, the cursor can be moved to the item to be changed. is configured so that the value of the item to be changed can be changed by operating (pressing) the . By operating the sub-switch 20, the change of the current time is confirmed, and the changed time is set as the current time.

The current time displayed when the time setting screen is displayed is configured not to be updated even if the time on the time setting screen has passed, but the current time is kept internally. It is configured to be

In addition, when the changed time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the number of seconds of the current time is set to "0" when the changed time is confirmed, and then the clocking of the current time is started.

In addition, it is configured to be able to detect opening and closing of the front door even during time setting, and is configured to be stored in the error history. Here, if the front door is opened before the change of the current time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the change of the current time is not confirmed, so the history of door opening is stored based on the current time before the change. configured to be If the front door is closed before the change of the current time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the history of door closing is stored based on the current time before the change because the change of the current time is not confirmed. It is configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, even when the time setting is finished without confirming the change of the current time, the correct time can be stored as an error history.

Also, the error history screen is configured to display the latest history in descending order according to the order in which the error history is stored. For example, when the error history is not displayed, the first error occurs and the current time is "t1". Assume that a time earlier than t1" is set, and then a second error occurs and the second error is notified at the timing when the current time is "t2" (a time earlier than t1). In this case, the first error occurrence time "t1" and the second error occurrence time "t2" are stored as the error history, respectively. Configured to show up as an error.
With this configuration, the order of the error history cannot be intentionally changed by setting the time, so that the fraud history can be reliably left.

FIG. 139 is a list of error history display patterns when multiple errors occur.
In the setting confirmation mode, errors are detected in the same manner as during reel rotation, but errors are not reported. For example, when a predetermined error (an error regarding the hopper 44, an error regarding the selector, etc.) is detected during the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined error is not notified at the timing when the predetermined error is detected (when the predetermined error occurs). , a predetermined error is notified at a predetermined timing after the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the content of the error and the time of occurrence of the error (the time at which the error was notified) are stored as an error history.
In addition, the error is not cleared even if the reset switch is operated during the setting confirmation mode.

"Confirming" in FIG. 139 corresponds to the setting confirmation mode, and "Normal" corresponds to a state in which an error can be notified while the reel is rotating or the setting confirmation mode is not in progress. Also, "adding and reporting" corresponds to collectively reporting a plurality of errors that have not been reported. For example, "first error and second error occur" are reported. Also, "total and display" corresponds to the error history when the errors are totaled and notified, and is displayed as an error history such as "first error and second error occurred", for example. Also, "first error" and "second error" correspond to errors related to the hopper 44 and errors related to the selector, respectively, and the first error is given a higher priority than the second error.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 139 will be described.
First, if errors occur in the order of the first error and then the second error during confirmation, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode is completed, and then the second error is notified when the first error is canceled. configured to be notified. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the first error → occurrence of the second error, and the error history screen is configured to display the occurrence of the second error → the occurrence of the first error in order from the top (from the newest history). there is

Next, if errors occur in the order of the second error and then the first error during confirmation, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode is completed, and then the second error is notified when the first error is canceled. is configured to be notified. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the first error → occurrence of the second error, and the error history screen is configured to display the occurrence of the second error → the occurrence of the first error in order from the top (from the newest history). there is

Next, when errors occur in the order of the first error and then the second error during normal operation, the first error is notified immediately after the first error occurs, and then the second error is reported after the first error is canceled. is configured to be notified. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the first error → occurrence of the second error, and the error history screen is configured to display the occurrence of the second error → the occurrence of the first error in order from the top (from the newest history). there is

Next, when errors occur in the order of the second error→the first error during normal operation, the second error is reported immediately after the second error occurs, and then the first error is reported after the second error is canceled. is configured to be notified. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the second error→the occurrence of the first error, and the error history screen is configured to display the occurrence of the first error→the occurrence of the second error in order from the top (from the newest history). there is

As described above, in pattern 1 of FIG. 139, when a plurality of errors are detected during the setting confirmation mode, the error notification is performed in order of error notification priority after the setting confirmation mode ends. is configured to notify errors in the order in which they occur when multiple errors occur.
Even in this configuration, the error history is stored in the order in which the errors were reported rather than in the order in which the errors occurred. can be prevented from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is malfunctioning or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Pattern 2 in FIG. 139 will be described.
First, if errors occur in the order of the first error and then the second error during confirmation, the first error and the second error are summed up and reported after the setting confirmation mode ends. . In this case, the error history stores the total error content of the first error and the second error, and the error history screen is configured to display the total content of the first error and the second error. .

Next, when errors occur in the order of the second error and then the first error during confirmation, the first error and the second error are combined and reported after the setting confirmation mode is finished. there is In this case, the error history stores the total error content of the first error and the second error, and the error history screen is configured to display the total content of the first error and the second error. .

In addition, when a plurality of errors are totaled and notified, the configuration may be such that a single error cancellation operation (operation of the reset switch) can cancel the totalized and notified multiple errors. It may be configured to require the error clearing operation as many times as the number of errors notified by the controller.

Also, when errors occur in the order of the first error→the second error during normal operation, and when errors occur in the order of the second error→the first error during normal operation, the pattern 1 in FIG. 139 is applied. be.

When configured in this manner, a plurality of errors can be notified at once, so the content of error notification can be simplified.

It should be noted that, for example, if errors occur in the order of the 3rd error → 4th error (error notification priority is the same as the 3rd error) during the setting confirmation mode, the 3rd error will be sent after the setting confirmation mode ends. An error is reported, and after that, when the third error is canceled, the fourth error is reported. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the 3rd error→the occurrence of the 4th error, and the error history screen is configured to display the occurrence of the 4th error→the occurrence of the 3rd error in order from the top (from the newest history). there is In this way, even if multiple errors occur during setting confirmation, if the error notification priority is the same, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred, and are stored in the error history in the order in which they occurred. It is

Also, it may be configured so that error detection is not performed during the setting confirmation mode.
With such a configuration, even if an error factor occurs, the error is not notified, so the error is not recorded in the error history.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the manager from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order or that some kind of dishonesty has been carried out due to the fact that an unreported error remains in the error history.

Further, if an error is detected while the error history screen is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode, the error history may be updated in real time, and the error history screen may also be updated.
With this configuration, the administrator can immediately know that an error has occurred even while the error history is being displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, when a specific error occurs, the specific error and the monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error may be notified. A "specific error" is an error whose detailed cause can be identified, and a "monitoring error of a sensor that detects a specific error" is an error whose detailed error cause cannot be identified.
For example, when a hopper retention error occurs, a hopper retention error or a payout sensor monitoring error indicating that either an error related to the hopper 44 has occurred may be notified.

Here, if a hopper retention error occurs during normal operation (a state in which it is possible to report an error that is not during reel rotation or during setting confirmation mode), the hopper retention error and payout sensor monitoring error are reported and recorded in the error history. is stored in the order of payout sensor monitoring error → hopper retention error, and the error history screen may be configured to display hopper retention error → payout sensor monitoring error in order from the top (from the newest history). .
In addition, the error history when the hopper retention error is cleared at this time is stored in the order of discharge sensor monitoring error cancellation → hopper retention error cancellation. It may also be configured to display "discharge sensor monitoring error canceled".
In other words, if a hopper retention error occurs during normal operation and the error history screen is displayed after the hopper retention error is cleared, the hopper retention error is canceled (from the top, starting with the newest history) → discharge sensor monitoring error is canceled → hopper retention error is displayed. Occurrence→Dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence may be displayed.

On the other hand, if a hopper retention error occurs while the error history screen is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode, the hopper retention error and dispensing sensor monitoring error will be notified after the setting confirmation mode is finished, and will be recorded in the error history. is stored in the order of hopper retention error occurrence → dispensation sensor monitoring error occurrence, and when the error history screen is displayed again, the error history screen will also display the dispensation sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper retention error occurrence in order from the top (newest history first). may be configured to be displayed.
In addition, when the hopper retention error is canceled at this time, the error history is stored in the order of dispensing sensor monitoring error cancellation → hopper retention error cancellation. may be configured to be
That is, if a hopper retention error occurs during the setting confirmation mode, and the error history screen is displayed again after the hopper retention error is cleared, the hopper retention error is released in order from the top (from the newest history) → Dispensing sensor monitoring error is released. → Occurrence of dispensing sensor monitoring error → Occurrence of hopper retention error may be displayed.

With this configuration, if a specific error occurs while the error history screen is displayed, when the error history screen is displayed again, in order from the top (newest history first) the specific error → specific error Therefore, even if fraudulent attempts are made to find out the error type, it is possible to prevent the error type from being immediately known.

Also, with this configuration, the error cancellation history on the error history screen is the same during normal operation and during display of the error history screen, so an accurate history can be left.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of a slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) is exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball game machine, a parrot, or a casino machine.

As described above, each technical content of the present embodiment described to describe the present invention can be appropriately combined.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation instruction lamp 24a: Left operation instruction lamp 24b: Center operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bed lamp 25b: 2 bed lamp 25c: 3 Bed lamp 26 : Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Winning number display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Receiving tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Seal container 32 : Display Device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal dispensing port 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal plate

Claims (1)

front door and
having a liquid crystal;
Equipped with a setting confirmation mode that allows you to check setting values,
When certain conditions are met in the setting confirmation mode, the error history can be displayed on the LCD,
This game machine is configured to update the error history displayed on the liquid crystal when the opening of the front door is detected while the error history is displayed on the liquid crystal.

Images